THE

CANADIANCANADIAN
LANDSCAPE STANDARD
LANDSCAPE STANDARD
- SECOND EDITION -
SECOND EDITION

THE GUIDE FOR LANDSCAPE CONSTRUCTION

PROJECTS ACROSS CANADA

CANADIAN SOCIETY OF
LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS
&
CANADIAN NURSERY
LANDSCAPE ASSOCIATION
The Canadian Landscape Standard - Second Edition

Published jointly by:

Canadian Society of Landscape Architects

12 Forillon Crescent, Ottawa ON K2M 2W5
1-613-668-4775 | csla-aapc.ca

Canadian Nursery Landscape Association

7856 Fifth Line South Milton ON L9T 2X8
1-888-446-3499 | cnla-acpp.ca

Printed in Canada. Copyright © 2020 (Digital update 04/20)

ISBN: 978-0-9950714-1-4 Canadian Landscape Standard - Second Edition
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Acknowledgement iv

Climate change v

1 SCOPE OF THE STANDARD 7

2 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION 13

3 SITE PREPARATION AND PROTECTION 25

4 GRADING AND DRAINAGE 35

5 GROWING MEDIUM 41

6 PLANTS & PLANTING 53

7 MULCHING 71

8 SEEDING & SODDING 75

9 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 89

10 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 131

11 INTEGRATED PEST AND VEGETATION MANAGEMENT 145

12 HARDSCAPE 155

13 LANDSCAPE OVER STRUCTURES 167

14 INTERIOR PLANTSCAPE 173

APPENDIX A TABLES & FIGURES 179

APPENDIX B BASIC CONTENTS OF A LANDSCAPE COMMISSIONING [LCx] PLAN 181

APPENDIX C CANADIAN NURSERY STOCK STANDARD 184

APPENDIX D NATIONAL VOLUNTARY CODE OF CONDUCT FOR THE ORNAMENTAL

HORTICULTURE INDUSTRY 185

GLOSSARY OF TERMS AND DEFINITIONS 187

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 3

 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The Canadian Landscape Standard CSLA CNLA Joint Committee wishes to express their sincere
appreciation to the many industry subject matter experts from the field of landscape architecture,
landscape design and the landscape horticulture industry who have contributed to the content of the
Second Edition of the Canadian Landscape Standard.

From this Standard’s humble beginnings 30 years ago, hundreds of dedicated industry professionals
have given freely of their time and expertise to share knowledge and experience, building and
expanding this document into the national standard it has become today.

A significant and impressive national effort has been made to ensure the continued improvement and
expansion of the Second Edition 2020, making it as relevant and current a tool as possible for the user.

Since it’s inception as the BC Landscape Standard 1st edition, this Standard has always been intended
to be a ‘living document’ that must evolve and expand in much the same way as the landscape
horticulture industry itself. As a result of this foundational principle, this Standard continues to reflect
the very best of our industry and the product and service it has to offer.

The publication of the 2020 Second Edition of the Canadian Landscape Standard marks both the end
of a process and the beginning of a new chapter in the evolution of this standard. The need for next
additions has already been identified by the Joint Committee. With the introduction of the 3-year
subscription, subscribers can expect to receive additions, amendments or revisions over the course of
their subscription.

We, the Joint Committee, welcome and encourage user comments, questions and feedback. We
cannot stress enough, the importance of involvement from industry members, stakeholders and
subject matter experts. This input and feedback are vital to ensuring a broad and current industry wide
perspective, reach and influence.

It is the landscape horticulture industry’s time as we position as key product and service providers in a
world dealing with the real affects of climate change.

Thank you to all who have contributed to the production of this valuable landscape horticulture
industry tool. Use this collective effort, your national landscape standard, to make a difference.

Christene Stenhouse LeVatte - BBA CLD CLHM, LEED Green Associate

Chair, Canadian Landscape Standard CSLA CNLA Joint Committee
CLIMATE CHANGE
The world’s climate is changing. Environmental change at this scale is having and will continue to have
escalating impacts on weather patterns, the length of growing season, and landscape biodiversity.

Canadian landscapes are already warming at more than twice the global rate.

The traditional basis for our work relied heavily on established weather and climate norms, including
geographically designated growing seasons. However, the coming changes require that we make
insightful and effective decisions in a context of uncertainty, complexity and timing. There is no more
normal.

The work of landscape architects and the landscape industry has been characterized by our capacity to
work effectively across environmental and cultural systems. As we move towards a changing future,
our profession and industry are uniquely positioned to lead, and to work collaboratively with other
professions, skilled practitioners and community decision-makers. We will build new alliances dedicated
to science-based, creative solutions to increasingly complex social and ecological challenges. While
aware of changing conditions, we are also prepared for emerging opportunities to advance the
principles of equity, sustainability, resiliency and democracy.

We understand that the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions is critical if society is to slow the pace
of environmental change and reduce the severity of impacts to communities and ecosystems. But we
must also enhance the capacity of our natural systems to sequester carbon and to shelter ecosystems
and human populations. As builders and protectors of landscapes, effective adaptation to our changing
future must be our highest priority. It will be the combination of short and long-term policies,
implemented through nimble and effective changes to landscape standards and practices that will
provoke and inspire social change.

Natural assets and built green assets together provide the support necessary for sustaining the quality
of air, water and soil in urban cities, suburban neighbourhoods and rural communities. The Canadian
Landscape Standard provides needed tools and resources to guide you, the owner, the designer, the
contractor or the maintenance contractor in your effort to create sustainable, resilient and performing
landscapes.

TERMS TO KNOW
[Living] green infrastructure is defined as “the natural vegetative systems and green technologies
that collectively provide society with a multitude of economic, environmental and social benefits”
(https://greeninfrastructureontario.org/). Examples of [living] green infrastructure include:

• Urban canopy (e.g., residential street and boulevard trees, residential trees, parklands, urban
forests and woodlots);

• Watershed ecological elements such as wetlands, streams, lakes, shorelines;

• Stormwater systems that incorporate sustainable natural assets including bioswales,

engineered wetlands, and stormwater ponds;

• Permeable hardscape surfaces used in low impact development (LID) approaches;

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 5

 • Agricultural lands; urban architecture and/or community gardens;

• Grasslands, lawns;

• Green roofs, green walls and container plantings;

Landscape Commissioning [LCx] As an emerging practice, landscape commissioning applies the

principles of traditional building commissioning to ensure that landscape work is responsive to site
context and is environmentally, socially, and financially sustainable. Landscape Commissioning is the
process of establishing, and then field-verifying, performance goals intended to optimize investments
in green infrastructure.

ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
Landscape Performance Metrics
https://www.lafoundation.org/what-we-do/research/landscape-performance
https://www.landscapeperformance.org/guide-to-evaluate-performance

Life Cycle Cost Analysis of Stormwater Management Methods

https://cnla.ca/learn/life-cycle-cost-analysis-of-stormwater-management-methods/

CSLA Resources for Climate Adaptation

https://www.csla-aapc.ca/climate-change/resources-climate-adaptation

CNLA – Extreme Weather, Water and Climate Change

https://cnla.ca/learn/extreme-weather-water-and-climate-change/

6 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

1. SCOPE OF THE STANDARD
1.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2. Any contract between the owner and contractor should
provide for performance and completion equal to or
1.1.1. PURPOSE STATEMENT
better than that set out in this standard.
AND INTENT

This standard addresses work that is conventionally 3. The contract and project related documents should
termed as Landscaping. The term ‘Landscaping’, for this clearly state who is responsible for compliance with each
standard, has been outlined as work described by but not provision of this standard.
limited to the following sections:
4. Projects that are covered in a development permit and/
1. Scope of the standard or building permit may be subject to review by a municipal
2. Contract administration authority. The reviewer appointed by a municipality or
other authority will be acting in the best interest of the
3. Site preparation and protection
authority, not that of the owner. It is recommended that a
4. Grading and drainage
landscape architect or other suitably qualified professional
5. Growing medium
be appointed to administer the contract in the interest of
6. Plants & planting the owner.
7. Mulching
8. Seeding & sodding
9. Landscape maintenance 5. Recommended procedures by the owner, project
10. Irrigation systems manager, contract administrator or owner’s representative
11. Integrated pest and vegetation management include:
12. Hardscape
13. Landscape over structures a. Provision of all pertinent contract documents to
14. Interior Plantscape the contractor

1.1.2. This standard also applies to the areas of b. Resolving and documenting changes in the work
administration, planning, design, and review that affect the throughout construction and maintenance
above sections. procedures

1.2. PROJECT ADMINISTRATION c. Providing interpretation and clarification of

documents
1.2.1. USE BY AUTHORITIES
d. Conducting field reviews and issuing reports
It is recommended that the provisions of this standard be
formally adopted by municipalities, towns, cities, and other e. Administration of the contract in regard to such
authorities and agencies having an interest in establishing, legislation as the Builders’ Act or Construction
maintaining, administering, and enforcing measurable base Lien Act
standards of quality for landscape practices and work.
f. Verifying appropriateness of specified materials.
1.2.2. USE BY THE OWNER/CONTRACTOR
g. Documenting a warranty and a maintenance
1. This standard does not stipulate or formulate contractual agreement between the owner and the
arrangements between owners, contractors, consultants contractor is a recommended practice
and other working parties. This standard can, however, be
used as a guide to pertinent legislation and to the various 6. In referencing this standard for a given contract, an
responsibilities involved in ensuring quality landscape owner and/or owner’s representative should review the
work. following provisions and include them as part of their
contract with the contractor.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 7

 a. Site reviews confirming that all growing benchmarks from which to measure, verify and
mediums supplied conform to soil test results adapt as the landscape grows, matures and
and specifications and mulches conform evolves over time.
to specification
b. DEFINITION: Landscape Commissioning/Site
b. Growing medium intended for use on a site, Commissioning involves establishing landscape
determining particle sizes, organic content, performance goals, designing and building to
nutrient values, absence of invasive plants and meet those goals, and then field-verifying that
their reproductive parts, roots or seeds, and performance is maintained through time. Goals
establishing amendment requirements are tailored to meet the unique needs of each
project and can span the triple bottom line.
c. Pre-site preparation and construction site review
determining presence and/or absence of invasive c. REFERENCE Section 9, Landscape
plant species to determine requirements for Maintenance and Appendix B: Basic contents of a
control, removal or eradication Landscape Commissioning [LCx] Plan.

d. Procedures for approving plants at the nursery d. RESOURCE: U.S. General Services
and at delivery on-site Administration “Landscape Analytics and
Commissioning”: https://www.gsa.gov/real-
e. Conditions of warranty estate/design-construction/landscape-
architecture/landscape-analytics-and-
f. Approval of planting layout commissioning.

g. Establishment maintenance plan

1.2.4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
h. Landscape commissioning plan [lcx] to ensure
provisions for required on-going landscape 1. The authority shall require that a copy of all contract
maintenance Reference Section 9 Landscape documents be submitted to the authority and be approved
Maintenance. in writing prior to the work commencing. This shall be
coordinated with obtaining any development permits/
i. Conditions for full and partial building permits/approval processes for each authority.
acceptance
2. The authority shall define its minimum expectations
j. Contract close-out procedure(s) regarding the extent and scope of the required documents.

3. Some jurisdictions and the authority shall require that

1.2.3. LANDSCAPE COMMISSIONING PLAN [LCX] drawings be noted with “All landscaping and landscape
materials to conform to the Canadian Landscape Standard,
1. Landscape Commissioning or Site Commissioning is an current edition”.
emerging practice in the landscape horticulture industry
which applies the principles and processes of the 4. Contract documents should include project drawings
traditional building commissioning to the landscape/ site. and specifications, change orders and other approved
Because performance of the landscape is necessary for modifications to the contract and warranties.
the landscape to meet or exceed its design intent, a new
landscape maintenance approach that is inclusive, a. Specifications:
interactive and adaptive over a longer period of time, is
imperative. i. May be included as part of the drawings or be
bound separately.
a. PURPOSE: The Landscape Commissioning Plan ii. Shall be specific to the requirements of the
[LCx] provides the processes and methodology to project, stipulating products and execution
set performance goals, methods, milestones and by description or by reference to recognized
8 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020
 standards, performance criteria, or classes of • Location and type of protection mea
execution. sures for the site and existing vegetation/
trees to be retained, e.g. tree hoarding,
iii. Shall conform to or exceed this standard. erosion and sediment controls.
iv. Shall include element protection specifica- • Location and type of stormwater
tions if applicable to the project.
protection measures, e.g. sediment
controls and barriers.
5. Separate drawings, varying with the scope and degree
of complexity of the project or owner requirements, c. Landscape plan/Landscape layout plan
should minimally outline or contain the following:
i. The landscape plan should be incorporated
a. Site plan/Existing conditions plan/Site inventory with the site plan or submitted as a separate
document.
i. A scaled drawing that should include:
ii. A scaled drawing with key dimensions should
• Datum for elevations be included identifying all pertinent features
• Topographic Survey including spot of the site, both existing and proposed.
elevations, contours, top and
bottom of banks iii. Enlarged portions of the plan should be
• Benchmarks included for intricate or generalized con-
• Locations of legal property lines struction details.
• Statutory rights of way and easements iv. Hardscape specifications should be included
• Identification of public or as a sidebar or text panel.
private ownership
• North arrow or compass directions v. The following features should be included:
• Buildings, structures and monuments
including bridges, walls, stairs, fences, • Existing elements [horticultural and
and site furniture non-horticultural] to be retained
• Hardscape elements including paths, • Existing natural features
driveways, and curbs
• Edges and centerlines of adjacent • Location of vegetation and stormwater
streets protection measures
• Surface, above grade, and underground, • All proposed plants, planting beds, and
site servicing infrastructure seeded and sodded areas
• Items of significant cultural or
• Composition and finishes of all
historic value
hardscaped areas [driveway, walks]
• Existing vegetation
• Edge of watercourses and water bodies • Height and materials of all fences, screen
• Edges and centerlines of swales, ditches, walls and retaining walls, etc.
culverts and storm sewer inlets • Stormwater management landscape
b. Demolition plan / Site protection & removals plan features
• All existing and proposed surface, above
i. A scaled drawing that indicates existing and below ground site servicing
vegetation, features or elements that are to infrastructure
be retained, altered, or removed as part of
the final design. • Identification of all relevant features
e.g. civil, mechanical equipment, pads,
ii. Drawing should also include: enclosures, and curbs

• A tree inventory.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 9

 • Culturally sensitive or historical • Drawing key
landscapes • Plant Type, e.g. deciduous
• Any other landscape element that • Common and botanical names
contributes to site development,
including site furnishings, play Plant size:
equipment and lighting
d. Grading Plan • Height
• Width
i. Plan showing existing and proposed changes • Caliper
to site’s grades • Root zone condition:
• Container class
ii. A scaled drawing should include: • Balled and burlapped [field•dug]
• Bare root
• Datum for elevations
• Indications of benchmark location(s) and Plant form:
elevation(s)
• Site boundaries • Standard [single trunk]
• Existing site structures, features, and • Multi-trunk
services • Foliated to ground
• Spot elevations for existing site • Grafted
structures, features, and services • Dwarf
• Elevations at the base of trees to remain • Weeping
• Existing topographic contours • Columnar
• Proposed site structures and elements
• Key proposed spot elevations for walls, Quantities:
steps, railings, ramps, landings, curbs,
drainage structures, etc. • Total number of each plant type, container
• Proposed contours size and spacing
• Slope direction and percentages for • Notes or special requirements
hardscapes and softscapes
• Location of cut and fill areas f. Irrigation plan
• Drainage areas and patterns
• Location of vegetation and stormwater i. The irrigation plan should identify location,
protection measures specifications, quantities, and installation
• Coordination and location of all storm information of the following irrigation
water management and civil engineering components and features:
related features, eg catch basins, swales,
pipes, and detention basins • Water source and point-of-connection
• Rim and invert elevations for proposed • Electrical power source
drainage • Electric wires for timers and controls
• Meter
e. Planting plan • Emergency shutoff valve(s)
• Electronic and manual controller with
i. The planting plan, to scale, should show the grounding
location and types of seeded/sodded areas and • Water delivery devices, piping, and valves
proposed plants in the project as noted in the • Manual system drain valves
plant schedule. • Back-flow prevention devices
ii. The plant schedule should contain the following • Pressure regulators
elements, if applicable: • Drip emitters
• Filters
• Sensors [soil, rain, freeze, flow]

10 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

 ii. Standardized symbols should be used to depict 5. Unless other provisions are agreed to, the contractor
irrigation elements. The symbols should be listed shall provide, maintain and pay for insurance for the
and described in an irrigation schedule or legend duration of the work, providing at least the following
as well as cross-referenced to the appropriate coverages for the following categories of risk:
irrigation details. Provide irrigation installation
details for all components which deviate from a. Comprehensive general liability insurance
standard municipal details. protecting the owner, the contractor,
subcontractors, and their respective servants,
g. Construction details: agents or employees against damage arising from
personal injury [including death] and against
i. Construction details should provide adequate claims for property damage that may arise
information to construct the specific landscape directly or indirectly out of the operations of the
project. contractor, subcontractors, servants, agents or
employees. The amount of coverage should be
ii. These details should include all hard and soft not less than $2,000,000 CAD inclusive for any
landscape elements. one occurrence. This policy shall contain a
standard cross liability clause, and shall cover all
1.2.5. FINANCIAL SECURITY liability arising out of products, whether
manufactured or supplied by the contractor,
It is recommended that the authority require a letter of contingent employer’s liability and liability
credit and/or security deposit [i.e. bond] for each project assumed by the contractor under and applicable
so that the work is completed to this standard or to the contract for the work.
specification, and as shown in the contract documents,
and that maintenance is carried out at least to this b. Automobile insurance on the contractor’s owned
standard. and non-owned vehicles, protecting the
contractor and the owner against damages
1.2.6. INSURANCE arising from bodily injury [including death] and
against claims for property damage arising out
1. Insurance coverage of the business, directors and of their use on the operations of the contractor,
officers, business property, work site, tools and equipment subcontractors, or agents. The amount of
of the business, employees and the work to be undertaken coverage should not be less than
shall be provided by the contractor. $2,000,000 CAD inclusive for any
one occurrence.
2. Other Insurance as required by the scope of the work
shall be provided by the contractor including but not c. Professional liability insurance, commonly
limited to: contract bond (performance or surety), referred to as errors and omissions insurance,
cyber security, boiler and machinery (equipment should be procured by the landscape contractor
breakdown), automobile, aircraft and watercraft liability to provide an appropriate amount of insurance
insurance, contractors’ equipment insurance, professional for liability associated with professional services
liability, errors and omissions, wrap up liability [with wrap provided.
up difference in condition endorsement and coverage for
completed operations], installation insurance etc. d. Reference:

3. Recommended minimum insurance requirements are i. Certified Landscape Designer Landscape Design
included in this standard, however it is important that the Manual, 2nd Edition, Section 6 Practice, 5.5
authority and the owner(s), and other parties involved, Insurance
review these requirements with their insurance advisors ii. Canadian Construction Documents Committee
and modify them as necessary. CCDC 21 – 2016 A guide to construction
insurance
4. The owner(s) should verify that valid proof of insurance
is provided. iii. Snow & Ice Operations Risk Management
Guidelines, CNLA October 18, 2018
CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 11
1.2.7. WARRANTY participants in the original contract and contract review.
Reasonable notice shall be allowed to permit the
1. For this standard, the customary 1-year warranty period landscape contractor to respond.
for the construction industry is accepted as the standard
for landscape work. The contractor should warranty all 7. This standard can never override provisions of a ontract;
materials and workmanship for a period of 1 full year from however, there are usually three distinct periods to
the date of substantial performance/completion, as consider:
defined in the applicable legislation, unless specified
otherwise in the contract with the owner. a. BEFORE ACCEPTANCE AND TAKEOVER
BY OWNER: Generally, the contractor maintains
2. This warranty includes replacing all plants, including and is solely responsible for the plants.
associated transport and labour, that are determined
by the reviewer to be dead or failing at the end of the b. DURING 1-YEAR WARRANTY PERIOD: In most
warranty period. Plant replacements shall be made at cases the owner is responsible for maintenance
the next appropriate season. Conditions of the warranty and protection unless the contract includes 1-year
shall apply to all replacement plants for 1 full growing maintenance by the contractor. The contractor is
season unless otherwise stated or other conditions responsible to make good for faulty products or
stated in this section are applicable. workmanship.

3. The warranty should not apply to plants or other c. AFTER THE WARRANTY PERIOD: The owner is
products damaged after acceptance by causes beyond responsible unless otherwise stated.
the contractor’s control such as inadequate maintenance
by others, vandalism, abuse, “acts of God”, 8. Warranty periods greater than 1-year for specific works,
“excessive wear and tear”, or winter damage as defined notably large trees, interlocking paving and decking should
in this standard. be clearly noted in the working drawings or specifications.
Reference Section 1.2.3 Landscape Commissioning Plan
4. The contractor is considered responsible for the [LCx].
work until acceptance. After acceptance, the owner
is considered responsible for the work, and including
undertaking maintenance, repairs, and plant replacements
according to the requirements of the work, unless
otherwise specified.

5. In instances where the landscape contractor

responsible for the warranty identifies that the owners
are not providing adequate maintenance, the landscape
contractor shall inform the owner(s) in writing of the
limitations to the warranty. In the case of a project subject
to municipal development permits, and/or building
permits, the notice of limitations to the warranty shall
be copied to all participants in the original contract and
contract review. Reasonable notice shall be allowed to
permit the owners to respond.

6. In instances where the owner identifies that the

landscape contractor is not providing adequate
maintenance, the owner should inform the landscape
contractor in writing of the requirements of the warranty.
In the case of a project subject to municipal development
permits, and/or building permits the notice of
requirements of the warranty shall be copied to all

12 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION
2.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS based on the findings of a review of existing site elements
by a qualified professional.
2.1.1. PURPOSE STATEMENT AND INTENT
4. The owner’s agent and representative consultants shall
1. All work, including planning, design, installation and be responsible for verifying that the provisions of Section
maintenance shall be executed to the Canadian Landscape 2.1.1 Purpose statement and intent, are met; and shall verify
Standard - current edition, industry requirements, national that its prime and general contractors and subtrades for
standards, codes and regulations recognized as acceptable the work comply with all municipal bylaws, legislation,
by the CSLA, the National Master Specification [NMS], codes, regulations and standards, including this standard.
the CNLA or other applicable trade organizations.
2.1.4. CHANGES AND SUBSTITUTIONS
2. Membership in CNLA [https://cnla.ca/] or
CSLA [https://www.csla-aapc.ca/] is recommended. 1. The authority shall stipulate all changes they need to be
advised of.
2.1.2. RELATED REFERENCES, STANDARDS
AND LEGISLATION 2. The owner may, without invalidating the contract, direct
the contractor to make changes in the materials and work.
1. Canadian National Master Construction Specification
[NMS] 3. When a change causes an increase or decrease in the
work, an amount is to be agreed upon in advance by the
2. Accessible Canada Act S.C. 2019, c. 10 [ACA] owner and contractor and documented in writing using a
Change Order [CO] that is agreed to and executed by
3. Snow & Ice Operations Risk Management Guidelines, both the contractor and owner.
CNLA October 18, 2018
2.1.5. REPORTS
2.1.3. PLANNING AND DESIGN
1. If progress reports are required by the owner’s
1. The planning, design and documentation of the representative or consultant, the contractor shall provide
landscape work shall be such that all municipal bylaws, these and action any deficiencies.
legislation, applicable codes, regulations and standards,
including this standard, can be met during landscape 2. The contractor shall be advised by the consultant of
construction and maintenance phases, and upon procedures for reporting before the work begins.
completion of the work. This includes horticultural
element preservation, protection and replacement 3. These reports of changes, damage, etc., shall be made
bylaws, as well as invasive species control bylaws. promptly and in such a manner that the work schedule is
not unduly hampered.
2. The presence of invasive species existing on the site
and/or the potential for the establishment of invasive 4. Notification of danger to property, persons, utilities,
species should be assessed by a qualified professional and features, or the surrounding environment shall be given at
the findings and recommendations reflected in the once, verbally, and where necessary in writing, to the
preliminary planning and design development. Reference authority or owner and to the appropriate public agencies
Appendix D National Voluntary Code of Conduct for the or authorities responsible for the safety and repair of such
Ornamental, Horticulture Industry. property or for the protection of the environment.

3. The potential for retaining existing site elements should 5. Landscape maintenance shall be reported as directed by
be thoroughly examined during preliminary assessments the Landscape Commissioning Plan [LCx]. If an LCx is not
and planning for all sites. Preliminary planning and used, all landscape maintenance should be reported to the
subsequent design development should include and be owner or owner’s representative using a logbook that
documents date of work, work carried out and notes of

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 13

any site conditions or landscape maintenance issues
requiring attention.

2.1.6. DAMAGE

1. Damage to property site elements or the surrounding

environment shall be documented and reported without
delay and shall be promptly and completely repaired.

2.1.7. CRITICAL TASK LIST

TASK DESCRIPTION / CONSIDERATIONS

1. Planning and Design

Site Analysis and Assessment Typically includes an existing conditions plan, this step reviews both the existing
natural assets, site challenges and site potential and the holistic effects they have
on the other.

Site Layout and Design A collaborative process combining the elements that satisfy the client brief
[Owner Project Requirements - OPR], and apply responsible, innovative design
practices and landscape solutions that consider form, function, and sustainability.
The design shall also consider the effects, influences and implications it can have
on the site’s ecology, water systems, surrounding environment, biodiversity, local
weather, climate change effects, and the carbon footprint. This process includes
conceptual, schematic and detailed design/design development phases. During
the detailed design/design development and project documentation phases,
drawing packages may include the following: Cover Sheet/Index Sheet; Site
References or Key Plan; Existing Conditions Plan; Tree/Plant Protection and
Removal Plan; Site Demolition Plan or Site Preparation Plan; Layout [and
Materials] Plan; Grading and Drainage Plan; Irrigation Plan; Site Lighting Plan or
Electrical Layout Plan; Utilities Plan or Site Servicing Plan; Planting Plan; Site Soils
Plan; Structural Plans or Mechanical Plans (i.e. for storage buildings, retaining
walls, water play); and Details.

Project Documents for Project documents typically include project plan(s) drawings, details and the
Tendering/ project specifications and are the instructions to a contractor for the purposes of
Request for Proposal/ bidding and/or building the Project. Pricing of projects is based solely on the
Quotation information contained in these documents. They also form the basis for a legal
contract between the owner and the contractor. Because project documents will
set the tone for a successful project, it is crucial that they are written and drawn as
inclusive and accurately as possible. Discrepancies, errors or omissions can occur
and if/when they do, should be corrected and communicated immediately.

2. Landscape Commissioning Plan [LCx]

14 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

 2. Landscape Commissioning Plan [LCx]

Landscape Commissioning Landscape Commissioning, also known as Site Commissioning, can [but is not
[LCx] limited to] include stormwater management, plantings, trees, turf, landscape over
structures, green roofs, hardscape, play areas, landscape lighting and irrigation
systems. Generate a project specific Landscape Commissioning Plan and include in
Project Documents.

3. Pre-Construction

Permits, Compliance and Secure all required permits prior to start of construction. Identify local by-laws
Locates and compliance requirements including [but not limited to] property extents,
required setbacks, noise and pollution [emissions] control, and pesticide applica-
tions. Call Before you Dig is a national service managed by the Canadian Common
Ground Alliance [CCGA]. Their website includes the CCGA Best Practices v3.0 in
both official languages and offers regional partner links in [alphabetical order]
Alberta, Atlantic Canada, British Columbia, Manitoba, Ontario, Quebec, and
Saskatchewan.

Protection of existing site Existing site elements that require protection may include both the canopy and
elements and natural assets root zone of mature trees, planting beds and hedges, lawns/fields, water courses,
water sources and drains from siltation and contamination and natural assets such
as rock formations/outcrops, tree groves, wetlands, historical or sacred areas and
animal/insect/fish/bird habitats.

Scheduling and Work Plan Organization is key to a safe, successful and profitable project. A project schedule
or work plan can include [but is not limited to] project mobilization, delivery of
product, labour and sub-contractors, timelines and milestones, and demobilization.
Depending on the project size, project management software programs are
available and include templates for all types of project requirements.

4. Construction Oversight / Contract Administration

Project Oversight, Inspections, Tools available can include stipulating contractor qualifications, referencing the
and Commissioning Canadian Landscape Standard - current edition, requesting submittals including
shop drawings, cutsheets, mock-ups, product and material samples in advance of
construction, and a landscape commissioning plan in the project documents.

Site Instructions, A site instruction [SI] provides supplemental information or instruction but does
Contemplated Change not result in modifications to the contract. The modification of a contract while
Orders/Notices and Change underway is inevitable on most construction projects. A contemplated change
Orders order/notice [CCO, CCN] delineates changes in scope of work that are expected
to change the contract time and/or price and requests prices for proposed
changes but requires Owner approval before action may be taken or costs in-
curred. A change order [CO], when issued, will affect the scope of work as origi-
nally contracted and should [but not be limited to] include changes in product,
materials, layout, construction techniques or scheduling.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 15

 Submittals Requesting submittals verifies that the project receives the product and material
as specified by the project designer and/or owner. Submittal requests can [but not
limited to] include samples of soils and soil analysis, fertilizers, mulches, sod, seed,
aggregates, hardscape product such as a unit concrete paver or segmented
retaining wall. Submittals can also include shop drawings for site furniture or
accessories, site lighting, irrigation, product cut sheets, or Safety Data Sheets
[SDS].

Inspection Inspections are typically carried out by the project designer or a person designat-
ed by the owner or designer. To be effective, inspections shall be scheduled to
align with project milestones or checkpoints such as product delivery, sub-grade
completion of aggregate base for hardscape, site services installation, planting or
sodding. Project milestones and checkpoints for inspections should be written into
the project documents and all inspections should be documented using a standard
form with a communications loop including the owner, project designer and
contractor.

5. Workplace Safety

Material handling and storage Plan for safe handling and storage of various products, materials and substances
including live products such as turfgrass sod and nursery stock, bulk product
including [but not limited to] soils, mulches and aggregates and chemical product
including fertilizers, pesticides, concrete sealers, solvents or adhesives.

Material storage areas are frequent sites for spills and other emergencies. Plan,
prepare and practice site and project specific preventative emergency
procedures.

Waste Disposal Plan for the on-site management and disposal of construction waste including
hazardous waste and recycled materials. Consult your local authority for disposal
requirements and restrictions in advance of construction. Comply with all applica-
ble laws, bylaws, rules, regulations.

Personal & Public Safety Overall site safety measures should include [but not limited to] safe operation of
equipment by trained personnel; equipment, vehicle and tool maintenance done
according to manufacturing instructions; compliance with the OHS guidelines;
maintaining sufficient barricades and safety protocols; conducting hazard assess-
ments; holding regular tool box meetings with staff; and wearing of PPE all
contribute to a safe work site. Develop a comprehensive site safety plan and
communicate, train and evaluate for continuous improvement in advance of
construction and throughout the duration of the project.

6. Warranty and Maintenance

Warranty and Maintenance Workmanship expectations, warranty extents and durations and maintenance
During Warranty Period requirements should be clearly outlined and included in project documents.

7. Resources
Time-Saver Standards for Landscape Architecture, Second Edition Harris Dines 1998 - 2004
Certified Landscape Designer Landscape Design Manual, current edition

16 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

2.1.8. QUALITY OF WORK 2.1.10. SITE EVALUATION

1. All work, including maintenance work, shall be 1. The contractor shall inspect the site prior to starting
executed to the requirements of the project specification work to verify that all surfaces are prepared and graded as
which would be included in the project and/or contract specified. Upon discovery, any discrepancies shall be
documents and this and other applicable standards. reported to the authority.

2. The contractor shall enforce a high standard of work 2. No landscape work shall be carried out in areas or over
quality, good discipline, order and professionalism on surfaces that have not been prepared and graded; and that
the site. due to climate would be at risk of unnecessary
disturbance.
2.1.9. SCHEDULING
2.1.11. SUPERVISORS / SUPERVISION
1. The contractor shall schedule all operations to ensure
optimum environmental protection during the removal 1. The contractor shall provide qualified, informed,
and control of invasive plants, demolition, planning and competent supervision on the site for the duration of the
construction, grading, growing medium placement, on-site contracted work.
planting, seeding or sodding, and maintenance
operations as outlined in this standard. 2. The person designated responsible for supervision shall
monitor, inspect and verify that the required standards of
2. Invasive plants and vegetative parts shall be removed to work, materials quality and quantity, and safety are
a registered treatment facility. achieved. This includes, but is not limited to, confirmation
of safety codes and utility layout, records of changes,
3. Scheduling shall be organized so that: on-site coordination, scheduling and management.

a. MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS are carried out 3. Personnel supervising all landscape work shall be
to the requirements of the maintenance schedule. qualified professionals with industry credentials and
experience and demonstrated expertise at supervising
b. OPERATIONS are such that they suit the plants landscape projects.
needs for the regional climate and local growing
seasons and conditions. 2.1.12. QUALIFIED PROFESSIONALS

c. COORDINATION is such that a minimum Professionals having expertise appropriate to the needs
duration of on-site storage of plants, minimum of each project should be engaged in the planning and
movement and compaction of growing medium, designing of the landscape work. Many sections of this
and prompt mulching and watering operations document deal with highly technical information that the
occur. reader may feel is beyond their own area of expertise. In
these situations, it is recommended that the services of a
d. THE WORK SCHEDULE is coordinated with the qualified professional be retained with the credentials and
owner’s schedule and the scheduling of other qualifications required to implement these standards.
trades on-site.
Qualified professionals should be aware of local bylaws,
4. Operations are such that they suit the regions climate government legislation, site conditions and other
and minimize impacts on the landscape. regionally specific circumstances that may have an impact
on the project.
5. Coordination and scheduling should warranty that no
damage occurs to any and all materials before, during or While not inclusive, the following list represents a group
after installation. of qualified professionals deemed to be qualified, all or in
part, to undertake assessments and reviews, comment on
6. The requirements of retained plants are adequately and proposed methods of planning, design, construction, and
promptly met. maintenance, make recommendations as they relate to

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 17

site preparation and protection, identification of site c. Landscape Horticulturist Red Seal Journeyperson
hazards and safety concerns, identification of elements for
removal or preservation, and invasive species identification d. Integrated Pest Management Specialist
and management. e. Irrigation Association Certified:
1. University Degree - College Diploma i. Contractor [CIC]
a. Planner
ii. Certified Irrigation Designer [CID]
b. Architect
iii. Certified Landscape Irrigation Auditor [CLIA]
c. Agronomist
d. Ecologist/Biologist
f. Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute [ICPI]
e. Landscape Architect designation:

f. Landscape Architecture Technician i. ICPI Certified Concrete Paver Installer

g. Landscape Designer ii. ICPI Certified Concrete Paver Installer

– Residential Specialist
h. Landscape Horticulture Technician
i. Professional Engineer [P.Eng.] e.g. Geo-technical iii. ICPI Certified Concrete Paver Installer
Engineer; Civil Engineer; Environmental Engineer; – Commercial Specialist
Mechanical Engineer
iv. ICPI Certified Concrete Paver Installer
j. Lawyer – PICP Specialist
k. Forester/Urban Forester g. Integrated pest management specialist and pest
l. Soils scientist/specialist management specialist

h. Accredited Landscape Horticulture Company

2. Industry specific certification or designation i. Green Roof Professional (accredited by

a. Certified Arborist designation: Green Roofs for Healthy Cities

i. ISA Certified Arborist j. Qualified/Certified equipment operators

ii. ISA Certified Arborist Utility Specialist 3. Certified/licensed registered professionals

iii. ISA Certified Arborist Municipal Specialist
a. Registered Professional Biologist
iv. ISA Certified Tree Worker Climber Specialist
b. Licensed Pesticide Applicators
v. ISA Certified Tree Worker Aerial Lift
Specialist c. Licensed trades people [Electrician, Plumber,
etc.]
vi. ISA Tree Risk Assessment Qualification
d. Certified trades people [Carpenter, etc.]
b. Landscape Horticulture Certification Program:
e. Manufacturer of green roof systems and
i. Certified Landscape Horticulturist Technician materials
[CLHT]
f. Manufacturers of living wall systems and
ii. Certified Landscape Designer [CLD] materials
iii. Certified Landscape Horticulturist Manager g. Building envelope consultants
[CLHM]
h. Roofing contractors and manufacturers

18 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

4. And/or any professional experts or consultants as 3. No toxic or waste materials, fertilizers or fuels shall be
deemed required by the designated consultant. stored adjacent to water courses or storm drains and shall
be in a location suitable to the owner and in accordance
5. Seeking advice from qualified professionals who are with municipal, provincial and federal regulations.
practicing within the scope of their own expertise and
code of conduct will help to protect the project from 4. All toxic materials, waste and other construction
errors related to misinterpretation or lack of knowledge. material shall be disposed of in a manner acceptable to the
owner and in accordance with municipal, provincial and
2.1.13. WORKMANSHIP AND PERSONNEL federal regulations.

1. The contractor shall employ qualified personnel and 2.1.16. CHEMICALS [WHERE LEGALLY PERMITTED]
professionals with experience pertinent to the landscape,
geographical location and other work. 1. The handling and application of all chemicals, including
2. The contractor shall provide a high standard of work but not limited to herbicides, pesticides, fungicides and
quality, good discipline, order and professionalism on the insecticides, shall be performed by persons legally licensed
site. or certified to do so under provincial and federal
legislation.

2.1.14. SAFETY 2. Use, handling and disposal of chemicals shall comply

with municipal or regional legislation, and all applicable
1. The contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, legislation and regulations, including, but not limited to:
bylaws, rules, regulations and lawful orders from any
authority having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or a. Pest Control Products Act
property to protect them from damage, injury or loss.

2. The contractor shall erect and maintain all reasonable b. Fisheries Act
safeguards for safety and protection as required by
regulatory bodies and as required by existing conditions c. Food And Drugs Act
and the progress of the work.
d. Canada Wildlife Act
3. The contractor shall provide sufficient barricades, safety
guards, and/or warning devices for the purpose of con- e. Weed Control Act
trolling traffic and where and whenever necessary, for the
protection of persons and property. f. Plant Protection Act
4. The contractor and subtrades are responsible for
g. Provincial Integrated Pest Management Act
implementing and complying with the relevant Canada
Occupational Health and Safety Regulations for all
workers. h. Provincial Waste Management Act

i. Provincial Workers Compensation Act

2.1.15. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

1. Appropriate measures shall be taken to ensure that no 2.1.17. SITE AND SITE ELEMENTS PROTECTION
spillage of fuels, toxic construction materials, or other
toxic wastes occurs. Ensure that adequate containment 1. The areas of the site that will be affected by the work
facilities and clean-up equipment is available and utilized should be defined on the landscape plans. All existing site
on site where use of such materials is necessary. features located outside the defined line of disturbance
are to remain undisturbed and protected. Where it is
2. No toxic or waste materials, fertilizers, fuels or slurry identified that site work may result in the need to cause
shall be permitted to enter into groundwater, water disturbance outside of the defined line of disturbance, the
courses or any other water body either on or off the job
site.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 19

change to the scope of work should be identified to the 2. All products and materials used in the work shall be
owner and/or owners representative prior to proceeding subject to testing when the reviewer determines that
with any work beyond the defined lines. testing is necessary to ensure that they meet
specifications or this standard. This includes, but is not
2. Environmental damage shall be avoided by carefully limited to:
planning and scheduling construction and maintenance
operations. Areas that are sensitive or present potential a. Seed and seed mixes
problems shall be noted, and schedules and work methods b. Fertilizers
shall be prepared and executed accordingly. c. Mulches
d. Growing medium and its components
3. All existing and new plants, site services, curbs, paving,
structures, finishes and all other elements shall be 3. The contract between owner and contractor shall set
protected against damage prior to and while conducting out who is responsible for the testing and certification of
the work. products and materials, in particular the growing medium.

4. Damage occurring during the course of conducting the 4. Unless the contract sets out other provisions,
work shall be reported immediately and shall be the owner shall pay for testing and obtaining all
completely repaired to the satisfaction of the authority. certifications of compliance with this standard. Where
any product or material does not meet this standard or
5. Reference Section 3, Site reparation and Protection. the specification, and requires amending, the cost of all
subsequent re-testing shall be paid by the contractor.

2.1.18. WATER AND IRRIGATION 5. The testing laboratory shall make the test results
available to the contractor, the reviewer and the owner
1. Water used for the work shall be free from any organic and shall include either:
or chemical contaminants detrimental to humans, animals
or healthy plant growth. Refer to Irrigation Association a. CERTIFICATION THAT THE TESTED SAMPLES
Landscape Irrigation Best Management Practices May meet the requirements of this standard, the
2014, Water Quality Assessment Table 1 page 20. specifications or applicable federal and provincial
legislation, or
2. Water shall be scheduled to meet the needs of all
phases of the project. b. RECOMMENDATIONS FOR MODIFYING THE
MATERIAL, or product to meet this standard or
3. Planning, scheduling and execution of the work shall specifications.
include measures to provide an adequate supply of water
and a satisfactory means of water distribution at adequate 6. The contractor shall carry out the recommended
pressures for the irrigation of all plants. modifications and shall submit new samples for testing if
required by the reviewer.
4. Planning shall include, but not be limited to the
provision of satisfactory manual or automatic sprinkler 7. The contractor shall only be required to modify products
systems, drip systems, hose bibs and connection points, or materials as necessary to meet the more stringent of
and truck- mounted water tanks. this standard or the project specification.

2.1.19. SAMPLES, TESTING AND CERTIFICATION 8. Testing and certification shall be carried out as quickly
as possible so as not to delay the contractor’s operations.
1. Testing shall be carried out by a provincially accredited,
independent testing laboratory approved by the reviewer, 9. The reviewer may, at his/her discretion, waive the
using commonly accepted testing methods, or methods requirement of testing for each project. This may apply if
set out in this standard. satisfactory test results have already been obtained from
the same stock of material.

20 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

10. Samples: d. SOIL AND GROWING MEDIUM:

a. SAMPLES IN THE QUANTITIES AND i. Sub-samples shall be taken at a minimum rate

CONDITIONS set out in this standard shall be of 1 sub-sample per 1,000m2 (10,760ft.2)
provided to the reviewer for testing within 48 before stripping on-site soil, or 1 sub-sample
hours of the request for samples, or within an per 200m3 (260yd3) for stockpiled on-site
agreed reasonable time if conditions do not soil or for growing medium, to a minimum of
permit this. 5 sub-samples and a maximum of 10
sub-samples.
b. SAMPLES OF ALL MATERIALS shall be taken,
handled and transported in such a manner that ii. Sub-samples shall be taken using a 2.5 cm
they are free from contamination and (1 in.) soil sampling corer/tube or a spade.
representative of the material or product Sub-samples shall be thoroughly mixed to
sampled. obtain a representative composite sample.
This final sample shall be supplied to the
c. SAMPLES SHALL BE TAKEN by the authority or testing laboratory in the amounts requested.
their designated representative and shall meet
the following requirements: iii. Growing medium testing may be performed
on samples provided to a testing laboratory
i. Commercial fertilizers: Properly sealed and by the supplier. The requirement for re-
labeled bags shall constitute assurance of testing of material may be waived if the
conformity. Labels shall be accessible to the landscape architect or reviewer is satisfied
reviewer on delivery, and inventory taken at that the delivered material conforms to the
each on-site delivery. [Where large soil test result provided.
installations are involved it may be advisable
to request Agriculture Canada to check the e. ORGANIC GROWING MEDIUM
validity of the label. This can be done at no COMPONENTS:
cost to the owner or contractor and places When required, samples of peat moss, manure,
full responsibility upon the supplier]. A compost and other proposed organic
sample of each material shall be supplied to amendments shall be supplied to the analyzing
the analyzing laboratory in the amounts laboratory, in the amounts requested for each
requested. sample of material.

ii. Seeds and seed mixtures: Certification by the f. TISSUE SAMPLES:

seed supplier shall constitute assurance of Where required to test for nutrient levels or
conformity except where the reviewer has presence and identification of pathogens, tissue
reason to verify such certification. If that is samples shall be supplied to the testing laboratory
the case, a sample of each seed type or mix in the amounts and under the conditions
shall be supplied in the amounts requested to requested.
the analyzing laboratory. Seed mixtures
should be certified as being free of seeds of 2.1.20. FIELD REVIEWS
potentially invasive plants.
Field reviews by an independent reviewer or by an
iii. Sand, rock, gravel and other aggregates: appropriate consultant should be conducted to provide
When required, a sample of each material fair interpretation of the contract and complete execution
shall be supplied to an analyzing laboratory in of the work. Field review requirements may be simplified
the amount requested. for small or simple projects or may need to be increased
for larger or more complex projects.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 21

1. The Owner should identify a qualified reviewer before 4. Field reviews and reports shall be timed to avoid undue
the work is to begin. Reference Section 2.1.12 Qualified delays in the execution of the work. The contractor shall
professionals. give reasonable notice when the work will be ready for
field reviews in order to avoid delays.
2. The reviewer shall not interfere with the contractor’s
control or management of the work or the contractor’s 2.1.21. PLANT LOSS AND LIABILITY
forces.
1. Plant loss and related liability falls within the existing
3. The reviewer shall have access to the work at all framework of contract law and insurance.
reasonable times and take action as necessary to ensure
compliance with this standard, the contract documents 2. This standard can never override provisions of a
and approved changes, including, but not limited to: contract; however, there are usually three distinct periods
to be considered:
a. REVIEWING THE WORK as often as is deemed
necessary to ensure the work reasonably a. BEFORE ACCEPTANCE AND TAKEOVER
conforms to approved plans and specifications. BY THE OWNER:
Examples of phases and conditions that require [this date may correspond with substantial
review include, but are but not limited to: completion]. In most cases, the contractor
maintains and is wholly responsible for the plants.
i. Project startup meeting
b. DURING 1- YEAR WARRANTY PERIOD:
ii. Existing conditions review: Confirm site In most cases the owner is responsible for
conditions, proposed layout, and approved maintenance and protection, unless the contract
substitutions or contract changes to date, includes 1- year maintenance by the contractor.
and prior to construction Contractor is responsible to make good for faulty
products or workmanship. Winterizing is a
iii. Plants field review mandatory requirement of the warranty
[not inclusive of perennials and non- zone hardy
iv. Subgrade field review material].

v. Growing medium field review c. AFTER WARRANTY PERIOD:

In most cases, the owner is responsible.
vi. Field review for acceptance
2.1.22. CONTROLS FOR INSECT PESTS,DISEASES,
vii. Warranty field review: Confirm completion AND INVASIVE AND NOXIOUS PLANTS
of all necessary replacements and corrections
at the conclusion of the warranty period 1. The principles of Integrated Pest Management [IPM]
and Plant Health Care [PHC] shall be applied in controlling
b. CALLING FOR SAMPLES AND TESTS of insect pests, diseases, and invasive and noxious plants.
materials and products as necessary That is, methods used should be a combination of physical,
cultural, biological, and chemical methods chosen for
c. INTERPRETING TEST RESULTS being the most effective and environmentally safest.

d. REPORTING TO THE AUTHORITY on the 2. All control methods employed shall be limited to those
results of tests and field reviews allowed by provincial and municipal bylaw and regulation.

e. ADVISING THE CONTRACTOR, THE 3. Reference Section 11, Integrated Pest and Vegetation
AUTHORITY AND THE OWNER of any work Management
found unacceptable.

22 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

2.1.23. ADMINISTRATION OF WARRANTY

1. The authority should ensure that the work is maintained

during the warranty period by conducting a field review
towards the end of the warranty period. Opportunity and
sufficient time shall be provided to rectify deficiencies
documented in these field reviews. If deficiencies are not
rectified, and if maintenance, construction specifications
and warranty requirements have not been met, the
authority may exact a penalty, such as forfeiture of a
bond, subject to contract.

2. In order that the contractor’s 1-year warranty or the

agreed upon turn over date be valid, the owner shall
arrange to have the maintenance provisions of Section 9,
Landscape Maintenance, carried out during the warranty
period under the supervision of a suitably qualified
professional.

3. Establishment maintenance should be carried out by the

contractor who originally completed the work but may be
carried out by qualified persons other than the contractor,
if all of the requirements of Section 9, Landscape
Maintenance are met and verified.

2.1.24. ACCEPTANCE

1. In most cases, the work will be reviewed by the owner’s

representative to determine compliance with the contract
for the work to set substantial completion [Builders’/
Construction Lien Act] and to accept the work on the
owner’s behalf.

2. It is anticipated that in the above case, as well as when

there is no separate professional reviewer, the reviewer
appointed by the authority will conduct the review to
ensure compliance with this standard and contract
documents, and will determine acceptance independently
in accordance with this standard, the contract and
specifications and with the authority’s procedures.

3. Acceptance criteria of landscape work by an authority

should be integrated with the development permit,
building permit, and approval process

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 23

SITE PREPARATION & PROTECTION
3.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS i. Invasive Species Regulations [Provincial/
Jurisdictional]
3.1.1. PURPOSE STATEMENT AND INTENT

1. The intent of this section is to verify that the site to be j. Agriculture Canada/Ministry of Agriculture [Federal
developed is prepared in such a manner that it meets the and Provincial]
performance goals of the landscape plan, complies with all
local or municipal bylaws and provides worker and public k. Vegetation management for invasive plants and
safety. contaminated soils [Provincial/Jurisdictional]

2. All horticultural and non-horticultural elements l. Tree Preservation/Protection Bylaws [Municipal]

contained within the site are assessed for preservation
or removal; in the case of preservation, sites are m. Underground Infrastructure Safety
subsequently managed in order to preserve or enhance
Enhancement Act
their pre-construction condition. It is expected that
horticultural elements deemed noxious or invasive in their 2. Industry
locale be brought under a reasonable measure of control,
based on specifications provided, and with management
practices that reflect the local and/or municipal, provincial a. American National Standards Institute ANSI A300
and federal bylaws and specific acts such as the Tree Care Operations - Tree, Shrub, and Other
Endangered Species Act and Migratory Bird Convention Woody Plant Maintenance - Standard Practices
Act.
b. National Voluntary Code of Conduct for the
3.1.2. RELATED REFERENCES, STANDARDS AND Ornamental Horticulture Industry, CSLA/CNLA
LEGISLATION
3.1.3. SITE ELEMENTS
1 Government
1. Site elements and conditions may include, but are not
a. NMS Section 32 01 90.33 Tree and Shrub limited to:
Preservation
a. Trees [individuals, groves or stands], shrubs and
b. NMS Section 35 01 40.92 Preservation groundcovers
of Water Courses and Wetlands
b. Topography
c. Canada Occupational Health and Safety
Regulations [Federal and Provincial] c. Natural systems

d. Canadian Environmental Protection Act d. Water sources: surface, ground, stormwater and
[Federal and Provincial] wastewater

e. Canada Wildlife Act [sections referring e. Native soils and sub-soils

to birds, nests and eggs]
f. Fauna
f. The Standards & Guidelines for the Conservation of
Historic Places in Canada g. Historical or archaeological elements

g. Weed Control Act [Federal and Provincial] h. Geologic [rock] formations

h. Heritage Conservation Acts and resources i. Other important natural or man-made elements
[Provincial/Jurisdictional]

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 25

3.1.4. ASSESSMENT OF EXISTING SITE ELEMENTS v. Crown radius
AND PLANNING FOR PRESERVATION AND vi. Form and structure
RELOCATION
vii. Crown class
1. Site inventory and identification for preservation and
relocation viii. Plant health assessment

ix. Soil composition

a. Prior to any disruption of the project site, a
qualified professional shall review and inventory
all site elements that may be suitable/designated c. Elements to be preserved should be tagged with
for preservation. number tags where appropriate to ensure that
preservation instructions and recording will
b. Site elements should be considered in the context remain accurate throughout the construction
of their relationship and interaction with other process.
elements located on the site. Feasibility of
retention, preservation and relocation should be 3. Assessment
carefully considered and included as part of the
contract documents where appropriate. a. All elements identified for preservation shall be
reviewed for hazards and safety by a qualified
c. Factors to be considered in preserving a site professional and appropriate hazard abatement
element include its condition, geographical measures shall be incorporated.
location, health and accessibility; its relevance
based on size and type, its ecological, historical, or b. Assessment findings and recommendations
unique qualities; anticipated success for preserva- should be in writing and submitted as part of
tion or relocation, and susceptibility if disturbed preliminary design work.
at specific times of year.
4. Trees
2. Survey and element identification
a. An ISA Certified Arborist [CA], Registered
a. All elements determined to be suitable for Consulting arborists [RCA] or Tree Risk
retention, preservation or relocation shall be Assessment Qualified [TRAQ] professionals shall
surveyed and documented before site planning is complete all tree assessments.
completed to determine:
b. Trees exhibiting abnormal growth patterns or
i. Exact location characteristics which indicate instability shall be
assessed prior to starting the project to verify
ii. Size, extent, and condition
that they are safe to retain. The following items
iii. Elevation should be considered:

iv. Relationship to proposed construction i. Tree species and rating

ii. Structural condition

b. Existing tree and vegetation surveys should show
accurate information regarding including: iii. Biological health
i. Location
iv. Growth habit
ii. Elevation
v. Trunk diameter [DBH] and crown radius
iii. Species
vi. Preservation priority
iv. Trunk diameter [DBH - Diameter at Breast
Height] vii. Recommended action to preserve/remove/
relocate

26 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

 viii. Specific defects d. The final location of the critical protection zone
ix. Special characteristics should be established after careful consideration
of those factors that will affect the health of the
x. Potential targets tree. The distances outlined are only intended to
be general guidelines in establishing Critical
c. Trees identified for preservation should have a Protection Zones and in the absence of detailed
recorded condition rating to enable accurate work these distances could suffice. This work
monitoring throughout site construction. should be undertaken by a certified arborist or
Retention should be based on the following qualified professional and may result in an area
considerations: that is larger than or perhaps smaller than that
distance determined by dripline or DBH
i. Species calculations.
ii. Present age and life expectancy
e. Municipal bylaws or other regulations may dictate
iii. Health and disease susceptibility measures to be undertaken regarding the critical
protection zone.
iv. Structure
3.1.5. DOCUMENTATION FOR PRESERVING SITE
v. Aesthetic values
ELEMENTS
vi. Importance to the landscape design
1. Preservation of site element specifications shall form
vii. Extent and feasibility of preservation mea- part of the contract documents for all stages of work
sures required including:

viii. Sentimental, historical, heritage, or special a. Demolition

considerations

ix. Adaptability to a new environment b. Site preparation

5. Critical protection zones c. Clearing and grubbing

a. Critical protection zones represent the area d. Landscape and maintenance plans
surrounding any element that shall be preserved
and protected to enable the safety or survival of 2. Site planning, design and project documents should
the element. These zones shall be assessed and include drawings and specifications for protection. Where
documented prior to commencing work. proposed work will encroach on any critical protection
zone the project documents should include specific details
for adequate protection of the affected elements noted
b. Critical protection zones containing horticultural
for preservation.
elements shall be monitored and kept sufficiently
moist throughout the work. This may require 3. Onsite instruction should be provided to the site
supplementary irrigation. supervisor, and all project personnel shall be made aware
of the exact location of site elements to be preserved and
c. Critical protection zones for trees or plants are of protection requirements. Penalties associated with
where most of their root mass is located. Under failure to comply with protection requirements shall be
normal conditions 95 percent of the root struc- reviewed at that time.
tures for most trees are found in the upper
30-45cm (12-18in.) of soil with root development 3.1.6. PLANNING AND DOCUMENTATION FOR
extending beyond the canopy radius. Since most RELOCATING SITE ELEMENTS
trees develop root structures beyond the canopy 1. Relocating site elements [e.g. large trees] is encouraged
radius, the drip line radius of a tree should not be as an environmentally sound means of retaining existing
used as a guideline for critical root zone elements when conditions permit.
definition.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 27

2. Recommendations regarding relocating site elements 3.2. EXECUTION
should be determined by a qualified professional.

3. Relocation or transplanting should be scheduled to 3.2.1. SCHEDULING

coincide with other site construction work.
1. Work shall be carefully planned and scheduled to
4. Factors to be considered in relocating horticultural minimize damage to the environment and protected
elements include: elements.

a. Quality and health 3.2.2. SAFETY

b. Size 1. The work shall be carried out in compliance with applica-

ble standards and regulations pertinent to
c. Ecological value, heritage, or historical construction site safety.
significance 2. Utility installations such as sewer, telephone, fuel, hydro,
waterlines, fiber optics or other underground and over-
d. Species head installations shall be identified, and appropriate
safety measures implemented.
e. Health and safety
3. Reference Canadian Common Ground Alliance CCGA
f. Growing medium and moisture levels at the new Best Practices, current edition.
location
3.2.3. CRITICAL PROTECTION ZONES
g. Optimal lead time for root pruning
1. General
h. Possibility of requiring storage a. Critical protection zones shall be established before
the start of work in compliance with all municipal
i. Method of relocation and distance of move bylaws, legislation, codes, regulations and
standards.
j. Time of year and weather conditions
2. Horticultural elements
k. Projected success rate
a. Protective fencing shall be located as required to
l. Cost benefit define the critical protection zone unless other-
wise specified or directed.
5. Relocation procedures and on-going maintenance
during and after relocation should be documented. b. Critical protection zones for trees should be
6. Relocated site elements shall be protected as required determined by referencing Table T-3.1. Guideline
by this section before, during storage and after relocation. for determining critical protection zones for
trees. Protection areas for unique situations such
as leaning or columnar trees may vary from Table
3.1.7. REPORTING CHANGES OR DAMAGE T-3.1. Guideline for determining critical protec-
tion zones for trees.
1. Any damage to elements designated for preservation
shall be documented and reported to the consultant. c. Critical protection zones for horticultural ele-
2. Any changes or damage to a designated critical ments depend on accurate evaluation of a variety
protection zones shall be documented and reported to the of factors including:
consultant. i. Pre-existing site conditions
3. Any proposed changes to the size or location of a ii. Species tolerance to disturbance
critical protection zone shall be approved by the
consultant or qualified professional prior to any changes iii. Plant age and projected longevity
being made and verified by the consultant.
28 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020
 iv. Plant health and vigour 3. As a minimum, protective fencing should be erected
outside the dripline or as shown in Table T-3.1. Guideline
v. Root spread and depth [root mass] for determining critical protection zones for trees.
vi. Site exposure and prevailing winds 4. Signage should be provided at regular intervals along
protective fencing indicating the function of the fencing,
vii. Soil texture, structure and depth i.e. “Tree/Plant Protection Area - Do Not Enter”.
viii. Site hydrology 5. Protective fencing and signage should be well main-
tained for all element critical protection zones throughout
construction. Damaged fencing or signs shall be repaired
TABLE T-3.1. GUIDELINE FOR or replaced immediately.
DETERMINING CRITICAL PROTECTION 6. Areas of trees and vegetation critical protection zones
ZONES FOR TREES shall be fenced off by means of:

Trunk Diameter [DBH] Minimum Protection Radius

a. Chain link fence of at least a 1.2m (4ft.) height
20cm (8in.) 1.6m (5.0ft.) mounted on steel or sturdy wooden posts. Fence
posts should be installed no farther than 2.4m
25cm (10in.) 2.0m (6.5ft.) (8ft.) apart.

30cm (12in.) 2.4m (8.0ft.) b. Solid plywood hoarding mounted securely to steel
or sturdy wooden posts. Posts should be installed
35cm (14in.) 2.8m (9.0ft.) no farther than 2.4m (8ft.) apart.
40cm (16in.) 3.2m (10.5ft.)
c. Board fencing consisting of posts minimum of
45cm (18in.) 3.6m (12ft.) 2x4 (1.5in. x 3.5in. or 38mm x 89mm) set securely
in the ground and extending at least 1m (39in.)
50cm (20in.) 4.0m (13ft.) above the ground shall be installed with a mini-
mum of two 4cm x 8cm (2in.x4in.) horizontal
55cm (22in.) 4.4m (14ft.) boards fastened securely between posts. Fence
posts should be installed no farther than 2.4m
60cm (24in.) 4.8m (16ft.) (8ft.) apart.
75cm (30in.) 6.0m (20ft.)
d. Plastic fencing, [‘international orange’ polyeth-
90cm (35in.) 7.2m (24ft.) ylene web fencing – also known as snow fence or
safety barrier] securely mounted on a wooden
100cm (39in.) 8.0m (26ft.) framework consisting of posts minimum of 4cm x
8cm (2in. x 4in.) set securely in the ground and
120cm (47in.) 9.6m (31ft.) extending at least 1m (39in.) above the ground
and with minimum 4cm x 8cm (2in. x 4in.) top
and bottom rail. Fence posts should be installed
no farther than 2.4m (8ft.) apart.
3.2.4. PROTECTIVE FENCING
7. Protective fencing shall be removed only when all
1. Physical protection barriers, silt fences, shade or erosion
construction is fully completed.
protection shall be erected at the edge of the critical
protection zones before clearing, grubbing, excavation,
grading, or any other sitework occurs in proximity. 3.2.5. RELOCATION OF EXISTING ELEMENTS

2. Physical protection barriers shall meet all applicable 1. Relocation or transplanting of elements should proceed
municipal bylaws and regulatory requirements. when conditions are favorable for success and prior to any
site construction, or, shall be scheduled to fit with other

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 29

site construction work such that the elements to be TABLE T-3.2. ROOT PRUNING
moved are protected as required by this section both
before and after relocation. Trunk Diameter (DBH) Distance from Trunk
2. Considerations for relocation of horticultural elements
include: Minimum Preferred

a. Plants should be relocated during their least

15.0cm (6in.) 1.2m (4ft.) 1.5m (5ft.)
active or dormant period. Reference Section 6,
Plants & planting, for more details on suitable
transplant periods. 22.5cm (9in.) 1.2m (4ft.) 1.5m (5ft.)

b. The growing medium should be irrigated to a 30.0cm (12in.) 1.2m (4ft.) 1.8m (6ft.)
depth of 50cm (20in.), 2 to 3 days prior to
digging. Do not saturate soil. 37.5cm (15in.) 1.5m (5ft.) 2.1m (7ft.)
c. Rootball size for relocating plants should be
determined based on such factors as soil type, 45.0cm (18in.) 1.8m (6ft.) 2.4m (8ft.)
species, size and condition.
52.5cm (21in.) 2.1m (7ft.) 2.7m (9ft.)
d. Rootball size for trees shall be determined by a
qualified professional. As a minimum, rootball
diameter should be 12 times the diameter of the 3.2.6. HANDLING AND STORAGE OF
trunk [or combined trunk diameters for HORTICULTURAL ELEMENTS
multi-stemmed trees], measured 1m (39in.) above
the existing undisturbed grade at the base of the 1. Reference Section 6, Plants & Planting.
tree.
3.2.7. PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT AND
e. Root pruning in advance of tree relocation is SITE ELEMENTS
recommended and should be scheduled for
dormant season whenever possible. Roots 1. Machinery
should be pruned to the depth of the proposed
excavation and 25cm (10in.) in from the line a. There shall be no parking, fueling or servicing of
of excavation. Thorough watering after root vehicles or equipment within or close to vegeta-
pruning is recommended. tion critical protection zones at any time through-
out demolition, site preparation and construction
f. After excavation, roots shall be cut cleanly with phases.
clean, sharp pruning tools.
b. Where large construction equipment is stationed
g. Once excavated, the rootball shall be kept moist for extended periods on a site, care should be
and the plant should be planted as per Section 6, taken to prevent damage to plants from heat
Plants & Planting or heeled in as soon as possible. from exhaust pipes.
The growing medium around roots shall be
watered to eliminate air pockets. c. There should be no passage of machinery of any
kind through or within vegetation/horticultural
h. Table T-3.2. Root pruning provides a guideline element protection areas at any time, including
for root pruning different tree sizes. the demolition and site preparation phases.

d. Where equipment travels or other activities occur

that are unavoidable within the critical protection
zones, measures shall be taken to protect the root
zone and minimize compaction as determined by

30 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

 the consultant, e.g. 30-45cm (12-18in.) of wood or within a predetermined minimum area unless
chips, bark mulch, or horticultural compaction otherwise specified by the consultant, qualified
mats. professional, and contractor.

2. Toxic chemicals and building materials 5. Trenching or tunneling

a. There shall be no storage of equipment or a. Tunneling [hydro excavation] rather than trench-
building materials, no dumping of fluids, chemi- ing should be considered when installing under-
cals and no disposal of construction debris within ground utilities and drainage lines to minimize
the vegetation/horticultural element critical damage to existing trees. Such work shall be
protection zones. planned and monitored by the consultant.

b. Appropriate measures shall be taken so that no b. Except as otherwise approved at the planning
spillage of fuels, toxic construction materials or stage and in the field by the consultant, there
other toxic wastes occurs. Where use of such shall be no trenching for drains or other services
materials is necessary, adequate containment through or within critical protection zones.
facilities and clean-up equipment shall be avail-
able and utilized. c. Where tunneling [hydro excavation] takes place
within the critical protection zones, it shall be
c. No toxic or waste materials shall be dumped into done as far away from the tree roots as possible.
water courses or any other water body either on
or off the job site. d. Where tunneling [hydro excavation] or trenching
has exposed the roots of a tree, roots shall be
d. No toxic materials, fertilizers, or fuels shall be protected and kept moist with wet burlap or peat
stored adjacent to water courses or in a location moss until the trench or tunnel can be filled.
where spillage could result in seepage into a
watercourse. e. Damaged or cut roots shall be cut cleanly with
pruning tools.
e. All toxic wastes and other construction material
shall be disposed of in a manner acceptable to the 6. Site drainage
owner and in accordance with municipal bylaws,
and provincial and federal regulation. a. There shall be no direct discharge of storm or site
drainage from construction areas through or into
3. Stockpiling vegetation/horticultural elements protection
areas, watercourses or ravines.
a. There shall be no stockpiling of soils, fill, sand,
gravel, or any construction materials within the b. All drainage water shall be filtered through
vegetation/horticultural element critical protec- acceptable sedimentation filtration systems
tion zones at any time during demolition, site before being discharged into the storm system,
preparation, and construction phases. or as stipulated by the authority having jurisdic-
tion. Measures such as retention ponds, siltation
b. Stockpiled soil or subsoil shall not be placed in low screens, and dikes shall be installed where
areas where natural drainage or stormwater could necessary to prevent rapid runoff into water-
pond or erode these materials during inclement courses as directed by a qualified professional or
weather. other governing authority.

4. Fires c. Prior to directing drainage to a storm system, the

consultant should determine if the system can
a. There shall be no fires of any kind, for any reason, handle the water volume.
within a distance equal to four times the drip-line
radius of the largest tree in the area of protection

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 31

7. Erosion controls j. Cover topsoil that has been piled for long term
storage with a suitable cover crop to maintain
a. Temporary erosion control measures shall be agricultural potential of soil.
provided to prevent excessive runoff to adjacent
sites, or watercourses, or where a soil or subsoil 3.2.8 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
erosion hazard exists.
1. Existing site elements shall always be protected during
b. Temporary measures may include silt [sediment clearing and grubbing operations.
control] fencing, mulching, diking, ponding, 2. Unusual or abnormal surface or subsurface conditions
terracing, or other means capable of reducing/ encountered on site during clearing and grubbing shall be
mitigating the effects of surface runoff. documented and reported immediately to the consultant.
8. Pruning 3. Cleared and grubbed materials shall be stockpiled
separately from growing medium stockpiles.
a. There shall be no cutting of branches or roots of
trees within critical protection zones at any time 4. Where noxious, undesirable weeds, or designated
without written approval from the consultant. invasive species are found on site, grubbed materials shall
be disposed of off-site as approved by the authority having
9. Soil stripping jurisdiction. These materials shall not be used as a constit-
uent of, or as a growing medium.
a. Soil stripping operations shall be carried out in 5. Stumps and visible surface roots shall be removed
such a manner as to avoid release of silt, or except where removal might adversely affect the health or
sediment into any stream or other water body. stability of a nearby tree or other preserved element that
has been identified for retention.
b. Soil stripping procedures are conducted in
accordance with applicable local/municipal 6. In natural areas, stumps and roots are an essential part
requirements. of the natural system, adding stability, nutrients, protec-
tion and habitat components to the site. Individual stumps
c. Strip topsoil prior to commencement of con- and roots shall be assessed by the consultant to determine
struction to avoid compaction of topsoil intended whether they should remain or be removed safely. Stumps
and standing dead wood may be required to be retained
for stripping and stockpiling.
for habitat or removed as in the case of termite protection
zones as per local bylaws. Decisions should be document-
d. Handle topsoil only when in dry and unfrozen
ed in writing and included in the project documents.
state.
7. Where stump removal is not recommended, the stump
e. Strip topsoil by scraping Horizon A [topsoil] to can be reduced by means of a mechanical stump grinder
depths determined by geotechnical report or as or retained as is, cut flush with the ground.
instructed.
3.2.9. PRUNING
f. Stockpile topsoil in berms in designated
location(s). 1. All pruning shall conform to ANSI A300 Tree Care
Operations - Tree, Shrub, and Other Woody Plant
Maintenance - Standard Practices.
g. Stockpiled height not to exceed 3 m.
2. Pruning prescriptions should be developed by a qualified
h. Protect stockpiles from contamination, erosion professional with extensive knowledge of the site, the
and compaction. species in question, preservation techniques and
objectives.
i. Cover topsoil that has been piled for temporary
storage with an environmental blanket or uni- 3. Risk reduction pruning shall be completed by or done
formly applied blown hay or straw. under the direction of a qualified professional.

32 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

4. Maintenance pruning during the site preparation 3.2.13. WATER AND IRRIGATION
stage shall consist of crown cleaning to remove all dead,
diseased, damaged, defected, and selective crossing 1. Water used for irrigation shall meet this Standard as
branches and shall be done by or under the direction of a outlined in Section 2.1.18. Water and Irrigation.
qualified professional.
2. Supplemental watering may be necessary during
5. Tree conditions not correctable by sound horticultural drought conditions or when an adequate site water source
pruning shall be identified and brought to the owner and/ is not available. Provide for available irrigation water
or consultant’s attention. source prior to construction.

3.2.10. CABLING AND BRACING 3. Horticultural elements whose root systems have
undergone disturbance shall be provided with supplemen-
1. The objectives of tree support systems should be tal water during dry weather periods.
defined prior to installation.
4. Plants with significant root removal should be moni-
2. Where required, mechanical support systems should be tored regularly for irrigation needs. In the absence of
used to provide supplementary support to leaders and precipitation, foliar and root watering shall be done as
individual limbs of trees to reduce risk and prolong tree determined by the consultant.
retention. This practice is generally limited to high value 5. Excessively compacted growing medium in the immedi-
individual specimens in high profile locations. All objec- ate area of plants should be aerated or scarified while
tives and recommendations for support systems shall be minimizing root damage and provided with supplemental
provided in writing by a qualified professional familiar with watering during periods of dry weather.
tree growth habits, weights, and wood strength and
included in project documents. 6. During demolition, site preparation, and construction
phases, irrigation lines should not be installed within the
3. Installation shall conform to ANSI A300 Tree Care critical protection zone but shall be designed to spray
Operations - Tree, Shrub, and Other Woody Plant water into the protection areas avoiding tree trunks.
Maintenance - Standard Practices.
7. Refer to Irrigation Association Landscape Irrigation Best
Management Practices May 2014, Water Quality
3.2.11. INSECT AND DISEASE CONTROL Assessment Table 1.
1. An integrated pest management [IPM] and plant health
care program should be developed to protect plants and 3.2.14. MAINTENANCE
trees which may have been weakened or stressed and
made susceptible to diseases and insects. 1. A qualified professional shall prescribe care and mainte-
nance for all trees. Should damage to protected trees
2. Horticultural elements impacted to any degree by occur the following maintenance guidelines should be
construction operations should be noted and monitored followed:
for changes. Instructions and maintenance procedures
developed should be included in project documents.
a. If the soil has become compacted over the root
3.2.12. INVASIVE SPECIES MANAGEMENT zone of any tree, the topsoil should be suitably
aerated.
1. Natural areas should be virtually free of invasive plant
species. Invasive plant species should be eradicated at the b. Damage to the crown, trunk, or root system of
time of construction. Depending on the extent, type and any tree shall be repaired immediately.
density of invasive plant cover, pre-planting treatments
shall be undertaken and may include removal, repeated c. Damaged roots shall be cleanly cut.
mowing during the growing season, and regulated herbi-
cide treatment. d. All tree limbs damaged during construction or
removed for any other reason shall be cut outside
2. Municipal bylaws or other regulations may dictate the branch collar or reduced to an appropriately
measures to be undertaken regarding control and eradica- sized lateral limb. 3.1 General requirements
tion of invasive species.
CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 33
GRADING & DRAINAGE
4.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4.1.4. SUBGRADES
4.1.1. PURPOSE STATEMENT AND INTENT 1. Subgrades are achieved through rough grading and
filling. Subgrading provides a smooth, solid base that will
1. Grading refers to shaping the land, providing suitable
allow for the placing of soil, growing medium or other
topography for buildings and other land use purposes, and
structures and materials to specified depths while meeting
directs surface runoff away from structures. It controls
the requirements of applicable building codes.
surface/stormwater run-off and shall be designed to
maximize drainage away from buildings and structures to 2. Finished subgrades or transitions of subgrade surfaces
minimize erosion, pollution, and sedimentation during and shall be free of irregular surface changes, debris and
after construction. foreign materials, and shall provide for growing medium
depths shown in Table T-5.3.5.5, Minimum depths of
4.1.2. RELATED REFERENCES, STANDARDS AND
growing media.
LEGISLATION
3. Relief of compacted subgrades via scarification should
1. Government occur before placement of growing media.
a. NMS Section 32 91 19.13 Topsoil placement
4. Grading should take place when soils are dry and when
and grading subgrade and soils are not frozen or saturated.
b. NMS Section 32 11 16.01 Granular sub-base 5. Permafrost in the active layer may cause issues in
achieving a smooth solid soil base.
c. NMS Section 32 14 13 Precast Concrete
Unit Paving 4.1.5. TOLERANCES

2. Industry 1. Tolerances for finish grades shall be specified in the

a. CSA and all related sections contract documents for hard and soft surface treatments.
Reference: Table T-4.2. Maximum and minimum gradients
for selected surface treatments
b. Certified Landscape Designer Landscape Design
Manual, current edition 2. Accuracy of subgrade elevations should be within the
tolerances shown in Table T-4.1, Tolerances for subgrade
4.1.3. GRADING elevations in soft landscape areas, unless otherwise
specified.
1. In this Standard, ‘grading’ refers to both the subgrade
and finish conditions.

TABLE T–4.1. TOLERANCES FOR SUBGRADE ELEVATIONS

IN SOFT LANDSCAPE AREAS

Condition Intended Growing Medium Depth Tolerance

(±1in.)
Within 3m 100-150mm (4-6in.) ±25mm ±25mm
(10ft.) from (±1in.)
fixed elevations 150-300mm 6-12in.) ±25mm
e.g. structures (±2Tin.)
300-600mm (12-24in.) ±50mm ±50mm

(±1in.)
Other Areas 100-150mm (4-6in.) ±25mm ±25mm
(±2in.)
150-300mm 6-12in.) ±50mm
(±2in.)
300-600mm (12-24in.) ±50mm ±50mm

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 35

4.1.6. GRADIENTS their reproductive parts and roots.

1. Gradients should be within the ranges shown in Table 3. Fill material shall be according to the Canadian National
T-4.2, Maximum and Minimum Gradients for Selected Surface Master Construction Specification or approved by a
Treatments, except where the consultant has called for geotechnical engineer.
variation from this Standard based on specific site condi- 4. Imported non-structural fill shall be clean, free from
tions. Gradients shall be sloped away from buildings as well turf, ash, debris, noxious weeds, roots larger than 75mm
as all existing and proposed structures. (3in.) maximum dimension, stones over 75mm (3in.) in
diameter, harmful chemicals, and harmful materials.
4.2. GRADING PRODUCTS Inspect and test growing medium as required. Reference
1. Fill materials shall not be toxic to plant and animal life Section 5.1.5, Testing and Section 5.2.3, Imported growing
either in part or in leachate concentration. media.

2. Fill materials should be free of invasive plants, including

TABLE T-4.2.
MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM GRADIENTS FOR SELECTED SURFACE TREATMENTS
LOCATION MINIMUM MAXIMUM
Lawn and grass 50:1 / 100:1 (1-2%) 3:1 (33.3%)
Grass swales [without additional erosion protection]
1 Slope along invert 100:1 (1%) 10:1 (10%)
2 Side slopes 6:1 (16.7%) 3:1 (33.3%)
Un-mown or native grass areas 100:1 (1%) 2:1* (50%)
Planted areas 50:1 (2%) 2:1* (50%) 3:1 preferred (33.3%)
Play fields ••
Conform to specifications and confirmed by legal survey
Building entries / exits 100:1 (1%) 50:1 (2%)
Paths and sidewalks
1 Longitudinal slope 100:1 (1%) 20:1 (5%)
2 Cross slopes 100:1 (1%) 50:1 (2%)
3 Accessibility ramps /w handrails•••
Plazas and open spaces hardscape 100:1 (1%) 40:1-20:1 (2.5-5%)
Patios and terraces 100:1 (1%) 50:1 (2%)

• Varies with soil types and cut vs. fill: varies with the use of other stabilizing procedures and maintenance expectations.
•• Minimum grades below 1% permitted with appropriate sub-surface drainage system.
••• Shall conform to local building code and accessibility legislation / guidelines

Note: Requires surface erosion protection at the time of planting and turf installation or seeding procedures
at 50% slope.

Reference Section 4.6.4, Open and Earthen Channels

36 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

5. Fill shall not be shipped, placed or graded in a wet, removed.
frozen or saturated state.
4. To achieve stability, fill materials shall be placed in lifts
of 150mm (6in.), compacting each layer to 80 – 85
4.3. GRADING EXECUTION percent standard Proctor density.
4.3.1. GENERAL 5. Areas showing excessive compaction shall be scarified
to a minimum depth of 150mm (6in.) and compacted to
1. Verify location and depth of bury for all underground 80 – 85 percent standard Proctor density.
services lines and utilities, whether or not shown on
drawings. 4.3.3. SUBGRADE – HARD LANDSCAPING
2. The grading plan shall be used to delineate elevations 1. The subgrade shall be prepared to a consistent standard
and drainage patterns. The plan shall show site boundaries, Proctor density of no less than 95 percent as required by
proposed elevations, existing landform contours or grid the drawings.
spot elevations, benchmarks to indicate base elevations,
existing site features and proposed structures. Gradient 2. To achieve stability, fill materials shall be placed in lifts
between contour lines is consistent unless otherwise of 150mm (6in.), compacting each layer to no less than 95
indicated with a spot elevation. When contour lines are percent standard Proctor density.
shown, indicate slope percentages. Where grade change
occurs, use arrows. Execution of grading should be 3. Soft and unstable areas below sub-grade as deemed by
evaluated and verified by a landscape architect or licensed the geotechnical report shall be excavated and filled with
surveyor. suitable fill material, except in locations where special
environmental conditions or alternate solutions have been
3. Gradients should be within the ranges shown in identified. In such cases, appropriate alternate solutions
Table T-4.2, Maximum and minimum gradients for selected shall be approved by the consultant and carried out.
treatments, except where the consultant has called for
variation from this Standard based on site conditions. 4.3.4. FINISH GRADE – SOFT LANDSCAPING

4. Use a geo-technical soil report to inform the needs 1. Placement and finish grading of growing medium shall
based on site conditions [weather and temperature]. be as outlined in Section 5, Growing Medium.

5. Sub-grading and finish grading should not be 2. The growing medium shall be fine graded after
undertaken when the soil surface is wet or frozen. placement to final elevations and shall conform to finished
grade elevations and contours shown on the approved
6. Grading should take place when conditions are optimal grading or landscape plan.
to prevent damage to the soil structure.
3. Rough spots and low areas shall be eliminated to
4.3.2. SUBGRADE – SOFT LANDSCAPING provide positive surface drainage, allowing for water
runoff away from buildings and structures, and preventing
1. The subgrade for “soft” landscape areas shall be depressions and subsequent settling or irregularities.
prepared to a consistent standard Proctor density of
not less than 80 percent and no more than 90 percent. 4. The surface shall be finished to be smooth and uniform,
firm against deep footprinting with a fine loose surface
2. Soft and unstable areas below subgrade that cannot be texture and free of debris and other material that would
compacted to 80 – 85 percent standard Proctor density be detrimental to healthy plant growth.
shall be excavated and filled with suitable fill material,
except in locations where special environmental 5. Finished grades shall be correct in relation to the
conditions have been identified. In such cases, appropriate building facade, preserved elements, and as set out in
alternate solutions shall be approved by the consultant applicable municipal building codes, best practices or
and carried out. specifications.

3. Debris, roots, branches, stones, building material, 6. Correct any irregularities caused by work operations
contaminated subsoil, visible or noxious invasive plants, over the finished grade.
and other material that may interfere with the growth and
construction of the planned, finished landscape shall be 7. Protect the finished grade.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 37

4.4. DRAINAGE GENERAL suspended materials shall not be drained or pumped
directly into waterways, wetlands, sewer or drainage
4.4.1. PURPOSE STATEMENT AND INTENT systems.
1. Surface and subsurface drainage provides a system for 7. Appropriate measures shall be taken to provide
the collection, treatment and disposal of surface, and temporary erosion and sedimentation control to prevent
subsurface water. soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff
or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
2. This section includes standards for products and Temporary erosion and sedimentation control shall meet
execution for work occurring within soft and hard land- the requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction,
scaped areas within the site of work. sediment and erosion control drawings, and sediment and
erosion control plans, specific to site.
3. The basis for the design will generally be derived from
the geotechnical design report. This report will include 8. Appropriate measures and installations shall be made
findings on subsurface conditions and recommendations. off-site and as part of the “hard” construction to ensure
that the objectives of this section can be met.
4.4.2. DRAINAGE

1. Surface and subsurface drainage systems shall be 4.5. DRAINAGE PRODUCTS

designed to appropriately intercept, collect, conduct and 4.5.1. RIGID PLASTIC PIPE
manage stormwater run-off and subsurface water. The
basis for the design should be derived from a geotechnical 1. Shall be PVC or polyethylene conforming to the current
report as required. This report generally includes informa- edition of the [CSA] B1800 Series Thermoplastic
tion on subsurface soil conditions, and design Nonpressure Piping Compendium.
recommendations.
4.5.2. OTHER PIPING MATERIALS
2. Drainage systems shall be designed and sized to meet
established criteria. They shall take into consideration the 1. Flexible plastic pipe, clay pipe, and concrete pipe shall be
site’s projected precipitation, infiltration, and flow rates, durable standard products.
and the potential for large fluctuations in groundwater
levels, tidal waters and freshet levels where necessary. 4.5.3. DRAIN ROCK
The basis for the design should be derived from
1. Drain rock shall be clean, round or fractured, inert, and
consultation with municipal drainage engineers, review of
durable, and shall have a maximum size of 50mm (2in.) and
lot grading plans and/or geotechnical reports.
contain no material finer than 10mm (0.4in.).
3. Drainage systems shall be designed to protect struc-
4.5.4. FILTER FABRIC/SOIL SEPARATOR
tures, site elements, and improvements. Drainage systems
shall also be designed to prevent flooding and erosion. 1. Filter fabric is a non-biodegradable blanket or other
filtering membrane that permits the flow of water but not
4. Design and installation of drainage systems shall meet
fine particles. It can be used to separate the growing
the requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction,
medium from drain rock and shall be specified to meet the
and this Standard.
strength, durability and permeability requirements of each
5. Where storm drainage is concentrated, permanently application.
installed facilities such as wet or dry stormwater retention
2. An envelope material or filter sock material, suitable for
ponds, wetlands or infiltration swales or other low impact
permanent underground use, should completely surround
landscape design practices /approaches shall be provided
the drain or pipe to prevent particle movement into the
in order to prevent erosion, flooding on the site or on
drain.
adjacent properties. Storm drainage facilities, practices
and approaches shall be maintained. 4.5.5. DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
6. Appropriate measures shall be taken prior to, and 1. Silt traps, culverts, area drains, sumps, and catch basins
throughout construction, to prevent siltation of existing shall be located and designed to achieve the intent set out
drainage systems and water courses. Water containing in Section 4.4.1, Purpose Statement and Intent.

38 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

4.5.6. RODENT SCREENS 4. Channel side slopes steeper than 2:1 (50 percent) shall
be designed as structural retaining walls by an engineer
1. Rodent screen openings should not exceed 6mm with provisions for live and dead surcharge load.
(0.25in.) and should be fabricated with hardware cloth or
zinc coated steel wire fabric. 4.6.5. DRAINAGE PIPE

4.6. DRAINAGE EXECUTION 1. Drainage pipe shall be installed with a constant grade to
drains, have smooth transitions, and all appropriate fittings
4.6.1. DURING CONSTRUCTION provisions shall be according to the manufacturers’ recommendations.
made for:
2. Cleanout risers shall be installed where junctions, grade
1. Appropriate water management and drainage of the or direction changes may cause siltation within drain lines.
site, which may include silt traps, erosion control mea-
sures, temporary water collection ditches and any other 3. Connections at sumps or catch basins shall be made by
measures required by the local authority. breaking out at the correct elevation and patching around
the pipe to make a watertight, durable seal. In the case of
2. Maintaining site water management and drainage plastic or similar catch basins, they are to be sealed
systems. according to manufacturers’ specifications.
4.6.2. PIPES AND SECONDARY PIPE DRAINS 4. The method of installation shall be compatible with the
drainage system design, manufacturer materials recom-
1. Pipe drains shall be installed when collected surface mendations and the existing soil conditions.
water flowing in swales may cause erosion of landscaped
areas, or when water flow may interfere with pedestrian or 5. Drainage pipe shall be installed on bedding material to
vehicular traffic, or when volume collected becomes the current edition of [CSA] B1800 Series Thermoplastic
excessive. Secondary pipe drains shall be of adequate size Nonpressure Piping Compendium.
from minor runoff concentration points and shall be
connected to appropriate disposal or dispersal/distribution 6. Pipes shall be laid to a true line and gradient. Pipes are
lines as required. not to be laid on soil backfill or in slurry and are to be
securely positioned to avoid displacement before
4.6.3. DRAINAGE SWALES AND GUTTERS backfilling the trench.
1. Paved gutters shall have a minimum grade 7. The inside of the drainpipe shall be kept clean and free
of 200:1 (0.5 percent). of debris throughout construction. All soil and debris
should be removed before additional pipe is laid.
2. Paved gutters and unpaved drainage swales shall have
adequate depth and width to accommodate the maximum 8. Perforated drainage pipes shall have the required cover
foreseeable runoff without overflow. of drain rock and filter fabric if applicable. Drainage pipe
shall be installed on bedding material to the current
3. Swales and gutters shall be stabilized through seeding, edition of [CSA] B1800 Series Thermoplastic Nonpressure
sodding, sprigging, mulching or paving as required to Piping Compendium.
minimize potential erosion.
9. Drainage pipes shall have the required cover of drain
4.6.4. OPEN AND EARTHEN CHANNELS rock and filter fabric as identified in specifications or as
recommended based on soil analysis.
1. Channels shall be protected from erosion by installing
appropriate vegetative covers, lining, or utilizing other 10. Lateral drainpipes shall connect with main drainpipes
appropriate treatments. so that their centre lines intersect.
2. Earthen channel side slopes shall have a gradient 11. Manufactured fittings shall be compatible with the pipe
designed to avoid erosion and shall not exceed used and installed per manufacturer’s recommendations
2:1 (50 percent) unless designed by a qualified engineer. at all connections and junctions.
3. Open channels with lining shall have a maximum 12. Each connection shall be made with a specially manu-
gradient on side slopes of 1.5:1 (67 percent), with adequate factured connector, except when silt traps and inspection
provisions for weep-hole drainage. holes are provided at the location.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 39

13. Connections at sumps or catch basins shall be made 6. Crushed stone or other material which may be
and sealed according to the manufacturers’ specifications. cementitious or is not suitable for water percolation shall
not be used.
14. Backflow preventers shall be installed in areas affected
by tidal water and freshet.

4.6.6. OVER STRUCTURES

1. Drainage for landscape over structures shall be designed

to adequately drain the planting medium.

2. Appropriate products, such as protection board, shall be

used to adequately protect underlying surfaces and
waterproofing layers where drainage materials and soil are
to be installed.

3. Installation procedures shall be such that protection

materials are maintained in their intended position.

4. Where drain rock is installed under growing medium,

it shall be to a minimum depth of 100mm (4in.) and the
surface shall be completely covered with filter fabric.
Filter fabric shall be overlapped a minimum of 150mm
(6in.) and fitted tightly around drains and other features.

5. Access by way of capped cleanout risers or other

appropriate structures shall be provided to all drains in
planting areas for purposes of inspection and
maintenance.

4.6.7. BACKFILLING

1. Minimum cover for main drains shall be according to

engineer’s recommendations with consideration of local
frost depth.

2. Drainpipes / tubing shall be blinded with approved

backfill / bedding material, immediately after installation
to hold it in alignment and provide protection to the pipe
during backfilling.

3. Trenches shall be carefully backfilled with excavated

material placed in such a way that the pipes are not
damaged or displaced. Stones should not contact the
drainpipe.

4. Fill shall be firmly placed but not compacted to the

point of preventing the passage of water to the pipe.

5. Aggregates and backfill shall be free of snow or ice,

frozen materials, trash, brick, clay lumps, broken concrete,
tree roots, sod, ash, cinder, glass, plaster, vegetative
material, and any other foreign matter.

40 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

GROWING MEDIUM
5.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2. Growing media should be certified as to its origin.

5.1.1. PURPOSE STATEMENT AND INTENT 3. Growing media shall be substantially free of plants or
their roots, building materials, invasive or noxious plants
1. The Standard sets out a range of measurable physical and their reproductive parts, non-composted wood,
and chemical properties as being acceptable in growing wood waste, insect pests, plant pathogenic organisms,
media applications in the installation of plants including ice, chemical pollutants or substances at levels toxic to
turf/sod. Geography will impact the composition of the plants, and other extraneous materials that detract from
growing medium. Specification of growing media shall the desirable physical and chemical properties required
take into account a variety of maintenance requirements. for landscaping purposes.
2. The consultant assigned to the project shall review the 4. Following installation of growing media, it should be
proposed growing medium as the selection of the growing tested , prior to the addition of plants to confirm compli-
medium should respond to regional climatic and ance with the specification and standard and to verify that
geographic conditions, and to the demands of the there have been no significant changes to the growing
proposed planting. medium after the original pile testing, that would result in
poor plant performance or plant toxicity.
5.1.2. RELATED REFERENCES, STANDARDS
AND LEGISLATION 5. Growing media with excessive weed and invasive plant
growth [as identified in Section 9, Landscape Maintenance]
1. Government during the first year may be an indication that
unacceptable levels of invasive plant seeds or parts were
a. NMS Section 32 91 19.13 Topsoil Placement and
present in the growing medium at the time of installation.
Grading
6. Soils to be restored or amended for use as growing
b. NMS Section 32 91 19.16 Topsoil Placement for
media shall be tested, assessed, and recommendations
Vegetated Roofs
made by a qualified professional. If restored or amended
2. Industry soil is to be used as growing media, then a qualified
professional shall confirm that it complies with the
a. Agriculture and Agri-Food Canada website: The specification and standard.
Canadian System of Soil Classification, current
edition 5.1.4. QUALITY OF WORK

b. Canadian Association for Laboratory 1. Quality of work is reflected in compliance with this
Accreditation Inc., “CALA Guide to Current Standard through the testing and utilization of growing
Sampling Practices” April 2, 2014 media with the properties as set out in Tables T- 5.3.5.2.,
T-5.3.5.3. and T-5.3.5.4. or the specification.
c. Canadian Council of Ministers of the
Environment, CCME Guidelines for Compost 5.1.5. TESTING
Quality, 2005
1. Growing media testing shall be conducted by a
d. Compost Council of Canada commercial laboratory that is accredited by CSA/ASTM
International/CALA [Canadian Association for Laboratory
e. Certified Landscape Designer Landscape Design Accreditation Inc.].
Manual, current edition
2. On-site soils should be tested before the landscape
5.1.3. GROWING MEDIUM work is tendered to establish suitability. Copies of test
results and required modification reports should be
1. Growing media consists of any on-site or imported soil, included in the bid documents.
soil substitute, or mixture whose chemical and physical
properties fall within the ranges set out by this Standard or 3. Imported or on-site soil or subsoil to be used as growing
by specification for identified application and maintenance medium on a site shall be tested and amended as required
level as per Section 9, Landscape Maintenance. by specification through the admixture of other organic or

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 41

non-organic components to bring its properties within the a. Level 1 “Well-Groomed”
ranges set in this section and Tables T-5.3.5.2., T-5.3.5.3. b. Level 2 “Groomed”
and T-5.3.5.4. for the intended application and mainte-
nance level prior to landscape work commencing on the c. Level 3 “Moderate”
site. d. Level 4 “Open Space/Play”
4. Where imported growing media is to be used, the e. Level 5 “Background & Natural”
contractor shall test, or have the soil supplier test, the f. Level 6 “Service & Industrial”
proposed growing medium. The cost for required modifi-
cations should be included in the price for the work. 3. Growing medium applications are:
5. Failure to test and provide proof documentation of test a. Low traffic lawn areas, trees and large shrubs.
results should be considered grounds for rejection of a
proposed growing medium and should result in the b. High traffic lawn areas, having regular pedestrian
removal of rejected material at the contractor’s expense. traffic. This growing medium has relatively high
structural strength but will require more care due
6. Where this Standard is adopted as part of a landscape to lower water and nutrient holding capacity.
contract, or where the contract requires testing of the c. Planting areas such as for shrub, perennial, and
growing medium and its components, the contractor shall ground cover areas. This growing medium is
meet all requirements of this section, or the correspond- similar to that for low traffic lawn areas but has
ing requirements of the contract. higher organic content and slightly lower pH
achieved by adding suitable peat or compost to a
7. The contractor’s signature to the contract shall signify
growing medium for low traffic lawn areas.
that the contractor has read and fully understands the
requirements for the growing medium and testing with d. Natural areas to be planted or replanted with
respect to chemical and physical properties including predominantly native non-invasive plants. The
texture, nutrient value, mineral and organic content, and growing medium can be on-site soil or imported
invasive plant [roots, rhizomes, seeds] content. growing media modified for native plant growth
or it may be similar to Table T-5.3.5.4. Properties
8. Qualified professionals shall verify the soil sampling of growing media for Level 4 “Open Space/Play”,
methodology with the laboratory prior to taking the Level 5 “Background and Natural”, and Level 6
samples. “Service & Industrial” areas, type 3P. A qualified
landscape professional should be consulted.
9. Qualified professionals shall conduct sampling of site
soils and/or growing media according to the accredited
commercial laboratory and the “CALA Guide to Current 5.2. PRODUCTS
Sampling Practices” April 2, 2014.
5.2.1. ON-SITE [PRESERVED} TOPSOIL
10. The contractor shall take reasonable precautions so
that the soil /growing medium submitted for laboratory Topsoil shall meet the requirements as set out in
testing is representative of the product delivered to/on this section.
the site and abide by the laboratory’s sampling technical
requirements. 1. Use of on-site topsoil is encouraged when it meets this
Standard for imported soil or can be modified to meet the
5.1.6. VARIATIONS IN MAINTENANCE LEVELS AND requirements as set out for growing media.
APPLICATIONS
2. On-site topsoil shall be defined as the existing “A”
1. Growing media vary in type. Their properties are horizon that complies with, or can be amended to comply
described in this Standard for a variety of maintenance with, the specification in Tables T- 5.3.5.2., T-5.3.5.3. and
levels and applications within each site. T-5.3.5.4.

2. Maintenance levels are as described in detail in 3. All site areas designated for paving or the construction
Section 9, Landscape Maintenance and reflect varying of structures shall be stripped of all topsoil to its full depth
objectives, appearance standards and maintenance taking care not to mix topsoil with subsoil.
practices appropriate to various sites or parts of sites and
are as follows:
42 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020
4. Stripping of topsoil shall be commenced only after the 5.2.4. SOILLESS MEDIA
area has been cleared of all scrub, plants, invasive and
noxious plants including their reproductive parts, grass, 1. Most container production uses specially prepared
stumps, rocks 50mm (2in.) and over, other extraneous growing media called soilless media or potting soils, which
organic and non-organic materials and containments. are comprised of various organic and inorganic growing
Reference Section 3.2.7.9. Soil Stripping. medium amendments.

5. Where testing shows topsoil is suitable for use in its 2. An effective soilless medium should be:
present condition or as a component of a growing
medium, it shall be stockpiled where shown on drawings a. Porous and well drained, and able to retain
or in areas designated for stockpiling according to sufficient moisture requirements of plants
construction planning and scheduling. Stockpiling areas between watering.
shall be protected from adverse weather conditions or b. Relatively low in soluble salts.
contamination.
c. Standardized and uniform to enable the use of
6. Topsoil shall have a pH range of pH 5.5-7.5 and contain standardized fertilization and irrigation programs
not less than 2 percent Organic Matter [OM] by weight. for each successive crop.
Reference Section 5.2.7. Growing Medium Nutrients. d. Free from harmful soil pests, pathogenic organ-
isms, chemical pollutants, nematodes and weed
7. Topsoil shall have a salt conductivity of seeds.
less than 2.5 dS/m.
e. Biologically and chemically stable following
5.2.2. ON-SITE SUBSOIL pasteurization.

1. On-site subsoil may be considered for use based on 3. Soilless media shall meet the requirements of the
nutrient value test results, acceptability of soil structure, intended planting and be as specified by a qualified
and availability of organic amendments. The amended professional.
growing medium shall be tested to confirm suitability prior
to placement. 5.2.5. SOIL AMENDMENTS

2. On-site subsoil shall be maintained free of scrub, plants, 1. Soil amendments shall be virtually free from subsoil,
and invasive and noxious species, grass, ice, and other sawdust, commercial wood products, stones, lumps,
extraneous organic and non-organic materials and toxins plants, roots, sticks, invasive and noxious plant parts and
and shall meet the nutrient requirements as identified in seeds, chemical contaminants and other organic or
Section 5.2.7. Growing Medium Nutrients. inorganic materials harmful to plant life.

5.2.3. IMPORTED GROWING MEDIA 2. Organic content shall be:

1. Growing media shall be from a source approved by the a. Within the weight percentage ranges shown in
authority. Tables T-5.3.5.2., T-5.3.5.3. and T-5.3.5.4. for the
intended applications when required.
2. Growing media shall satisfy the requirements for b. Submitted in the form of a 1 litre sample for
texture and organic matter as specified in Tables T-5.3.5.2., analysis and testing for the presence of invasive
T-5.3.5.3. and T-5.3.5.4. plant seeds, reproductive parts and roots.
3. Growing media shall be virtually free from subsoil, wood c. Determined, based on testing results and on
particles not previously composted, invasive and noxious recommendations from the soil testing
plant parts or seeds, known plant pathogenic organisms, laboratory.
toxins, stones over 30mm (1.2in.), or any other debris. d. Met by mixing growing components or by
4. Growing media shall meet the nutrient levels as identi- topdressing existing soils with an approved type
fied in Section 5.2.7. Growing Medium Nutrients. of organic matter and tilling into the top
150mm (6in.) of soil.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 43

3. Peat moss shall be: 7. Uncomposted wood residuals [wood chips, bark,
sawdust and ground green wood] shall:
a. Of horticultural grade sphagnum mosses.
b Medium to coarse shredded with a texture a. Not make up more than 40 percent of the
varying from porous to spongy fibrous, fairly organic content of any growing media.
elastic and substantially homogeneous. b. Have an appropriate fertilizer application, ap-
c. Between the pH range of 3.5 to 6.5. proved by a qualified professional, that can
provide for a range of decomposition levels and
deal with nutrient fluxes and other soil physical
4. Manure shall be: issues [air and water movement].
c. Have appropriate subgrade drainage.
a. Farm animal manure or mushroom manure.
d. Have been approved by the consultant.
b. Rotted to the extent that the material is crumbly.
8. Well-rotted wood residuals when found to be a compo-
c. Virtually free from weed and invasive plants and
nent of compost, animal manure or mushroom manure are
their seeds and reproductive parts, coliform
acceptable provided the total carbon to total nitrogen
pathogens, rocks, sticks and rubble.
ratio for the growing medium shall not exceed 40:1.
d. Not more than 40 percent sawdust, straw or
shavings. 5.2.6. INORGANIC COMPONENTS AND
AMENDMENTS
e. A growing medium amendment not exceeding
a 40:1 total carbon to nitrogen ratio. 1. Sand shall be:
f. Leached, as required, of excess water-soluble salts
to a level of 3.0 dS/m (3.0mmho/cm) or less, a. Washed concrete sand, clean river pump sand or a
with fresh water from irrigation or precipitation locally available equivalent
prior to planting. b. Free from impurities, chemical or organic matter.
c. Of a particle size such that:
5. Commercially prepared compost shall: i. 95-100% passes a USBS No. 4 (4.76mm)
standard sieve
a. Be substantially free from all viable weed and
invasive plants including their seeds and other ii. 0-40% passes a USBS No. 35 (0.5mm)
plant reproductive parts, coliform, pathogens, standard sieve
and chemical or organic contaminants that may
be detrimental to plant or animal health. iii. 0-5% [fines] passes a USBS No. 270
b. Contain less than 0.5 percent by volume of (0.053mm) standard sieve
contaminants such as rocks, plastic, metal or
glass. 2. Perlite: perlite is a siliceous mineral of volcanic origin
c. Be a growing medium not more than 25:1 total and is a commonly used component in soilless growing
carbon to nitrogen ratio; with a pH between media. It is generally included to improve drainage and
7.0-8.4. A Solvita test result between 6-8 is ideal aeration. Perlite is chemically inert, pH neutral, weed free,
for plant health. light- weight, sterile and odourless.
d. Be leached, as required, of excess water-soluble 3. Vermiculite: vermiculite is mined as a mineral named
salts to a level of 3.0 milliohms/cm or less, with hydrated laminar magnesium- aluminum-iron silicate.
fresh water from irrigation or precipitation prior When heated the mineral exfoliates and expands
to planting. producing high water holding capacity and excellent
exchange and buffering capacities.
6. Municipal sewage sludge shall be approved by the
municipal pollution prevention unit.

44 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

4. Fertilizers 6. Total nitrogen shall be 0.2 percent to 0.6 percent by
weight.
a. Types, formulations, and rates of application
of fertilizers and liming agents shall be as 7. Available phosphorus shall be 20 to 250ppm.
recommended by a laboratory soil specialist and
based on test results of the growing medium 8. Available potassium shall be 50 to 1000ppm.
b. Fertilizers shall be approved by the consultant 9. Carbon to nitrogen ratio shall not exceed 40:1.
based on testing results and to specification for
the project 10. pH range shall be within that shown in Table T-5.3.5.2.,
T-5.3.5.3. and T- 5.3.5.4. for the intended maintenance level
c. Substitutions or variations in fertilizers and
and application.
methods shall be made only upon pre-approval by
the consultant 11. Texture: particle sizes and proportions of each size
d. Fertilizers shall meet the requirements of particle shall be within the ranges shown in Table T-5.3.5.2.,
municipal and provincial regulations and the T-5.3.5.3. and T-5.3.5.4. for the intended maintenance level
Federal Fertilizers Act, be in granular, pellet and application.
or pill form, dry and free flowing and have a
guaranteed N-P-K analysis 5.2.8. DRAINAGE OF GROWING MEDIUM
e. Fertilizers shall be packed in standard waterproof 1. Drainage of growing media shall be measured only after
containers and clearly marked with the name the growing medium is in place.
of the manufacturer, weight and analysis
2. Mixing and handling of growing media shall be complet-
f. Fertilizers shall be stored in a dry and weather-
ed in such a manner that the minimum drainage character-
proof storage location to prevent impairment
istics shown in Table T-5.3.5.2., T-5.3.5.3. and T-5.3.5.4. are
of performance
achieved.
g. Receipts and empty bags should be retained
for review by the consultant as verification of
application of specified fertilizer 5.2.9. ENGINEERED SOIL

1. Engineered soil is a designed matrix of gap-graded

5.2.7. GROWING MEDIUM NUTRIENTS aggregate, growing media and stabilizing agent in a
homogeneous mixture.

1. Growing media shall require not more than 0.5kg/m² 2. Engineered soil provides load bearing support for paved
(0.10lb./ft.2) of dolomite lime to reach the required pH surfaces and predictable sized growing media-filled voids.
level. The voids provide rapid drainage, air infiltration and pore
space for tree root development. The aggregate is clean,
2. Fertility [nitrogen, phosphorus and potassium] and pH inert blasted quarry rock or alternative, accepted by the
may be modified either during mixing and screening, or consultant. For each project where engineered soil is
after the growing medium is placed. specified, provide a job specific description of the included
work, the growing medium, aggregate and soil stabilizer.
3. Salinity - the saturation extract conductivity shall not
exceed 3.0 dS/m (3.0mmho/cm), Nitrogen: 20-40 5.3. EXECUTION
micrograms/g soil, Phosphate: 40 - 50 micrograms/g soil,
Potassium: 75 - 110 micrograms /g soil at 25°C (77F°). If 5.3.1. GROWING MEDIUM
higher, it shall be leached with fresh water through
irrigation or precipitation prior to planting. 1. Prior to on-site delivery, a representative sample of the
growing medium and current test results should be made
4. Boron - the concentration in the saturation extract shall available to the consultant.
not exceed 1.0ppm.
2. Commercial processing and mixing of growing media
5. Sodium - the sodium adsorption ratio [SAR], {which components shall be done thoroughly by a mechanized
describes the proportion of sodium to calcium and screening process.
magnesium in soil solution as calculated by analysis of the
saturation extract} shall not exceed 8.0. 3. Growing media shall not be hand mixed.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 45

4. Processed and mixed growing media shall be a 2. Compacted subgrades shall be scarified to a minimum
homogeneous mixture. depth of 150mm (6in.) immediately before placing the
growing medium.
5. Where blending on site is approved trucks, equipment
and machinery shall be cleaned prior to use and arrival on 3. Table T-5.3.5.5. sets out the minimum depths of
site. growing media, after settlement, for various types
of subgrade application.
6. Peat moss shall not be allowed to dry, and at the time of
mixing shall not have a moisture level less than 60 to 75 4. Growing media shall be placed and spread with suitable
percent making it able to form and hold a ball shape when equipment and in a manner that does not adversely affect
squeezed and released. its structure.

7. Growing media shall be moist but not wet when placed. 5. Placed growing media shall be allowed to settle or shall
be compacted by light rolling such that it is firm against
8. Growing media shall not be handled or placed when deep footprints prior to planting. Compaction shall not be
excessively wet or frozen. more than is necessary to meet this requirement.
9. Growing media in restoration sites shall be handled in 6. For growing media depths greater than 300mm (12in.),
a way that is suitable for the application and should be place at no greater than 150mm (6in.) lifts and compact
detailed in the contract documents by a qualified with a suitably weighted landscape roller where applicable.
professional or authority. Landscape rollers are not recommended for naturalization
areas as microtopography is recommended. Mechanical
10. Aquatic soils should be specified and amended in compactors including plate compactors are not
consultation with a qualified professional. permitted.
5.3.2. DELIVERY AND STOCKPILING OF 7. Placement of growing media on restoration sites should
GROWING MEDIUM be detailed in the landscape documents by the consultant.
1. Efforts should be made so that the growing medium is 8. Maximum depths of homogeneous layers of soil shall
not contaminated prior to and during delivery, or while not exceed 500mm (20in.). The soil profile shall be
stockpiled on site. reconstructed in gradated layers that contain A, B,
2. Efforts should be made to have the growing medium and C profiles to eliminate homogeneous soils
delivered on the day of installation. and mimic naturally occurring soils.

3. A storage area shall be designated and prepared prior to 9. Abrupt changes in soil composition between A, B, and
delivery. C profiles shall be avoided so that hydraulic conductivity
between layers is maintained.
4. All growing media delivered to the site and not
immediately used shall: 5.3.4. FERTILIZERS

a. Be placed on a clean tarpaulin, clean asphalt, 1. Fertilizers shall be added to bring the growing medium
or clean concrete pad. fertility within the ranges set out in Section 5.2.7. Growing
Medium Nutrients and in amounts as recommended by
b. Be covered with a clean tarpaulin for protection testing results.
from rain, debris and weed or invasive plant
contamination. 2. Fertilizers shall be spread evenly over the placed
growing medium with a suitable mechanical spreader, then
5.3.3. PLACING GROWING MEDIUM cultivated or raked into the medium to a minimum depth
of 50mm (2in.).
1. Growing media shall only be placed over subgrades
prepared to this Standard. Subgrades shall be examined 3. There should be a minimum of at least 3 weeks
for any variation from the requirements of Section 4.1.4. separation between the application of soil amendments
Subgrades, and repaired prior to placing growing media. and fertilizers, or as specified by qualified professional and
Any discrepancies shall be reported to the authority and testing results.
corrected before placing the growing medium.

46 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

4. Soil amendments should be added to the growing
medium at the time of screening or cultivated into the top
100mm (4in.) of growing medium after it is in place, as
specified by a qualified professional and testing results.

5. Restoration site fertilizers.

a. Fertilizer requirement specification shall depend

on the intent of the site, growing media, and
types of plants.
b. As many of these sites are environmentally
sensitive, fertilization should only be undertaken
in consultation with a qualified professional.

5.3.5. USE OF TABLES

1. The following tables illustrate an acceptable range of

growing media components. Each region of Canada will
have different growing media available, dependent on
local/native soils and market availability. All finished
growing media will meet specification and support
specified landscape performance and plant health.

2. Growing medium type designations may be used

in specifying various growing media or in noting their
specific locations on drawings.

3. Table T-5.3.5.1. provides a summary of growing

medium type designations relative to maintenance
levels and applications types.

4. Tables T-5.3.5.2., T-5.3.5.3. and T-5.3.5.4. outline proper-

ties of growing media and its intended uses. The consul-
tant shall be responsible for the specification of soil
properties If no specific reference is provided in the
contract documents, use Table T-5.3.5.3.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 47

TABLE T-5.3.5.1. SUMMARY OF GROWING MEDIA TYPE DESIGNATIONS

For Level 1 “Well-Groomed” Areas:

Low Traffic Lawn
Applications: Areas Trees & High Traffic lawn Areas Planting Areas
Large Shrubs
Growing Medium Type
1L 1H 1P
Designations:
For Level 2 “Groomed” and Level 3 “Moderate” Areas:
All Lawn Areas, Trees
Applications: High Traffic lawn Areas Planting Areas
& Large Shrubs
Growing Medium Type
1L 2H 2P
Designations:
For Level 4 “Open Space/Play”, Level 5 “Background & Natural” and Level 6 “Service & Industrial” Areas:
Applications:
Growing Medium Type
3L 3P
Designations:
For Level 7 “Restoration and Level 8 “Aquatic” Areas:
Applications: All planting Areas

Growing Medium Type

4P (restoration) 4P (aquatic)
Designations:

NOTE: Growing Medium details for Types 4P (restoration) and 4P (aquatic) are not available for this edition. Special
requirements for these types should be specified in the contract documents.

48 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

TABLE T-5.3.5.2. PROPERTIES OF GROWING MEDIA
FOR LEVEL 1 “WELL-GROOMED” AREAS

LEVEL 1 Areas: Intensive, high standard of maintenance is anticipated. Irrigation is necessary in all
Level 1 Areas and areas that are “on-slab” or under cover. The textural classification for these
growing media by the Canadian system of soil classification is “sand” to “loamy sand”. Plant selection,
irrigation requirements and maintenance intensity should consistently respond to the exceptional
nature of the growing medium.

Note: Trees and large shrub areas may also have Type 1L growing medium.

Growing Medium Types: 1L 1H 1P

Low traffic Lawn Areas

Applications: High Traffic Lawn Areas Planting Areas
Trees & Large Shrubs

Texture: Percent of Dry Weight of Total Growing Med

Coarse Gravel:
•Larger than 19mm 0 – 1% 0 – 1% 0 – 1%
•Smaller than 40mm

All Gravel:
•Larger than 2mm 0 – 5% 0 – 5% 0 – 5%
•Smaller than 40mm

Percent of Dry Weight of Growing Medium Excluding Gravel

Sand:
•Larger than 0.05mm 50 – 70% 70 – 90% 50 – 70%
•Smaller than 2mm (50–60% MB/ONT) (50–60% MB/ONT) (50–60% MB/ONT)

Silt:
•Larger than 0.002mm
10 – 25% 5 – 15% 10 – 25%
•Smaller than 0.05mm

Clay:
•Smaller than .002mm 0 – 20% 0 – 20% 0 – 20%

Maximum 25% Maximum 25% Maximum 25%

Clay and Silt Combined
(35% MB/ONT) (35% MB/ONT) (35% MB/ONT)

Organic Content:
3-10% 3-5% 10-20%
(by weight)

Percolation shall be such that no standing water is visible 60 minutes after

Drainage:
at least 10 minutes of moderate to heavy rain or irrigation, or as otherwise specified.

6.0-7.0 6.0-7.0 4.5-6.5

Acidity (pH)
(6.0- 8.0 MB/ONT) (6.0- 8.0 MB/ONT) (6.0-8.0 MB/ONT)

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 49

 TABLE T-5.3.5.3. PROPERTIES OF GROWING MEDIA
FOR LEVEL 2 “GROOMED” AND LEVEL 3 “MODERATE” AREAS

LEVEL 2 and 3 Areas: Routine, high to moderate standard of maintenance is anticipated. Automatic
irrigation is recommended; however, such areas can be adequately irrigated through consistent use of
manual irrigation equipment. The textural classification for these growing media by the Canadian system
of soil classification is “loamy sand” to “sandy loam”. These growing media accommodate a wide selection
of plants; they create a balance between good drainage and water retention and are suited to moderate,
normal maintenance practices.
Note 1: “On-slab” areas should be treated as LEVEL 1 areas, with corresponding increase
in sand content and decrease in silts and clays.
Note 2: Trees and large shrub areas may also have Type 2L growing medium.

Growing Medium Types: 2L 2H 2P

Low traffic Lawn Areas

Applications: High Traffic Lawn Areas Planting Areas
Trees & Large Shrubs

Texture: Percent of Dry Weight of Total Growing Med

Coarse Gravel:
•Larger than 19mm 0 – 1% 0 – 1% 0 – 1%
•Smaller than 40mm

All Gravel:
•Larger than 2mm 0 – 5% 0 – 5% 0 – 5%
•Smaller than 40mm

Percent of Dry Weight of Growing Medium Excluding Gravel

Sand:
•Larger than 0.05mm 50 – 70% 70 – 90% 50 – 70%
•Smaller than 2mm (50–60% MB/ONT) (50–60% MB/ONT) (50–60% MB/ONT)

Silt:
•Larger than 0.002mm
10 – 25% 0 – 15% 10 – 25%
•Smaller than 0.05mm

Clay:
•Smaller than .002mm 0 – 20% 0 – 15% 0 – 25%

Clay and Silt Combined Maximum 25% Maximum 25% Maximum 25%

Organic Content:
3-10% 3-5% 10-20%
(by weight)

Percolation shall be such that no standing water is visible 60 minutes after

Drainage:
at least 10 minutes of moderate to heavy rain or irrigation, or as otherwise specified.
6.0-7.0 6.0-7.0 4.5-6.5
Acidity (pH)
(6.0- 8.0 MB/ONT) (6.0- 8.0 MB/ONT) (6.0-8.0 MB/ONT)

50 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

 TABLE T-5.3.5.4. PROPERTIES OF GROWING MEDIA FOR LEVEL 4,
“OPEN SPACE/PLAY”, LEVEL 5, “BACKGROUND AND NATURAL”
AND LEVEL 6 “SERVICE & INDUSTRIAL” AREAS

LEVELS 4, 5, and 6 Areas: High standard of maintenance is not anticipated nor required. Irrigation
may be provided, but more frequently watering is completed only for establishment. The textural
classification for this growing medium by the Canadian system of soil classification is “sandy loam” to
“loam”. These soils provide a high-quality growing media, albeit with reduced percolation and
resistance to compaction. These may be imported soils; however existing soils may meet these
requirements, or it may be possible to amend them to meet the requirements. Plant selection shall
respond to the limitations of the growing medium and to modest maintenance expectations. If
growing media must be imported to augment existing site topsoil (due to insufficient volumes on site
or damage to on-site topsoil by construction activities), the imported growing medium should be
similar to the on-site soil and should be mixed with it. Different soil types should not be layered.
Note: Trees and large shrub areas may also have Type 3L growing medium.

Growing Medium Types: 3L 3P

Applications: All Lawn Areas Trees & Large Shrubs Planting Areas

Texture: Percent of Dry Weight of Total Growing Med

Coarse Gravel:
•Larger than 19mm 0 – 3% 0 – 3%
•Smaller than 40mm

All Gravel:
•Larger than 2mm 0 – 10% 0 – 10%
•Smaller than 40mm

Percent of Dry Weight of Growing Medium Excluding Gravel

Sand:
•Larger than 0.05mm 30 – 70% 30 – 90%
•Smaller than 2mm (30–60% MB/ONT) (30–60% MB/ONT)

Silt:
•Larger than 0.002mm
15 – 50% 15 - 50%
•Smaller than 0.05mm

Clay:
•Smaller than .002mm 15 – 30% 15 – 30%

Clay and Silt Combined Maximum 60% Maximum 60%

Organic Content:
2-10% 5-20%
(by weight)

Percolation shall be such that no standing water is visible 60 minutes after

Drainage:
at least 10 minutes of moderate to heavy rain or irrigation, or as otherwise specified.
6.0-7.0 4.5-7.0
Acidity (pH)
(6.0-8.0 MB/ONT (6.0-8.0 MB/ONT)

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 51

TABLE T-5.3.5.5. MINIMUM DEPTHS OF GROWING MEDIA
OVER PREPARED OVER PREPARED OVER PREPARED
APPLICATION SUBGRADE (WHICH SUBGRADE WHERE THE SUBGRADE WHERE THE
RETAINS “A” HORIZON) SUBSOIL DRAINS RAPIDLY SUBSOIL DRAINS RAPIDLY
Low Traffic Lawn Areas
Irrigated 100mm (4in.) 150mm (6in.) 200mm (8in.)
Non Irrigated 100mm (4in.) 150mm (6in.) 300mm (12in.)
High Traffic Lawn Areas 100mm (4in.) 150mm (6in.)
Planting Areas and Planters
Ground cover areas 150mm (6in.) 300mm (12in.) 300mm (12in.)
Small shrubs 300mm (12in.) 450mm (18in.) 300mm (12in.)
Large shrubs 450mm (18in.) 600mm (24in.) 500mm (20in.)
Tree Planting Areas
At each tree 450mm (18in.) to 600mm (24in.) deep for as large an area as possible around each tree.
Recommended area 10 m2 or greater. See Section 6, Plants & Planting.

52 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

PLANTS & PLANTING
6.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS b. ANSI Z133 The American National Standard for
Arboricultural Operations - Safety Requirements
6.1.1. INTRODUCTION
c. ANSI A300, Best Management Practices - Tree
1. This section is an amalgamation of two sections of the Planting
previous version of the Standard. In the first edition,
Section 9 [Plants and planting] and Section 12 [Container d. ANSI A300, Best Management Practices – Tree
grown plants] were previously separated. In this Second Pruning
Edition the two sections have been combined.
e. NSI A300, Best Management Practices - Part 6,
2. This Standard acknowledges that the Canadian Nursery Planting and Transplanting
Stock Standard [CNSS] is the authority referred to by
f. “Call or Click Before You Dig” - Canadian Common
growers and distributors of nursery stock.
Ground Alliance CCGA Best Practices, current
6.1.2. PURPOSE STATEMENT AND INTENT edition

1. The intent of this section is to set out standard methods g. Certified Landscape Designer Landscape Design
of measurement and specifications for container and Manual, current edition
field-grown plants, as accepted in the trade by nursery
h. Landscape Training Manual for Maintenance
growers and specifiers of nursery products.
Technicians, current edition
2. This section provides recommendations regarding
i. Ontario Landscape Tree Planting Guide
handling and planting practices for plants. It is intended to
be used in conjunction with all other sections of this j. Convention on International Trade in Endangered
Standard. Species of Wild Fauna and Flora [CITES]
3. Where there is found to be a discrepancy between the 6.1.4. PLANTS
landscape plans and the associated plant list, the quantities
identified within the plant list shall be deemed to be 1. The specifications of the Canadian Nursery Stock
correct. The landscape contractor should make the owner Standard [CNSS] shall apply, except as and where modified
and/or owners representative aware of any such discrep- by this Standard or contract documents.
ancies as early in the process as possible.
2. The contractor shall be responsible for scheduling the
6.1.3. RELATED REFERENCES, STANDARDS delivery of plants to the site in conformance with the
AND LEGISLATION contract documents or this Standard.
1. Government 3. The contractor shall be responsible for verifying that
plants delivered to the site comply with the contract
a. NMS Section 32 93 10 Trees, Shrubs and documents or this Standard.
Groundcover Planting
4. The contractor shall be responsible for supplying
b. NMS Section 32 01 90.23 Pruning necessary permits and import licenses in compliance with
federal and provincial regulations for imported plants.
c. Canada Food Inspection Agency [regarding the
restrictions on the importation of plants] 5. Collected plants shall not be identified as nursery grown
plants.
d. Environment Canada, The Species at Risk Act
[SARA] 6. Collectors shall comply with all international, federal,
and provincial legislation and/or treaties regarding the
2. Industry
collection of living plant material, import and export of
a. Canadian Nursery Landscape Association, Canadian same, conservation and biodiversity measures, and shall
Nursery Stock Standard [CNSS]. not knowingly acquire plants that are in violation of such
measures.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 53

7. All collected plants with be collected with the best iii. Carry out nursery practices to reduce plant
practices for sustainable harvest protocols. loss.

8. Seed should be collected from no more than 10% of a iv. Select plants known to be derived from stock
sustainable population. Collectors should vary collection in an area of similar climatic conditions /of
across a broad range of populations. Collectors shall equal provenance.
undertake best practices including having permission to
collect from the landowners and shall not collect plants v. Ship only fully rooted plants.
that are endangered or threatened without the required
vi. Harden off nursery stock slated for fall
permits and adherence to CITES protocols.
planting.
6.1.5. COLD CLIMATE FACTORS
vii. Provide acclimatization period when plants
1. To reduce losses due to winter damage, the following are shipped from milder climates or from
measures are recommended: greenhouses.

a. The landscape architect shall: c. The landscape contractor shall:

i. Specify and select plants known to be hardy i. Not plant in adverse conditions [e.g. soil
to the location. saturation, extreme temperatures].

ii. Consider microclimate [e.g. frost hollows, sun ii. Not accept plants from nursery if root
orientation, and wind exposure], salt toler- development, acclimatization, provenance, or
ance and snow load. other factors indicate a risk of loss.

iii. Be conservative in judgments of hardiness iii. Notify the owner in advance, in writing, of
particularly with plants for large mass plants or planting situations that are likely to
plantings. be susceptible to hardiness/winter damage
problems.
iv. Advise owner in advance if plants in the
design are tender for their specific location in 6.1.6. TRANSPORTING PLANTS TO SITE
the project.
1. All dormant plants:
v. Advise owners/developers/general contrac-
a. Roots of plants shall be protected from frost,
tors in advance of risks associated with
wind and sun.
planting under adverse conditions.
b. Where trees are being transported, roots shall be
vi. Recommend delay of planting or other
suitable measures if winter damage is antici- protected with wet straw or other suitable
moisture retaining material over the roots.
pated for some plants.
c. Where plants are transported via refrigerated
vii. Support and work with the landscape con-
truck, temperatures shall be maintained to
tractor if the contractor makes a reasonable
prevent frost damage to roots. Suitable
case for anticipated hardiness/winter damage
temperature range is between 0°C (32°F) and
problems, to develop a suitable solution.
10°C (50°F).
b. The nursery shall:
2. Dormant Trees and Shrubs:
i. Monitor performance of species and
a Deciduous: Bare root [only in dormant period or
varieties; alert landscape architects and
condition]: Plants shall receive adequate
contractors of possible problems due to
protection, prior to and during delivery to
tender plants.
preserve moisture and avoid desiccation of root
ii. Advise contractors regarding recommended systems, and to prevent damage to branching,
protective measures during transport, trunks and roots. For short transit periods [4
planting and after planting. hours or less], the maximum temperature in the
truck shall not exceed 20°C (68°F).

54 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

 b. Evergreens: It is recommended that rootballs be four points or by supporting the tree below the rootball.
protected from freezing temperatures below Trunks shall be supported as necessary to hold them in
-5°C (23°F) for periods longer than 4 hours, and relation to the rootball and to prevent tearing of roots or
that adequate protection from wind and sun be loosening of the rootball. Support shall be such that the
provided to prevent desiccation cambium is not damaged.

3. All non-dormant plants: 6.1.8. HANDLING AND PROTECTION

a. Plants in open transit shall be protected from 1. All plants:

direct sun by mesh tarpaulin or shade cloth to
avoid sun scorch. a. Plant rootballs shall be kept in a moist condition.
All plants shall be held in a protection zone and
b. Where plants may be subject to wind during guarded against damage, extreme temperatures
transportation and storage, mesh tarpaulins, and and desiccation.
other protective measures should be supplement-
ed by spraying the foliage with an antidesiccant b. During loading, transportation, off-loading, and
prior to shipping. planting, all trees shall be protected against
damage to stems and branches. This applies
4. Non-dormant trees: particularly to large wire-basket trees.

a. Movement of container grown, B&B, and c. Where plant damage occurs, it shall be reported
wire-basketed plants shall be restricted to closed immediately to the consultant who will determine
vans or trucks covered with mesh tarpaulin, or if the material is still acceptable.
similar material, to protect the leaves or needles
from windburn or desiccation. d. When permission has been obtained to plant
deciduous plants after buds have broken, plants
6.1.7. UNLOADING PROCEDURES shall be sprayed with anti-desiccant to slow down
transpiration prior to transplanting.
1. Plants shall at no time be dropped or handled roughly.
2. Trees and shrubs:
2. All plants shall be unloaded and checked immediately
upon arrival; condition of plants shall be documented. a. Bark shall be protected against chafing from
chains, cables, equipment, or other trees by a
3. Where plants have sustained damage or injury due to wrapping of cardboard or burlap.
shipping, the supplier shall be notified, verbally and in
writing, as soon as possible. b. Sudden or rapid movement of trees in transit or
off-loading shall be avoided. If the trees branches
4. Plants in containers shall be handled as much as possible are entangled with those of other trees, reason-
by the pots to reduce breakage of branches or leaves. able care shall be taken to separate them without
Where avoidable, plants shall not be held by their trunks, damage to branches.
tops or stems.
c. Where damage to trees occurs, the consultant
5. Bare root: Roots shall be covered and protected shall determine whether the plant is acceptable
immediately after unloading from the effects of frost, despite the damage. Any corrective measures
freezing, sun, and wind. shall be carried out in accordance with arboricul-
tural practices recognized by the International
6. Balled and burlapped [B&B] trees and shrubs shall be Society of Arboriculture. Shattered bark shall be
handled with caution to maintain the firmness of the removed, and broken branches shall be pruned
rootballs and to protect against damage to stems and back to the appropriate branch collar or bud, with
branches. care to avoid tearing of the stem bark. Wounds
7. Where avoidable, trees shall not be lifted by their trunks. shall be traced to remove shattered bark back to
Lifting shall be by attachments to the basket at three to firm cambium without damaging the cambium or
enlarging the wound.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 55

3. During growing season 3. Where planting is postponed, plants shall be stored and
maintained with protection and irrigation procedures that
a. All plants: will support the success of planting.
i. Containerized plants: In extreme weather, 4. All plants in containers, B&B, or wire basket, if not
freezing or high dry heat, the containers shall planted immediately, shall be stored in an upright position,
be covered in a protective medium [e.g., with care taken to provide enough space between plants
sawdust, bark mulch, peat moss, topsoil]. to allow light to reach all around to the bottom of the
plant in order to avoid sunscald or burning when plants are
ii. Plants intended for planting in the open shall planted out.
not be kept stored in a building, truck, or any
area of low light intensity for a period 6.1.10. WATER AND IRRIGATION
exceeding 7 days.
1. Plants shall be inspected for moisture content at time
iii. Plants shall be acclimatized or hardened off of delivery and watered as necessary to retain a turgid
against the environmental conditions of their condition. On-site irrigation shall be available during the
final planting location and shall not be taken duration of storage.
directly from shade houses or greenhouses
and planted in a drastically different 2. Water quality shall meet the recommendation in
environment. Preparation for the new Section 2, Contract Administration, unless otherwise
environment shall include a suitable period approved by the consultant.
of storage in an intermediate environment,
managing fertilizer applications to avoid 3. Reference Section 9, Landscape Maintenance,
excessively lush growth, and provision of for irrigation recommendations.
a graduated watering regime.
6.1.11. PLANTING TIME
iv. All plants shall be kept well-watered and
protected from extremes in temperatures. 1. Trees, shrubs, perennials and annuals shall only be
planted during periods that are normal for such work as
b. Trees: determined by local weather conditions, when seasonal
conditions are likely to provide successful adaptation of
i. B&B plants: Special attention shall be given plants to their new location.
to protecting the rootball. Unless weather is
rainy or cool, rootballs shall be protected by 2. Reference Section 9, Landscape Maintenance.
heeling them in with material suitable to
protect them from drying out. [e.g., sawdust, 6.1.12. SUBSTITUTIONS
bark mulch, peat moss, topsoil].
1. All plants shall be supplied as specified on the plant list.
ii Trees shall be suited to establishment after There shall be no substitutions of plants without prior
planting, without undue setback, and without written approval from the consultant. Note: there may be
dieback. instances where it is necessary to obtain approval of
substitutions from the consultant or authority having
4. During dormant period:
jurisdiction.
a. Plants shall be cared for according to the species
a. Substitution shall be allowed only when:
hardiness and geographic location and provided
suitable winter protection as required. i. A search by the supplier within the
appropriate area of search, as defined in
6.1.9. SCHEDULING AND STORAGE
the contract documents, confirms that the
1. The scheduling of delivery shall be such that plants substitution is justified in terms of availability
spend a minimal amount of time in storage on site. of plants or sizes.

2. Planting shall be carefully planned and scheduled to ii. An acceptable substitute of equal value is
limit storage of plants to a maximum of 36 hours on site. made available.

iii. Notification from the supplier is given to the

56 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

 consultant a minimum of 5 working days finish grade. Root flare of woody plants shall be 2.5-5cm
unless otherwise specified prior to the start above finish grade.
of planting. Confirmation of changes shall be
posted to the consultant in writing by the 4. All plants are healthy and free of disease, insect pests,
supplier or contractor. and invasive or noxious plant species.

iv. All changes shall be approved by consultant 5. Water content in the growing medium is within the
or owner’s representative prior to plant ranges identified in this Standard. Reference Table-9.17.
delivery. The practical chart for determining soil moisture.

v. Note: In many instances, it is necessary to 6. Trees are staked as required. Reference Section 9.3.11.
obtain approval of substitutions from Tree Stabilization and Section 6.3.10 Stabilizing Trees.
authorities having jurisdiction, which may
7. Pruning is completed where required and according to
result in delays. Suppliers should begin
reserving and securing plants as soon as they contract specifications or to this Standard. Reference
Section 9.3.12. Pruning.
are advised of the intended planting date and
should advise the contractor and the 8. Planted areas are free of visible weeds, invasive and
consultant as soon as possible of noxious plant species, and substantially free of under-
proposed substitutions, to facilitate ground weed parts, and to the agreed upon specification
the approval process. identified by the consultant.
2. Availability 9. Growing media amendments and mulch are of the
type specified and placed to the recommendation of
a. Plants that cannot be located at a wholesaler in
this Standard or the contract documents.
the province at the time of planting should be
regarded as unavailable, unless the contract 10. Growing media is cultivated to a loose and friable
documents indicate the geographical parameters consistency and is water permeable.
of an expanded search is appropriate. Out of
province sourcing of plants shall be pre-approved
6.1.14. ANIMAL, INSECT PESTS AND
by the consultant or owner’s representative.
DISEASE CONTROL
b. Canada Food Inspection Agency restrictions on
1. An integrated pest management program shall be
the importation of plants shall prevail over and
developed to protect plants and trees which may have
limit the stated parameters of search.
been weakened or stressed and made susceptible to
diseases and insects during transportation, storage and
6.1.13. RECOMMENDED CONDITIONS planting.
FOR ACCEPTANCE
2. Chemical and biological controls employed in con-
Acceptance by the consultant and by the owner of plants trolling insect pests and diseases shall be applied in
and landscaped areas for further maintenance shall occur accordance with all applicable legislation and regulations
only when the following conditions have been achieved: and manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Prior to planting: Growing medium quality, fertility 3. Chemical and biological controls that are restricted
levels, depths and surface grading are as specified and federally, provincially or municipally shall not be
identified in Section 4, Grading and Drainage, and Section 5, employed.
Growing Medium.
4. Provide trunk protection for younger trees in areas
2. Plant quantities, species, sizes, quality and locations are susceptible to rabbit, rodent, and/or other animal damage.
as shown in the contract documents or as otherwise
approved. All substitutions are approved and noted; a list 6.1.15. INVASIVE AND NOXIOUS PLANT CONTROLS
of substitutions shall be provided to the owner at the time
of acceptance. 1. Rootballs and growing medium in containers shall be
free of invasive and noxious plants.
3. All plants are installed according to contract specifica-
tions or to this Standard and at the correct level relative to 2. Where plants are stored on site, the principles of
integrated weed management shall be applied in
CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 57
controlling invasive plants. Methods used shall be a Planting, with respect to sizing, grading and quality.
combination of physical, cultural, biological and chemical
methods chosen for being the most effective, safest and 2. All plants specified shall be containerized and/or ball and
economical control of invasive plants. burlap nursery stock.

3. Chemical controls that are restricted federally, 6.2.4. NATIVE PLANTS

provincially or municipally shall not be employed.
1. Native plants shall be propagated in nurseries and not
6.2. PRODUCTS harvested from wild sites, except where salvaged from an
area where the native vegetation will be destroyed and
6.2.1. PLANTS authorization for harvest has been obtained from the
authority having jurisdiction.
1. Each plant list shall contain or be accompanied by the
statement: “Plants in this plant list are specified according to 2. All collected native plants shall be held and maintained
the Canadian Nursery Landscape Association Canadian in a nursery until new roots have formed and are estab-
Nursery Stock Standard [CNSS], and Section 6, Plants & lished either through the burlap or other suitable packing
Planting, from the Canadian Landscape Standard”. Each material, or in the case of containerized plants, until such
plant list shall specifically note any exceptions to the time that the roots grow to fill and hold the growing
above statement. medium within the container. Reference Section 6.1.4.
Plants.
6.2.2. SPECIMEN PLANTS
3. All collected native plants shall be labelled and provide
1. Specimen plants shall be identified in the plant list. information that includes collection information,
This designation is usually applied to large trees and provenance and origin.
shrubs, and should be used to indicate exceptionally
heavy, well-shaped plants. 4. Rootballs and growing medium in containers shall be
free of invasive and noxious plants, weeds, and insect
2. Plants designated as specimen or plants having other pests.
unique desirable characteristics shall be pre-selected,
or the required special characteristics [such as unique 6.2.5. PLANT CHARACTERISTICS
ranching habit, deviations from standard minimum caliper,
height, branching height, rootball size, foliage density] 1. Plants shall be true to name, type and form,
shall be clearly specified. and representative of their species or variety.

3. Specimen plants or plants having unique desirable 2. Plants shall be compact and suitably proportioned, not
characteristics should be pre-purchased or secured by weak or thin, or adversely affected from being planted too
other special agreements. closely in nursery rows; plants shall have healthy roots and
tops and be suitably proportioned as typical of the species
4. Material to be selected by the consultant should be or variety.
identified in the plant list and excluded from the tender
and may be pre-purchased or secured by other special 3. Conifers shall have a healthy single leader [unless
agreements. intended for a hedging form] and overall natural form
characteristic of the species or variety. The leader shall
5. All landscape contracts should be awarded with have well- spaced whorls of vigorous newly growing
adequate lead-time to assemble the specified material. branches, such that normal development of the plant’s
form can be expected.
6. Where unusually large quantities or sizes are specified,
a pre-purchasing arrangement, including contract growing 4. Plants shall have well-developed branches and vigorous,
can be considered to provide adequate lead-time to grow fibrous root systems typical to the species or variety. They
or source the specified material. shall be healthy, vigorous plants, free from defects, decay,
girdling roots, sunscald injuries, abrasions of the bark,
6.2.3. NURSERY-GROWN PLANTS plant diseases, insect pests’ eggs, borers, and all forms of
infestation.
1. Nursery grown plants shall, as a minimum, comply with
the Canadian Nursery Landscape Association, Canadian
Nursery Stock Standard [CNSS] and Section 6, Plants &

58 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

6.2.6. ROOTBALLS d. Recommended container sizes by plant type

1. Rootballs shall meet the following standards according e. Height relationship to caliper by type
to the Canadian Nursery Stock Standard [CNSS]:
3. Rootball Standards
a. Quality shall be normal for the species where
plants have not been transplanted or root pruned a. Securing rootballs over 60cm:
for 4 years or more or when plants are dug out of
i. Rootballs over 60cm shall be secured with
season. Fertile growing medium, ample spacing,
either daisy baskets or wire baskets, or drum
weed control, pest control, adequate moisture,
tied with twine or rope. Tying material and
pruning and shearing, transplanting or root
burlap shall not be wrapped around the trunk
pruning not less than once in 4 years, depending
or collar of the tree.
on species, are all necessary growing condition
requirements for normal quality nursery stock. b. Securing rootballs under 60cm:
b. Rootballs shall be viable, free from invasive and i. Rootballs below this size shall be secured with
noxious plants, weeds, insect pests and disease, either polypropylene twine or treated sisal
and undamaged. with a maximum of 10cm between wraps and
have a lateral line around the centre of the
c. All nursery stock shall have an adequate fibrous
ball at right angles to the regular ties. Tying
root system that has been developed through
material and burlap shall not be wrapped
cultivation practices, particularly transplanting or
around the trunk or collar of the tree.
root pruning. Pertinent facts, such as when larger
nursery stock was transplanted or root pruned, c. Burlap used for rootball wrapping shall be:
shall be available to the buyer. [This Standard
recognizes that plants often reach the landscape i. Free from toxic contaminants.
trade through a series of transactions among
growers, nurseries and brokers, and that it is not ii. Of sufficient strength to hold the rootball in
always possible for a supplier to retrace a plant’s a compact, stable mass that does not move
history]. relative to the main stem(s) of the tree or
shrub.
d. Rootball sizes shall always be of sufficient width
and depth to encompass enough of the fibrous d. Wire baskets for rootballs:
and absorptive root system to support full
recovery of the plant. i. Wire rootball baskets shall be of a shape that
will result in a stable planting condition.
e. Rootballs shall be solid, remain intact until
transplanted, and be tied tightly with burlap and ii. Wire baskets shall be suitably sized for the
rope. rootball, such that the top wire is at least
10cm below the top of the rootball for
f. Larger rootballs than those recommended in smaller baskets and 15cm to 20cm below the
Canadian Nursery Stock Standard [CNSS] Table top of the rootball for baskets of 90cm
5.4.4 and [CNSS] Table 5.4.5 are required when diameter or larger.
the plants have not been transplanted or root
pruned for 4 or more years or when plants are iii. All methods of treating rootballs shall follow
dug out of season. the guidelines provided for in the Canadian
Nursery Stock Standard [CNSS] and this
2. Refer to Canadian Nursery Stock Standard [CNSS] and Standard, even if not specifically mentioned.
Section 6, Plants & planting, for further details including
standards for:

a. Container sizes

b. Digging standards

c. Rootball diameters, depths, weights

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 59

 e. Rootball Sizing to currently accepted practices which meets the
proportions and density requirements stated
i. Minimum rootball sizes are documented in herein.
the Canadian Nursery Stock Standard
[CNSS]: b. Reference Canadian Nursery Stock Standard
[CNSS] for guidelines on container sizes
• Refer to CNSS Table 5.4.4. Rootball size
in relation to spread or height for Dwarf, i. Table 3.4 Container class volume ranges
Medium, and Tall and Columnar type
conifers.
ii. Table 3.5 In-ground fabric bag dimensions.
• Refer to CNSS Table 5.4.5 Rootball size
in relation to height for Tall and Broad iii. Table 14.7 Common container classes and
type conifers. volume ranges for herbaceous perennials
• Refer to CNSS Table 6.5.3 Rootball
c. Reference Canadian Nursery Stock Standard
diameter in relation to plant spread or
[CNSS] for guidelines on container sizes related
height for broadleaf evergreens.
to plant type:
• Refer to CNSS Table 7.3.4 Rootball size in
relation to caliper for field grown i. Table 5.5.1.1 Guidelines for container size in
Standard type trees. relation to spread or height for Dwarf and
Medium type conifers
ii. Rootballs shall be of size to meet the
minimum rootball diameters for coniferous ii. Table 5.5.1.2 Guidelines for container size in
trees and deciduous trees as identified in the relation to height for Tall and Columnar and
Canadian Nursery Stock Standard [CNSS] for Tall and Broad type conifers
Tables, however it is important to note that
rootball sizes could be larger. iii. Table 6.6.1 Guidelines for container size in
relation to plant size for broadleaf evergreens
6.2.7. CONTAINER GROWN PLANTS
iv. Table 7.4.1 Guidelines for container size in
1. Plants shall have a well-established root system, reach- relation to tree height and caliper for shade
ing the sides of the container to maintain a firm ball when and flowering trees
removed from the container, but shall not be root bound.
v. Table 8.4.1 Guidelines for container size in
2. Plants in containers shall not be grown in the same class relation to plant height and cane number for
container for longer than two (2) growing seasons, unless deciduous shrubs
species allows otherwise, and providing that the root
system does not become root bound, does not develop 6. Recommended procedures for specifying container
girdling roots, or other characteristics detrimental to grown plants
normal plant development.
a. Specifying plants
3. At the time of potting, all containers shall be filled to
within 2.5cm of the top of the container. This specification i. All measurements should be specified in
applies to container-grown and field-potted plants. metric.

4. Plants will be handled in a manner to minimize disrup- ii. Reference CNLA Canadian Nursery Stock
tion of growing media and root systems. Plants delivered Standard [CNSS] Appendix A: Metric / imperial
to the project with disturbed roots will be rejected. equivalents.

5. Container classes iii. When specifying by container class, only the

CNLA container classes should be specified.
a. The plant sizes shown in this Standard shall be the
minimum sizes acceptable for the corresponding iv. Where the tables of the Canadian Nursery
container size. These sizes are specified according Stock Standard [CNSS] show no plant size,

60 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

 plants should be specified by container class b. Approval of plants
only.
i. Plants shall be made available for review at
v. For plants larger than those listed in this source of supply if assembly is specified or
Standard, container size should be listed negotiated.
wherever possible with plant size.
ii. Plant reviews requiring assembly should be
vi. Where both container class and plant size arranged by negotiation with the supplier.
are specified according to this section,
both container class and plant size shall iii. Approval of plants at source of supply will not
be regarded as minimum sizes. impair the right of the owner, or owner’s
representative, to review plants upon arrival
vii. Where plant size only is specified, minimum on site or during the course of construction
container classes shall be according to the and reject plants that have been damaged or
Canadian Nursery Stock Standard [CNSS]. are not representative of the sample show.

viii. Where container class only is specified, 7. Measuring container grown plants
minimum plant sizes shall be according to the
Canadian Nursery Stock Standard [CNSS]. a. General

ix. Where balled and burlapped field dug plants i. This approach applies a standard method of
are substituted for container grown plants, measurement for each type of plant in
the supplier or contractor shall verify that combination with a minimum percentage of
substituted plants meet the requirements of leaf density for each type.
the Canadian Nursery Stock Standard [CNSS]
minimum quality, proportion, density, rootball ii. ii. Leaf density is defined as the approximate
and plant size specifications. percentage of the measurement plane seen
as foliage [as opposed to light passing
x. Where container grown stock that meets the through] when viewed from the side [or from
specified size and requirements of this above in the case of plants measured by
Standard may be substituted for balled and spread]. If plants are not in full leaf, the leaf
burlapped field dug plants, the supplier or density should be estimated on the basis of
contractor shall receive written approval density of twigs and buds.
from the consultant or owner’s
representative. iii. The average of two measurements at right
angles to each other. Leaf density shall be the
xi. Each plant list transmitted to a supplying average of two readings taken through the
nursery should include project name, same measurement planes.
location and job number, all comments,
area of search, designer name and
contact information.

B Box Represents H x S
= Measurement Plane
B Box Represents H x S
= Measurement Plane
Sp
A
2/3 Height

Spread

A figure 6.2
2/3 Height

Spread

figure 6.1 50% Min

Leaf Density
50% Min
A +B Leaf Density
= Average Spread
A +B 2
= Average Spread
2

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 61

Width=
2/3 Height
Width=
 Sp
Width=
1/3 Height

Spread

2/3 Height
Width=
2/3 Height

Height
8. Evergreens – coniferous

Spread
S
e a. Dwarf coniferous evergreens - This group
Spread includes ground cover, flat, and small globe types
or
usually not exceeding 100cm in height 75% Min.
at maturi-
Leaf Density
B ty.
Box Measurement
Represents H x S shall refer to spread [height not
Height

figure 6.3 50% Min.

= Measurement Plane
considered]. The main body of the plant shall be
2/3Height
Spread

Leaf Density
Spread
no less than the size stated. Minimum leaf density
Height

50% Min. 75 percent.

Leaf
A Density
B Box Represents H x S 50% Min.

2/3 Height
Width=Plane

Spread
50% Min. = Measurement Leaf Dens
Leaf Density 40% Height
Spread
iv. Measurements shall50% Min
be based
Leaf Density on the main
body
A +B of the plant, from branch tip to branch
= AAverage Spread
tip, excluding leaves and excluding branches

2/3 Height

Spread
2
outside the main body of the plant.
50% Min
Leaf Density
v.
Width= Measurement plane is defined as the rectan-

2/3 Height
2/3 Height A +B
gle formed by the plant’s spread [S] and
= Average Spread
height [H]. 2 figure 6.6
Height
Width=
2/3 Height
Height shall be
Height

Width = Width determined midway

40% Height between the tip of
the leader and the
uppermost Width=
whorl
figure 6.4
1/2 Height

50% Min. 2/3 Height

Leaf Density Height
75% Min.
Width Leaf Density
Min. 75% Min.
Density Leaf Density 50% Min.
2/3 Height

Leaf Density
50% Min.
1/2 Height

b. Medium coniferous evergreens – This group Leaf Density

Height

Height
vi. The “Two-Thirds rule”: For medium to tall includes plants usually not exceeding 200cm in
plants that may not branch right to the height or spread at maturity including semi
50% Min.
ground, the leaf density measurement is Leafspreading,
Density globes, and compact upright types,
50% Min.
applied to only the top of the measurement commonly used in foundation planting. Leaf Density
plane. In plants where the characteristic plant Measurements shall refer to height or spread.
Spread
habit is higher branching, the top of the Minimum leaf density 75 percent.
Width = 50% Min.
measurement
30% Height plane may be reduced Leaf
so that
Density
leaf density is measured for the main body of c. Tall and columnar coniferous evergreens .
the canopy. This group includes plants frequently used as
accents in foundation or other plantings.
Spread

Width=
1/2 Height 50% Min.
Measurement
Spread shall refer to height.Leaf
Width [W] is
Density
approximately 1/3 of height [H]. Minimum leaf
density: 75 percent, measured in the top 2/3 of
2/3 Height

Width=
the measurement plane.
1/2
75%Height
Min.
Height

75% Min.
2/3 Height

Leaf Density Spread

Leaf Density
Spread
Height

figure 6.7

figure 6.5 75% Min. 75% M

Leaf D
2/3 Height

Leaf Density
Spread
Height

40% Min. 50% Min.

Leaf Density Leaf Density 75% Min.
Leaf Density

62 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

50% Min.
Leaf Density
 Leaf Density
A +B 75% Min.
= Average Spread
Leaf Density
2

2/3 Height
Height
Box Represents H x S
= Measurement Plane
Spread Width=
2/3 Height

Width Spread
50% Min.
Width = 50% Min.
2/3 Height

Spread
Leaf Density
30% Height Leaf Density
1/2 Height

figure 6.8

Height
Spread
figure 6.11 50% Min.
50% Min. Leaf Density
Leaf Density
50% Min.
Leaf Density
2/3 Height

Width=
d. Tall and broad coniferous evergreens – This group 1/3 Height
includes large trees frequently used as landscape
Height

specimens or for shelterbelts or screen plantings. significant factor. Measure spread. Minimum leaf
density: 50 percent.
Spread
Width=
2/3 Height

2/3 Height
b. Semi-Spreading - Measure spread.
Height is approximately half the spread.

Height
Spread

Minimum leaf density: 50 percent.

figure 6.9 40% Min.
Width= Leaf Density
Height

1/2 Height
Spread Spread
or
% Min. 75% Min.
af Density Leaf Density
50% Min.
Leaf Density
2/3Height

Height
Spread
2/3 Height

Height

Spread
Height

50% Min.
Measurements shall refer to height. Width is Width= or
Leaf Density 40% Height 75% Min.
usually about 40 percent of height. Measure figure 6.12 75% Min.
Leaf Density Leaf Density
height. Height shall be determined midway
2/3Height

between the tip of the leader and the uppermost

Height

whorl. Minimum leaf density: 75 percent, mea-

50% Min.
sured in theLeaf
topDensity
2/3 of the measurement plane.
50% Min.
9.Spread
Evergreens – broadleaf Leaf Density
2/3 Height

a. Spreading - Mainly flat types, used as ground

Height

covers; height, seldom greater than 30cm not a

c. Globe and Dwarf Forms - Measure designated
height. Spread shallHeight
not be less than 2/3 of the
shall be
Spread

Width = height. Minimum leaf density: 50 percent.

determined midway
40% Height between the tip of

2/3 Height
the leader
d. Upright Forms - Measure and the
height, spread shall not
75% Min. 75% Min. uppermost whorl
Leaf Density be less than 50 percent of the height. Minimum
Height
Leaf Density
leaf density: 50 percent
75% Min.measured in the top 2/3
of the measurementLeaf plane.
Density

Width =
2/3 Height

10. Deciduous shrubs 40% Height

Height

figure 6.10
a. Dwarf shrubs - seldom exceed 100cm at maturity.
Measure height and spread. Minimum leaf
density: 50 percent.

b. Medium growing shrubs - mainly compact

2/3 Height

growing shrubs,
Spreadusually not greater than 200cm
Width = 50% Min. at maturity. Measure height or spread. Minimum
Height

30% Height Leaf Density

leaf density: 50 percent [If height is measured, 50
Spread

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 63

50% Min.
Leaf Density

Width = 50% Min.

ht
 Leaf Density

2/3Height
Width=

Height
1/3 Height

50% Min. Width=

Leaf Density Spread 40% Height

2/3 Height
Height
Spread
percent in the top 2/3 of the measurement 11. Grasses
plane].
a. Ornamental grasses are usually sold as plugs,

2/3 Height
c. Tall growing shrubs - this group includes tall or or in #1, or #2 containers but are also available
75% Min.
growing shrubs of substantial habit generally in larger sizes and can be specified as such. Leaf Density

Height
200cm or more at maturity. Measure height. Reference Canadian Nursery Stock Standard

2/3Height
Spread shall be not less than 40 percent of [CNSS]
Height Height shall be
Width = determined midway
40% Height 12. Perennials and miscellaneous
between the tip of
the leader and the
a. Min.
50% Perennials are usually Width=
specified in #1 containers
uppermost whorl
Leaf Density 40% Height
but are available in larger and smaller sizes.
75% Min.
Reference Canadian Nursery Stock Standard
Leaf Density
[CNSS]
figure 6.13
2/3 Height

6.2.8. HARVESTING PRACTICES

Height

1. Current practices allow for the use of in-ground fabric

2/3 Height
bags and pre-digging trees then heeling them into sawdust
for several months to develop fibrous roots.

Height
2. Digging, preparation, and transplanting shall be such
Spread
that the fibrous roots are well developed and protected.
Width = 50% Min. Height shall be
Width = determined midway
30% Height Leaf Density 40% Height 6.2.9. PLANTING ACCESSORIES between the tip of
the leader and the
uppermost whorl
1. Tree ties used to secure guy wires and stakes shall be:
Spread

height. Minimum leaf density: 50 percent, 50% Min.

measured in the top 2/3 of the measurement 75% Min.
a. Of a material that willLeaf
notDensity
damage the bark.
Leaf Density
plane.
b. At least 2.5cm wide and shall remain soft and
2/3 Height
2/3 Height

d. Tall growing shrubs of slender habit - this group pliable under all weather conditions.
includes tall growing shrubs of slender habit
Height

generally 200cm or more at maturity. Measure c. Such that the tree is permitted a reasonable
height. Width shall be not less than 30 percent of degree of movement under normal forces, such
height. Minimum leaf density: 40 percent, as wind, without detrimental effects.
measured in the top 2/3 of the measurement
plane. 2. Tree ties may be proprietary devices or may be adapted
Spread
Width = products
50% Min. such as rubber belts or tubing, provided they
30% Height meet
Leaf the above requirements.
Density
figure 6.14 40% Min.
Leaf Density
3. Wire or wire encased in hose shall not be used in
Spread

contact with the tree. 50% Min.

Leaf Density
4. Securing method selection shall be determined by the
site conditions and tree requirements. Securing methods
2/3 Height

include staking, guying, soil anchors, deadmen and /or

attachments to fixed elements.
Height

6.2.10 DECIDUOUS TREES

1. Trees are categorized into the following tree form types,

in accordance with the Canadian Nursery Stock Standard
[CNSS], current edition:

40% Min. a. Standard shade trees

Leaf Density

64 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

 i. Large growing shade trees which may be height at which branching starts. Height of
suitable for streets, boulevards, parks, branching should bear a relationship to the size
residential or industrial use. These trees have and kind of tree, recognizing each species’ normal
a single trunk or stem, with branching usually range of forms, so that the head of the tree will
starting 1.0m to 2.5m above ground level. be in good balance with the trunk size as the tree
grows.
b. Dwarf, formal and top-worked [grafted] trees:
b. Standard trees shall be specified by height up to
i. This group includes many small trees grown 2.4m except where otherwise shown in this
as standards, [top-worked or grafted]. The Standard. Standard trees higher than 2.4m, or as
maximum height at maturity for this group is shown otherwise for some species, shall be
usually 6m. May include topiary formed trees. specified by caliper.
c. Other forms of trees c. Caliper shall be measured 15cm above ground
level for trees up to 10cm caliper. For trees of
i. Small spreading trees: These are usually small 10cm caliper and greater, caliper shall be mea-
trees that may have a stem 30cm to 80cm in sured 30cm above ground level.
height and a well-balanced head.
4. Specifying dwarf, formal and topworked trees
ii. Columnar and fastigiate types: These are tall
narrow trees with one main stem, often a. relationship to the size and kind of tree so that
branched from near ground level and often the head of the tree will be in suitable proportion
having foliage close to the ground. with the trunk size as the tree grows], the size of
head, and overall height of the tree. The caliper of
iii. Multi-stemmed types: Tall growing trees with the tree is used when caliper is greater than 4cm.
two or more main stems.
b. Specifications shall include all special require-
2. Standard shade trees ments such as form of topiary or espaliered
a. Standard shade trees shall be true to form and branching.
shape for the species. 5. Specifying other forms of trees
b. Trees shall have straight sturdy trunks and a. Small spreading trees shall have a single stem
well-branched and balanced heads, with branch- 30cm to 80cm high with a suitable crown and
ing characteristic for the species and enhanced by should be specified by height only. These may be
suitable nursery pruning. specified by caliper when caliper is greater than
c. The branching structure of the head of the tree 4cm.
may vary according to species, height, age, and b. Columnar and fastigiate trees shall have a single
climatic/cultural conditions. stem. In some tree types, branching may begin
d. Diffuse or indeterminate branching is acceptable close to the ground. Height of branching should
if it is characteristic for the species and does not be specified. Specify by caliper, or by height when
create imbalance, crossing branches, included caliper is less than 4cm.
bark or other flaws which could affect the tree’s c. specifications for multi-stem trees shall state the
long-term health or stability. number of stems required and the size of the
e. A dominant, central leader shall be developed in largest stem. No stem may be counted if it is
species for which it is characteristic. The domi- more than 2cm smaller in diameter than the
nant leader will not necessarily be evident or specified stem diameter. Specified branching
expected early in a tree’s development and may characteristics should bear a relationship to the
not be typical of its natural growth habit. size and kind of tree, recognizing each species’
normal range of forms.
3. Specifying standard shade trees
6. It is recognized that most trees do not attain their
a. Specifications for standard trees shall state the characteristic form when they are immature. Trees should
not be designated as specimen until they have grown to
CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 65
larger sizes. Most standard form shade trees shall not be rootball to sit on undisturbed material or compacted fill
designated specimen until they are at least 8cm caliper. such that the top of the rootball remains at the finished
grade. Disturbed subgrade or fill below the rootball shall
be compacted to prevent settlement of the tree after
6.3. EXECUTION planting. Excess excavated material shall be removed from
the site.
6.3.1. DIGGING OF PLANTS
5. Where poor drainage or percolation is suspected, it shall
1. Plants specified or approved as “BR” [Bare Root] shall, be reported to the consultant, and the condition rectified
where practical, be dug and moved while dormant and in prior to planting.
accordance with the Canadian Nursery Stock Standard
[CNSS] 6. Planting pits or areas shall be tested for drainage
performance by filling with water. If planting pits or areas
2. Plants specified or approved as “B&B” [Ball & Burlap] do not drain adequately, measures such as penetrating the
shall be dug and planted in accordance with Canadian impervious layers, raising the planting grade, or adding
Nursery Stock Standard [CNSS] drain lines shall be employed.
3. Plants specified or approved as “Machine Dug into Wire 7. On slopes, drainage may be achieved by breaking out
Basket” shall be dug and planted in accordance with the sides of pits or planting areas to allow drainage down
Canadian Nursery Stock Standard [CNSS] the slope.

8. Planting pits or areas excavated in fine soils or by

6.3.2. PREPARING ROOTS mechanical means shall have all bottoms and sides
scarified to a minimum depth of 10cm to increase
1. Prior to removing plants from containers for planting,
permeability.
the plants shall be well watered to reduce injury to the
plants and provide a better survival rate. 9. Where the growing medium in a planting pit or area is
different in texture, structure or organic content from the
2. Should water not penetrate the rootball, as in cases
surrounding growing medium, the sides and bottom shall
where the plant has been left dry for too long, the rootball
be scarified to a depth of 10cm and the two materials
shall be soaked, until thoroughly moist, in a container of
thoroughly mixed to avoid an abrupt interface. Growing
water prior to planting.
medium shall be free from interfaces or textural
3. Where roots tend to circle or girdle the rootball, outside differences that could impede root development.
roots shall be gently loosened or cut vertically in one or
10. Reference Canadian Common Ground Alliance CCGA
two places with an appropriate and clean knife.
Best Practices, current edition to implement utility locate
requirements prior to planting.
6.3.3. PREPARATION FOR PLANTING

1. All trees and shrubs shall be planted in prepared growing 6.3.4. PLANTING
medium to the requirements of this Standard or the
1. General
contract documents.
a. All planting hole depths shall only be dug deep
2. Prepared growing medium for trees shall be between
enough to accommodate the root system or root
45cm and 60cm deep for as large an area as is practical
mass at the desired depth relative to the
around each tree location. A recommended area of
surrounding grade.
growing medium for each tree is 10 square meters or
greater. Reference Table T-5.3.5.5. Minimum depths of b. Rootballs shall be placed on the undisturbed
growing media. subgrade to prevent settling.
3. The transition of the tree planting area to a shallower c. With the exception of woody plants, plants shall
growing medium shall have a shallow angle. be planted so that after settlement, the level of
the adjacent growing medium surface matches
4. Excavation of the subgrade below the rootballs of trees
the level of the original growing medium surface
shall be only as necessary to permit the bottom of the

66 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

 in the nursery. The growing medium mark on the disturbing the rootball integrity. No burlap shall
stem is an indication of planting depth, and it shall show above grade.
be maintained on the finished level, allowing for
settling of the growing medium after planting. d. Growing medium shall be watered in when
The total depth of rootballs shall be planted in the growing medium has been placed to two-thirds of
growing medium. the depth of the rootball and allowed to settle
around the roots. After the water has been
d. Woody plants shall be planted with the root flare absorbed, the backfilling shall be completed and
2.5 - 5cm above finished grade. tamped lightly. Any settling shall be corrected by
raising the tree.
e. Plants shall be set plumb in the planting beds or in
the centre of the pits, except where the plant’s e. All inorganic/non-compostable containers
character requires variation from this. [including “grow bags” and sleeves] and tying
materials shall be removed and disposed of at the
f. If no other factors come into play, the plant shall time of planting.
be oriented in the same direction that it was
grown in the nursery. Face the lowest branch f. Trees and shrubs in perishable containers such as
away from the greatest traffic [pedestrian and fibre tubs can be planted with the fibre tub if the
vehicular]; and position the plant for best viewing. rim is removed below growing medium grade and
sides are slit.
2. Evergreens & shrubs
g. Trees dug bare root and planted in fibre tubs for
a. Shrub beds: Excavate to minimum depth of summer planting, if not fully established at time
500mm as indicated on the drawings. Individual of planting, can be planted with the fibre tub if
shrubs shall be planted in 500mm deep holes the rim is removed below growing medium grade
backfilled with growing media. and large holes are cut out of the tub sides.
b. For shrubs, loosen bottom of planting hole to h. All string, rope, burlap and other restricting
depth of 150 to 200mm. Cover bottom of each elements shall be cut and removed out to the
excavation with minimum of 150mm of growing perimeter of the rootball; all wire basket handles
medium. shall be cut off flush with the top ring or folded
back down into the planting hole.
c. Plant trees, shrubs and groundcovers vertically,
with roots placed straight out in hole. Orient i. Wire baskets shall not be removed from rootballs.
plants to give best appearance in relation to Any visible portion shall be folded down away
structures, roads and walkways. from the rootball and buried. Where the wire
basket is oversized such that the top wire is higher
d. Place plants to depth equal to origina than the grade, any visible portions shall be folded
growing depth. down away from the rootball or the basket shall
3. Trees be cut back to a minimum of 10cm below the
surface of the growing medium.
a. Growing medium shall be placed, preferably by
hand, in layers around the roots or rootball. Each j. Top lacing on rootballs shall not be left in place at
layer shall be carefully tamped to avoid injuring the time of planting unless it is 7.5cm clear of the
the roots or rootball or disturbing the position of base of the trunk and there is a commitment
the plant. made in writing at the time of planting by the
party responsible for the tree [contractor, owner,
b. The trunk flare shall be 2.5-5cm above the maintenance operator] to remove the lacing to
finished grade and visible after the tree has been the requirements of this Standard, 12 to 14
planted. months after planting. If the written commitment
is not made, the lacing shall be removed at the
c. When growing medium has been placed up to time of planting.
about two-thirds of the rootball height, ties shall
be cut and the top one-third of burlap on B&B k. A 10cm raised saucer shall be constructed around
plants shall be folded back carefully, without

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 67

 the perimeter of the rootball to enhance water root zone.
infiltration into the rootball.
3. Reference Section 2. Contract Administration.

6.3.5. BARE ROOT PLANTING

6.3.8. PRUNING AND SHEARING
1. Damaged or broken roots shall be cut back to healthy,
living tissue. Kinked or circling lateral roots that may 1. Pruning at the time of planting shall be limited to the
become girdling roots shall be removed. minimum necessary to remove dead, diseased, damaged,
and defective branches.
2. Spread out all roots radially from the trunk in prepared
hole, so that roots are directed away from the trunk. Roots 2. The tree leader shall not be removed at any stage of the
of bare root trees shall fit in the planting hole without tree’s growth. Corrective pruning shall be undertaken in
bending. such a manner as to preserve the structure of the tree.

3. Growing medium shall be placed around the roots, 3. Only clean, sharp tools suitable for the pruning task shall
gently shaking the tree to allow particles to sift into the be used.
root system so that growing medium is in close contact
4. Tools shall be sterilized between pruning of different
with all roots and preventing air pockets. Water can be
plants.
used to move growing medium in close contact with the
root system. 5. All cuts on trees and shrubs shall be clean and outside
the branch collar, leaving no stubs. Cuts, bruises or scars
4. Fertilizer, slow release fertilizers, and manure, when
on the bark shall be traced back to living tissue and
used, shall not be placed in direct contact with roots
removed. The affected areas shall be shaped so as not to
systems.
retain water.
5. Plants shall be immediately and adequately watered
6. The timing of pruning or shearing shall be appropriate
after planting.
to season and plant type.

6.3.6. POORLY DRAINED GROWING MEDIUM 6.3.9. MULCHING PLANTED AREAS

1. Planting holes shall only be dug deep enough to accom- 1. Correct growing media settlement prior to mulching.
modate the root system or root mass at the desired depth
relative to the surrounding ground. 2. All trees installed in lawn areas shall have a 1m diameter
mulched ring that is maintained for a minimum of 8 years.
2. When planting where drainage correction is impractical
or impossible, the root collar shall be planted higher in 3. Mulch is to be of a type suitable for the material
relationship to the surrounding growing medium surface planted. Reference Section 7, Mulching, and Section 9,
by 7.5-10cm. Landscape Maintenance.
3. Planting hole width shall be at least 3 times the width of 4. Mulch depths shall be to the recommendations of
the rootball or root system. Refer to ANSI A300. Tree Section 7, Mulching.
Care Operations - Tree, Shrub, and Other Woody Plant
Maintenance - Standard Practices.
6.3.10. STABILIZING TREES
4. Growing medium used for backfilling shall be the
original excavated material. 1. Immediately following planting, trees shall be stabilized
using suitable methods such that the crown of each tree is
6.3.7. WATERING permitted free movement but normal forces such as wind,
snow loading or human force will not disturb the buttress
1. Plants shall be watered immediately after planting to the root system or cause the rootball to shift in the growing
depth of their root systems. medium.
2. Watering shall be carried out when required and in 2. A tree may not need to be stabilized if the subsoil and
volumes relative to specific plant needs and growing growing medium are stable and can hold the rootball in
medium type to maintain available moisture through the place if the rootball is solid and contained in a wire basket
68 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020
and shaped such that it can be expected to resist shifting.

3. All tree stabilization methods shall be such that they do

not damage the tree.

4. Attachment to the tree shall be no higher than neces-

sary to stabilize the rootball while permitting free move-
ment of the tree’s crown.

5. Ties shall be secured to the stakes or placed in the tree

such that they will not slide down or otherwise be
displaced.

6. Stakes, anchors, etc. shall be set deep enough so that

they will not move in the growing media when subjected
to wind and other normal forces.

7. Stakes or anchors for guy wires shall be set below or

flush with the growing media surface so that they do not
present a hazard, and guy wires shall be used only where
they do not present a hazard. Guy wires shall be marked
with flagging tape for visibility.

8. Stakes shall not be driven through the rootball. Confirm

stakes are secure, vertical and un-split.

9. The following methods are recommended for staking

and guying:

a. Deciduous trees up to 12cm caliper and conifer-

ous trees up to 3m height: 2 stakes per tree.

b. Deciduous trees larger than 12cm caliper and

coniferous trees larger than 3m height: 3 guy
wires spaced equally around each tree.

c. For evergreens over 3m use three (3) guy

wires spaced equally around .

10. After tree supports have been installed, prune and

remove broken branches with clean, sharp tools.

11. Trees installed on roof decks or in planters may require

special stabilization methods.

12. Except where stabilization of plants is directed to

remain in place for longer periods due to special
considerations, tree ties, stakes, guys etc. shall be re-
moved between 12 and 14 months after installation. In
some cases [e.g., street trees], stakes might be left in place
to protect the trees, but ties shall be removed.

6.3.11. CLEAN-UP

1. Debris and materials resulting from planting shall be

removed promptly from the site.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 69

MULCHING
7.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 7.1.3. MULCHING MATERIALS

1. Mulching materials shall be substantially free of invasive

7.1.1. PURPOSE STATEMENT & INTENT and noxious plant seeds and reproductive parts, soil, salts
or other harmful chemicals, or other extraneous matter
1. Mulch is a desirable, aesthetic ground cover treatment that would prohibit the healthy growth and development
applied to planting beds at the time of planting and as a of plants.
part of an ongoing maintenance and growing media
conservation program. Mulch provides a layer of material
on top of the planting medium and below plant canopies
7.2. PRODUCTS
to meet the objectives stated below. It can replace 7.2.1. MULCHES
vegetation as a sole ground cover in any application where
growing media protection or weed control is desired. It is 1. Mulches can be divided into two basic categories:
not to be used as a growing medium in landscape organic and inorganic.
applications.
a. Organic Mulches are composed of plant or animal
7.1.2. OBJECTIVES OF MULCHING residues that decompose over time and may
improve the structure or nutrient value of the
1. Protection of the growing medium from structural growing media.
damage resulting from the effects of winter freezing.
b. Inorganic mulches are natural or man-made
2. Insulation of growing media and rootballs and preven- materials that do not readily decompose and have
tion of extreme temperature fluctuations that can damage limited value in their contribution to growing
plant roots. media improvements.
3. Reduction of the germination and growth of weeds and 7.2.2. SELECTED ORGANIC MULCHES
invasive plants and makes their removal easier.
1. Non-composted bark mulch
4. Reduction of compaction, crusting of growing media
surfaces, erosion of growing media and leaching of a. Standard bark mulch shall be 25mm (1in.) minus
nutrients resulting from heavy rains. bark chips and fines, free of chunks, sticks, roots
and granular material.
5. Reduction of compaction from foot traffic and mainte-
nance activities. b. Coarse bark mulch shall meet the same require-
ments as standard bark but shall consist of larger
6. Reduction of growing medium moisture loss by mini- chips.
mizing evaporation.
2. Composted bark
7. Provision of a source of organic matter for the growing
media as it decays, thus improving soil structure and tilth a. Standard bark mulch shall be composted suffi-
[organic mulches only]. ciently to achieve a uniform texture and dark
brown colour.
8. Aesthetically improves or augments the landscape by
providing a neater and more finished appearance provid- b. Composted or potting bark shall be reasonably
ing a cover of uniform colour and interesting textural free of invasive and noxious plants, seeds or their
element. reproductive parts, all soil, stones, roots or other
extraneous matter.
9. Protection of trees in lawn areas from damage from
landscape maintenance equipment [mowers and line 3. Compost
trimmers etc.].
a. Well decomposed, stable, weed free organic
matter; derived from agricultural, food or
industrial organic residuals: biosolids;
yard trimmings; source-separated or mixed
solid waste.
CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 71
 b. Shall be free of any substances toxic to plants, rounded, well-graded stones. Stone mulch shall
man-made foreign matter, granular material, be free from fines.
invasive or noxious plant seeds or reproductive
parts, and have no objectionable odours or 3. Crusher dust mulch [crusher tailings]
resemble the derived raw material.
a. Durable particles, free from clay and organic
c. Composted materials may be used as a surface material. Crusher dust should include granular
application. Reference Section 5.2.5. Soil material passing through a 5mm sieve, including
amendments. fines.

4. Manure b. Suitable for use in non-planted areas and tree

plantings; use shall be limited in areas planted
a. Well decomposed livestock excrement, rich in with shrubs or perennials.
organic matter and free from living plants,
man-made foreign matter, granular material, 4. Landscape fabric
invasive or noxious plant seeds or reproductive
a. Fabrics are not recommended for use under
parts. Manure is not to be fresh and resemble the
organic mulches. Use under inorganic mulch
derived raw or ‘green’ manure.
should be limited to non-planted areas or used
b. Composted manure may be used as a surface only short-term in planted areas, as mulches tend
application. Reference Section 5.2.5. Soil to create anaerobic conditions under long-term
amendments. use.

5. Wood fibre mulch b. Should not be visible when installed correctly.

a. Untreated shredded wood fibres of varying c. Prevents weed germination while letting water
lengths. May be partially composted or installed pass readily into the growing media.
in a non-composted state.
d. Disadvantages:
6. Treated or coloured wood chips
i. Cannot be used in plantings that include
a. Treated or coloured wood chips or fibres similar in stoloniferous ground covers or bulbs
gradation to bark mulch. Colours and other
ii. Prevents organic material from incorporating
treatments shall be non-toxic.
into growing media
7.2.3. Selected Inorganic Mulches
iii. Organic material accumulates above fabric
1. Quarried or crushed rock
iv. Limits water/air movement
a. Crushed rock mulch materials vary in character,
v. Provides rooting media for weed seeds
colour, and size. Crushed rock is composed of
fractured, angular stones.
e. Fabric may be woven or spun bonded and shall be
b. Rock should be selected with a view to suitability
a product specifically designed for its ability to
for the size of the area, the landscape design, and
allow for the movement of water and limited
plant type.
establishment of invasive and noxious weeds.
c. Limit use of finely ground rock that includes fines,
f. Geotextiles with a high percentage of closed
such as crushed limestone, in planted areas, as it
space have been found to be most effective.
may compact and form an impervious barrier to
both water and air. g. Plastics, tarps or other non-permeable liners shall
not be used as substitutes for landscape fabric, as
2. Excavated rock or stone mulch
they do not allow air and water to penetrate to
a. Stone mulch materials vary in character, colour the growing medium and contribute to anaerobic
and size. Stone mulch is composed of naturally conditions.

72 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

TABLE T-7.1. CONSIDERATIONS FOR MULCH SELECTION

TYPE APPEARANCE ADVANTAGES DISADVANTAGES

Non-composted Bark Reddish brown/brown Widely available; effective Can be blown or

Mulch [depending on source mulch accidentally swept out of
material], medium texture planted area

Coarse Bark Mulch Dark reddish brown/ Longer lasting; less likely to Will not break down to
medium brown blow away when used in dry contribute to the soil
[depending on source regions structure for many years;
material], coarse texture and need to add nitrogen

Composted Bark, Dark brown, fine texture Breaks down quickly to Shorter time period of
Compost, and Manure become part of the soil effectiveness as mulch is
structure already partly decomposed;
easily displaced from
planted areas; can cause
issues around ponds/pools
etc.; may introduce weeds
or invasive species

Rock and Stone Mulch Various Protects growing media Does not contribute to
from frost and compaction; organic content of growing
provides clean uniform media; can be difficult to
effect maintain over long term
even if used with landscape
fabric; difficult to amend
growing media with organic
matter during later upkeep;
organic matter and fines
can accumulate within
mulch, providing rooting
media for weed seeds

Untreated Shredded Wood Tan/light brown shredded Widely available; knits Fades to grey quickly;
Fibres wood fibres of varying together following installa- decomposes quickly;
lengths and widths tion to limit movement by requires frequent top-up
wind/water

Treated/Coloured Wood Variable colour and texture Colourfast and rot-resistant Slow to contribute to
Chips growing media organic
matter; difficult to match
colour when topping up

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 73

7.3. EXECUTION 2. Mulch should not be placed if the growing media
surface is saturated; allow the surface to dry. Mulch shall
7.3.1. ORGANIC MULCHES not be placed in wet low-lying areas where ponding may
occur.
1. Weeds shall be removed prior to mulch installation.
3. Mulch can slow growing media warming. Growing media
2. Mulch shall be placed in an even layer after finish should be allowed to warm before mulch installation.
grading is complete, immediately following planting.

3. Recommended depth of organic mulch shall be 75mm 7.3.5. MAINTENANCE OF MULCH

(3in.) under irrigation, and 100mm (4in.) under dryland
situation, after settling. 1. Mulch displacement repair: traffic, maintenance activi-
ties, or other causes may displace mulch. Periodically rake
4. Finish by hosing down to settle in place. mulch to restore it to its intended depth, uniformity and
location. Particular care should be taken to eliminate
exposure of landscape fabric, and to pull mulch away from
7.3.2. INORGANIC MULCHES
stems/crowns of planted material to recommended
1. Weeds shall be removed prior to mulch installation. distances.

2.Mulch shall be placed in an even layer after finish grading 2. Mulch top up: organic mulches will naturally decompose
is complete, immediately following planting. under normal planting conditions. Top up mulch to
specified depths according to contract documents or this
3. Depth of mulch shall vary according to the diameter of Standard, as required. The frequency of mulch applications
the individual rocks. will vary regionally and per mulch material; the following
provides guidance:
4. Rock mulch shall not be in contact with the trunk and
lower branches of trees, shrubs and plants; rock mulch a. Every 2 years in areas receiving more than 60cm
shall not cover plants or branches. (24in.) average annual precipitation.

5. Inorganic mulch may be placed on landscape fabric b. Every 3-4 years in areas receiving less than 60cm
approved by this Standard. (24in.) average annual precipitation.

6. Finish by hosing down to clean and settle in place.

7.3.6. GROWING MEDIA FERTILITY

7.3.3. MULCHING AROUND PLANTS 1. Growing media fertility shall be monitored regularly as
[ORGANIC AND INORGANIC] fertility may be temporarily decreased due to the binding
of nutrients by micro-organisms, particularly under
1. Provide 100cm (39in.) diameter circle around trees non-composted organic mulches. Supplemental fertilizer
installed in lawn areas. Mulched ring shall be maintained shall be applied as needed.
for a minimum of 8 years.

2. Taper mulch at the base of tree trunks; mulch should

not be placed within 100mm (4in.) of tree trunk.

3. Taper mulch at the base of shrubs; mulch should not be

placed within 50mm (2in.) of the base of shrubs.

4. Taper mulch at the base of perennials; mulch should not

be placed within 50mm (2in.) of perennial stems/crowns.

7.3.4. COLD AND WET GROWING MEDIA

1. During wet periods when the growing media surface is

very moist mulch may encourage a fungal disease called
damping-off.

74 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

SEEDING & SODDING
8.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 8.1.3. SEED APPLICATION METHODS

8.1.1. PURPOSE STATEMENT AND INTENT This section identifies general requirements for applying
grass seed and specific requirements for a variety of
1. Establishment of grass can occur in a range of condi- common seed application methods. These methods
tions from highway and industrial use to fine residential include:
lawns.
1. Method A: Mechanical dry seeding:
2. The intent of this section is to provide:
Seed uniformly distributed on prepared growing medium
a. Guidelines for the successful installation and basic at finished grade by calibrated mechanical equipment.
maintenance requirements of grass seed and sod in
various lawn area classes. 2. Method B: Hydraulic seeding [commonly called hydro-
seeding]:
b. Standard requirements for quality grades and other
classifications of grass types in sod so that the desired Seed mixed with water, fibre mulch, fertilizer and other
quality can be specified, defined and installed for each additives in slurry and uniformly distributed on prepared
application. finished grade by spraying the calibrated mixture.
8.1.2. Related references, standards and legislation 3. Method C:
Integrated growing medium/seed application [commonly
1. Government
called terraseeding]:
a. NMS Section 32 92 23 Sodding
Seed mixed with growing medium and applied by
b. NMS Section 32 92 19.13 Mechanical Seeding “blowing” the growing medium/seed mix onto a prepared
subgrade or growing medium bed. This method usually
c. NMS Section 32 92 19.16 Hydraulic Seeding applies approximately 50mm (2in.) depth of growing
medium/seed. Where approved for Class 3 areas, the mix
d. Canada Seeds Act and Regulations, Weed Seeds may be applied directly over prepared subgrade.
Order, 2016 For Class 1 and 2 areas, the mix should be applied over a
bed of compatible prepared growing medium, such that
e. Canada Fertilizers Act. (R.S.C., 1985, c.F-10) the mix and underlying growing medium combine for the
f. Canadian Food Inspection Agency Act required growing medium depth. Method C can provide
referencing the requirements of the grass seed greater initial protection and maintain more uniform
moisture than other methods, resulting in more reliable
2. Industry germination and establishment.

a. Canadian Council of Ministers of the 8.1.4. RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

Environment, Guidelines for Compost Quality,
current edition 1. Section 5: Growing Medium - Depths, Preparation,
Fertility, pH etc.
b. Compost Council of Canada
2. Section 9: Landscape Maintenance - Watering,
c. Sports Turf Canada, Athletic Field Construction Fertilization etc.
Manual, current edition

d. Turf Producers International

e. Nursery Sod Growers Association of Ontario

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 75

TABLE T-8.1. LAWN AND GRASS CLASSES

CHARACTERISTICS CLASS 1 AREAS CLASS 2 AREAS CLASS 3 AREAS

& CONDITIONS [LAWN] [GRASS] [ROUGH GRASS]

Typical Locations Most urban landscapes, Large suburban sites and Rural sites, verges of
high profiles of larger some backyards, play, airport runways, farms,
sites, residential, com- recreation and open highway rights of ways,
mercial, golf course, spaces, public areas temporary grass cover,
institutional entries front around large facilities stormwater retention
areas, residential patios with park-like conditions, areas.
and front yards. publicly visible commer-
cial and industrial sites of
medium to large scale.

Maintenance Level Level 1 “Well-Groomed” or Level 3 “Moderate”, or Level 5 “Background &

Level 2 “Groomed”. Level 4 “Open Space/Play”. Natural” or Level 6 “Service
Reference Table T-9.1. & Reference Table T-9.3. & & Industrial”.
Table T-9.2. Maintenance Table T-9.4. Maintenance Reference Table T-9.5. &
Levels. Levels. Table T-9.6. Maintenance
Levels.

Growing Medium To the requirements of Existing on-site growing Existing growing media
Tables T-5.3.5.2., T-5.3.5.3. media meeting the require- cleaned of surface debris
and T-5.3.5.5. or ments of Table T-5.3.5.3. over 50mm (2in.) in
as specified. and Table T-5.3.5.5. dimension.

Gradient Standard As shown in Table T-4.2. As shown in Table T- 4.2. Roughly graded for ease of
minor irregularities are maintenance and positive
acceptable if ponding surface drainage.
is not created.

Drainage Collected and dispersed Collected and dispersed in Collected and dispersed via
in accordance with local accordance with local standard means or held in
municipal bylaws via storm municipal bylaws via storm an area intended for
sewer, existing watercourse sewer, existing watercourse ponding in accordance with
before and after before, during, and after municipal bylaws.
construction. construction.

Seed Certified Canada No.1, Certified Canada No.1, Restoration seed mixes,
Varietal Blend #1, Lawn or as specified. preferably suitable native
Mix #1, or as specified. grasses, selected to suit
growing media,
maintenance and climatic
conditions, or as
specified; and free of
invasive species.

Sod No.1 Premium, No.2 No. 3 Commercial or as As specified.

Standard. specified.

76 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

8.1.5. LAWN AND GRASS CLASSES 1. Growing medium quality, fertility levels, depths and
surface conditions are as set out in this Standard or
1. Table T-8.1. Lawn And Grass Classes, provides three specification, unless specified otherwise.
classes and the corresponding standard characteristics
and conditions to identify and designate the minimum 2. Grasses are of the required species only.
standard for seed and sod required for a project or area
contained within a landscape site. 3. Lawn Class 1 areas are relatively free of weeds and
invasive plants, containing no more than 5 broadleaf
weeds or 25 annual weeds or weedy grasses per 100m2
8.1.6. HANDLING AND STORAGE (1,080sq.ft.2).

1. All grass seed, nurse crop seed, and hydromulch shall be 4. All seeded areas have been mown at least twice to a
stored in original containers or packaging until such time height of 60mm (2.5in.), the last mowing being within 48
as accepted by owner or consultant. hours of the field review for acceptance.

2. All seed shall be stored in a suitable dry, weatherproof 5. Grasses shall be uniformly established in sufficient
storage place. density such that no surface growing media shall be visible
when they are mown to a height of 60mm (2.5in.) for
3. All seed shall be protected from damage by heat, Class 1 and 2 areas. For Class 3 areas, up to 80 percent of
moisture, invasive and noxious plant seed contamination, the growing media area shall be uniformly established in
rodents or other damaging or contaminative causes until sufficient density such that no surface growing media shall
time of seeding. be visible when they are mown to a height of 60mm
(2.5in.).
4. Labels or other identification shall not be removed from
containers or packaging or be defaced. 6. Maintenance procedures set out in this section and
Section 9, Landscape Maintenance has been carried out.

8.1.7. FINISH GRADE PREPARATION 7. If specified, a more rigorous performance measuring

procedure may be specified to measure the success of
1. The finished grade shall be smooth to the extent germination and establishment. One model specifies
required for the class of seeding to be carried out, firm inspections at 30, 60, and 90 days after seeding, with the
against footprints, loose textured, and free of all stones, following benchmarks:
roots, branches, etc. larger than the diameter required for
removal for the class of seeding to be carried out. a. 30 days: growing media visually intact and
cohesive, nurse crop germination visually evident.
2. Areas that are excessively compacted shall have their
surfaces loosened by means of a thorough scarification, b. 60 days: nurse crop providing uniform coverage
discing or harrowing, to a minimum of 150mm (6in.) at mature height, permanent seed species visually
depth. evident in uniform cover, and no bare areas.

3. Finished grade shall meet the requirements of c. 90 days: permanent seed species established
Section 4, Grading and drainage. in uniform cover, and no bare areas.

8.1.8. FIELD REVIEW 8.1.10. SUBMITTALS

Provide the authority and the owner with the following

1. Approval of site preparation should be obtained prior to
documentation:
commencement of seeding. Reference Section 2, Contract
Administration. 1. Growing medium test results to the requirements of
Section 5, Growing Medium.
8.1.9. CONDITIONS FOR ACCEPTANCE
2. Seed analysis or facsimile of seed package label includ-
Acceptance of grass areas by the authority and the owner
ing the information required in Section 8.2.1.5. Grass seed.
should be undertaken only when the following conditions
exist:

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 77

8.1.11. SOD QUALITY GRADES a. Mix of grass types:

1. This Standard divides sod into the following quality i. Unless otherwise specified, the mix of grass
grades: species in the sod shall be the producer’s
standard mix and shall meet the requirements
a. Nursery [cultivated] sod of this Standard for the quality grade suitable
to the location.
b. No. 1 Premium grade ii. Specialty or custom mixes may include mixes
c. No. 2 Standard grade other than the producer’s standard mix, or
single species sod such as Kentucky bluegrass
d. No. 3 Commercial grade sod or perennial rye.

e. Field [pasture] sod b. Intended function or area:

i. This Standard identifies three classes of grass
2. Reference Section 8.2.4. Sod for quality requirements
area regarding function, quality and
for each grade.
appearance.
8.1.12. SPECIFYING AND IDENTIFYING SOD ii. Specifications should state the quality grade
of sod and other pertinent information [e.g.
1. Sod should be specified by reference to the quality use of the area for play, shady conditions].
grades in this Standard, and should be fully specified
according to the following characteristics: iii. Table T-8.2: Recommended sod quality grade
by class, shows the standard sod classes in
relation to the recommended quality grade

TABLE T-8.2 RECOMMENDED SOD QUALITY GRADE BY CLASS

Class General Description/Typical Locations Usual Recommended Sod Quality Grade

Level of Maintenance

Class 1 High profile building sites, areas around public No. 1 Premium grade
[Lawn] entrances to building of lower profile small No. 2 Standard grade
urban and suburban sites. This is the minimum
standard for residential and commercial.

Maintenance Level 1 “Well-Groomed” or Level 2

“Groomed”.

Class 2 Large suburban sites, public areas around large No. 2 Standard grade
[Grass] facilities with park like conditions, industrial No. 3 Commercial grade
sites. Maintenance

Level 3 “Moderate” or Level 4 “Open Space/

Play”.

Class 3 Rural sites, verges of runway, farms, highway No. 3 Commercial grade
[Rough Grass] rights-of-way, temporary grass. Commercial or Field (pasture) sod
field turfgrass cover. Can also be seeded with a custom seed mix

Maintenance Level 5 “Background & Natural” or

Level 6 “Service and Industrial”.

78 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

 of sod and usual levels of maintenance for 8.1.18. RECOMMENDED CONDITIONS FOR
each class of lawn. Reference Section 9, ACCEPTANCE
Landscape maintenance.
1. Acceptance of grass areas by the consultant and by the
owner for further maintenance should be undertaken only
8.1.13. SPECIAL GROWING MEDIUM REQUIREMENTS when the following conditions exist:
1. Unless otherwise specified, the growing medium for turf a. Sod has been sufficiently established so that its
shall be the producer’s standard growing medium unless roots are growing into the underlying growing
otherwise specified, including the specific gradation and medium.
type of sand.
b. Sodded areas have been mowed at least once to a
height of 40mm (1.5 in.), the last mowing being
8.1.14. OTHER SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS within 48 hours of the field review for
1. Specifiers should identify any other special sod require- acceptance.
ments. c. Sod lawns show no visible seams.

d. Sod is of the required species only.

8.1.15. CERTIFICATION OF SOD
e. Sod areas are relatively free of weeds and invasive
1. The supplier shall provide, upon request of the contrac- plants, containing no more than 5 broadleaf
tor, a label or statement certifying the quality grade, weeds or 25 annual weeds or weedy grasses per
location of sod source and species of grass in the sod, 100m² (120sq.yd.).
to verify that the sod meets the specification or
requirements of this Standard for the stated grade.
8.1.19. MAINTENANCE
2. The contractor shall retain labeling for inspection by
owner or consultant. 1. Reference Section 9, Landscape Maintenance.

8.1.16. HANDLING AND STORAGE 8.2. PRODUCTS

1. Sod shall not be dropped or dumped from vehicles. 8.2.1. GRASS SEED
2. Sod shall be protected during transportation against 1. Grass seed shall meet the requirements of the Canadian
wind exposure to prevent drying and shall arrive at the site Food Inspection Agency.
in a fresh and healthy condition.
2. Seed mixtures shall be suited to the climate, growing
3. Where there is any delay in installation, the sod shall be medium condition and type, site orientation, sun exposure,
kept moist, cool, and protected against adverse weather terrain, purpose of use, establishment and lawn class
conditions at all times until installation. designation under which they are to be grown, and to lawn
class designation and/or to consultant or owner
4. During the growing season, and where feasible, sod
specification.
should be delivered to the site within 36 hours of harvest
and shall be installed within 24 hours of delivery. 3. Professional consultation is recommended when
selecting or designing seed mixtures. This includes
5. Sod shall be allowed to dry sufficiently after wet
restoration seed mixes.
weather conditions to prevent tearing or damage during
handling and installation. 4. Seed shall have minimum germination rate of 75
percent and minimum purity of 97 percent, except where
otherwise specified by the professional selecting such
8.1.17. FINISH GRADE PREPARATION
seed, and/or the consultant or owner.
1. Reference Section 4, Grading and drainage.
5. Seed shall be packed and delivered in original containers
in accordance with the Seeds Act clearly showing:

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 79

 a. Name and address of supplier, packager or labeler (Neotyphodium spp.) which lives in a symbiotic relation-
ship of mutual benefit with the lawn. This provides a
b. Name of the kind or species of seed repellent for surface feeding insects such as chinch bug
and sod webworms. Such varieties should be incorporated
c. Name of the grade of seed where possible except where horses have access to lawn
d. Varietals name of the seed or cuttings.

e. Lot number 7. The seed mixture shall be mixed, labeled, and supplied
by a recognized seed supplier.
f. Germination percentage
8. The owner should have seed tested for purity, presence
g. Purity analysis of seed mixture: percentage of of invasive and noxious species, and germination
pure seed, variety and weed percentage.

h. Year of production 9. The installer shall retain package labels and seed sample
for inspection by owner.
i. Net weight [mass]
10. Reference Table T-8.3. Seed characteristics.
6. Endophyte enhanced grasses contain an internal fungus
8.2.2. HYDROSEED

1. Hydromulch materials shall consist of a mixture of fibre,

TABLE T-8.3. SEED CHARACTERISTICS

Characteristic Kentucky Perennial Creeping and TallFescue Creeping

Bluegrass Ryegrass Fine Fescues [Festuca Bentgrass
[Poa pratensis] [Lolium [Festuca spp.] arundinacea] [Agrostis
perenne] palustris]

Days to 10 to 30 3 to 10 7 to 14 7 to 14 10 to 21
Germinate

Wear Good Excellent Fair Good Good

Tolerance

Drought Good Good Good Excellent Poor

Tolerance

Water Usage High Medium Medium Low Medium

Shade Fair Fair to Very Good Good Fair

Tolerance Good

Cold Very Good Poor Good Fine Excellent

Tolerance

Seeding Rate 1 to 2 2 to 3 1 to 2 4 to 5 0.5 to 1

(kg/100m²)

80 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

Characteristic Kentucky Perennial Creeping and TallFescue Creeping
Bluegrass Ryegrass Fine Fescues [Festuca Bentgrass
[Poa pratensis] [Lolium [Festuca spp.] arundinacea] [Agrostis
perenne] palustris]

Seeding Rate 2 to 4 4 to 6 2 to 4 8 to 10 1 to 2
(bs./1000ft²)

Endophytic No Yes Yes Yes No

Variety

Texture Medium to Medium Fine Medium to Fine

Fine Coarse

Uses Athletic Fields, Athletic Fields, Golf Courses Athletic Fields, Golf
Home Lawns, Golf Courses Home Lawns, Courses,
Parks Golf Overseeding, Parks Golf Lawn
Home Lawns Courses, & Bowling,
areas of little Croquet
maintenance
General High quality. Bunch type Tolerates low Tolerant of High quality.
Grows best in turf, rapid moisture and salt, grows in a
well drained growth. Does shade. wide range of
growing media not tolerate conditions.
and full sun. poorly drained Best seeded
growing as a
media. monoculture.

seed, fertilizer and water designed for hydroseeding and eration during mixing in hydraulic mulching equipment.
dyed for ease of monitoring application.
6. When used on slopes or erodible surfaces hydraulic
2. Hydromulch shall contain no growth or germination mulches shall contain a binder that is able to join seed and
inhibiting factors, be dry, free of invasive plants and all soil particles together until turf growth is established.
other foreign material. The binder and mulch shall form a pervious mat or matrix
which will not prevent the penetration of moisture to the
3. Hydromulch shall be supplied in packages bearing the underlying soil.
manufacturer’s label clearly indicating weight and product
name. 7. Erosion control products include blown hay or straw,
wood fibre combined with tackifier, Erosion Control
4. Fibre should be green coloured fibrous, wood cellulose Blanket, Stabilized Mulch Matrix [SMM], Bonded Fibre
mulch, not containing any growth or germination inhibi- Matrix [BFM], and Flexible Growth Medium [FGM].
tors, and shall be manufactured so that it will form
uniformly suspended homogeneous slurry when added to 8.2.3. INTEGRATED GROWING MEDIUM/SEED
the fertilizer, seed and water in a tank and agitated. APPLICATION MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

5. Hydraulic mulch may contain a colloidal polythacuride 1. Growing medium shall meet the requirements of
[or equivalent] industry accepted tackifier for adhesion on Section 5, Growing Medium.
slopes as erosion control and to prevent chemical agglom-
2. Growing medium shall consist of a suitable and

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 81

approved homogenous blend of sand and composted d. Festuca brevipila [Hard Fescue]
organic components. e. Festuca ovina var. ovina [Sheep’s Fescue]
3. Where applicable, the growing medium in the “blown” f. Festuca octoflora [Slender Fescue]
component shall be similar in sieve analysis and organic g. Agrostis palustris [Creeping Bentgrass]
content to the underlying growing medium such that with Poa annua [Annual Bluegrass]
the interface of the two materials does not impede
percolation. h. Poa reptans [Creeping Bluegrass]
i. Poa supine [Supina Bluegrass]
4. Composted organic components shall be derived from
well composted green waste organic matter produced by j. Poa pratensis [Kentucky Bluegrass]
a composting site that meets or exceeds the requirements k. Lolium perenne [Perennial Ryegrass]
of the Canadian Council of Ministers of the Environment,
5. Size of sections
Guidelines for Compost Quality definition for Type “A”
Compost. a. Sod shall be cut by machines designed for that
purpose, to the supplier’s standard length and
5. The growing medium/seed mix shall be homogenous
width, plus or minus 2 percent in width and plus or
with uniform distribution of mineral components, organic
minus 5 percent in length. Broken pieces and torn
components, seed, fertilizers and other components
or uneven ends shall not acceptable.
throughout the mix.
6. Thickness of cut
6. Equipment used for integrated growing medium/seed
application shall be purpose-built, with a pneumatic blower a. Sod shall be cut at a uniform growing media
unit and computer-calibrated seed injection system thickness [excluding top growth and thatch] of
capable of simultaneously applying growing medium and 15mm (0.6in.) plus or minus 6mm (0.25in.)
seed uniformly over the whole area without significant or by special order.
variation in the mix. The application equipment is usually 7. Strength of sod
truck mounted and shall have appropriate distribution
equipment such as hoses to enable uniform distribution a. Sod shall have a fibrous root system strong
throughout the area to be covered. enough that a standard sized section can support
its own weight without damage or tearing when
suspended vertically by holding up the upper two
8.2.4. SOD corners.
1. All sod shall be suited to the locality, site conditions, and 8. Moisture content
intended function of each project or area, and
specification. a. Sod shall not be harvested or transplanted when
excessive moisture or dryness will result in
2. Grass mixture in sod: supplier’s standard sod [No. 1 and damage to, or failure of the sod.
No. 2 Grade] shall be grown from certified seed of 9. Grass height
improved turf cultivars registered for sale in Canada and
suited to its regional requirements and its intended use. a. he height of the grass in the sod at the time of
harvesting shall be between 40mm (1.5in.) and
3. Premium No.1 and standard No. 2 specialty or custom 60mm (2.5in.) except where otherwise specified.
sod shall be as specified or as certified by the supplier,
composed of a single variety or combinations of varieties 10. Thatch
of improved turf cultivars registered for sale in Canada,
a. 13mm (0.5in.) of thatch (uncompressed) is
and suited to its regional requirements and its intended
acceptable. Commercial grade is exempt.
use.
11. Diseases, fungi, nematodes, insects
4. Specialty sod mixes may include:
a. Sod shall be reasonably free from visible diseases,
a. Agrostis capillaris [Colonial Bentgrass] detrimental fungi and damaging nematodes, and
b. Grostis palustris [Creeping Bentgrass] soil-born insects, to the extent that with installa-
tion methods and establishment maintenance [as
c. Estuca arundinacea [Tall Fescue]

82 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

 described in this section, and Section 9, Poa annua [Annual Bluegrass].|
Landscape maintenance], new turf will not
deteriorate due to such causes.
12. Weeds, invasive and noxious plants 8.2.6. FIELD [PASTURE] SOD

a. All sod shall be free from plants designated as 1. Field sod is all sod that does not meet the requirements
noxious weeds by Agriculture Canada or by for nursery sod. It may consist of sod lifted from pastures
provincial authorities. or meadows.
b. Nursery sod shall be free of broadleaf weeds,
invasive species, and undesirable grasses to the 8.2.7. WATER
extent required for each quality grade.
c. Field sod shall contain no more than 10 weeds per 1. Water used in hydraulic seeding and irrigation shall be
10 m2 (100sq.ft.2). free of any impurities that may have an injurious effect on
the success of seeding or germination or may be harmful
to the environment.
8.2.5. NURSERY [CULTIVATED] SOD
2. Irrigation shall be scheduled to meet the needs of all
1. Nursery [cultivated] sod shall be quality sod planted on
phases of the project.
cultivated agricultural land and grown specifically for sod
purposes. 8.3. EXECUTION
2. Cultivated sod shall be mown regularly and otherwise 8.3.1. SEEDING
maintained to obtain reasonable quality and uniformity.
1. Scheduling
3. Nursery sod shall be grown from certified seed of
improved turf cultivars registered for sale in Canada a. Seeding should be carried out during periods
[except as noted for No. 3 commercial grade]. when seasonal conditions provide successful
germination and continued growth of all species
4. Requirements specific to the three quality grades of of seed in the grass mix.
nursery sod:
b. All seeding should be conducted during calm
a. No. 1 Premium Grade: Premium grade sod shall weather and shall be undertaken when growing
contain only the species and varieties of grasses media is free of ground frost, snow, and standing
identified on the supplier’s certificate or sales slip, water.
and will be free of weeds, invasive species, or c. Hydroseeding shall not be carried out during
foreign grasses, and relatively free of Poa annua periods of moderate to heavy rainfall.
[Annual Bluegrass].
2. Methods
b. No. 2 Standard Grade: Standard grade sod shall
show no visible broadleaf weeds when viewed a. Seed shall be applied by method A [mechanical
from a standing position; the turf shall be visibly dry seeding], method B [hydroseeding] or
consistent with no obvious patches of foreign Method C [terraseeding] unless otherwise
grasses, and relatively free of Poa annua [Annual specified.
Bluegrass]. In no case may the total amount of
b. Hand seeding shall only be carried out when
foreign grasses exceed 2 percent of the total
patching limited areas of lawns or where site
canopy for any 10m2 (100ft2) of turf.
conditions preclude the above two methods.
c. No. 3 Commercial grade: Commercial grade sod
3. Rates of application
is any nursery sod that does not meet the require-
ments for premium or standard grades. a. Rates of application of seed species mixtures,
Commercial grade sod may be composed of hydromulch, and other components shall be
grasses from non-certified seed, or of unknown based on an analysis of the season, climate,
origin, and may contain noticeable amounts of

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 83

 terrain, growing medium, and establishment and and shall not be removed or altered.
maintenance conditions for class, and intended ii. Be thoroughly cleaned prior to any and all
use of lawn. seeding applications.
4. Method A [mechanical dry seeding] iii. Be capable of sufficient agitation to mix the
a. The required fertilizer shall be uniformly applied materials into homogeneous slurry and to
at the rate required and worked well into the maintain the slurry in a homogeneous state
growing medium by hand cultivating, raking, or until it is applied.
discing and harrowing to a minimum depth of iv. Have discharge pumps and gun nozzles
50mm (2in.). capable of applying the mulch slurry
b. All grass seed, nurse crop seed, and fertilizer shall uniformly over the designated areas.
be measured accurately prior to application. e. After charging, no water or other material shall
c. Seed and fertilizers shall be applied evenly by be added to the mixture in the hydromulcher.
means of an accurately calibrated, approved f. Water slurry and other components should not be
mechanical dry seeder at the rate required, or as left in the tank for more than four hours unless
specified. required for specific purposes of application.
d. Seed shall be applied in two intersecting direc-
tions, except where conditions dictate seeding in g. Wildflower seed, if required, should be applied
one direction only. prior to or during grass hydroseeding.
e. Seeded areas [particularly for Class 1 and 2 lawns h. The wildflower seed mix shall be such that it
and smaller areas] should be lightly raked and meets the requirements of the Canadian Food
rolled after seeding to provide suitable contact Inspection agency and be free of any invasive
between seed and growing medium. plant species or potentially invasive species.
f. Mulch may be applied [particularly for Class 3
i. Hydroseeding shall be done with care so that the
lawns and larger areas] with seed or following
fertilizer in solution does not come in contact
seeding with an approved mulcher. No area shall
with the foliage of any trees, shrubs, or other
be seeded more than can be mulched on the
susceptible vegetation. Seed or mulch shall not be
same day. The mulch shall be applied to form a
sprayed on areas or on objects not expected to
uniform mat over the entire seeded area.
grow grass.
5. Method B [hydroseeding] j. Existing site equipment, roadways, landscaping,
reference points, monuments, markers, struc-
a. The quantities of each of the materials to be
tures, and vehicles shall be protected from
charged into the hydroseeder/mulcher tank shall
over-spray damage.
be accurately measured either by mass or by
mass- calibrated volume measurements. k. Over-spray or damage that occurs during hydro-
b. Materials for hydroseeding shall be added to the seeding shall be documented, reported and
tank while it is being filled with water, and in the promptly rectified.
following sequence: seed, fertilizer, and where
applicable, mulch. l. When applied, the hydromulch shall be applied
uniformly and in such a manner as to prevent
c. Materials shall be thoroughly mixed and agitated pooling and movement of the growing medium
into a homogeneous water slurry in the various surface and be capable of forming an absorptive
combinations described herein and shall be mat which will allow moisture to percolate into
distributed uniformly over the surface area with the underlying soil.
the hydroseeder/mulcher.
6. Method C [terraseeding]
d. Hydroseeding equipment shall:
i. Have the tank volume certified by an a. Prior to application of growing medium and seed,
identification plate or sticker that shall the pneumatic blower shall be calibrated to
be affixed in plain view on the equipment provide the specified amounts and proportions of

84 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

 growing medium and seed. Growing medium, or to contract specification.

b. Growing medium/seed mix shall be applied to a b. The growing medium under all sodded areas shall
uniform depth over the whole area. be spread evenly over the approved subgrade to
the specified depth. The minimum depth of
c. The depth of application shall be suited to the site growing medium under sodded areas shall be as
conditions and project requirements. Depths shown in Table T-5.3.5.5. Minimum depths of
between 25mm (1in.) and 75mm (3in.) may be growing medium.
specified. The depth shall be 50mm (2in.) or as
otherwise specified or instructed. 4. Fertilizer

d. Except where otherwise specified or instructed, a. Fertilizer shall be applied as identified by growing
the growing medium and seed shall cover the medium test results. Fertilizer shall be applied and
entire area and overlap adjoining ground by worked uniformly into the growing medium to a
300mm (1ft.). depth of 50mm (2in.) by cultivating, discing,
raking or harrowing at the rates specified. The
e. Existing site equipment, roadways, landscaping, fertilizer application shall be applied prior to, and
reference points, monuments, markers and within 48 hours of the sod installation.
structures shall be protected from over-spray
damage. 5. Laying sod

f. Over-spray or damage that occurs during a. Sod laying shall be performed during the active
terraseeding shall be documented, reported growing season for type of sod. Sod installed
and promptly rectified. during dry periods, at freezing temperatures
or over frozen growing medium shall not be
accepted. .
8.3.2. SODDING
b. Where the growing medium surface is dry,
1. Scheduling it shall be lightly moistened immediately before
laying sod.
a. Sod shall be installed within 24 hours of delivery,
and within 36 hours of harvest, unless otherwise c. Sod shall be laid in smooth even staggered rows,
authorized and a suitable preservation method is and closely knit together in such a manner that no
approved prior to delivery. open joints wider than 3mm (1/8in.) are visible,
joints are staggered a minimum of 250mm (10in.),
b. Sod not installed within 36 hours of harvesting or and no pieces are stretched or overlapped.
within 24 hours of delivery may be rejected if
there is any evidence of deterioration. d. Sod shall be laid smooth and flush with adjoining
grass areas, paving and top surface of curbs
c. The contractor shall coordinate sod laying with unless shown otherwise on the drawings.
growing media operations and with the installa-
tion of irrigation and lighting systems. e. New sod shall be protected from heavy foot
traffic during and after laying. Suitable protection
2. Preparation of grade in the form of broad planks and plywood shall be
a. Sites requiring sodding shall be prepared to meet placed if necessary, to prevent damage to sod, as
the requirements set out in Section 3, Site well as growing medium grade and level.
preparation and protection, and Section 4, f. Sod shall be cut where necessary only with a
Grading and drainage, or to contract sharp knife or edging tool.
specification.
g. The sodded area shall be rolled, tamped,
3. Growing medium or planked with plywood providing sufficient
a. Growing medium under all sodded areas shall be pressure, to provide a good bond between
to the requirements as set out in Section 5, sod and growing medium.

h. As sodding is completed in any one section, the

section shall be lightly rolled and then irrigated
CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 85
 immediately with sufficient amounts of water to of 60mm (2.5in.) for Class 1 lawns; 80mm (3in.)
thoroughly moisten the sod and the growing for Class 2 Grass; and not less than 90mm (3.5in.)
medium to prevent drying. The sod shall be for Class 3 Rough Grass.
irrigated as required in order to maintain a moist
root zone. The amount of water required will vary c. No more than 1/3 of the blade shall be cut at any
depending upon season, weather, temperature, one mowing on Class 1 or 2 lawns. Class 3 lawns
wind, slope and sod variety. The contractor shall shall be cut as required to maintain function and
be responsible for having adequate water avail- health of the grass.
able at the site prior to, and during, installation.
d. Edges of Class 1 and 2 lawns shall be maintained
i. Spacing of stakes or staples shall provide in a neatly trimmed condition.
secure anchorage of the sod to the ground
e. Heavy clippings that may interfere with the
or as specified by the manufacturer.
healthy growth of the sod shall be removed
j. On sloped areas with grades greater than 2:1, immediately after mowing and trimming. For
sod shall be laid at right angles to slopes or the Class 1 or 2 lawns mowing shall be such that
flow of water. Sodding shall start at the bottom there are only light clippings and should be left
of the slope and shall be laid crosswise and on the lawn.
staggered on the slope. Every row shall be
f. Regrading, re-seeding, or re-sodding shall be
pegged with wooden lath pegs of sufficient
carried out when necessary to restore damaged
length to provide secure anchorage of the sod,
or failing grass areas.
and at intervals of not more than 0.5m (1.5ft.).
Pegs shall be driven flush with the sod. 4. Irrigation shall be scheduled and carried out when
required and with sufficient quantities to prevent grass,
k. Before pedestrian traffic is permitted on the
seed, sod and underlying growing media from drying out.
turf, and after the turf is well rooted into the
growing medium, pegs or stakes shall be 5. When environmental conditions allow:
removed or driven at least 50mm (2in.) below
the sod surface. a. Any seeded areas that show deterioration or bare
spots shall be repaired immediately.
8.3.3. MAINTENANCE PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE
b. Any sodded areas showing shrinkage cracks shall
1. Reference Section 9, Landscape Maintenance. be top-dressed and seeded with a seed mix
matching the original.
2. Maintenance for seeded and sodded areas shall begin
immediately after seeding or sodding has been completed 6. Insect pest, weed and invasive plant control
and shall continue until the date set for signing off or
acceptance of the areas by the owner for further a. Reference Section 9, Landscape maintenance.
maintenance or as specified in the contract.
b. Lawns shall be inspected regularly for signs of
3. Maintenance shall include all measures necessary to insects, disease, and invasive and weed species.
establish and maintain grass in accordance with its class,
and in a vigorous growing condition, including, but not c. Weed control measures shall be carried out when
limited to the following: the density of weeds reaches 25 broadleaf weeds
per 100m2 (1,080sq.ft.) or to an acceptable
a. The first mowing shall not be attempted until: threshold for the class of lawn and in consultation
with the owner.
i. All seed has germinated, and new grass has
reached a mowing height of 75mm-90mm d. Weed control shall consist of integrated pest
(3in.-3.5in.); management [IPM] best practices and shall
reduce the density of weeds to an acceptable,
ii. All sod is firmly rooted and securely in place. established threshold for the class of lawn, in
consultation with the owner.
b. Mowing shall be carried out at regular intervals as
required, to maintain grass at a maximum height

86 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

 e. Invasive and noxious plant control measures shall
reduce the density of these plants to zero.

f. Insect pest controls shall be timely and applied as

appropriate for individual species.

g. Where chemical controls are used, products shall

meet municipal standards and bylaws and shall be
timed and applied as appropriate for individual
species.

8.3.4. PROTECTION

1. Temporary wire or twine fencing, barriers, barricades,

signage or other appropriate means shall be provided and
maintained where required to protect newly seeded and
sodded areas from damage, including but not limited to
erosion, pedestrian and vehicular traffic, or wildlife.

2. Except as required by the contract, or as otherwise

agreed, protective fencing shall be maintained in good
condition until such time as the lawn has been established
or until acceptance.

8.3.5. CLEANUP

1. All materials and other debris resulting from seeding and

sodding operations shall be removed promptly from the
job site upon completion of each phase of the project.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 87

LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE
9.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS include testing of soil and soil amendments, water
quality, air quality, temperature, rainfall, and plant
9.1.1. PURPOSE STATEMENT AND INTENT health etc. Advanced metrics measure ecological,
economic, social and cultural gaps, values and
1. The general intent of landscape maintenance is to contributions provided by a landscape.
provide the post installation care necessary so that all of
the landscape elements on the site, both horticultural and 3. Landscape maintenance operations shall follow and
non-horticultural, are maintained in good health or repair. implement ecologically sound, sustainable practices which
The standard of that care should provide maintenance includes protecting water sources from pollutants,
services so that plants and lawns are healthy and thriving, monitoring soil and soil amendments, providing plant
hardscape element, systems and accessories are in good health care, monitoring for invasive species, implementing
repair and the site is kept in the condition as per the Integrated Pest Management [IPM] practices, sourcing
design intent and/or to the owner expectations. and managing renewable resources, protecting green
infrastructure, natural assets and ecosystems, employing
2. With the effects of global climate change, the scope of qualified staff, using current and well maintained equip-
landscape maintenance has evolved and expanded to meet ment and tools with the lowest environmental impact.
the demands for sustainability and environmental
contribution. 4. This section is not meant to be, nor shall it replace, a
maintenance contract. This section shall be used in
a. A landscape maintenance plan is developed conjunction with all other sections of this Standard in the
specific to the site and should include details development and implementation of a landscape mainte-
such as tasks to be performed, methods, product nance plan suitable to a specific site or project.
application rates, frequencies and schedules.
The plan should establish goals and expectations. 9.1.2. RELATED REFERENCES,
STANDARDS AND LEGISLATION
b. A landscape maintenance contract should be
based on the landscape maintenance plan, and 1. Government
shall include scope, deliverables, duration and
price. a. NMS Section 32 93 10 Trees Shrubs and
Groundcover Planting
c. Landscape management provides the care and
maintenance of a landscape and its elements and b. NMS Section 32 92 23 Sodding
includes consideration and allowance for adapta-
tion as the landscape changes, grows, matures c. NMS Section 32 92 19.13 Mechanical Seeding
and/or is damaged. d. NMS Section 32 92 19.16 Hydraulic Seeding
d. A Landscape Commissioning Plan [LCx] is an e. NMS Section 32 01 90.23 Pruning
inclusive and collaborative process that establish-
es landscape performance goals at the beginning f. NMS Section 32 01 90.33 Tree Shrub Protection
of a project. The LCx provides guidance for
designing, installing and maintaining landscapes g. NMS Section 35 42 19 Preservation Water Courses
to meet those goals. The LCx plan should involve
both the landscape contractor and the site h. Government of Canada, Fertilizers Act 2015
maintenance staff to verify that the landscape is
i. Municipal and local authorities’ legislation and
maintained and performing as designed through
requirements: all work shall be completed in
time. The LCx systematic methodology and
accordance with local legislation and require-
process is scalable to any size landscape project.
ments, which may restrict or prohibit certain
e. Landscape performance metrics are tools and activities such as application of pesticides,
methodologies that measure the health, perfor- herbicides, and insecticides.
mance, changes and deviations from the design
j. Canadian Pest Control Products Act [PCPA]
intent of a landscape. Performance metrics

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 89

 k. Pest Management Regulatory Agency of Health 4. Development of LCx Plan [stand alone or for insertion
Canada into project documents] – includes the project docu-
ments, all approved changes to the scope of the project,
l. Canadian Plant Protection Act and the specifics of the landscape maintenance and/or
management plan and forms the basis for the Landscape
m. Canadian Fisheries Act maintenance contract.
n. Canadian Migratory Bird Regulations 5. Processes to meet performance goals – deliverables
o. Canadian Food and Drugs Act – establishes the tools, processes and path so that the
deliverables are met. Critical paths such as communica-
p. Canadian Pesticide Residue Compensation Act tions and reporting, risk assessment and performance
metrics are included.
q. The Pesticide Control Branch Legislation and
Procedures 6. Operations and Maintenance Manual [O&M] inclusions
– provides mechanism to transfer project knowledge by
r. The Canadian Weed Science Society compiling a comprehensive document that, upon project
close-out, provides the property owner or staff with a
2. Industry detailed landscape reference manual. This manual should
include the final project documents, all records, reports,
a. International Society of Arboriculture, Guide for
product data and drawings/illustrations and information
Plant Appraisal, 10th Edition
that is relevant to the landscape maintenance and/or
b. ANSI A300 Tree Care Operations - Tree, Shrub, operational procedures specific to the project or site. The
and Other Woody Plant Maintenance - Standard O&M Manual is scalable to any project size.
Practices
7. Scope of Landscape Commissioning – should include all
c. Ontario Landscape Tree Planting Guide or in part, the landscape elements, products and services
as identified within the Contract documents.
d. Snow & Ice Operations Risk Management Guidelines,
CNLA October 18, 2018 9.1.4. MAINTENANCE CONCEPT

9.1.3. THE LANDSCAPE COMMISSIONING PLAN 1. The maintenance concept for a site shall be based on
[LCX] [REFERENCE APPENDIX B] the original design intent, site use, the established
performance goals, and its current condition.
The LCx provides guidance as follows:
2. A maintenance concept for mature sites that are in
1. Project information – provides project name and good condition should simply be to maintain the status
location and identifies the owner, owner designate, quo by keeping plants healthy and preventing deteriora-
consultants and contractors. tion due to weather damage and normal wear and tear,
and to prevent the invasion of invasive plant species.
2. Statement from Owner Project Requirements [OPR]
project performance goals – outlines the project’s design 3. On some sites, the maintenance concept may incorpo-
intent, communicates specific design criteria and perfor- rate the idea of succession, for example, allowing native
mance goals, and includes a set of contract drawings and plants to take over rough grassed areas, or as maturing
project specifications. trees are thinned out or replaced over time. Where plants
are over-matured and in decline, a a replacement planting
3. LCx Team Populate and define roles and responsibilities. plan should be considered.
Identifies the team which can include the owner designate,
landscape architect or landscape designer, the landscape 4. Landscape maintenance plans developed for each site
contractor, the landscape maintenance contractor and a should support the intended maintenance concept as
member of the site or facility’s maintenance staff etc. agreed to by the owner or consultant.
Select team members suitable to the scope and scale of
the project. Larger projects should include a landscape
commissioning agent [LCxA] as the lead.

90 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

9.1.5. ESTABLISHMENT AND d. Trees, shrubs or groundcovers [deciduous,conifer-
WARRANTY MAINTENANCE ous, evergreen, perennial or annual]

1. Establishment maintenance is maintenance that is e. Green infrastructure [green roofs, living walls,
performed immediately after a landscape installation until bioswales and bioretention ponds etc.]
a project is accepted. Acceptance periods, [typically a
commercial project term], can vary at the discretion of the 6. Maintenance during warranty period is maintenance
owner, consultant, landscape architect or landscape that is performed after project acceptance. Warranty
designer. Reference Section 1.2.7. Warranty and Section periods should be for a 1-year period with extended
2.1.23. Administration of Warranty. warranties for larger caliper tree plantings. Warranty
periods can vary at the discretion of the owner, consul-
2. Establishment maintenance is critical for new landscape tant, landscape architect or landscape designer. Reference
installations as it focuses on plant establishment and Section 1.2.7. Warranty and Section 2.1.23. Administration of
providing the initial care and conditions to support the Warranty.
long-term success of the planting.
7. Maintenance for the project during the warranty period
3. Establishment maintenance includes the monitoring of is the responsibility of the contractor. At the end of the
the establishment [rooting/seeding] of invasive plant warranty period, the contractor shall notify the owner,
species whose typical source is from an adjacent property consultant, landscape architect or landscape designer to
or imported growing media. arrange for inspection and transfer of maintenance
responsibility to the owner. It is at this point that an O & M
4. Establishment maintenance should include provisions Manual should be included in the transfer of the project
for: within the landscape commissioning plan.
a. Watering to maintain optimum soil moisture 8. Maintenance during warranty should include
provisions for:
b. Mowing and trimming
a. Watering to maintain optimum soil moisture
c. Removing and controlling weeds and
invasive species b. Maintaining wells/saucers at base of trees
d. Monitoring for pests and diseases c. Mowing and trimming
e. Replacing or restoring damaged, missing or d. Cultivating non-mulched areas
disturbed mulch
e. Removing and controlling weeds invasive species
f. Applying an antidesiccant
f. Monitoring for pests and diseases
g. Pruning
g. Replacing or restoring damaged, missing or
h. Maintaining tree stakes and guys in suitable repair disturbed mulch
i. Fertilizing at specified application rates h. Applying an antidesiccant
j. emoving and replacing dead plant material i. Pruning
5. Establishment maintenance procedures apply to all j. Maintaining tree stakes and guys in suitable repair
vegetation, including:
k. Fertilizing at specified application rates
a. Seeded lawn areas [mechanical seeding,
hydro seeding or terraseeding] l. Removing and replacing dead plant material

b. Sodded lawn areas m. Removing tree supports

c. Re-vegetated naturalized areas [wildflowers and

grasses]

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 91

9.1.6. APPEARANCE STANDARDS f. Potential for establishment of invasive plants
from adjacent landscape sources
1. The consultant, or the owner and contractor in collabo-
ration, should set out the desired appearance standard for g. Growing media type, depth, fertility and
each area or landscape element of the site. structure. While these can often be “read” from
site conditions by an experienced contractor,
2. Appearance standards, if developed in enough detail, they should also be verified by soil and growing
should form either the basis of the maintenance contract media testing. Reference Section 5, Growing
and/or should be included in the maintenance plan. Medium.
9.1.7. MAINTENANCE LEVELS h. Subsoils/sub-strata
1. Tables T-9.1. to T-9.6. Maintenance Levels relate the i. Bodies of water: surface and subterranean
objective, appearance standard, typical location, plant
characteristics, traffic levels and maintenance practices j. Irrigation systems
for 6 levels of maintenance that shall support the develop-
ment of the maintenance contract and maintenance plan. k. Site drainage

2. These Tables provide the basis for the development of a l. Hard surfaces and non-horticultural elements
landscape maintenance plan and scheduling of work
m. Location of utilities
specific to each maintenance level.
n. Ecological function and sustainability
9.1.8. RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES AND FREQUENCIES FOR
MAINTENANCE LEVELS 1-6 3. Existing undesirable conditions such as plant disease,
poor drainage, or conditions that may lead to deteriora-
1. Table T-9.7. to Table T-9.12. Recommended Maintenance tion shall be documented and reported to the authority.
Procedures & Frequencies are intended as guidelines for
achieving the appearance standards set out in this section 4. Where existing features may be difficult, overly
of this Standard. The maintenance plan developed for each expensive, impractical or impossible to maintain
site [or each portion of a site] should be based on these at the stated level [e.g. Class 1 lawn under a dense
guidelines but should be adjusted as necessary to achieve conifer canopy] the maintenance contract should
the agreed upon appearance standard. include modified standards or remedial work in the
maintenance plan.
9.1.9. SITE EVALUATION
5. Table T-9.13. Site Maintenance Inspection Form should be
1. The consultant, owner and contractor in collaboration used to so that all aspects of the maintenance work are
should carry out a comprehensive site evaluation, considered.
including a site inventory, prior to the implementation
of the maintenance plan. 9.1.10. FIELD REVIEWS

2. Maintenance plans and contracts should be based on a 1. It is recommended that a field review be conducted by
thorough evaluation of the site including, but not limited the consultant, contractor and the owner or owner’s
to the following: representative at the end of the establishment period, and
prior to project acceptance and/or start of maintenance
a. Design intent and maintenance concept contract.
for the landscape
2. It is recommended that field reviews should take place
b Regional climatic conditions between the contractor and the owner or owner’s repre-
sentative annually or as required by the landscape mainte-
c. Site exposure to wind, rain and sun nance contract. Scheduling of field reviews should align
with transitions in seasonal maintenance operations and
d. Situation related to elevation [topography] timed to avoid undue delays in the execution of the work.
e Original and planned plant types and the 3. Guidelines for reviews should follow the guidelines as
requirements of each set out in Section 2.1.20. Field Reviews.

92 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

TABLE T-9.1. MAINTENANCE LEVELS -LEVEL 1 “WELL-GROOMED”

LEVEL 1. WELL GROOMED

Objectives Main objective is first-class appearance, always

impeccably clean and well groomed..

Appearance Standard Plants are kept “manicured” and in near-perfect

health and condition, lawns are healthy, uniformly
green and thoroughly groomed. The area is kept
substantially free of weeds and invasive plants, and
debris. Seasonal plantings kept lush and “very
showy” throughout the seasons. Noxious weeds
shall be eradicated.

Typical Locations • Often a small high-profile area of a larger site.

• Some residential entrance areas.
• Intimate outdoor areas where people are close
to the landscape. [e.g. courtyards]

Plant Characteristics Areas often include specimen plants, rare and

unusual plants, fine turf varieties.

Traffic Activity Levels Pedestrian [and other] traffic often limited; if not,
maintenance is very intensive to compensate for
the effects of traffic.

Maintenance Practices This level requires consistent, frequent attention to

many details that affect the health and appearance
of the garden. Maintenance may include extensive
work to upgrade conditions that would be
acceptable in most other landscapes. This level is
best achieved by a qualified professional who has
considerable expertise in establishing and adjusting
maintenance operations to suit the site.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 93

TABLE T-9.2. MAINTENANCE LEVELS - LEVEL 2 “GROOMED”

LEVEL 2. GROOMED

Objectives Main objective is to present a neat, orderly,

groomed appearance but not to the same
“near-perfect” standard as Level 1.

Appearance Standard Plants are healthy and vigorous. Lawns are healthy,
uniformly green and regularly mowed and trimmed
within accepted height range for the type. The area
has few weeds and no invasive or noxious weeds,
and little accumulated debris. Seasonal plantings
kept lush and “showy” during their seasonal bloom.

Typical Locations • May be a high-profile area of a larger site.

• Residential, commercial, institutional entry
or front areas.
• Most urban landscapes.
• Most rooftop gardens.
• Areas where people are close to the landscape.

Plant Characteristics Specimen plants may be included but not usually as

exotic as Level 1.

Traffic Activity Levels Pedestrian [and other] traffic often limited; if not,
then maintenance measures are taken to
compensate for the effects of traffic.

Maintenance Practices This level requires frequent, regular, routine

maintenance of a high intensity, with regular
monitoring and adjustment to keep high visual
quality. Most of the maintenance tasks require a
qualified professional for execution.

94 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

TABLE T-9.3. MAINTENANCE LEVELS - LEVEL 3 “MODERATE”

LEVEL 3. MODERATE
Objectives Main objective is a generally neat, moderately
groomed appearance, with some tolerance for the
effects of “wear and tear,” moderate traffic and
natural processes.
Appearance Standard Plants and lawns are healthy, lawns kept within
accepted height range for type. Invasive plants, with
the exception of listed noxious weeds, and debris are
acceptable within limits between regular visits.
Invasive and noxious weeds shall be eradicated.
Seasonal plantings are in good condition and
attractive at appropriate seasons.
Typical Locations • Most residential commercial and institutional
sites, especially those of medium to large size.
• Publicly visible sections of industrial sites.
• Areas for occasional recreational use.
• Areas viewed from a medium distance.
Plant Characteristics Areas may include some native or naturalized planting.
This may be modified for appearance or moderately
intensive use.

Traffic Activity Levels Moderate traffic tolerated; minor deterioration due to

traffic is acceptable. Maintenance may include
adjustments in response to such “wear and tear.”

Maintenance Practices Routine maintenance of moderate frequency and

intensity, with regular monitoring to avoid serious
deterioration. Many of the maintenance tasks require
a qualified professional for execution.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 95

TABLE T-9.4. MAINTENANCE LEVELS - LEVEL 4 “OPEN SPACE/PLAY”

LEVEL 4. OPEN SPACE/PLAY

Objectives Main objective is an orderly appearance, well adapted
to play and heavy traffic and with considerable
tolerance for the effects of such use.

Appearance Standard Appearance is secondary to functional requirements.

Areas are neat and functional. Vegetation retains
healthy, normal appearance. Grass kept within
accepted height range; trimming may be less
frequent. Invasive and noxious weeds shall be
eradicated.
Typical Locations • Some backyards.
• General park areas and open spaces.
• Play and recreation areas [sports fields not
included; these require specialized maintenance].
• Areas viewed from medium to long distance.
Plant Characteristics Plants and grasses are generally selected for
“toughness” and low maintenance needs. Plants native
to the site may be included if adaptable to intensive
use.
Traffic Activity Levels “Wear and tear” is tolerated except where it interferes
with the intended use or leads to severe deterioration.

Maintenance Practices Routine maintenance of moderate to low intensity.

Emphasis is on controlling deterioration and adapting
the site to activities. Vegetation is managed to
accommodate the activities. Some of the maintenance
tasks require a qualified professional for execution.

96 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

TABLE T-9.5. MAINTENANCE LEVELS - LEVEL 5 “BACKGROUND & NATURAL”

LEVEL 5. BACKGROUND & NATURAL

Objectives Main objective is to preserve habitat and ecosystem
functioning while accommodating low intensity
activities.

Appearance Standard Vegetation retains healthy, normal appearance.

Invasive plants shall be controlled, and noxious weeds
shall be eradicated.

Typical Locations • Often transitional areas from developed areas to

more natural areas.
• Meadows, forest, riparian areas, wetlands.
• Low intensity recreation areas, trails, etc.
• Areas generally viewed at a distance.
Plant Characteristics Native and suitable trees and shrubs, and grasses.

Traffic Activity Levels Deterioration [human-induced or natural] is

monitored and remediated as necessary.

Maintenance Practices Maintenance is low in order to maintain ecosystem

functioning and habitat quality. New native or natural
plantings in a more-or-less natural condition. Many of
the maintenance tasks require a qualified professional
for execution.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 97

TABLE T-9.6. MAINTENANCE LEVELS - LEVEL 6 “SERVICE & INDUSTRIAL”

LEVEL 6. SERVICE & INDUSTRIAL

Objectives Main objectives are to manage vegetation for
functional rather than aesthetic concerns and
protection of adjacent areas against impacts from
industrial or service activities.
Appearance Standard Vegetation is controlled to accommodate service
activity. Invasive plants are managed to prevent
spreading. Noxious weeds shall be eradicated.

Typical Locations Industrial sites and service areas away from

public view.

Plant Characteristics Native or re-vegetated trees and shrubs, controlled

grass. Areas where no vegetation is desired.

Traffic Activity Levels Deterioration is rectified as necessary.

Maintenance Practices Maintenance is primarily vegetation and invasive plant

control. Some of the maintenance tasks require a
qualified professional for execution.

98 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

TABLE T-9.7. RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES & FREQUENCIES
LEVEL 1 “WELL GROOMED”

PROCEDURE FREQUENCY

General:

Inspection Each time personnel on site

Litter Removal Weekly [and as necessary]

Reporting Monthly

Soil Testing Recommended Annually

Lawns:

Aerate As required, or conditions allow

De-thatch As required, or conditions allow

Edge Each time lawn is mown

Fertilize Minimum 3 - 4 times per year as per growing media

test results
Lime As per growing media test results

Mow 3 - 7-day intervals

Pest Control As per IPM protocol and provincial regulations

Repair Immediately when observed

Reseed/Overseed As required

Trim Each time lawn is mown

Water Twice weekly/or as required

Weed Control [see local bylaws]

Trees/Shrubs/Perennials:

Fertilize 3 times per year or as determined by

growing media test results
Mulch/Cultivate Biannually

Plant As required

Prune As required

Repair As required

Transplant As required

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 99

T-9.7. - CONTINUED
PROCEDURE FREQUENCY

Water As required [see local bylaws]

Weed Control See Table T-9.18.

Bedding Plants:

Bulbs

Fertilize As required

Renew Annually

Annuals

Change 1-- 4 times annually

Deadhead Twice weekly

Fertilize Monthly

Water Before wilting

100 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

TABLE T-9.8. RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES & FREQUENCIES
LEVEL 2 “GROOMED”

PROCEDURE FREQUENCY

General:

Inspection Monthly

Litter Removal Weekly [and as necessary]

Reporting Monthly

Soil Testing Every 2 or 3 years

Lawns:

Aerate As required, or conditions allow

De-thatch As required, or conditions allow

Edge 3 times per growing season

Fertilize Minimum 3 times per year as per growing

media test results
Lime As per growing media test results

Mow 7-day intervals

Pest Control As per IPM protocol and

provincial regulations
Repair Within 2 weeks

Reseed/Overseed As required

Trim Each time lawn is mown

Water Twice weekly or as required

[see local bylaws]
Weed Control See Table T-9.18.

Trees/Shrubs/Perennials:

Fertilize 3 times per year or as determined by

growing media test results
Mulch/Cultivate Biannually

Plant As required

Prune As required

Repair As required

Transplant As required

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 101

TABLE T-9.9. RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES & FREQUENCIES
LEVEL 3 “MODERATE”

PROCEDURE FREQUENCY

General:

Inspection Monthly

Litter Removal Weekly [and as necessary]

Reporting Monthly

Soil Testing To diagnose problems

Lawns:

Aerate As required, or conditions allow

De-thatch As required, or conditions allow

Edge Annually

Fertilize Minimum 2 times per year as per

growing media test results
Lime As per growing media test results

Mow 7 - 10-day intervals

Pest Control As per IPM protocol and provincial

regulations
Repair Within 2 weeks

Reseed/Overseed As required

Trim Each time lawn is mown

Water Not usually required; however,

it may be required to prevent plant loss
or deterioration under drought conditions
Weed Control See Table T-9.18.

Trees/Shrubs/Perennials:

Fertilize Annually

Mulch/Cultivate Annually

Plant To keep plant healthy

Prune As required

Repair As required

Transplant As required

102 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

T-9.9. - CONTINUED

PROCEDURE FREQUENCY

Water As required [see local bylaws]

Weed Control See Table T-9.18.

Bedding Plants:

Bulbs

Fertilize As required

Renew Every 2 years

Annuals

Change 2 times annually

Deadhead Once weekly

Fertilize As required

Water As required

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 103

TABLE T-9.10. RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES & FREQUENCIES
LEVEL 4 “OPEN SPACE/PLAY”

PROCEDURE FREQUENCY

General:

Inspection Monthly

Litter Removal Weekly [and as necessary]

Reporting Monthly

Soil Testing To diagnose problems

Lawns:

Aerate As required, or conditions allow

De-thatch As required, or conditions allow

Edge 3 times per growing season

Fertilize Annual application to suit site and/or

as per growing media test results
Lime As per growing media test results

Mow 10-14-day intervals

Pest Control As per IPM protocol and provincial

regulations
Repair Within 2 weeks

Reseed/Overseed As required

Trim Each time lawn is mown

Water Twice weekly or as required

[see local bylaws]
Weed Control See Table T-9.18.

Trees/Shrubs/Perennials:

Fertilize 3 times per year or as determined

by growing media test results
Mulch/Cultivate Biannually

Plant As required

Prune As required

Repair As required

Transplant As required

Water As required [see local bylaws]

Weed Control See Table T-9.18.

104 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

TABLE T-9.11. RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES & FREQUENCIES
LEVEL 5 “BACKGROUND & NATURAL”

PROCEDURE FREQUENCY

General:

Inspection 3 times per year

Litter Removal As required

Reporting 3 times per year

Soil Testing Annual

Repair As required

Tree hazard assessment and Every five years or when reported

abatement
Fire management To reduce the risk of ignition

Pest control To prevent loss of rare, endangered,

and threatened ecosystem or plant community.

Native tree and shrub planting As compensation for invasive plant removal or hazard
tree removal

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 105

TABLE T-9.12. RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES & FREQUENCIES
LEVEL 6 “SERVICE & INDUSTRIAL”

PROCEDURE FREQUENCY

General:

Inspection Biannually

Litter Removal As necessary

Reporting Biannually

Soil Testing To diagnose problems

Lawns:

Fertilize Not usually required

Lime Not usually required

Edge As required to prevent spread

Fertilize Minimum 3 times per year as per growing

media test results
Repair Rectify deterioration

Trim Not usually required

Water Not usually required

Weed Control See Table T-9.18.

Trees/Shrubs:

Fertilize Not usually required

Pest Control As required to prevent spread

Prune As required

Water Not usually required

Weed Control See Table T-9.18.

106 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

TABLE T-9.13. SITE MAINTENANCE INSPECTION FORM [SAMPLE]

Contract No. & Address:__________________ Inspected by:____________________

Client:_______________________________ Date of inspection:________________

Needs
Good Comments/Locations
Attention
Annual bulbs, seasonal colour and container plantings
• Plant condition
• Water/moisture
• Pest/disease monitor and control
• Cultivation/deadhead
• Fertilization
Shrubs, groundcover and perennials
• General condition
• Water/moisture
• Pest/disease monitor and control
• Pruning/shearing
• Weed control
• Cultivation
• Edging/mulch
• Fertilization
Trees
• General conditions
• Water/moisture
• Pest/disease monitor and control
• Wells/saucers/edging/mulch
• Pruning/repair
• Stakes/wires/anchors
• Base damage/girdling
• Fertilization
Lawns
• General appearance
• Mowing height
• Water/moisture
• Edging & trimming
• Pest/disease monitor and control
• Weed control
• Fertilization
Paved/Graveled/Bare Areas
• Surface condition

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 107

Contract No. & Address:__________________ Inspected by:____________________
Client:_______________________________ Date of inspection:________________

Needs
Good Comments/Locations
Attention

• Weed control
• Curbs/stops/dividers
Irrigation System
• Heads/risers
• Pressure
• Coverage
• Controllers & settings [schedule]
Drains/Ditches/Water Courses
Furnishings/Fixtures
Litter/Cleanup
Other

108 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

4. A field review should be scheduled prior to end of work should include a description of any special
contract. procedures to be included in the work.

9.1.11. SCHEDULING c. Payment procedures that may include lump sum,

unit prices, monthly fee or other methods, a
1. Maintenance operations shall be carried out on a schedule of progress payments, final payments
predetermined schedule suited to the owner and the and holdbacks.
contractor, so that the intended level of maintenance
performance requirements is being met. d. Procedures for reporting and documenting site
visits, work conducted, extra work completed,
2. Operations shall be such that they suit the plants needs materials and supplies used, details of remedial
for the regional climate and local growing seasons and work or upgrading, and conditions requiring
conditions. extra attention.
9.1.12. MAINTENANCE PLAN e. Insurance requirements
1. Following the initial site examination and determination f. Testing requirements
of the maintenance concept and levels, a maintenance
plan should be developed in collaboration with the owner, g. Arbitration procedures
consultant and contractor, and shall be specifically suited
to each site, or, if necessary, to each area within the site. h. Specifications, proposal calls, tender documents,
and contracts should be written by a person who
2. The maintenance plan may be developed by the mainte- has a thorough knowledge of the site and the
nance contractor as a proposal to the owner, consultant or maintenance operations.
property manager, or may be developed by the owner or
the consultant as the basis of a tender call. i. Where this Standard is incorporated into a
maintenance contract and this Standard conflicts
3. Maintenance plans should clearly document the with the provisions of the contract, the provisions
expected appearance standard for each element of the of the contract shall govern.
landscape or should document the frequency and details
of each maintenance operation. j. Maintenance contracts may be developed using
the procedures in Table T-9.15. Developing a
4. Table T-9.14. Maintenance Plan summary provides a maintenance contract.
quick reference for developing the detailed maintenance
plan. k. Section 2, Contract Administration
Recommendations should be referenced when
9.1.13. CONTRACTS developing a contract.

1. This Standard is not intended to be a contract 9.1.14. DOCUMENTATION AND REPORTING

document.
1. If a Landscape Commissioning Plan isn’t used, a logbook
2. A contract for maintenance of a specific site should should be maintained, and reporting procedures observed
clearly state and include, but not be limited to: as recommended in Section 2.1.5. Reports.

a. Definitions of responsibilities [e.g. who performs 2. At each maintenance visit, personnel should record in a
what tasks]. logbook the operations carried out, IPM records, materials
used, damage to horticultural and non-horticultural
b. Scope of the maintenance plan including a elements, and any conditions that require attention or
complete listing of maintenance operations, monitoring.
timing and frequency of each operation, and a
workable standard for the appearance to be 3. A summary of the information should be submitted as
maintained. In some cases, a description of the required by the contract to the owner or consultant.
materials [i.e. quantities and sizes of plants, type Reference Table T-9.16. Landscape maintenance monthly
of fertilizer, brands of equipment, etc.] and report [sample], as a guide.
equipment to be used can help to identify a
particular level of maintenance. The scope of 4. Where conditions require immediate attention, they

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 109

TABLE T-9.14. MAINTENANCE PLAN SUMMARY [SAMPLE]

Contract No:________________________________ Maintenance Level: _______________________

Site Location:________________________________ Work to Start:___________________________
Owner’s Representative:________________________ Work to End:____________________________

Maintenance Levtel Location, Quantity,

Elements Operations
/ Special Requirements Area, Frequency
Lawns • Mow
• Trim/edge
• Water
• Fertilize
• Other
Trees & shrubs • Prune
• Water
• Fertilize
• Edging
• Wells /Saucers
• Mulch
• Other
Groundcovers • Prune
and perennials • Water
• Fertilize
• Edging
• Mulch
• Other
Annuals, bulbs, seasonal colour • Water
and container plantings • Fertilize
• Change out/Rotation
• Edging
• Mulch
• Deadhead
Weed control

Pest control

Irrigation • Automatic
• Manual

Hardscape [description]

Elements [description]

Other [description]

Other [description]

Special scheduling requirements

110 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

shall be brought to the owner’s attention immediately. TABLE T-9.15. DEVELOPING
5. The contractor should inspect and record site condi-
A MAINTENANCE CONTRACT
tions regularly, adjusting maintenance operations to suit
observed conditions. Table T-9.13. Site Maintenance 1. Initial site examination
Inspection Form [Sample], should be used as a guide to a. Determine maintenance concept &
record each site visit appearance standards.
b Determine maintenance levels.
6. The contractor should report maintenance procedures.
Table T-9.16. Landscape Maintenance Monthly Report should c. Determine special
be used as a guide document for reporting maintenance conditions,undesirable conditions,
procedures. and remedial action.
d. Evaluate plant health.
7. Notification of major recommended maintenance e. Evaluate soil conditions by
procedures should be provided to the owner or consultant
conducting a soil test.
a minimum of 1 week before proceeding.
f. Complete an inspection report.
8. Any necessary work identified in the contract to be
completed at an extra cost should be reported and a cost 2. Development of a maintenance plan
provided for the proposed work, for approval by the owner a. Appearance standards or procedures
or the owner’s representative, prior to commencement.
and frequencies.
9.1.15. REPORTING DAMAGE OR DETERIORATION b. Maintenance plan summary sheet.

1. The maintenance contractor shall not be responsible for 3. Preparation of specification & tender documents
inspecting the site for general hazards.
[or documentation of collaborative or negotiated
2. Any dangerous or potentially dangerous situations agreement]
should be documented when observed. Notification a. Outline the specifics of the
should be given where necessary to the owner and/or the maintenance to be performed.
public agencies or authorities having jurisdiction. For b. Review documents and pricing
example, public utilities and environmental protection structure.
agencies, etc.

3. Deterioration of any element of the site or unsafe 4. Contract

conditions shall be documented and reported to the a. Review with legal representative,
owner or the authority having jurisdiction. if required.
4. Damage to property site elements or the environment b. Review with owner.
shall be documented, reported, and secured for safety
until completely repaired.
a. This Standard can never override provisions of a
5. Reference Section 9.1.16.3. Cold Climate Factors. contract; however, there are usually three distinct
periods to be considered:
9.1.16. COLD CLIMATE FACTORS

1. General: The contractor should be aware that this i. Before acceptance and takeover by owner,
definition of winter damage is not always reflected in the this date should correspond with substantial
contract documents and should take care so that this item performance. In most cases, the contractor
is dealt with specifically. maintains and is wholly responsible for the
plants.
2. Legal: The issue of plant loss and related liability falls
within the existing framework of contract law and ii. During one-year warranty period: In most
insurance. cases owner is responsible for maintenance
and protection, unless the contract includes
one-year maintenance by contractor.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 111

TABLE T-9.16. LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE MONTHLY REPORT [SAMPLE]

Contract #:

Client:

Address:

Month:

Elements Work completed this month Needing attention

Annuals, bulbs, seasonal colour,

container plantings

Shrubs, Groundcovers and

Perennials

Trees & Specimen Plants

Lawns

Paved, Graveled & Bare Areas

Other

Contractor is responsible to make good for e. Extreme temperature fluctuation

faulty products or workmanship. f. Constant freezing and thawing

iii. After warranty period: In most cases, the g. Plants not hardy for the location
owner is responsible.
h. Extreme winds
3. The following conditions and factors can contribute to
cold climate plant failure: i. Extreme high temperatures

a. Snap frost 4. NOTE: The above conditions and factors are intended
as a basis for consideration and should be carefully
b. Dehydration reviewed regarding how these conditions affect plants and
plant maintenance. Guidelines for protective measures
c. Wvaterlogging should be developed where possible. Data for evaluating
d. Excessive below average sustained frost
112 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020
the above factors should be based on temperatures, etc. as sodium chloride, calcium chloride, and
recorded on site and on data from the nearest magnesium chloride can cause salt injury to
Environment Canada station, with adjustment for such plant material when it comes in contact
factors as orientation and elevation. Reference Section with the foliage or enters soil and is
6.1.5. Cold Climate Factors. absorbed by the root zone.

5. Recommendations: To reduce losses due to winter • Snow and ice load on plant material can
damage, the following measures are recommended: cause damage, disfiguration and plant loss.

a. The landscape contractor shall: ii. Perform services to mitigate damage to

landscapes such as:
i. Carry out maintenance procedures prior to
turnover to the owner such that plants are • Identify and locate snow push/melt zones
well established and thriving. [setbacks] to minimize injury or damage to
hardscape and softscape installations, and
that preserves safety for site users.
ii. Provide protective measures until turnover
to the owner. • Follow recommended product application
rates.
iii. Protect plants from the damaging effects of 9.1.17. QUALITY OF WORK
winter wind, snow load and ice, install winter
wrap using a combination of support stakes 1. All maintenance work shall be completed to this
and either winter netting, burlap or twine. Standard and/or the contract documents.

9.1.18. ENVIRONMENTAL AND SITE

iv. Protect root zones of plants vulnerable to
ELEMENT PROTECTION
frost heave by applying a 4” - 6” loose layer
of an organic, shredded mulch, straw or leaf 1. All existing and new horticultural and non-horticultural
litter. elements including plants, growing media, water bodies,
site services, curbs, paving, structures, finishes and all
v. Protect plants by creating mounds using an other features, shall be protected against damage during
organic, shredded mulch, straw or leaf litter all phases of the maintenance work. Reference Section 3
to protect tender plants such as roses or any Site Preparation And Protection.
woody plant, at the end of the season.
2. Should damage occur as a result of maintenance
vi. Apply an antidesiccant [antitranspirant] procedures, it shall be documented and reported, and shall
agent, commonly used for broadleaf be promptly and completely repaired by the parties
evergreens, conifers and tender stems of responsible.
deciduous plants, to help prevent 3. Appropriate measures shall be taken to prevent spillage
dehydration of foliage. [Applied as an of fuels, fertilizers, toxic materials, or toxic wastes. Where
emulsion, the product coats the foliage with a the use of such materials is necessary, the contractor shall
protective layer. This protective layer will provide adequate containment facilities and cleanup
wear off so multiple applications may be equipment are available and utilized as required.
necessary.]
4. Toxic or waste materials, fuels and fertilizers shall not be
b. The snow and ice contractor shall: dumped on site, into storm drains, or watercourses.

5. Toxic or waste materials, fuels and fertilizers shall not be

i. Perform snow and ice management services
stored adjacent to a watercourse or in a location where
using products and techniques that minimizes
spillage could result in seepage into a storm drain or
plant injury or loss, and consider the watercourse.
following:
6. Toxic or waste materials, fuels, fertilizers and other
• The use of chemical de-icing product such material shall be stored and disposed of in accordance

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 113

with municipal, provincial and federal regulations, and in a and meet all federal, provincial and regional/municipal
manner acceptable to the owner. regulations and bylaws.

7. Toxic or waste materials, fuels, pesticides, fertilizers and 2. Handling and application of all chemicals, including but
other material shall be disposed of in accordance with not limited to pesticides including herbicides, fungicides,
municipal, provincial and federal regulations and in a and insecticides, shall be undertaken in accordance with,
manner acceptable to the owner. and comply with, municipal bylaws, provincial, and federal
legislation.
8. Environmental and site protection shall be undertaken
to this section with reference to Section 2, Contract 3. Application and disposal of chemicals shall comply with
Administration, and Section 3, Site Preparation and all applicable legislation and regulations, including, but not
Protection. limited to, the Canadian Pest Control Products Act,
Fisheries Act, and Food and Drugs Act and Regulations;
9.1.19. SAFETY as well as any provincial, municipal or regional district
legislation.
1. Maintenance procedures shall be carried out in a manner
that complies with all applicable laws, bylaws, rules, 4. The applicator shall wear protective clothing and/or
regulations and lawful orders of any public authority equipment that meets all applicable standards and
having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property to regulations and is suited to the task being performed.
protect them from damage, injury or loss.
5. Health and safety shall be considered in the develop-
2. All safeguards for safety and protection, as required by ment of maintenance procedures, particularly with regard
Canada Occupational Health and Safety Regulations, and to food, potable water, play areas, and play equipment.
other regulatory bodies, shall be established and main-
tained while maintenance work is in progress. 9.1.21. WATER

3. Suitable protective clothing and equipment shall be 1. Water used for landscape maintenance shall be
available and worn as required by the work activity, and substantially free from organic or chemical contaminants
during the application of chemical and biological controls. detrimental to humans, animals, healthy plant growth,
and the environment.
4. Use of equipment and products shall be as per the
manufacturer’s recommendations taking into account the 2. Accurate information regarding the water available for
need to protect all horticultural and non-horticultural maintenance purposes should be contained in the
elements of the site. maintenance contract. This information should include:

5. Chemical and biological controls shall be applied by a a. Who [owner or contractor] is to provide
qualified professional following label instruction and using distribution equipment [such as hoses, sprinklers
appropriate, well-maintained and properly calibrated etc.], and who is responsible for watering.
equipment. b. Existence and details of any automatic irrigation
6. Storage, handling and disposal of chemical products system [if applicable].
shall follow guidelines as set out by applicable federal and c. Locations of hose bibs.
provincial legislation, and Workplace Hazardous Materials d. Available water pressure, temperature and
Information System 2015 [WHMIS 2015]. volume rates.
7. Treatment areas shall have barricades, safety guards, and e. Restrictions on the use of water.
warning devices, and shall be maintained whenever f. Requirements for backflow prevention device.
necessary for the protection of persons and property as
required by the manufacturer, provincial and municipal
bylaws. 3. Water and watering shall meet the requirements of
Section 2, Contract Administration.
8. Reference Section 2, Contract Administration.
4. Reference Table T-9.17, The Practical Chart For
9.1.20. CHEMICALS Determining Soil Moisture.

1. Chemicals used during the course of maintenance

procedures shall be limited to those that are registered
114 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020
9.1.22. INSECT PESTS, DISEASE, INVASIVE i. Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute
AND NOXIOUS PLANT CONTROLS
9.2. PRODUCTS
1. The principles of Integrated pest Management [IPM]
should be applied to monitor and control insect pests, 9.2.1. GENERAL
plant diseases, and invasive and noxious plants. IPM
practices should include a combination of physical, 1. Products and materials used in landscape maintenance
cultural, biological, and chemical methods chosen for the shall meet all requirements as set out in this Standard, the
most effective, environmentally safe, and economical contract documents or the specification. Reference:
control method. Reference Section 11, Integrated Pest and
a. Section 5, Growing Medium
Vegetation Management.
b. Section 6, Plants & planting
2. Inspections for growth of invasive and noxious plants
c. Section 7, Mulching
should be ongoing with frequent removal if they appear.
Stopping the spread of designated invasive species should d. Section 8, Seeding & Sodding
be a priority. e. Section 10, Irrigation Systems
9.1.23. NON-HORTICULTURAL ELEMENT f. Section 13, Landscape Over Structures
MAINTENANCE g. Section 14, Interior Plantscape
1. Non-horticultural elements within the site such as
paving, signage, lighting, curbing, buildings and other 9.2.2. EQUIPMENT
structures, fences, play equipment, art works, and foun-
tains should be maintained to standards that are consistent 1. Equipment shall be suited to the work, and shall be
with the selected maintenance level. clean, maintained in good condition, and accurately
calibrated. Safety devices and guards shall be in place and
2. Deterioration or unsafe conditions in any element of functioning in compliance with the Canada Occupational
the site shall be documented and reported as observed. Health and Safety Regulations.
3. Standards developed by suitable trade and professional 2. All equipment and hand tools shall be cleaned between
organizations should be considered when developing sites to prevent the spread of plant diseases and invasive
maintenance procedures for elements not covered in this or noxious weed seeds or reproductive parts.
Standard. Some examples are:
3. Pruning equipment shall be cleaned and sanitized
a. Paint between plants where plant disease is suspected or
i. Canadian Painting Contractors Association probable.
Specification Manual.
4. Equipment shall be handled and maintained to minimize
b. Asphalt or eliminate the risk of spillage, inadvertent spraying or
misdirection of oil, gasoline, herbicides, pesticides, or
i. Canadian Technical Asphalt Association
other chemicals.
c. Concrete
5. Cutting and pruning equipment shall be kept sharp,
i. Canadian Portland Cement Association clean, and maintained according to manufacturer’s
recommendations.
ii. Canadian Standards Association
6. Equipment used for the application of fertilizers shall be
d. Play Areas well maintained, clean and suitable for product application,
i. Canadian Institute of Child Health and correctly calibrated.

e. Paving 7. Personal protective equipment shall be used as required,

be in good condition, suitable e for the tasks conducted
and meet all applicable federal and provincial legislation.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 115

9.3. EXECUTION - PLANTINGS 6. Irrigation plans for an area or site shall be based on soil
type and condition, regional climate, microclimates, and
9.3.1. GROWING MEDIUM TESTING plant types.
1. Growing medium testing shall meet all the requirements 7. Irrigation should supplement natural rainfall so that soil
of this Standard. Reference Section 2, Contract moisture content is maintained at 50 percent to 100
Administration, and Section 5, Growing medium. percent of field capacity. Reference Table T-9.17. The
Practical Chart For Determining Soil Moisture. The use of
2. Growing medium testing should be carried out prior to smart controllers or soil moisture-based irrigation sensors
formulating a fertilizer plan and should be conducted is recommended.
periodically to determine exact fertilizer, lime and amend-
ment requirements. Growing medium fertility should be 8. The contractor should supplement natural rainfall as
monitored for changes that may affect plant health and to required by ornamental trees and shrubs throughout the
update fertilizer application rates. growing season.
3. Growing medium testing should be undertaken regular- 9. Irrigation of ornamental beds should be suitable to the
ly for maintenance Level 1. [It is not always necessary in plant type for established plantings and to the depth of
single-family residential landscapes, but is a useful diag- the entire root zone for new plantings.
nostic tool if problems are encountered. Soil testing may
be useful in some Level 2 and 3 maintenance areas.] 10. Ornamental and exposed evergreen plants in areas
with cold, dry winters should be irrigated deeply in fall
4. Testing on a well-established turfgrass area should be before dormancy to reduce desiccation damage during
carried out on a regular basis; representative sampling winter.
every 2 or 3 years should be adequate.
11. There may be areas within the site that require irrigation
5. Growing medium testing should be considered as a through the winter, such as enclosures, planting under
useful diagnostic tool where plant health concerns are overhangs, pots and planters. These situations should be
encountered. identified in the contract and appropriate measures for
irrigating should be formulated.
6. A recognized testing laboratory, using standard
methods shall conduct growing medium testing. Test 12. Growing media in ornamental turfgrass areas should
results should be expressed in consistent form, be monitored regularly and irrigated as required to
units and format. Reference Section 5, Growing Medium. supplement rainfall. The growing media should be
saturated to 75 percent of the depth of the root zone
9.3.2. IRRIGATION at each watering.
1. During the first and second growing seasons, new plants 13. Frequent, light watering of ornamental turfgrass
shall be monitored and watered as local environmental should only be conducted when encouraging the
conditions demand and to the extent the plants are germination of newly seeded and sodded areas.
healthy.
14. Plants and grasses native to an area or selected for the
2. Watering shall be such that the water penetrates the area’s cultural conditions should not require irrigation
full depth of the root zone. beyond the establishment maintenance period.
3. Soil moisture shall be monitored during the growing 15. Where rainfall is insufficient to replenish the water
season, and watering shall be undertaken more frequently reserves of mature trees, or where trees are surrounded
if plants are reaching the permanent wilting point. by paving or other factors that prevent water penetration,
the contractor should use probes for measuring growing
4. Scheduled applications of water shall be missed only
medium saturation, and/or install tree wells and then
when rainfall has penetrated the full depth of the root
provide supplemental water as required.
zone.
9.3.3. FERTILIZING
5. Water and watering shall meet the requirements of
Section 2, Contract Administration. Reference Table T-9.17. 1. Growing medium testing should be carried out when
The Practical Chart For Determining Soil Moisture. formulating a fertilizer plan and should be performed
regularly thereafter to monitor fertility levels and adjust

116 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

TABLE T-9.17. THE PRACTICAL CHART FOR DETERMINING SOIL MOISTURE

Amount of Moisture Readily Available to Plants

Close to 0% Little or no moisture available

50% or less Approaching time to irrigate
50% to 75% Enough available moisture
75% to field capacity Plenty of available moisture capacity
At field capacity Soil will not hold any more water [after draining]
Above field capacity Unless water drains out, soil will be waterlogged
Soil Type: SAND [gritty when moist, almost like beach sand when dry]
Moisture Feel & Appearance
Close to 0% Dry, loose single-grained; flows through fingers
50% or less Still appears to be dry; will not form a ball with pressure
50% to 75% Still appears to be dry; will not form a ball with pressure
75% to field capacity Tends to stick together slightly; sometimes forms a very weak ball under pressure
At field capacity Upon squeezing, no free water appears but moisture is left on hand
Above field capacity Free water appears when soil is bounced in hand

Soil Type: SANDY LOAM [gritty when moist; dirties fingers; contains some silt & clay]
Moisture Feel & Appearance
Close to 0% Dry, loose; flows through fingers
50% or less Still appears to be dry; will not form a ball
50% to 75% Tends to ball under pressure but will seldom hold together
75% to field capacity Forms weak ball; breaks easily; will not become slick
At field capacity Upon squeezing, no free water appears but moisture is left on hand
Above field capacity Free water is released with kneading
Soil Type: CLAY LOAM [sticky and plastic when moist]
Moisture Feel & Appearance
Close to 0% Dry clods that break down into powdery substance. Difficult to break;
50% or less sometimes has loose crumbs on surface
50% to 75% Somewhat crumbly; will hold together with pressure
75% to field capacity Forms a ball; somewhat plastic; will sometimes stick slightly with pressure
At field capacity Forms a ball and is very pliable; becomes slick readily if high in clay
Above field capacity Upon squeezing, no free water appears but moisture is left on hand
Can squeeze out free water

Soil Type: CLAY [very sticky when moist; behaves like modeling clay]

Moisture Feel & Appearance

Close to 0% Hard, baked, cracked surface - hard clods
50% or less Somewhat pliable; will ball under pressure
50% to 75% Forms a ball; will ribbon out between thumb and forefinger
75% to field capacity Easily ribbons out between fingers; feels slick
At field capacity Upon squeezing, no free water appears but moisture is left on hand
Above field capacity Puddles and free water forms on surface

From: Harris, Richard, ARBORICULTURE Pub 1983 Prentice Hall, New Jersey p. 330

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 117

fertilizer application rates. 9.3.5. CULTIVATING

2. Plants shall be fertilized only as required to correct 1. Cultivation of growing medium should be conducted in
symptoms of nutrient deficiency, or as recommended ornamental and display planting beds to reduce invasive
based on the results of a growing medium test and visual plant growth, to improve air and water penetration of the
assessment. soil, to moderate soil temperature, and to improve the
appearance of the planting area.
3. Fertilizers should only be applied to provide plants with
nutrients necessary to obtain a desired healthy rate of 2. Depth of cultivation is determined by the type of
growth and quality of plant where nutrients are not growing medium and plant material and should be
naturally available in the growing medium. undertaken without causing damage to the roots of
desirable plants.
4. The following factors are among those that will identify
the requirement for supplemental fertilization: the desired 3. Cultivation depth should vary each time it is undertaken
quality of a landscape, the intensity of activity [including to prevent the formation of a soil pan.
maintenance activity] on or around a planted area, the
inability of a growing medium to retain nutrients, and the 9.3.6. MULCHING
amount of precipitation or irrigation water applied to the
1. Mulch type and application shall be to the
planting.
recommendations set out in Section 7, Mulching.
5. Fertilizers should be applied just prior to the period
2. Mulching should be undertaken to reduce and prevent
when plant nutrient requirements are at their highest.
invasive and noxious plant growth, to improve water
Apply fertilizers in a form and at a rate to supply a regular
retention in soil, to moderate soil temperature, and to
and continual source of nutrients throughout the growing
improve the appearance of the planting area.
season.
3. Mulch should not be applied too early in the spring as it
6. General nutrient levels are recommended in Section 5,
may slow growing medium warming and consequently
Growing Medium. Variations from these general nutrient
slow plant growth.
levels should be made based on soil test results and a
thorough knowledge of site conditions. 4. Impermeable plastic film is not recommended as a weed
control mat under mulches. Where a weed barrier is
7. Fertility needs of trees may differ from surrounding
desired, permeable woven or non-woven fabrics designed
areas and should be assessed by regular observation and,
for this purpose should be used.
where necessary, growing medium or tissue testing.
5. Where optimum plant growth is desired, such as in Level
8. Fertilizer application methods for trees including, but
1 “Well-Groomed” and Level 2 “Groomed” maintenance
not limited to pills, tablets, auguring and probes should
areas, more intensive maintenance measures such as
be selected to provide consistent distribution throughout
cultivation and organic mulches should be used.
the root zone.
Reference Section 9.3.6.6.
9.3.4. LIMING
6. Composted organic mulches such as compost, leaf
1. The growing medium of garden beds should be tested mulch, composted bark mulch, or well-rotted manure
for pH at the beginning of each growing season, should be worked into the soil with thorough cultivation
particularly in areas of high precipitation. when they are sufficiently decayed. These mulches provide
an organic soil amendment that improves the structure,
2. If necessary, dolomite lime shall be applied at rates fertility, and moisture-holding capacity of the soil.
recommended by growing media test results and/or by
product label, to bring the pH within the range set out in 7. Non-composted bark mulch:
Tables T-5.3.5.2., T-5.3.5.3. and T-5.3.5.4., Properties of
a. Should not be cultivated into the soil.
Growing Media.
b. Should not be used to replace vegetation as a sole
3. Application and timing of lime and fertilizer shall be ground cover.
determined by growing medium test results and
consideration of pH and nutrient levels. Consult with a
qualified professional to determine liming and
fertilization schedules.
118 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020
 c. Should be kept a minimum 10cm (4in.) back from regulated by provincial legislations. Regulations have
the crown of any plant [the point at which the been formulated to control their spread. These regulations
plant emerges from the ground] it should never shall be followed to eliminate these weeds during all
be mound ed up around the stem of the plant. maintenance work. Reference the Canadian Weed
d. Can inhibit the growth of plants, particularly Science Society for weed related resources throughout
smaller plants such as groundcovers. Canada. Reference Appendix D, National Voluntary Code of
Conduct for the Ornamental Horticulture Industry.
e. Should consist of chips and fines as outlined
in Section 7, Mulching. 4. Weed/invasive/noxious plant control consists of:
f. Shall be substantially free of invasive and noxious a. Biological control
plants, cedar bark, sticks and splinters of wood,
salts, and other contaminants that could be toxic b. Herbicides
to plants. c. Crop rotation
8. The settled depths of bark mulch should not exceed d. Cultivation/hoeing
10cm (4in.) around larger plants and 5cm (2in.) for smaller
e. Encouraging the growth of desired plants and
plants such as groundcovers. Where a layer of fresh mulch
reducing the growth of weeds
will cause these depths to be exceeded, some or all the old
mulch shall be removed before placing new mulch. f. Mulching/thatching
g. Preventing or reducing spread by roots, seeds or
9. Maintenance of mulch shall be maintained in the original
runners within the area
placement areas and topped up to replace depleted mulch
as identified in the contract documents and/or to this h. Preventing or reducing the entrance of weeds
Standard. into the area
i. Pulling by hand
9.3.7. INORGANIC DECORATIVE SURFACE
TREATMENTS j. Removing and disposing of weeds and plant pests
according to provincial legislations
1. Decorative surface treatments shall be maintained to
k. Soil aeration
preserve the intent of the original application and design.
l. Appropriate/adequate fertilizer
2. Decorative surface treatments using inorganic materials
m. Mowing
such as rock should not be used where they may have a
detrimental effect on plant growth by increasing reflected n. Appropriate/adequate watering
heat and reducing soil quality if worked into the soil.
5. The principles of integrated pest management should
9.3.8. WEED AND INVASIVE PLANT CONTROL be applied in controlling invasive plants. Methods used for
1. Weed as defined in this Standard refers to any plant weed control should be a combination of physical, cultural,
growing where it is not wanted and includes unwanted biological, and chemical methods selected for being the
plants in planting beds, unplanted areas, and paving, as most effective, safest, and economical control of invasive
well as those grass varieties that detract from the desired plants. Reference Section 11, Integrated Pest [IPM] and
appearance or function of lawn areas. Vegetation [IVM] Management.

2. Invasive plant as defined in this Standard refers to 6. Proactive horticultural practices and maintenance can
non-native plants that have been introduced to Canada reduce the need for more aggressive plant controls such
without the insect predators and plant pathogens that as the use of chemicals.
help keep them in check in their native habitats. Because 7. Weed/invasive plant control should be very thorough in
of their aggressive growth, invasive plants can be highly high level maintenance areas; intensity of controls is
destructive, competitive and difficult to control. reduced in lower level maintenance areas. All areas of the
3. “Noxious weeds” are those species that have been site should be monitored for potentially invasive weeds.
designated by an agricultural authority as one that is 8. Level 5, Background & Natural Areas, and Level 6,
injurious to agricultural or horticultural crops, natural Service & Industrial areas, weed control should consist of
habitats or ecosystems, or humans or livestock and are cutting back or mowing plants on a regular basis.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 119

9. Landscape sites shall be inspected routinely for weeds 13. Appropriate precautions shall be taken when using
with control operations scheduled and carried out accord- herbicides. The contractor shall take precautions to
ing to the established level of maintenance. prevent application of herbicides to non-target plants in
the landscape or surrounding environment.
10. The weed/invasive plant control standards identified in
this Standard assumes use of chemical control products 14. Control methods employed shall be limited to those
only as required, as identified in an integrated pest permitted by provincial and municipal bylaws and
management plan. If local regulations limit such controls, regulations.
these standards may not be achievable.
15. Table T-9.18. Weed Control Standards, outlines control
11. All areas shall have all weeds and invasive plants re- standards for the 6 maintenance levels.
moved prior to flowering during the growing season by
hoeing, cultivation, or hand pulling, or if necessary, using 9.3.9. INSECT PEST AND PLANT DISEASE CONTROL
herbicides.
1. All planted areas shall be inspected and monitored for
12. Care should be taken to remove weeds by hand around insect pests and plant diseases at a minimum of every 2
shallow rooted plants and ground cover areas [e.g. months during the growing season.
Rhododendrons, Pachysandra].

TABLE T-9.18. WEED CONTROL STANDARDS

Maintenance Level Standard

1. Well-Groomed No weeds are permitted to grow larger than 2.5cm (1in.) in width; remove all
weeds when observed. The ability to perform weed control shall be present during
each visit.

2. Groomed Weeding shall be undertaken when isolated weedy patches have a width of 30cm
(12in.). Weeding shall kill or remove 80 percent of weeds or the process shall be
repeated within one month. Note: “Isolated” means a weed distribution no greater
than four patches per 5m2 (54ft.2).

3. Moderate Weeding shall be undertaken when isolated small weed patches have a width of
15cm (6in.). Weeding shall kill or remove 90 percent of weeds or the process shall
be repeated within the next two site visits. NOTE: “Isolated” means a weed
distribution no greater than two patches per 5m2 (54ft.2).

4. Open Space/Play Weeding shall be undertaken when isolated weedy patches have a width of 30cm
(12in.). Weeding shall kill or remove 80 percent of weeds or the process shall be
repeated within one month. Note: “Isolated” means a weed distribution no greater
than four patches per 5m2 (54ft.2).

5. Background & Weeding shall be undertaken when isolated weedy patches have a width of 30cm
Natural (12in.). Weeding shall kill or remove 80 percent of weeds or the process shall be
repeated within one month. Note: “Isolated” means a weed distribution no greater
than four patches per 5m2 (54ft.2).

6. Service & Industrial Invasive plant removal shall be undertaken when the invasive plants threaten the
sustainability of the natural area landscape, habitat, and ecosystem functioning.

120 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

2. Treatments for insect pests or plant diseases shall be 2. 2. Frequency of litter removal shall be determined by
carried out promptly and consistently for maximum the established maintenance level [Level 1 “Well-
effectiveness. Groomed” areas will require more frequent litter removal
than Level 3 “Moderate” areas] and by the amount of litter
3. The principles of integrated pest management [IPM] accumulated on site
should be applied to the control of insect pests, diseases,
invasive, and noxious plants. IPM methods should be a 3. Vegetative litter should be scheduled for removal
combination of physical, cultural, biological, and chemical before it rots or accumulates sufficiently to detract from
methods chosen for the most effective, environmentally the use or appearance of the area or causes damage to
safe, and economical control method. plants and the landscape.

4. Suitable horticultural practices should be used routinely 4. Vegetative litter should be composted for re-use on
to reduce the need for more aggressive control measures site or off site wherever possible, or disposed of in an
such as the use of chemicals. approved manner, especially when it is from an invasive/
noxious plant species.
5. Facilities to which the public has free access shall have
minimal pesticide use except where irreversible damage 5. The contract documents should state clearly where
would result from insect pest and plant disease infestation. vegetative and non-vegetative litter removal is required,
level of frequency and extent of removal.
6. Controlled use of registered pesticides may be appro-
priate in areas of controlled or restricted public access 6. Clean-up after maintenance practices such as mowing
should include sweeping or blowing of paved areas and
7. Where chemical controls are required, pesticides shall sidewalks.
be selected based on the highest effectiveness and
selectivity, with the least hazard to health and the environ- 7. The clean-up and/or washing of paved areas shall not
ment. Chemicals under review by Agriculture Canada for result in excess debris being flushed into storm drains.
health or environmental concerns shall not be used.
8. Vegetative and non-vegetative litter and debris
8. The Health Canada Pest Management Regulatory collection and removal shall be to a standard agreed
Agency [PMRA], WHMIS 2015 and provincial/territorial/ upon by the owner in consultation with the
municipal bylaws and regulations shall regulate storage, maintenance contractor.
handling, and application of pesticides.
9.3.11. TREE STABILIZATION
9. Pesticide labels shall be consulted for special instruc-
tions prior to opening containers. 1. All stakes, guy wires, and ties on the trees and the root
balls, shall be removed after the first growing season
10. Applicators and employers shall be licensed by except where large trees require continued support.
provincial/jurisdictional pest management Reference Ontario Landscape Tree Planting Guide.
regulatory agencies.
2. Ties shall be checked at least every 4 months to so that
11. Timing of pesticide applications shall include consider- they are not causing a depression in the bark or girdling
ation of pest life cycles and stages, weather limitations and the tree and shall be loosened, repaired or replaced as
conflicts with the use of the site. necessary.

12. Pesticides restricted by provincial or municipal bylaws 3. If twine has been left on the root ball it shall be re-
or regulation shall not be applied. moved after the first growing season. Reference Section
6.3.4.3.j. Planting Trees.
13. Reference Section 11, Integrated Pest [IPM] and
Vegetation [IVM] Management. 4. Where stakes or anchors are necessary, they shall meet
the requirements outlined in Section 6, Plants & Planting,
and in accordance with the standards established by the
9.3.10. LITTER REMOVAL International Society of Arboriculture [ISA]
1. Non-vegetative [paper, cans, refuse, etc.] litter should
be removed at each site visit.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 121

9.3.12. PRUNING b. Where required, affected branching or trees shall
be removed or other precautions taken to reduce
1. General the likelihood of damage or injury.
a. All tree pruning is to be undertaken in accordance c. Work on hazard trees should be conducted by, or
with current acceptable arboricultural practice as under the supervision of an arborist.
determined by the ISA. Topping and excessive lift d. Non-horticultural elements that present an
pruning are not acceptable. Cuts shall be clean imminent or potential future hazard to property
and made in accordance with the standards set by elements or occupants shall be documented and
the ANSI A300 Tree Care Operations - Tree Shrub reported to the owner as they are observed.
and Other Woody Plant Maintenance - Standard
Practices.
9.3.13. SEASONAL ANNUAL PLANTS – IN GARDENS
b. Pruning should be such that plant parts are AND CONTAINERS
removed to maintain or improve plant structure
and to improve plant health or function of the 1. Change in seasonal display of annual plants should be
plant in the landscape. reflected in the maintenance contract and made 1 to 4
c. All trees and shrubs shall be examined at least times per year depending on budget, desired seasons of
every 2 months during the growing season and floral display, and owner requirements.
shall be pruned to remove all dead, damaged, or 2. Annual plants require intensive management and should
diseased wood. Pruning shall be undertaken by a be managed by qualified professionals regarding layout,
qualified professional. planting, watering, and insect pest and plant disease
d. Tools used for pruning shall be appropriate to control to achieve a desired showy, attractive appearance.
the task, well maintained, sharp, and clean.
3. Layouts of annual plants should be such that each
e. Clipping, shearing or shaping shall be carried out variety is shown to its best advantage in a pleasant
only if required in the maintenance contract for composition.
specific varieties or conditions.
f. Clipping, shearing or shaping should be 4. Spacing of plants will vary with type and the desired
conducted during the season best suited to the appearance level, and should be such that as individual
plant s and should be carried out under the plants mature, they fill the bed with flowers to the desired
direction of, or by a qualified professional. density.
g. Pruning of trees and shrubs shall be conducted 5. Annual plants shall be planted and maintained with a
by, or under the supervision of, a qualified fertilizer plan appropriate to the plant type and growing
professional. medium condition.
h. Pruning should be undertaken at the appropriate
6. Moisture content shall be monitored regularly; annual
time of year for each plant species and location.
plants shall be watered whenever necessary to prevent
i. Pruning should be undertaken to maintain the wilting and to maintain plant health.
intended form and should be limited to cuts that
are necessary to remove dead, diseased, damaged 7. Pruning, shearing, trimming and deadheading should be
and defective branches, to direct growth and to done regularly during the growing season. Frequency shall
correct structural weaknesses while preserving be such that the desired appearance level is consistent and
the natural character and structure of the plant, plant health is maintained.
by applying acceptable practices.
8. Annual plants shall be inspected for signs of insect
2. Root pruning pests, plant disease, soil moisture content, and nutrient
deficiency each time maintenance personnel are on site.
a. Root pruning, including alteration or removal of
Appropriate measures shall be taken to rectify any
surface roots, shall be performed only under the
problems.
supervision of, or by, an arborist.
3. Hazard removal 9. Where staking of annual plants is required it shall be
undertaken as the plants develop, to prevent them from
a. Tree risk factors such as dead, diseased, damaged, falling, rather than after they have fallen.
or defective trees shall be promptly abated.
122 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020
 10. Where garden beds are not planted during any season, Mowing equipment:
they shall be left cultivated and groomed to a smooth,
friable soil surface. a. Rotary mowers are acceptable for most mainte-
nance levels provided that the equipment is sharp
and well adjusted. Low Maintenance Levels 4
9.4. EXECUTION – LAWNS through 6 may require the use of gang mowers,
AND LAWN AREAS flail mowers or other mowing equipment. Mowing
heights for these methods shall be determined by
9.4.1. GENERAL the objective site conditions, and type of
1. The many variables in grass types, appearance levels, equipment.
growing medium, moisture conditions, and other factors b. Reel type mowers should be utilized for Level 1
of lawn maintenance, require qualified professional and 2 lawns, particularly established lawns that
maintenance workers and managers to have the training have been mown with reel mowers previously.
and skills necessary to judge each situation and make c. Mowing heights for all mowing methods are to be
appropriate decisions on the best lawn care. determined by the maintenance levels and health
2. The following are guidelines to equipment types, and appearance objectives, site conditions, and
mowing heights and frequencies and may be adjusted as type of equipment.
necessary to produce a healthy lawn of the desired d. Table T-9.19. Mowing Heights and Frequencies,
appearance. outlines recommended mowing heights and
frequencies to achieve the desired appearance

TABLE T-9.19. MOWING HEIGHTS AND FREQUENCIES

Maintenance Level Mowing Heights Frequency Trimming

Reel Rotary Horizontal Vertical

20-38mm
1. Well-Groomed n/a 5-7 days•• each mowing each mowing
(0.75-1.5in.)

20-38mm 63-76mm every other

2. Groomed 7 days•• each mowing
(0.75-1.5in.) (2.5-3in.) mowing

25-38mm 3 times per

76-100mm
3. Moderate (1-1.5in.) 7-10 days•• each mowing• growing
(3–4in.)
season

+100mm
4. Open Space/Play • 10-14 days•• each mowing• yearly
(+4in.) •
to preserve
5. Background & biodiversity
• • • not required
Natural and meadow
functioning•

6. Service & • • • •
Industrial

• As determined by conditions, equipment and objectives

•• Less than 1/3 turfgrass blade removal
CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 123
 levels though some lawn types and site conditions recommendations, and on the manufacturer’s
may require variations from this guideline. recommendations as modified to suit the site and
3. Mowing should be performed as necessary to avoid the its current growing medium conditions.
removal of any more than one third of the grass blade c. Timing of fertilizer: application depends on
length at any one time. factors such as:

4. Restoration: cutting height may be lowered in late

spring or during a period of active spring growth to i. Desired level of quality
rejuvenate the grass. This is often undertaken in combina- ii. Length of growing season
tion with dethatching and aerating. iii. Growing medium type
5. Clippings: clippings should not be removed at each iv. Turf condition
mowing unless they interfere with healthy growth. v. Turf species
6. Trimming [Horizontal]: Lawn edges may be trimmed vi. Turf use
with a steel blade edge or nylon type line trimmer at the vii. Type of fertilizer
frequencies and heights shown in Table T-9.19. Mowing
Heights And Frequencies. Special care should be taken to so viii. Prevailing weather conditions
that the equipment operator does not scalp lawn edges by ix. Rainfall or watering schedule
constantly trimming too short. For low level maintenance
x. Removal of clippings
areas, trimming is not necessary in all cases, but trimming
with each mowing contributes greatly to the desired
orderly appearance. Occasional trimming may be required d. Minimum frequencies for application of fertilizer
for functional reasons in some Level 5 and 6 areas. are outlined in Table T-9.20. Minimum Frequencies
For Fertilizing Lawns.
7. Edging [Vertical]: Lawn edging consists of making e. Application and timing of lime and fertilizer shall
vertical cuts through the mat of grass to remove grass be determined by growing medium test results
that is growing over garden beds, walks, paths, paved areas and consideration of pH and nutrient levels.
and curbs and tight to fences, buildings and other Consult with a qualified professional to determine
structures. liming and fertilization schedules.
f. Fertilizer applications should be scheduled so that
a Edging should be undertaken with a half-moon
they do not occur during periods of heat,
cutting tool, power edger or nylon type line
drought, and stress, or when conditions favour
trimmer.
damage or active disease development.
b. Recommended frequencies for edging are: g. Fertilizers shall be watered in after application as
i. Level 1 - with each mowing per label instructions.

ii. Level 2 - every second mowing h. Fertilizers shall be applied with mechanical
spreading equipment that can be accurately
iii. Level 3 - 3 times during the growing season calibrated for a uniform application of fertilizer.
iv. Level 4 - yearly
v. Level 5, 6 - edging not required 9.4.2. LIMING

1.Liming may be required to adjust the natural regionally

8. Fertilizing lawns occurring acidity of the soil in cultivat ed lawn areas.
a Lawns should be fertilized regularly to keep 2.Liming requirements are best indicated by a soil test
growing medium nutrient levels within an accept- and, except where local experience indicates a regular
able range for each maintenance level. In addition need for liming, such tests should be undertaken to avoid
to this section, refer to Section 5, Growing unnecessary liming.
Medium, and Section 8.3.2.4. Fertilizer.
b Fertilizer types and ratio of application should be 3. Dolomitic lime should be used at a rate to adjust the
based on growing media test results and pH to between 6.0 and 7.0. Lime usually should not be
applied at a rate greater than 10kg/100m2 (25lb/1000ft2).
124 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020
TABLE T-9.20. MINIMUM FREQUENCIES FOR FERTILIZING LAWNS
Maintenance Level Frequency Recommended Timing
[applications per year]

Spring, early summer,

1. Well-Groomed 3-4
summer, fall

2. Groomed 3 Spring, summer, fall

3. Moderate 2 Spring, fall

4. Open Space/Play 1 Fall

5. Background & Natural Not usually required Not applicable

6. Service & Industrial Not usually required Not applicable

4. Application and timing of lime and fertilizer shall be depth of the growing medium or rooting zone.
determined by growing medium test results and Subsequent applications shall take place when the
consideration of pH and nutrient levels. Consult with a water content reaches 50 percent of field
qualified professional to determine liming and/or fertiliza- capacity. Reference Table T-9.17. The Practical
tion schedules. Chart For Determining Soil Moisture.

5. Lime shall be applied with mechanical spreading 2. Weed, invasive plant, insect, and disease control
equipment that can be accurately calibrated for a uni-
form application of lime. a. Turf areas shall be examined for invasive plants,
noxious weeds, insect pests, and plant diseases at
each mowing.
9.4.3. TURF ESTABLISHMENT
b. Where required, turf shall be promptly treated by
1. Watering a qualified professional using the most appropri-
ate IPM methods in compliance with this Standard
a. Hoses and sprinklers, irrigation systems or other and municipal bylaws. Reference Section 11,
methods shall be used to apply water to Class 1 Integrated Pest and Vegetation Management.
and Class 2 lawn areas to maintain grass in a
turgid condition. Reference Section 8, Seeding & c. Where populations exceed 10 broad-leaved
Sodding. weeds, 50 annual weeds, or the turf contains
invasive plants, they shall be eliminated in Level 1
b. The method of application shall be such that and 2 lawns through manual means and/or the
compaction or erosion of the soil or excessive process of spot spraying with a suitable herbicide
leaching of nutrient does not occur. in compliance with these standard and municipal
bylaws bringing their populations to zero.
c. Watering is not usually required in Class 3 areas;
however, it may be required to prevent plant loss d. All pest management products shall be applied
or deterioration under drought conditions. by a qualified professional taking all necessary
precautions to safeguard horticultural and
d. Application of water shall be of a rate and non-horticultural elements of the site.
duration such that the water content in the
growing medium reaches field capacity to the full 3. Fertilizing

a. During the active growing season, at least 3

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 125

 months after seeding or sodding, a balanced 6.5cm (2.5in.) Trim with nylon line type power
establishment fertilizer shall be applied to all trimmer to same height.
lawn and grass areas as required and as per label
instructions. d. Class 2 areas: Mow with a sharp reel or rotary
mower [preferred] every 7-10 days or when the
b. One month before ground frost and at least 3 grass reaches a height of 10cm (4.0in.); mow to a
months after seeding or sodding, a winterize height of 7.5cm (3.0in.). Trim with nylon line type
fertilizer shall be applied to all turf areas. power trimmer to same height.

c. Fertilizers shall be watered in after application as e. Class 3 areas: Mow every 30 days or as otherwise
per label instructions. required, with a sharp rotary type mower. Cutting
height should be no less than 15 cm (6in.). Edging
4. Liming or trimming is not required.
a. Where regional conditions and soil tests indicate, f. Excess grass clippings shall be removed after each
dolomite lime shall be applied with suitable cut for Class 1 and 2 areas; clippings shall only be
mechanical equipment at a uniform rate to a removed on Class 3 if they will be a detriment to
maximum of 10kg/100m2 (25lb/1,000ft2), or as the normal growth of the turf area.
recommended by a soil- testing laboratory based
on samples taken from the turfgrass area. g. At each mowing no more than 1/3 of the turfgrass
blade should be remove.
5. Equipment
7. Edging [vertical cut]
a. Equipment shall be suited to the work at hand and
shall be in good working condition. Safety devices a. Half-moon edger, power edger or nylon type
shall be in place and functioning to Canada trimmer as frequently as necessary to accurately
Occupational Health and Safety Regulation establish and maintain the intended edge location
requirements. for the level of maintenance required.

b. Equipment shall be cleaned between sites to b. Edging should be to lines established, and main-
prevent the spread of plant disease, weeds, and tained with straight string lines, radii of curves
invasive plants. established by string or other marking methods
suited to the design and layout.
c. Equipment handling shall be such that the risk of
spillage, inadvertent spraying or misdirection of 8. Core aeration
oil, gasoline or chemicals of any kind is minimized.
a. Core aeration shall not be carried out in the first
d. Fueling of equipment should take place off the growing season.
property undergoing maintenance or away from
horticultural elements and on tarpaulin-covered 9. Repairs
surfaces.
a. Regrading, re-seeding, or re-sodding shall be
e. All cutting equipment shall be clean, sharp and carried out when necessary to restore damaged
suitably adjusted. or failing turfgrass areas.

6. Mowing and trimming [horizontal cut] b. Where turfgrass fails due to conditions that
cannot be modified, such as deep shade or heavy
a. Classes of turf or grass referred to are as defined foot traffic, and subsequent repairs would likely
in Section 8, Seeding & Sodding. result in repeated turf failure, other horticultural
and non-horticultural solutions should be sought.
b. All areas: The first 4 cuts shall be by a sharp rotary
type mower. c. New sod or seed used for repairs shall match the
grass varieties in the surrounding area if growing
c. Class 1 areas: Mow with a sharp reel or rotary conditions permit.
mower every 5-7 days or when the grass reaches
a height of 8.5cm (3.3in.); mow to a height of d. Re-sodding should be carried out throughout the
growing season where irrigation is available.
126 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020
 e. Re-seeding shall be undertaken on soil that is free b. Topdressing should be undertaken after reducing
from frost, snow, and standing water, when the height of the lawn to a height of 6cm (2.5in.),
seasonal conditions are likely to provide power raking thoroughly to remove thatch, moss,
successful germination and continued growth loose and dead grass, stones, and debris. Spread
of all varieties of seed in the grass mix. and level a material that is compatible with the
present growing medium to avoid the creation of
f. Re-seeded areas shall be protected from foot or an impermeable horizon.
mechanical traffic and kept moist until the first
mowing. c. Topdressing shall be to a maximum depth of
0.6-1.3cm (0.25-0.5in.), filling in low areas and
9.4.4. TURF RESTORATION bare spots. Care should be taken so that the
material applied is incorporated fully into the turf
1. Aerating by raking or dragging the area. Apply only enough
in a single application so as not to bury the turf
a. Aerating should be undertaken to improve water
plant entirely.
and gas exchange where soil structure has been
compromised, soil drains poorly, or growing
medium has become compacted. 4. Re-seeding
b. Aerating shall be undertaken with a suitable corer a. Where re-seeding is required seed mix should suit
that removes cores of soil to at least a 7.5-10cm the cultural growing conditions in the lawn and be
(3-4in.) depth, and at a maximum of 12.5cm (5in.) applied after topdressing.
on center spacing and after the lawn is reduced in
height to a maximum height of 5cm (2in.). b. The surface of the lawn shall be level prior to
seeding.
c. Heavy or compacted soils can be improved over a
long term by removing the cores of soil and top 5. Repairs
dressing with sand or an appropriate fine
screened growing medium or composted a. Thinning: turfgrass thinning may be caused by any
material. or all the following factors:
d. In some situations, the growing medium cores can i. Insufficient or over-watering
be pulverized and raked into the surface.
ii. Insufficient or excessive fertilization
e. Aeration shall be undertaken when turfgrass is iii. Incorrect cutting height
actively growing, in either spring or fall, and when
iv. Chemical or mechanical damage
soils are neither too dry nor too wet.
v. Soil compaction, often due to foot traffic
2. Dethatching and other human activities
a. Dethatching involves a series of vertical cuts vi. Improper lawn seed selection
into a grass area using suitable equipment, to vii. Severe competition from other plants
penetrate and remove excessive built-up layers
viii. Poor drainage
of thatch on the growing medium surface.
ix. Plant disease or insect pests
b. Where required, dethatching should be
x. Human or animal wear and tear
undertaken after reducing the height of the lawn
to 4cm (1.5in.), and prior to over-seeding and/or xi. Environmental conditions [deep shade,
topdressing grass areas. excessive sun and saltwater exposure]

3. Topdressing b. Timing of repairs

a. Topdressing should be undertaken annually in i. Level 1, 2: Isolated thinning & patches should
Level 1 areas and may be necessary occasionally be repaired immediately.
in Level 2 and 3 areas. ii. Level 3: Should be repaired in early spring
or fall.
CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 127
 iii. Level 4: Should be repaired when patches 2. The maintenance plan developed for each site, or each
are larger than 30cm (12in.) in width or portion of a site, should be based on Table T-9.7. to Table
as required T-9.12. Recommended Maintenance Procedures & Frequencies
iv. Level 5, 6: Should be repaired when required. but should be adjusted as necessary to achieve the desired
appearance standard.

c. Methods of repair of bare patches due 3. Site maintenance typically extends beyond the property
to compaction lines of a site to include such things as boulevards and
street frontages. Care and irrigation issues should be
i. Core aerate the compacted area to relieve addressed in the maintenance contract.
compaction.
9.4.6. MAINTENANCE OF IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
ii. Power rake or heavily rake the area, to
scarify and loosen the growing medium 1. Reference Section 10.1.8. Maintenance Of Irrigation
to a depth of 7.5-10cm (3-4in.). Systems.
iii. Grade to a level surface. Apply suitable seed,
2. When a system is restarted in the spring, it should
and top dress with recommended sand or
be thoroughly checked for leaks, valve problems,
turf blend growing medium to a depth of
suitable irrigation head and nozzle operation, condition
0.6-1.3cm (0.25-0.5in.). Reference Section 8,
and effectiveness of risers, and controller and schedule
Seeding & sodding.
operation.
v. Re-sod. Reference Section 8,
Seeding & Sodding. 3. Damage and repairs should be recorded.
vi. Irrigate regularly to maintain moisture 4. A repair kit should be kept on site to ensure timely and
until germination and sufficient root effective irrigation system repairs.
development.
d. Method of repair of bare patches or thinning
problems

i. Improve cultural practice, such as

fertilization and watering.
ii. Scarify surface of growing medium to a
depth of 7.5-10cm (3-4in.) or aerate to
reduce compaction.
iii. Grade to a level surface.
iv. Over-seed with suitable/matching seed
mixture.
v. Top-dress with recommended sand or turf
blend growing medium.
vi. Irrigate regularly to maintain moisture until
germination and establishment of new grass.
vii. Where bare patches or thinning problems
are a result of environmental conditions
consider introducing alternate plants or
hardscaping.

9.4.5. LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION

1. Reference Section 10, Irrigation Systems For More

Detailed Information.

128 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 129
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
10.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 10.1.3. SITE ASSESSMENT

1. Carry out a site visit before planning and

10.1.1. PURPOSE STATEMENT excavation to:
AND INTENT
a. Determine what needs to be protected and
1. The Irrigation Association [IA] has developed the preserved [trees, watercourse and archaeological
Standards for Landscape Irrigation Systems. CNLA and remains, etc.]
CSLA recognizes these Standards. With permission from
the IA, the Canadian Landscape Standard CSLA CNLA b. Identify existing barriers, underground infrastruc-
Joint Committee has included resources listed in Section ture, buildings, soil quality and composition.
10.1.2. Related references, standards and legislation.
c. Identify the topography, the landscape [plant
2. To complement the IA resources, the Canadian height and form] and the existing irrigation or
Landscape Standard has developed and/or enhanced the water inlet.
following resources and guidelines:

a. Related references, standards and legislation 10.1.4. SITE AND ELEMENT PROTECTION

b. Site and element protection 1. Existing landscape features, plants, structures, work in
progress, and the work of other trades shall be protected
c. Scheduling from damage through all phases of the work.

d. Water for irrigation

10.1.5. SCHEDULING
e. Protection of growing medium
1. The Contractor shall schedule and sequence this work so
f. Maintenance of irrigation systems, including that it is carried out in coordination with the work of other
adjustments, documentation and reporting trades and approved by the owner’s representative.
g. Backfill material 2. Where irrigation sleeves or conduits are required, their
installation shall be scheduled to facilitate correct and
h. Coordination with planting and other site
timely installation of hardscape elements, compaction of
features
base courses, paving and other finishes. Sleeve ends shall
i. Warranty including settlement of irrigation be staked or otherwise marked to facilitate subsequent
trenches installation of pipe.

3. Irrigation system completion and commissioning shall

10.1.2. RELATED REFERENCES, STANDARDS be scheduled to enable prompt irrigation of all newly
AND LEGISLATION installed planting in irrigated areas, and reliable ongoing
irrigation.
1. Industry
10.1.6. WATER FOR IRRIGATION
a. Irrigation Association, Technical Resources
1. Water shall be free from any organic or chemical
b. Canadian Electrical Code [CEC]- referencing line contaminants detrimental to humans, animals or healthy
voltage wires plant growth.
c. CSA Group and Plastic Pipe Institute [PPI]- 2 Reference Irrigation Association Landscape Irrigation Best
referencing all High-Density Polyethylene [HDPE] Management Practices May 2014, Water Quality Assessment
Pipe material Table page 20.

3. Reference Section 2.1.18. Water and Irrigation.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 131

10.1.7. PROTECTION OF GROWING MEDIUM should be carefully planned so that they are beneficial to
the landscape and do not adversely affect the intent of
1. Disturbed growing medium shall be handled in such a the existing irrigation system. Changes to the system shall
way that its structure is not compromised. be reported and accurately recorded on “as-built” draw-
ings kept with the landscape maintenance records.
2 Growing medium shall be stockpiled and protected from
contamination with invasive or noxious plant species, 8. All adjustments, modifications and/or repairs should be
subsoil, and other substances non-conducive to plant completed in accordance with the Canadian Landscape
growth. Standard and IA Standards.
3. Reference Section 3.2.7.3. Stockpiling.
10.1.9. BACKFILL MATERIAL
10.1.8. MAINTENANCE OF IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 1. Backfill soil or sand that is placed around approved
1. Maintenance of underground irrigation systems is irrigation pipe shall be rock free with no particles greater
intended to keep the system in good working condition than 13mm (0.5 in.) in diameter next to the pipe.
and to provide water to designated areas to supplement
natural rainfall for optimum growing conditions of lawns
and plants. 10.2. EXECUTION
2. During the operating season, the system should be
checked weekly, and promptly repaired or adjusted as 10.2.1. COORDINATION WITH PLANTING AND
necessary. Adjustments should be made to sprinkler OTHER SITE FEATURES
coverage and timing so that all areas receive adequate
water to supplement natural rainfall, without over-water- 1. Prior to installation, the exact location of lines, valves,
ing or creating excess runoff. The controller should be and heads shall be coordinated with planting locations to
adjusted to suit seasonal water requirements and any avoid conflict and damage during the work.
applicable regulations or restrictions. 2. Location of sprinklers are to be adjusted where neces-
3. Irrigation systems [except those designed for year- sary to achieve full, even coverage without spraying onto
round operation] shall be shut down at the water supply adjacent structures and surfaces not intended to be
and completely drained of water in the fall before freezing irrigated. During layout, consult with owner’s
occurs. Controls should be turned off and all pop-up heads representative to verify placement and revisions
should be left in the down position. Any auxiliary batteries where necessary.
should be removed for the winter season. Where a system
is shut down in the fall and restarted in the spring, it 10.2.2. WARRANTY
should be thoroughly checked for leaks, valve problems,
sprinkler and nozzle operation, controller operation, In addition to providing the standard 1-year warranty
schedule and spray coverage patterns. the contractor shall be responsible for the following:
4. Damage and repairs should be documented and 1. To fill and repair depressions and re-establish plants at
reported. the original level due to settlement of irrigation trenches
for 1 year following acceptance of the project.
5. Repairs to irrigation systems should be completed as
soon as possible after damage or deterioration is observed, 2. Warranties shall become effective from the date of the
so that plants are not permitted to dry out and to prevent Construction Completion Certificate. If the contractor
damage to the landscape due to leakage. maintains the project, the warranties will remain in effect
until completion of the Final Acceptance Completion
6. Repair of all irrigation equipment shall be completed [FAC].
with the originally installed components or their equiva-
lents or with components with greater efficiency. 3. The irrigation system warranty will include but not be
limited to the following specific items in addition to the
7. Modification of existing irrigation systems, such as normal warranty coverage:
adding or relocating sprinklers, or zones, may be required
for optimal performance of the system. Such changes

132 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

 a. Repair and replace pipes, which have been found adequate for the scope of work. Utilizing staff
during subsequent construction to be installed certified by the Irrigation Association in such
with insufficient cover. disciplines as Certified Irrigation Technician [CIT],
Certified Irrigation Contractor [CIC], Certified
b. Repair and/or replace materials which do not Irrigation Designer [CID], Certified Landscape
meet the specifications and whose substitution Irrigation Auditor [CLIA], Certified Landscape
was not approved by the engineer. Water Manager [CLWM], or Certified Golf
Irrigation Auditor [CGIA] are recommended; and
c. signed pressures for all zones on automatic meeting the standards not less than the National
systems. Master Specification [NMS] and meeting local
d. The following items are to be done by the municipal standards where the work is being
contractor during the first month of actual performed.
system operation on a bi-weekly basis as well as b. The contractor shall be a member in good
during spring start-up and during the two-week standing of the Irrigation Association and/or a
period prior to expiration of the warranty period: provincial irrigation association and have met the
qualification standards currently applied to
i. Clean and adjust sprinklers for effective contractors by that organization.
operation.
ii. Adjust sprinklers and valve boxes to grade. c. A written warranty of the installed system shall be
provided to the owner covering workmanship,
iii. Re-tighten loose fittings, sprinklers and products and materials for a minimum of 1 year.
valves.
3. Submittals
e. Correct any work not in accordance with the
plans and specifications unless specifically a. A suitably scaled as-built drawing shall be
authorized by the engineer, which may be provid ed. All components of the irrigation
discovered during the warranty period. system shall be shown as installed, with clear
underground component coverage [depth]
measurements and measurements from an
10.3. STANDARDS FOR LANDSCAPE identifiable reference point to the location of the
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS controller and its circuit breaker, master valve,
zone control valves, main water connection, blow
10.3.1. GENERAL out connection, pump and its electrical connec-
tions, and any other similar features.
1. Scope of work
b. Provide a manual containing operating and
a. Supply and install the components required for an maintenance instructions for all components of
automatic irrigation system to provide supple- the system including but not limited to a zone
mental water to the intended landscape efficient- map or list of zones and the areas they cover.
ly and uniformly.
c. Provide clear instructions for operating the
b. irrigation system which shall meet the Irrigation irrigation system “in season”, showing the relative
Association design standards. timing differences between zones of different
precipitation rates, and a schedule of run times
c. representative as to the inclusion or exclusion of
suggested for various weather conditions. Divide
desirable features in the irrigation system design
the system into hydrozones, or areas with differ
that exceeds the Landscape Irrigation Best
ent water requirements, whether based on
Management Practices, May 2014, IA and/or
gardens/grass, sun exposure, drainage patterns,
are site specific.
or distinct areas.
2. Quality assurance
d. Provide any special tools as provided by the
a. All irrigation work shall be performed by a suitably manufacturer for day to day servicing of the
experienced and qualified irrigation contractor, irrigation equipment installed.
having trained and competent personnel

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 133

 e. Provide a base irrigation schedule indicating and other important characteristics so as not to
when and how much to irrigate, by zone, for compromise the intent of the design.
the system installed. Indicate a source of local
evapotranspiration data with clear instructions c. All materials shall remain compatible. When
on how to alter the schedule reflecting changing changing from one product to another the flow
ET values. from all the sprinklers shall be recalculated to
confirm that piping is still sized at a maximum of
f. If using soil moisture sensors to determine 1.5m/second (5ft.2/second).
watering events include a watering strategy
method and a brief explanation. d. The alternate materials proposed shall be
installed according to their manufacturer’s
4. Site condition recommendations.

a. Verify and mark the location of all on site utilities

required by the irrigation system. 10.3.2. DESIGN

b. Verify and mark the location of all utilities, buried An irrigation system shall apply a consistent, uniform,
cables, conduits, pipes, etc., prior to any measurable amount of water to the landscape over a
excavation. period of time to promote deep root zone development.
It is necessary that the system design consider water cost
c. adjust the design as necessary, together with and conservation, long term durability and maintenance
the owner’s representative, to suit existing site cost, safety, the desired aesthetic, and site-specific
conditions and grades before proceeding with requirements. The relative importance of these consider-
the work. ations will vary from project to project and require the
attention of a qualified and experienced trade qualified
d. Protect from damage as necessary, existing designer. The design will incorporate the following:
landscape features, plants, structures, this work in
progress, and the work of other trades. 1. Sprinklers

e. Sequence this work so that it is carried out in a. Sprinkler spacing shall be designed to achieve the
coordination with the work of other trades and highest possible distribution uniformity using the
that sleeves are installed when appropriate. manufacturer’s recommendations or as deter-
mined by a densogram analysis using available
5. Owner or representative software and accepted industry best practices.
a. Prior to commencement of any involvement b. The selection of pop-up or riser style sprinklers
with an irrigation project, identify the person or shall consider safety, maintenance, risk of
persons qualified and authorized to make project vandalism, and appearance on the site.
decisions.
c Pop-up or riser height shall consider the related
6. Regulations plants, its growth potential, interfering landscape
features, and arrive at a solution which provides
a. Obtain all permits and licenses applicable to the optimum coverage for as long as possible.
scope of work.
d All sprinklers shall be suitably adjustable and
b. Comply with the relevant codes and regulations located so as to keep the water within the
both in the design and during the execution of landscaped area and minimize overthrow.
the work involved in the project.
e. When low head drainage is apparent, sprinklers
7. Alternate materials with built in check valves shall be used to
eliminate wasted water, water hammer and
a. The written approval of the owner’s
to reduce erosion.
representative is required prior to the use of
materials that are different from those specified. f. Sports fields and public parks shall be equipped
with sprinklers with rubber covers in turf areas.
b. Alternate materials shall match the original
materials in performance, flow, pressure loss,

134 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

 g. Pressure compensating devices [heads, screens, their location on site [sun exposure and natural
or valves] are recommended to increase drainage] and varying growing medium and slope
efficiency and water conservation. conditions shall be considered.

h. Sprinkler layout shall be designed to prevent d. Relevant soils/growing medium information such
runoff, low head drainage, overspray, or other as structure, texture and infiltration rate shall be
similar conditions where irrigation water flows referenced when designing irrigation systems.
onto non-targeted areas, such as adjacent
property, non-irrigated areas, hardscapes, e. The pressure variation within each zone from the
roadways, or structures. first to the last head shall not exceed 10 percent.

i. Sprinkler heads and other emission devices shall 4. Controls

be selected based on what is appropriate for the
a. Controllers shall be CSA/UL approved, suitable
plants and growing medium structure and texture
within that hydrozone. Minimum pop-up height for their mounting location, and sufficiently
flexible to enable optimum operation of the
for sprinklers in turfgrass areas shall be four
designed system in all circumstances.
inches.
b. Soil moisture sensors, tipping bucket rain gauge,
2. Pipe
or other “rain off” devices are a desirable
a. The velocity of flow in piping shall not exceed ehancement of any irrigation system and are
1.5m /second (5ft./second). recommended for effective water management.

b. Pipe routing shall take site elevation changes into c. Valves shall meet the pressure and flow
consideration to minimize low head drainage. Use requirements of the zone being controlled and
inline check valves on lateral piping as required. sized appropriately.

c. Selection of the strength and/or flexibility of d. Sensors [rain, freeze, wind, soil moisture etc.],
the pipe material and its installation criteria shall either integral or auxiliary, that suspend or alter
consider site-specific requirements such as frost, irrigation operation during unfavorable weather
traffic, soil depth, soil composition, soil quality, conditions or when sufficient soil moisture is
etc. present shall be required on all irrigation systems,
as appropriate for local climatic conditions.
d. culations so that the required pressure will be
delivered under all circumstances and that e. Indoor rated controllers should only be mounted
pressure variation within the lateral is at a mini indoors. Indoor rated controllers can only be
mum as determined by the friction factor mounted outdoors in suitable weather-tight
method. enclosures.

3. Zoning 5. Pressure control

a. All sprinklers grouped into a zone shall have the a. The design shall include suitable regulation of the
same precipitation rates. Rotating style heads pressure throughout the irrigation system
should consider arcs of coverage to provide utilizing such devices as pressure compensating
matched precipitation. valves, sprinklers, drip lines and screens.

b. The potential for low head drainage shall be b. The irrigation systems shall be designed so that
minimized for each zone. the operating pressure at each emission device is
within the manufacturer’s recommended pres
c. The design of the irrigation system shall conform sure range for optimal performance and within
to the hydrozones of the landscape design plan. pressure variation of 10% as stated in 5.3.2.3.f
The areas of the landscape that have different Zoning.
water requirements [different hydrozones] shall
be identified and a determination made as to the c. To control excessive pressure above the required
significance of these differences and whether hey operating pressure of the irrigation system
require separate zoning. The type of plants and

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 135

 emission devices, pressure-regulating devices b. A spare wire should be available at each valve
such as valve pressure regulators, sprinkler head manifold.
pressure regula tors, inline pressure regulators, or
other devices shall be installed to meet the c. Trace wire shall follow lateral piping to identify
required operating pressure of the emission lateral piping.
devices.
9. Flow Meters
d. If water pressure is below the required operating
a. Flow meters that detect and report high flow
pressure of the emission devices, then a booster
conditions created by system damage or mal-
pump shall be installed so that the emission
function are required for all non-residential
device operates within the manufacturer’s
landscapes.
recommended pressure range.

e. The pressure and flow measurements shall be

identified at the design stage and verified prior to 10.3.3. MATERIALS
the installation of the system.
1. Sprinklers
6. Winterizing
a. All sprinklers shall be in new condition with the
a. The system design shall make the water connec- size, manufacturer, and features as shown in the
tion and all the system components safe from design or approved equal. Reference Section
winter freezing damage. 10.3.1.7. Alternate Materials.

b. Using a suitable and convenient blow out point b. The relevant manufacturer’s recommendations
and connection is the recommended method of shall be followed in the selection and application
purging the system of water using a suitably sized of each sprinkler being used.
air compressor.
2. Control valves
c. Automatic drain valves are not recommended.
a. All control valves shall be in new condition with
7. Low volume/micro irrigation the size, manufacturer, and features as shown in
the design or approved equal. Reference Section
a. Any low volume irrigation included in a system 10.3.1.7. Alternate Materials.
shall be separately zoned and valved inde-
pendently from rotors or spray heads. b. The relevant manufacturer’s recommendations
shall be followed in the selection and application
b. Filtration and pressure control as recommended of each control valve being used.
by the manufacturer of the low volume devices
shall be provided together with suitable controller 3. Isolation valves
capabilities.
a. All isolation valves shall be in new condition with
c. Connect [loop] ends of the individual laterals the size, manufacturer, and features as shown in
to improve system uniformity and limit the design or approved equal. Reference Section
contamination if drip tubing is damaged. 10.3.1.7. Alternate Materials.

d. Use air-vacuum relief valves to minimize injection b. Valves 15mm (0.5in.) through 65mm (2.5in.) may
of soil or other contaminants into the emitters. be ball or gate valves while those larger shall be
operated by butterfly valves.
e. Wherever possible, use drip irrigation to increase
irrigation efficiency. c. An exterior isolation valve should be accessible
from the exterior to aid in closing a system in the
8. Control wire case of a main line rupture.
a. Control wire shall be sized to the length of its run 4. Controllers
using the recommendations of the manufacturer
of the zone control valves being wired. a. All controllers shall be in new condition with the

136 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

 size, manufacturer, and features as shown in the c. All High-Density Polyethylene [HDPE] Pipe
design or approved equal. Reference Section material shall be listed by the CSA group and
10.3.1.7. Alternate Materials. Plastic Pipe Institute [PPI] as a PE-3408 resin.

b. All controllers shall be. CSA/UL approved for use 8. Pipe – polyvinyl chloride [PVC]
in the mounting location or application selected.
a. All pipe shall be in new condition, extruded from
5. Wire virgin materials and continuously and permanent-
ly marked with the manufacturer’s name, material,
a. All power and control wiring and its associated size, and pressure rating.
components shall conform to local codes
being used. b. A minimum of Series/Class 315 pipe shall be used
in 15mm (0.5in.), Series 200 in 20mm (0.75in.)
b. All wire shall be sized and specified as shown and 25mm (1in.), and Series 160 in 30mm (1.25in.)
in the design. and larger.
c. Line voltage wire shall be CSA approved and 9. Fittings
follow the Canadian Electrical Code [CEC]. Line
voltage wire shall be installed by a licensed a. Fittings for PVC pipe shall be schedule 40 PVC
electrician with the requisite qualifications. suitable for solvent welding or threaded
connections.
d. Approved multi-conductor control wire may be
used if specifically manufactured for use as direct b. Fittings for polyethylene pipe may be compres-
burial irrigation wire. sion style or insert fittings with strength at least
equal to the pipe used and complete with all
e. White wire shall only and always be used as the stainless-steel clamps.
common wire.
c. Fittings for HDPE shall be butt-fusion type for
f. All connectors shall be approved for watertight end-to-end joints and electro- fusion type for all
application and assembled according to the others.
manufacturer’s recommendations.
d. Nipples shall be schedule 80.
g. No wire smaller than 18 gauge shall be used.
e. Threaded connections of PVC to metal shall have
6. Backflow prevention devices male threads on the PVC and female threads on
the metal.
a. All backflow prevention devices shall be in new
condition with the size, manufacturer, and f. Polyethylene barb fittings and marlex street ells
features as shown in the design or approved are acceptable for use with 15mm (0.5in.) swing
equal. Reference Section 10.3.1.7. Alternate pipe or triple swing joint assemblies.
Materials.
g. All medium density polyethylene [MDPE] or
b. All devices used shall be approved for the low-density polyethylene [LDPE] insert fittings
application and shall meet or exceed the local shall be double clamped with stainless steel
plumbing requirements. clamps.
7. Pipe – polyethylene 10. Cement and primer
a. All pipe shall be in new condition, extruded from a. The cement and primer combination shall be as
virgin materials and continuously and recommended by the manufacturer to be
permanently marked with the manufacturers suitable for the materials, temperature and
name, material, size, and pressure rating. application, used as directed, and shall meet local
codes.
b. All pipe shall be series rated for a pressure equal
to or greater than the maximum water pressure 11. Valve boxes
to be encountered in the irrigation system.
a. All valve boxes shall be in new condition and of

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 137

 the size and type as shown in the design or d. Backfill material shall be free of rocks and/or
approved equal. Reference Section 10.3.1.7. other unsuitable materials which could damage
Alternate Materials. the pipe or create unusual settlement problems.

12. Sleeving e. Backfill material around the swing joints and

under the heads shall be of a suitable type to
a. Sleeving material shall be series 160 PVC unless allow appropriate movement under impact.
the circumstances of its installation require a
stronger material to ensure its survival during f. Trenches shall be at least 300mm (12in.) away
ongoing construction activity by other trades. from paving stone or other hard surfaces to avoid
undermining such surface or its edge retention.
b. Sleeving shall be sized to be:
2. Pipe
i. Twice the size of the sum of all pipe being
protected for a lateral line. a. Visually inspect each pipe prior to installation,
removing any dimpled, scored or otherwise
ii. Three times the size of the sum of all pipe damaged sections.
being protected for a main line.
b. Lay the pipe in a straight line between fittings,
c. Water pipe and wire shall not share the same placing it on firm soil at all points in the trench.
sleeve.
c. Multiple pipes may occupy the same trench
13. Hydraulic controls provided that a minimum of 50mm (2in.) horizon-
tal clearance can be maintained and the pipes are
a. Hydraulic control lines and the associated water all on the same plane.
filtration equipment shall be as recommended by
the manufacturer of the control devices being d. All solvent welding shall be completed in compli-
used. ance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
with attention to cleanliness, air temperature,
moisture, and curing time. Excess cement shall be
removed from all joints.
10.3.4. INSTALLATION
e. All polyethylene insert fittings in 35mm (1.5in.)
Prior to beginning the installation, the contractor shall
and 50mm (2in.) sizes shall be double clamped.
verify the site-specific design information, including water
pressure and flow, the area for each hydrozone, grading f. Joint restraints or thrust blocking is required for
and slopes, utility locations, and any other important gasketed PVC pipe 75mm (3in.) and larger.
features. The proposed system should be laid out by
survey and sprinkler locations flagged. The relative lack of g. As the pipe layout in the design is diagrammatic,
flexibility in pipe, valve, and particularly sprinkler place- care shall be taken during the installation to size
ment will require coordination with landscape planting the pipe to keep the maximum velocity of flow at
locations to minimize conflict, damage, and to avoid 1.5m/second (5ft./second).
compromising the irrigation design.
3. Valves and valve boxes
1. Excavation and backfill
a. Manual shut-off valves [such as a gate valve, ball
a. The following coverage to finished grade is valve, or butterfly valve] shall be required, as
required over the piping: close as possible to the point of connection of
the water supply and to isolate sections of
b. All trenches shall be as straight as possible with a mainline on larger systems, to minimize water loss
level, uniform slope to the bottom. in case of an emergency [such as a main line
break] or routine repair.
c. Backfill trenches in 150mm (6in.) layers, tamping
firmly to ensure that the compaction of the b. All valve boxes shall be installed flush with
trench is equal to the surrounding undisturbed finished grade and located in shrub areas where
areas. possible.

138 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

 c. All valves shall be installed vertically and centered level with the finished grade and not higher than
in the box to be easily accessible for servicing. any adjoining hard surface from which there shall
be at least a 50mm (2in.) separation to allow for
d. All valve boxes shall be installed with adequate edging.
clearance above the pipe and on a firm base so as
not to contact the pipe with settlement or upon g. All stationary shrub risers shall be installed with
being depressed. two PVC street elbows connected to the side of
the lateral line pipe and a schedule 80 nipple that
e. Valve boxes shall be supported and of a type of is long enough to suit the plants.
material such as to be able to support the weight
of expected traffic. h. All piping shall be thoroughly flushed prior to the
installation of sprinklers and nozzles. Large zones
f. Minimum valve box size recommendations:
will require progressive flushing.

i. All sprinklers next to sidewalks shall be installed

g. Only valve boxes larger than 25cm (10in.) round
against and 25mm (1in.) below slab to avoid
should be used, otherwise sod grows over too
quickly.
damage by snow removal equipment.

h. Extension boxes shall not be used as the primary 5. Wire

box (as they are not deep enough and the a. All wiring shall be installed to meet local
solenoid wires will get cut).
electrical codes.
4. Sprinklers
b. All wiring shall be protected by being bundled and
a. All pop-up sprinklers shall be connected to the taped at 3m (10ft.) intervals and installed beneath
pipe by an adjustable swing joint assembly that is the irrigation piping or in appropriately sized
sized to meet the flow requirements of the conduit if run independently.
sprinkler.
c. All wire splices shall be contained in a valve box.
b. A swing joint assembly shall be either a PVC triple
d. Sufficient extra wire shall be left in each valve box
swing joint consisting of a Schedule 40 street
such that the splice may be lifted 300mm (12in.)
elbow [MIPT x FIPT], a Schedule 80 nipple, and
above grade. Extra wire will be neatly coiled.
two Schedule 40 street elbows at the head end,
or a polyethylene swing pipe with a barb by pipe e. White wire shall only be used as the common wire
thread elbow at each end; the end that connects and other colours used shall be consistent from
to the base of the sprinkler shall have an extra valve to controller.
threaded street elbow.
6. Backflow prevention
c. All sprinklers with an inlet size larger than 20mm
(0.75in.) shall use a PVC triple swing joint a. Backflow prevention assemblies shall be installed
assembly or a pre-assembled swing joint only. to protect the potable water supply from con-
tamination by the irrigation system and according
d. Swing joint assemblies for valve-in-head sprinklers to the local plumbing code and the municipal
shall have acme threads and an O-ring sealing approval agency.
mechanism.
b. All cross-connection control devices installed
e. The bottom street elbow of the swing joint shall be sized to accommodate the design’s flow
assembly shall be connected to an outlet on requirements and successfully tested after
the side of the lateral line pipe and the nipple installation by a qualified specialist/professional.
shall be of sufficient length to be installed at an
approximate 45-degree angle when the sprinkler 7. Controller
is mounted at finished grade. A similar alignment
is required if swing pipe is used, with a minimum a. The controller shall be firmly mounted at approxi-
length of polyethylene tubing of 300mm (12in.). mate eye level with all wiring done in the control-
ler or an approved junction box.
f. All pop-up sprinklers shall be installed flush and
CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 139
 b. Zones shall be wired in a logical sequence and 1. Inspection
unless they can be clearly described, a scaled site
plan shall be mounted next to the controller with a. Upon completion of the irrigation system
each zone clearly outlined. installation, all pressure regulation, arcs, distances
of throw, sprinkler locations and height, controller
c. The installation of any rain/moisture sensing zones, etc., shall be adjusted to optimize the
equipment shall be noted on the controller and operation of the system and make it ready for
the location of the controller’s circuit breaker inspection and testing.
indicated unless obvious.
b. Inspection will be carried out by the owner’s
8. Turf valves/quick coupling valves representative to ensure that the work has been
completed in a neat and workmanlike fashion and
a. All turf valves/quick coupling valves installed in meets the intent of the installation standards
the landscape shall be mounted on a suitably sized previously agreed upon.
swing joint, either solidly supported by clamping
to an angle iron stake, or the last two fittings 2. Testing
attached to the quick coupling valve shall be a
90-degree galvanized/brass elbow and a galva- a. The test will require that the system be operated
nized/brass nipple. sequentially with the controller, in the presence
of the owner’s representative.
9. Sleeving
b. The purpose of the test is to verify that the
a. All sleeving in soil shall be installed and sleeve system adequately covers the landscape to be
trenches backfilled with the same considerations irrigated and meets the design criteria previously
for protection of the material as if it were water agreed upon.
pipe. Compaction shall be to the same standard
as the adjoining undisturbed soil and the sleeves c. There are no circumstances under which the
shall project at least 300mm (12in.) on either side system main line should be subjected to the
of the hard surface being crossed. application of compressed air as a static pressure
test. This is a hazardous and unnecessary
b. Sleeving being installed across roads or driveways procedure. The water meter will detect leakage
for later use shall have the necessary pipe of any significance and if absent and leaking is
installed at the same time with each end elbow- suspected, hydrostatic pressure testing can
ing to at least 1m (39in.) above grade. be considered.

c. When it is not possible to install sleeving, 3. Deficiencies

the water pipe shall be DR11 HDPE
a. Any deficiencies noted during the inspection and
testing shall be rectified promptly and signed off
10.3.5. SITE MAINTENANCE by the owner’s representative.

1. The job site shall be kept in a neat, clean, and orderly b. Any disputes arising from the use or implementa-
condition at all times during the installation process. tion of these standards may be referred to the
Irrigation Association for recommendations.
2. All scrap and excess materials are to be regularly
removed from the site and not buried in excavation.
10.3.7. INSTALLATION DETAIL DRAWINGS
3. Trenching, laying pipe and backfilling shall be continuous
so that the amount of open trench at the end of each 1. The following drawings are provided for reference
workday is minimized. Any open trench or other excava- only. Individual project requirements may dictate
tions shall be barricaded and marked with high visibility differences in installation procedure that are not
flagging tape. identified here and shall be provided in the design
package.

10.3.6. INSPECTION AND TESTING

140 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

10.4. IRRIGATION PLANS/ depth of coverage.
AS-BUILT PLANS 9. Location of all buried wire, splice boxes, connection
10.4.1. MINIMUM RECOMMENDATION points and grounding points.

1. Every owner of an irrigation system will need to locate 10. Location and function of other irrigation equipment
the equipment buried on his/her property at some point. used on the project (including fertilizer injectors, rain
It is a contractor’s responsibility to supply an as-built plan shut-off devices, booster pumps, etc.).
to the owner in the form of a reproducible scaled plot plan.
11. Location of all underground sleeves (including the size
It is also recommended that the contractor retain
and type of pipe).
a copy. As-built plans will indicate any changes from the
original design of the proposed irrigation system. 12. Name, contact phone number and address of the
installing contractor.
10.4.2. ITEMS INCLUDED ON A TYPICAL AS-BUILT/
RECORD DRAWING PLAN ARE:

1. Scale of the drawing, complete with an irrigation legend

showing the identification of irrigation components.

2. Property lines, easements, existing or proposed

structures, impervious surfaces, and existing natural
features.

3. Date of the installation/as-built plan.

4. Minimum system requirements e.g. 227 litres per

minute @ 3.8 bar (60 USGPM @ 55 PSI).

5. Flow rate (gallons per minute), application rate (inches

per hour), and design operating pressure (pressure per
square inch) for each irrigation zone.

6. Location and size of the point of connection to the

water supply and meter locations along with static water
pressure at the point of connection to the water supply
and dynamic water pressure for system operation.
Information included shall be:

a. The size and type of the pipe the system is

connected to;

b. Location and type of winterization point.

7. Location, type and size of all components of the irriga-

tion system, including, but not limited to, backflow
preventer, smart irrigation controllers, main and lateral
lines, manual valves, remote control valves, sprinkler
heads, moisture sensing devices, rain switches, quick
couplers, pressure regulators.

8. Locations of all underground irrigation pipe including

type and size of pipe, (e.g. 25mm (1in.) PVC; 15mm (0.5in.)
Poly; 20mm (0.75in.) PEX; 50mm (2in.) copper; etc.),
fittings, reductions and changes of direction, including

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 141

 FIGURE 10.1. SHRUB SPRAY ON RISER

142 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

FIGURE 10.2. TURF ROTARY HEAD OR FIGURE 10.3. QUICK COUPLER VALVE
POP-UP SPRAY HEAD

FIGURE 10.4. REMOTE CONTROL VALVE

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 143

 FIGURE 10.5. CONTROLLER
WALL MOUNT

144 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

PLANT HEALTH CARE [PHC], INTEGRATED PEST MANAGEMENT [IPM],
AND INTEGRATED VEGETATION MANAGEMENT [IVM]

11.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2. Industry

11.1.1. PURPOSE STATEMENT AND INTENT a. Ontario Landscape Tree Planting Guide

1. IPM, IVM, and Plant Health Care [PHC] are coordinated b. Sustainable Turf – Establishment, Maintenance
decision making processes and approaches that follow a and IPM Guidelines for Turf in Atlantic Canada,
best practices methodology to ensure effective manage- Second Edition 2017
ment of the landscape in an environmentally sound and
c. IPM Council of Canada
cost-effective manner.
11.1.3. INTEGRATED PEST MANAGEMENT [IPM],
2. Using a combination of these tools can minimize
PLANT HEALTH CARE [PHC] AND INTEGRATED
infestations, reduce damage and contribute to the health,
VEGETATION MANAGEMENT [IVM]
sustainability and performance of the both the natural and
built landscape. 1. Integrated Pest Management [IPM] is an approach to
pest management that utilizes all available tools to reduce
3. The intent of this section is to provide guidance that
pest populations to an acceptable level in a cost-effective,
supports the implementation of Management, Plant
environmentally rational manner. These tools include
Health Care and Integrated Vegetation Management
monitoring, cultural control, physical control, biological
control and chemical control. IPM involves accurately
11.1.2. RELATED REFERENCES, STANDARDS, identifying a pest, understanding its biology and most
AND LEGISLATION susceptible life stage, establishing action thresholds,
choosing appropriate management techniques and
1. Government evaluating their effectiveness.

a. NMS Section 31 31 19.13 Chemical Vegetation 2. Plant Health Care [PHC] is an integrative approach for
Control establishing and sustaining the long-term performance,
vitality and vigour of plants in managed landscapes. PHC
b. NMS Section 32 93 10 Trees, Shrubs and planning incorporates landscape design, cultural practices,
Groundcover Planting and integrated pest management with client input and
education. PHC focuses on maintaining healthy plants
c. NMS Section 32 91 19.16 Topsoil Placement and with management practices that align with the property
Grading owner’s goals. Combining the methodologies and
d. NMS Section 32 92 23 Sodding philosophy of IPM and PHC in landscape management
ultimately leads to healthier plants while reducing
e. NMS Section 32 92 19.13 Mechanical Seeding the need for inputs and maintenance activities.

f. NMS Section 32 92 19.16 Hydraulic Seeding 3. Integrated Vegetation Management [IVM] is an

integrated approach to noxious plants and invasive species
g. Canadian Environmental Assessment Act management that utilizes the basic principles of IPM to
effectively reduce the impact of invasive and noxious
h. Canadian Environmental Protection Act weeds on the environment. IPM for invasive plants is a
decision-making process that includes identification and
i. Canadian Pest Control Products Act
inventory of invasive plant populations, assessment of the
j. Provincial Invasive Species Councils and risks that they pose, development of well-informed
Organization control decisions that use a combination of biological,
cultural, mechanical, physical and chemical methods, and
k. Global Invasive Species Database the monitoring of the outcome of any treatment(s). In the
context of invasive plants, IPM is also referred to as
l. OMAFRA – Publication 841, Chapter 2 Integrated Vegetation Management [IVM]. In the highest
levels of IPM practices, biological, cultural, mechanical and
m. Province of British Columbia – AgriServiceBC, physical management tools are used preferentially over
Integrated Pest Management chemical tools. Chemical tools are employed when the use
of other methods would result in unacceptable pest
CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 145
management levels, environmental degradation, [e.g. wasps lay their eggs inside soft-bodied insects
tillage on highly erodible hillsides, or where vegetation such as aphids. The wasp eggs hatch and feed
levels have exceeded an established acceptable threshold] on the contents of their aphid host, eventu-
or where the plant pest is threatening the natural ally killing the host.
ecosystem and all other methods are cost prohibitive.
iii. Pathogens cause diseases and these organ-
4. Reference Section 3, Site Preparation and Protection, isms can be in the form of a bacteria, fungi or
Section 9, Landscape Maintenance and Appendix D, National virus. These are referred to as microbial
voluntary code of conduct for the ornamental horticulture insecticides, biorational or bio-insecticides.
industry. Bacillus thuringiensis or Bt, is a common
pathogen used by industry.
11.2. PRODUCTS
4. Chemical controls
1. Cultural controls
a. A chemical control uses a pesticide, either
a. Cultural controls use a plant health care approach synthetically or naturally derived, to control pests,
and process that includes best management weeds and disease on turf and plants. There are
practices such as soil health, resistant plant several types of pesticides available, specific to
selection, location of planting [Right plant in the the pest, weed or disease. With all pesticides, it is
Right place], irrigation, pruning and plant important to read the product label carefully and
nutrition. ensure the proper product is selected specific to
the pest, weed or disease.
2. Physical Controls
i. Insecticide is generally specific to insect
a. Physical controls use control
i. Manual removal of infested plants, plant ii. Fungicide is generally specific to disease
parts or weeds control
ii. Products such as yellow sticky tape to trap iii. Herbicide is generally specific to weed
flying insects control
iii. Sticky bands on tree trunks to prevent iv. A selective herbicide is a chemical that will
movement of insects into the canopy kill a specific type of plant
iv. Water pressure from a hose v. A nonselective herbicide is a chemical that
will kill all types of plants
3. Biological controls
vi. contact herbicide is a chemical that is only
a. A biological control reduces and/or suppresses
effective where it touches the plant
turf and plant pests and diseases by introducing
its living natural enemy [beneficial species] to vii. A systemic herbicide is a chemical that is
affected areas. The biological control choice, absorbed through the leaves or roots where
timing and application method must be specific it enters the plants vascular system to kill
to the pest or disease. These natural enemies are the plant
generally classed as a predator, a parasitoid or a
pathogen.
11.3. EXECUTION – INTEGRATED
i. Coccinellida spp. [ladybird/ladybug beetles]:
larvae and adults, Neuroptera spp. [lacewings] PEST MANAGEMENT
- larvae and predatory mites are common 11.3.1. AN IPM PROGRAM INVOLVES THE
predators outdoors. These predators feed on FOLLOWING COMPONENTS:
soft-bodied insect pests such as aphids, mites
and scale nymphs. 1. Monitoring
ii. Parasitic wasps are also common beneficial a. Monitoring is the most important aspect of IPM.
insects in the landscape. The adult female Monitoring data provides the basis for making
146 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020
 informed decisions about pest management branches infested with scale insects] can be an
practices. Early detection is the key to preventing important part of IPM.
pests from reaching economic injury levels [EIL]
and may help minimize the use of pesticides. b. The contractor:

b. The contractor shall: i. Should remove infested plants or pests

[including weeds] from landscape areas and
i. Keep detailed records of monitoring observa- destroy them.
tions including date, location, weather
conditions, stages of plant species phenology, ii. Should install sticky bands on the trunks of
plant host identification, pest identification landscape trees to trap or exclude/repel
and population level, percent of host crawling insects and use sticky traps baited
affected, host condition, management with lures to attract breeding adults and their
actions and evaluation. egg masses [e.g., adult gypsy moths] away
from their natural plant hosts.
ii. Develop monitoring programs that consist of
regular physical examinations of all produc- 4. Biological control
tion and landscape areas during the growing
a. Biological control is a method for managing pests
season, including above and below ground
by using natural enemies. In IPM, natural enemies
plant parts.
[beneficial species] are introduced to a situation,
iii. Monitor for pests on a weekly basis as early or steps are taken to preserve the natural
detection is important. enemies that are already present.

2. Cultural control b. The Contractor should monitor for pest popula-

tions, and:
a. Cultural control activities are preventative plant
care and best management practices that help i. Identify and source natural predators and
avoid the pest from becoming a problem. parasites from insectaries [or other reputable
suppliers] and introduce as required.
b. The contractor:
ii. Identify natural predators [natural enemies]
i. Shall avoid irrigating after 3:00 pm, since leaf and parasites, as they are also an important
wetness periods that extend into the night aspect of pest control that can reduce the
may increase disease problems. need for pest control product applications.

ii. Should irrigate enough to adequately wet the 5. Chemical control

root zone but less frequently so the soil can
dry out between irrigation events to a. When all other methods of management fail or
encourage deeper rooting in situations where when pest populations are threatening the
disease is a problem. economic value or viability of the plants, pesti-
cides may be the most effective solution. When
iii. Should specify and select plant cultivars that used wisely, a pesticide program can be an
are tolerant of disease and insect pests. For important part of an IPM Plan.
example, Betula nigra and its cultivars are
more tolerant of bronze birch borer than b. The contractor shall:
Betula pendula.
i. Select the most suitable, effective product
iv. Select only healthy specimens for landscape that is least toxic to non-target organisms.
plantings and prepare the planting site to
ii. Before using a pesticide, read the pest
accommodate and to support root growth
control product’s label and understand its
into the soil surrounding the rootball.
relative toxicity, mode of action, persistence
3. Physical control and safe application. Canadian pesticide
labels can be found at Health Canada’s
a. Physical control, such as manually removing Pesticide Label website/App if required.
infested plants or plant parts, [e.g. scrubbing
CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 147
 iii. Apply the product to coincide with the of the landscape
susceptible stage of the pest [according to
biology and monitoring observations] to c. Plant inspection, observing:
optimize effectiveness of control.
i. Overall plant health
iv. Apply products according to municipal,
ii. Signs of insect pest and plant disease
provincial and federal regulations. Reference
The Canadian Pest Control Products Act. iii. Symptoms of nutrient deficiency/toxicity
11.3.2. SITE REVIEW iv. Growth abnormalities, stunting [short
internodes]
1. The site review is a systematic inspection performed to
collect current and site-specific information to form the v. Pruning requirements
basis for mapping, referencing, and record keeping, and
formulates a strategic approach to Integrated Pest vi. Root flare is intact, unobstructed and visible
Management and Plant Health Care.
vii. Canopy structure
2. The Contractor should undertake a site review to collect
data that includes, but is not limited to: d. Cultural maintenance practices and history,
identifying:
a. Physical characteristics, identifying:
i. Transplanting methods
i. Soil conditions and characteristics
ii. Spacing
• Texture [sand, silt, clay]
iii. Irrigating
• Depth of topsoil
• Drainage and compaction iv. Fertilizing
• pH and Electrical Conductivity [EC] v. Pruning
• Soil fertility [soil nutrient analysis]
vi. Sanitation
• Organic Matter [OM] content
• Cation Exchange Capacity [CEC] vii. Staking
ii. Micro-climate conditions, identifying: viii. Mowing practices
• Temperature 3. The Contractor should observe landscape use patterns,
• Exposure to sun, light and shade patterns identifying:
• Wind exposure and air circulation a. Frequency and purpose of use
• Water features, both natural and built
b. Pedestrian and vehicular traffic patterns
• Topography
c. Seasonal changes
• Surface drainage patterns
• Irrigation system frequency, 4. The Contractor should observe environmental and
amount, type sociological concerns, identifying:
b. Plant inventory, identifying: a. Potential for runoff and sedimentation into water
bodies, ditches or storm drains
i. The species, and if possible, the cultivars
of plants in the landscape b. Use by wildlife populations, such as birds,
mammals, pollinators
ii. The plotted locations, numbers and
plant names on a site map c. Impact on adjacent properties
iii. Maturity/age of plants/condition 5. The Contractor shall identify insect pests, plant
diseases, weeds and beneficial species and should:
148 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020
 a. Develop profiles for each insect pest, plant a. Record keeping journal [notebook, pen, pencil,
disease, weed, or invasive/noxious species that is permanent marker]
prevalent in the area. The profile should include: b. Bucket, hand trowel, shovel
i. Accurate plant identification, knowledge of c. Camera
pest life cycles [and appropriate monitoring d. Smart phone with monitoring apps
techniques] and host species range. [e.g. BugFinder]
ii. Signs and symptoms of infestation/infection. e. Cooler with ice to keep samples

iii. Favourable environmental conditions: f. Cup cutter

Seasonal and weather conditions that g. Dish detergent and scrub brush
coincide with pest, pathogen, or beneficial h. Flagging ribbon and flagging stakes
activity including:
i. Hand lens [10-20X]
• Minimum and maximum air temperature j. Insect pest and plant disease guides
• Soil temperatures k. Plastic bags, bottles and identification tags
• Precipitation l. Pruning tools [secateurs, loppers, pruning knife,
• Wind direction telescopic pole pruners]
• Prevalence m. Rain gauge
• Hours of sunlight n. Rating grid
iv. Insect pest, plant disease and beneficial o. Ruler/tape measure
species identification, noting both the p. Forceps & collection vials
common and scientific name.
q. Rubbing alcohol
v. Monitoring techniques that are effective for r. Soil probes and soil penetrometer
each pest.
s. Sweep net, white tapping tray
vi. Insect pest, plant disease and beneficial t. Soil thermometer and soil moisture sensor
species identification keys, stages of develop-
ment, photos, and maps. u. Traps and lures for monitoring etc.

vii. Life cycles and historical populations: 7. Plant and insect/microorganism phenology
• Identify damage symptoms and a. Plant growth and insect development are
signs of pests correlated to temperature, therefore the time a
• Developmental stage particular plant is in bloom is dependent upon the
• Number of generations daily accumulation of heat units or growing
degree days. Growing Degree Days [GDD]
viii. Treatment strategies identifying: are calculated by finding the average daily
temperature and subtracting 10C from this
• Which lifecycle stages are most susce- number. [GDD = (TMAX + TMIN)/2 – TBASE].
tible to various management strategies. GDD’s are added together, resulting in an
• Which beneficial species have potential accumulated total for the growing season.
to suppress the pest populations most Calendar dates for phenological events differ
effectively. from year to year, so it is important that any
ix. Record-keeping documents Integrated Pest Management program should
consider GDD and phenology models. Plants,
x. Reference materials [e.g. BugFinder app] arthropods and microorganism pests generally
develop in the same relationship to each other
6. The contractor should have access to the following tools in any given year based on daily heat exposure,
to conduct a site review: making Plant Phenology models a very efficient
way for contractors to monitor pest
CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 149
 development. to be completely eliminated. The contractor
should manage pests at acceptable levels also
8. Monitoring techniques known as the Economic Injury Level [EIL], or the
pest population level where the dollar loss from
a. Insects injury equals the cost of implementing a control
i. Soil dwelling insects: soap flush, irritating measure.
drench, flotation or flooding, excavation b. Disease and weed thresholds are subjective and
ii. Flying insects: traps [pheromone/light/pitfall/ vary according to maintenance levels and site
sticky], sweep net, beating tray, black lights usage. Limits should be established by the owner
or consultant with the contractor.
b. Diseases
11. Pest management planning considerations
i. Symptoms appearance/colour/location/
tissues affected a. Pest management planning and decision
making should take into consideration
ii. Quantification of necrosis: necrotic spots, the following criteria:
cankers, root and stem necrosis
i. Least disruptive method/tool
c. Weeds
ii. Least hazardous to human health
i. Weed species, numbers, and stage of growth
iii. Least harmful to non-target organisms
ii. Growing media conditions and texture
iv. Least harmful to the environment
9. Abiotic conditions to note at time of infestation/
infection v. Effectiveness on target organism

a. Soil: moisture, temperature, compaction, and vi. Compliance with municipal by-laws,
fertility levels provincial and federal regulations

b. Turf thatch layer: thickness, density 12. The checklist provided in Section 11.3.3. Integrated Pest
Management Checklist provides a tool for contractors to
c. Surface site drainage and slope support a systematic inspection, monitoring and measure-
ment approach to IPM.
d. Irrigation/precipitation patterns and leaf wetness
periods 11.3.3. INTEGRATED PEST MANAGEMENT CHECKLIST

e. Air circulation Scheduling and monitoring for timely and effective

decision making includes:
f. Hours of direct sunlight or shade
__ Establish a regular schedule to identify and
g. Mowing height and frequency monitor pests and diseases to support
effective decision making and action.
h. Mulching depth, root flare visibility Reference Section 9, Landscape Maintenance.
i. Damage during or following: __ Develop a process that includes detailed
record keeping such as a maintenance log for
• Extreme temperatures
recording and reference.
• High humidity
Identify pest and/or disease, the damage risk and avail-
• Heavy rainfall
able options for control(s):
• Drought
__ Identify pest/disease. Consult with qualified
• Wind
professionals or a diagnostic lab as required.
10. Threshold establishment
__ Identify lifecycle of the pest or disease.
a. Insect, disease, or weed pests can be challenging
150 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020
 __ Identify naturally occurring/present biological
controls that can support the control program.

__ Determine potential risk for damage to site.

Develop action threshold specific to the pest and/or disease:

__ Identify the owner’s tolerance for pest popula-

tions and damage; this will depend on desired
level of aesthetics, use, health issues or an
environmental position or opinion.

__ Determine how much damage is acceptable.

__ Identify the action threshold [the level of

population or extent reached before control is
applied].

Determine best control and application methods and

implementation plan:

__ Cultural control methods [undertake Plant

Health Care [PHC] best management practices]

__ Physical control methods [initiate hand picking/

pruning/removal, and hose water rinse, install
sticky tapes and barriers etc.]

__ Biological controls [apply predatory insects,

parasitic insects, beneficial nematodes, micro-
bial applications etc.]

__ Chemical controls [apply pesticide, herbicide or

fungicide]

Implement follow-up monitoring to determine efficacy

- document methods, execution and results:

__ Inspect, monitor and record control measure

results during and post application.

__ Record findings and include photographs.

__ Measure and record results and determine

efficacy.

__ Make recommendations and modify the IPM

program as required.

11.4. EXECUTION - PLANT HEALTH

CARE [PHC]
11.4.1. PLANT HEALTH CARE INCLUDES THE
FOLLOWING COMPONENTS:

1. Plant Selection

a. Plant selection impacts plant health, and

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 151
 therefore the contractor should consider the cultural practices to optimize plant health:
following when selecting plants:
i. Monitoring and regular check-ups
i. Maintenance or control options will not ii. Diagnosis of plant problems
compensate effectively for the site condi-
tions if plants are not selected to be suitable iii. Cultural considerations
to the site. Selection of the ‘right plant for iv. Fertilization
the right place’ is critical.
v. Soil pH adjustment
b. The contractor shall consider the following when vi. Irrigating
selecting plants:
vii. Aeration of soils
i. Site characteristics viii. Mulching
• Environmental conditions ix. Pruning and mowing
• Soil type x. Thatch removal
• Major insect pest and plant disease xi. Over-seeding
presence xii. Winter protection
• Plant characteristics, tolerance and
requirements for growth and development 4. Evaluation

• Cultural practices a. After any pest/disease management strategy is

ii. Plant and turf tolerance is specific and implemented, monitoring and evaluation to assess
dependent on several factors: effects and efficacy should be conducted. Impact
on pest populations, beneficial populations and
• Insect pest or plant disease species other elements of the ecosystem should be
present or combination thereof determined. The assessed effectiveness of the
management program may indicate the necessity
• Inherent tolerance of the cultivar to the to perform additional monitoring and implemen-
insect pest or plant disease tation of additional management measures.
• Vigour and condition of plants
b. Monitoring, follow-up treatment, records,
• Time of year observations from field staff, and other feedback
2. Planting should be analyzed to assess the effectiveness of
the IPM program and to identify areas for IPM
a. The contractor shall consider Plant Health Care practice and pest management improvement.
and the following procedures when planting:
c. The evaluation process should include:
i. Preparation of planting area
i. Analysis of treatment results
ii. Planting pit width/depth
iii. Time of digging/planting ii. Fine-tuning of monitoring techniques

iv. Irrigating iii. Review of management options

v. Fertilizing iv. Determination of next steps to maintain
vi. Pruning of roots and shoots plant health
vii. Backfilling 5. Reference Section 6, Plants and Planting.
viii. Staking
11.4.2. IPM AND PHC MONITORING:
ix. Mulching
x. Sod or seed 1. The Standard IPM & Plant Health Care Monitoring form
that should be used by contractors includes identification
3. Plant maintenance of the following information:

a. The contractor shall undertake the following a. Date of observation(s)

152 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020
 b. Monitor/scout name(s) Canadian Legal Information Institute [CanLII].
c. Client name/address/location/grid number b. Three elements common to all invasive plant
d. Plant/turf species management strategies are:
e. Sampling techniques used i. Prevention measures that includes site
f. Plant/turf location planning and preparation, construction/
g. Pest/disease quantity and activity installation, and maintenance operations.

h. Natural enemy [beneficial species] quantity and ii. Establishment of an early detection system.
activity
iii. Application of Integrated Pest Management
i. Introduced predator/parasite populations and [IPM] principles.
activity
j. Environmental conditions 11.5.3. PREVENTION
k. Abiotic and biotic factors 1. The most cost effective and environmentally sound
l. General notes management option for invasive plants is prevention. The
contractor shall undertake the following approaches to
m. Recommendations prevention:

a. Identify the priority invasive plant species within

11.5. EXECUTION – INTEGRATED the area, assessing its populations and monitoring
VEGETATION MANAGEMENT [IVM] its spread.

11.5.1. The following provides an overview of integrated pest b. Identify species of concern by having invasive
management [IPM] practices for invasive plants, which green plant species identification resources available
industry professionals should implement due diligence to and supporting the implementation of prevention
reduce the impact of invasive and noxious plants. and management measures where appropriate.

1. Invasive plants are negatively impacting landscape and 11.5.4. MANAGEMENT PRACTICES
nursery operations across Canada. Qualified professionals,
1. The recommended practices outlined below are general
including landscape architects, nursery growers, installa-
in nature and can be applied to any invasive plants;
tion and maintenance contractors, and others can
however, management methods vary considerably with
mitigate these negative impacts by implementing a
invasive plant species, severity of the infestation area [e.g.
combination of prevention and management practices.
m2] and density [e.g. plants/m2], season of removal,
2. The term invasive plant is used and includes provincially projected maintenance level after removal, and site
listed noxious weeds, as well as other alien plant species considerations.
with the potential to pose undesirable impacts on humans,
2. The contractor:
animals or ecosystems.
a. Should consider site and species specific biolog-
3. Reference Appendix D, National Voluntary Code Of
ical, cultural, mechanical, physical or chemical
Conduct For The Ornamental Horticulture Industry.
management methods and apply them to provide
11.5.2. INVASIVE PLANTS MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES effective, efficient, and environmentally sound
site management practices.
1. The contractor should develop IVM management
strategies with consideration of the following: b. Should implement recommended general
management practices including, but are not
a. Management strategies will vary by landscape limited to:
maintenance level, invasive species identified, and
region of Canada. For detailed information on i. Identifying priority invasive plant species in
management of specific invasive plant species, the working area and keeping staff, and
refer to The Canadian Weed Science Society construction and maintenance contractors
resources. For information on provincial, territo- informed.
rial and federal legislation on weeds refer to the
CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 153
 ii. Identifying and documenting where invasive
species might impact the disrupted project
site on planting plans. Documentation should
include invasive plant species on site and in
surrounding areas, as well as best manage-
ment practices for removal with respect to
timing, methods used, and success rates.

iii. Where invasive plants are encountered, using

species-specific biology and life cycle to
determine suitable management measures.

iv. Managing on-site and surrounding invasive

plant infestations prior to site construction or
disturbance.

v. Removing and disposing of invasive plants

completely and in a suitable manner. [Refer
to species specific management information
to confirm].

vi. Washing plant seeds and reproductive parts

from personal gear, equipment, vehicles and
machinery at designated cleaning stations
before leaving infested sites. Keep equipment
out of areas infested by invasive plants and
maintain equipment yards and storage areas
free of invasive plants.

vii. Minimizing areas of soil disturbance during

site construction and re-vegetate disturbed
areas as soon after disturbance as possible
using a suitable combination of scarification/
cultivation, seeding/planting, and fertilization
and/or mulching.

viii. Importing or supplying fill material, compost

and growing medium that is free of invasive
plant seeds and reproductive parts.

ix. Providing seed to be used to re-vegetate the

site that meets Federal Seeds Act
regulations.

x. Monitoring the site for a minimum period of

2 years post-disturbance to prevent estab-
lishment and spread of invasive plants.

154 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

HARDSCAPE
12.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS k. National Concrete Masonry Association
[NCMA SRW]
12.1.1. PURPOSE STATEMENT AND INTENT
l. NCMA Segmental Retaining Wall Best
1. The intent of this section is to provide users with Practices Guide
relevant standards and technical resources related to
hardscape elements and related components. m. Canadian Institute of Steel Construction CISC/
ICCA Handbook of steel construction
2. In order that hardscape elements and related compo-
nents are installed to a satisfactory level it is intended that n. Master Painters and Decorators Association
the provisions of Section 1, Scope of the Standard, and [MPDA]
Section 2, Contract administration, also apply.
o. Illuminating Engineering Society [IES] The
12.1.2. RELATED REFERENCES, Lighting Handbook
STANDARDS AND LEGISLATION
p. The Canadian Playground Safety Institute [CPSI]
1. Government
q. Certified Landscape Designer Landscape Design
a. Master Municipal Construction Documents Manual
[MMCD] including paving and related work
r. Time-Saver Standards for Landscape
b. National Building Code of Canada NBC 2010 Part Architecture, Second Edition
9 Housing and small buildings
s. Canada Green Building Council [CaGBC]
c. Legislation, codes and regulations such as LEED v4.1
electrical codes and municipal bylaws
12.1.3. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND
d. Canada Occupational Health and Safety RESOURCES
Regulations
1. For hardscape elements not addressed in detail by this
2. Industry Standard, there is an abundance of additional sources of
information available and provided by recognized organi-
a. Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute [ICPI] zations including but not limited to:

b. Ground Alliance CCGA Best Practices, current a. Standards such as those published by the CSA
edition Group, ASTM International and other indepen-
dent standards institutes or associations that
c. Standards published by the Canadian Standards carry out evaluations of materials and construc-
Association [CSA] tion procedures using standardized testing
methods.
d. Standards published by ASTM International
b. Research publications, codes and standards such
e. Master Painters Institute [MPI] Guide as those issued by the National Research Council
Specifications of Canada [NRC].
f. Geosynthetic Institute [GSI] c. Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute [ICPI].
g. Canadian Wood Council [CWC] Technical d. Publications and online resources made available
Publications by trade organizations.
h. National Lumber Grades Authority [NLGA] e. Literature provided by manufacturers, which can
Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber include technical specifications and design and
i. Portland Cement Association [PCA] installation recommendations.

j. Cement Association of Canada [CAC] f It is recommended that the information,

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 155

 standards and guidance available from the
resources provided, be applied to the planning
and design, project documents, product selec-
tion, and installation and maintenance of
hardscape elements and products. Reference
Section 2.1.7. Critical task list.

g. The listings of related regulatory requirements,

codes, standards, and reference publications
provide guidance. Users of this Standard shall
seek out additional sources of information as
required.

h. Table T-12.1. provides a summary of relevant

codes, standards and technical guidance
references for hardscape elements, products and
materials.

156 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

TABLE T-12.1. RELEVANT CODES, STANDARDS AND TECHNICAL GUIDANCE
REFERENCES FOR HARDSCAPE ELEMENTS, PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS

Hardscape Element/ Code/Standard Resource Title

Products/Materials
Code/Standard
Paving

ICPI Tech Spec 1 Glossary of terms for segmental concrete pavement

ICPI Tech Spec 2 Construction of interlocking concrete pavements

ICPI Tech Spec 3 Edge restraints for interlocking concrete pavements

ICPI Tech Spec 4 Structural design of interlocking concrete pavement for roads and parking lots

ICPI Tech Spec 5 Cleaning, sealing and joint sand stabilization of interlocking concrete pavement

ICPI Tech Spec 6 Reinstatement of interlocking concrete pavements

ICPI Tech Spec 7 Repair of utility cuts using interlocking concrete pavers

ICPI Tech Spec 7 Repair of utility cuts using interlocking concrete pavers

ICPI Tech Spec 8 Concrete grid pavements

ICPI Tech Spec 9 Guide specification for the construction of interlocking concrete pavement

ICPI Tech Spec 10 Application guide for interlocking concrete pavements

ICPI Tech Spec 11 Mechanical installation of interlocking concrete pavements

ICPI Tech Spec 12 Snow melting systems for interlocking concrete pavements

ICPI Tech Spec 13 Slip and skid resistance of interlocking concrete pavements

ICPI Tech Spec 14 Concrete paving units for roof decks

ICPI Tech Spec 15 A guide for the construction of mechanically installed interlocking concrete pavements

ICPI Tech Spec 16 Achieving LEED credits with segmental concrete pavements

ICPI Tech Spec 17 Bedding sand selection for interlocking concrete pavements in vehicular applications

ICPI Tech Spec 19 Design, construction and maintenance of interlocking concrete pavement crosswalks

ICPI Tech Spec 20 Capping and compression strength testing procedures for concrete pavers

ICPI Tech Spec 22 Geosynthetics for segmental concrete pavements

Construction guidelines for segmental concrete paving slabs and planks in non-vehicular
ICPI Tech Spec 25
residential applications

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 157

Permeable ICP

ICPI Tech Spec 18 Construction of permeable interlocking concrete pavement systems

ICPI Tech Spec 23 Maintenance guide for permeable interlocking concrete pavements

Concrete

ASTM C117 Standard test method for material finer than 0.075 mm (no. 200) sieve in mineral aggregates by sashing

Standard test method for evaluating the freeze-thaw durability of dry-cast segmental retaining wall
ASTM C1262/C1262M
units and related concrete units

ASTM C136/C136M Standard test method for sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregates

ASTM C1372 Standard specifications for segmental retaining wall units

ASTM C1781/C1781M Standard specification for mortar for unit masonry

ASTM C270 Standard specification for concrete aggregates

ASTM C33/C33M Standard specification for chemical admixtures for concrete

ASTM C494/C494M Standard specification for solid concrete interlocking paving units

ASTM C936/C936M Standard classification for sizes of aggregate for road and bridge construction

ASTM D448-12 Mortar and grout for unit masonry

CAN/CSA-A179 Carbon steel bars for concrete reinforcement

CAN/CSA-G30.18 Concrete materials and methods of construction/test methods and standard practices for concrete

CSA A23.1/A23.2 Design of concrete structures

CSA A23.3 Precast concrete paving slabs/precast concrete pavers

CSA A231.1/CSA
Qualification code for concrete testing laboratories
A231.2

CSA A283 Cementitious materials compendium

CSA S269.1 Falsework and formwork

Wood

Standard specification for establishing performance ratings for wood-plastic composite and plastic
ASTM D7032
lumber deck boards, stair treads, guards, and handrails
CAN/CSA-O80
Wood preservation
Series

158 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

CAN/CSA-Z809 Sustainable forest management

CSA O141 Softwood lumber

ASTM A121 Standard specification for metallic-coated carbon steel barbed wire

ASTM A123 / A123M Standard specification for zinc [hot dip galvanized] coatings on iron and steel products

ASTM A53/A53M Standard specification for pipe, steel, black and hot-dipped, zinc-coated, welded and seamless

ASTM A702 Standard specification for steel fence posts, hot wrought

Standard test method for weight [mass] of coating on iron and steel articles with zinc or zinc-alloy
ASTM A90 / A90M
coatings
Standard specification for steel sheet, zinc coated [galvanized] or zinc-iron alloy-coated [galvannealed]
ASTM Current
by the hot-dip process
Standard specification for Poly [Vinyl Chloride] [PVC] and other conforming organic polymer-coated
ASTM F1664
steel tension wire used with chain-link fence

CSA G164 Hot dip galvanizing of irregularly shaped articles

CSA G40.20/G40.21 General requirements for rolled or welded structural quality steel/structural quality steel

CSA S16 Design of steel structures

CSA W47.1 Certification of companies for fusion welding of steel

CSA W47.2 Certification of companies for fusion welding of aluminum

CSA W59 Welded steel construction [metal arc welding]

SAE J403 Chemical compositions of SAE carbon steels

Geotextiles

ASTM D4491/
Standard test methods for water permeability of geotextiles by permittivity
D4491M

ASTM D4595 Standard test method for tensile properties of geotextiles by the wide-width strip method

ASTM D4716-/ Standard test method for determining the [in-plane] flow rate per unit width and hydraulic transmissivity
D4716M of a geosynthetic using a constant head

ASTM D4751 Standard test method for determining apparent opening size of a geotextile

Standard test method for evaluating the unconfined tension creep and creep rupture behavior of
ASTM D5262 - 07
geosynthetics
ASTM D7737/
Standard test method for individual geogrid junction strength
D7737M

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 159

Lighting

ANSI/ASHRAE/
Energy standard for buildings
IES 90.1

CSA C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code, part I, Safety standard for electrical installations

IALD/LIRC Guidelines for specification integrity

IES DG-18 Light + Design: A guide to designing quality lighting for people and buildings

IES G-1-16 Guide for security lighting for people, property, and critical infrastructure

IES RP-11 Lighting for interior and exterior residential environments

IES RP-33 Lighting for exterior environments

IES TM-15 Luminaire classification system for outdoor luminaires

MLO-11 Model lighting ordinance

NECA/IESNA-501 Standard for installing exterior lighting systems

Playgrounds

Standard specification for impact attenuation of surfacing materials within the use zone of
ASTM F1292
playground equipment
Standard specification for determination of accessibility of surface systems under and around
ASTM F1951
playground equipment
Standard specification for engineered wood fiber for use as a playground safety surface under
ASTM F2075
and around playground equipment

ASTM F2223 Standard guide for ASTM standards on playground surfacing

Standard test method for impact attenuation of playing surface systems, other protective
ASTM F355
sport systems, and materials used for athletics, recreation and play

CAN/CSA-Z614 Children’s playspaces and equipment

160 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

12.1.4. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 12.2.3. PERMEABLE INTERLOCKING CONCRETE
PAVEMENT [PICP]
1. Hardscape components of the landscape may be subject
to requirements set by the authority having jurisdiction, 1. Permeable interlocking concrete pavement, as a green
and to other related trade or regulatory body require- infrastructure hardscape element, is a durable and
ments, e.g., CSA - Canadian Electrical Code. cost-effective solution for compliance with national,
provincial and municipal stormwater regulations or Low
12.1.5. SAFETY Impact Development [LID] objectives.
1. The contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, 2. Where hardscapes are specified, permeable pavers, or
rules, regulations and lawful orders from any authority pavement with high porosity, should be installed to help
having jurisdiction for the safety of persons and property reduce stormwater runoff and increase water infiltration
to protect them from damage, injury or loss. into the ground. Permeable pavers can also filter pollut-
ants that would otherwise enter local water sheds. The
2. The contractor shall provide and maintain sufficient amount of annual rainfall that can infiltrate into the
personal protective equipment, barricades and safety underlying soil is dependent on the soil’s permeability and
guards for the protection of people and property. can be as high as 100%.
3. Section 9, Landscape Maintenance, shall be used as a 3. Residential driveways and walkways can incorporate
guideline for meeting safety, environmental and site permeable materials while still maintaining a high-level of
protection standards. aesthetic quality and structural function.
4. The contractor shall comply with Canada Occupational 4. PICP products can be specified with a higher solar
Health and Safety Regulations or provincial equivalent reflective index, which can help decrease the heat island
regulations as relevant to the scope of work. effect.
5. The contractor shall comply with Canadian Centre for 5. PICP can reduce runoff and pollutants from walkways,
Occupational Health and Safety, Working at heights patios, driveways, parking lots, alleys, parking lanes, and
training/certification or provincial equivalent regulations. low volume streets.
12.2. PRODUCTS 6. The surface consists of solid concrete pavers with small,
1. Hardscape products installed in the landscape shall be stone-filled joints that allow water to flow into highly
new unless otherwise specified and shall meet the permeable, open-graded bedding, base, and subbase
requirements of the project document(s) specifications. aggregates.

2. Samples and product data 7. The spaces among the aggregates store water and
enable infiltration into the soil subgrade rather than
a. Submit product data, product and material generating surface runoff.
samples, mock-ups and Safety Data Sheets [SDS]
in accordance with Section 2, Contract 8. The paver joints provide 100 percent surface
Administration. permeability.

3. Table T-12.1. provides a summary of relevant codes, 9. Reference National Master Specifications [NMS] Division
standards and technical guidance references for hard- 32.
scape elements, products and materials. 12.2.4. RETAINING WALLS/SEGMENTED
12.2.2. PAVING RETAINING WALLS

1. Paving may include gravel, interlocking concrete pavers 1. Retaining walls are constructed using a variety of
[ICP], concrete slabs, concrete cast-in place, asphalt, materials and systems, selected to suit the requirements.
natural stone, dry laid stone, mortared paving [brick, tile These systems include but are not limited to reinforced
and stone], and safety surfaces [wood fibre and rubber]. cast in place concrete, precast concrete segmental
systems, dry stacked stone, mortared stone, timber,
2. Paving may be specified for projects including but not gabions, Mechanically Stabilized Earth [MSE], and vegetat-
limited to roadways and parking areas that require civil ed MSE systems.
engineering services.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 161

12.2.5. CONCRETE – CAST-IN-PLACE 3. Landscape lighting provides outdoor illumination of
private gardens and public landscapes for the enhance-
1. Concrete elements include footings and bases for other ment and purposes of safety, nighttime aesthetics,
landscape elements, edges, curbs, walls, and other accessibility, security, recreation and sports and social and
elements. event uses.
12.2.6. WOOD AND WOOD COMPOSITES 12.2.10. WATER FEATURES
1. Wood construction elements include fences, screens, 1. Water feature elements include ponds, waterfalls,
decks, pergolas, gazebos, and vs and other elements. streams, pondless waterfalls, bubbling rocks, etc.
2. Wood composites are sometimes used in place of wood, 2. Water feature components include structural shells,
e.g. for decks and railings. liners and membranes, water quality treatment and
pumping systems and sensors, lighting systems, decorative
3. Related work may include concrete bases and metal features including rocks, boulders, weirs, etc.
connectors. Care shall be taken in selecting wood species,
preservative treatments and connectors to prevent 12.2.11. PLAYGROUNDS
corrosion of connectors due to preservatives.
1. A playground, playpark, or play area is a place specifically
12.2.7. METAL FABRICATION designed for children, and other age groups including
people with disabilities to play outdoors.
1. Metal fabrication elements includes fences, gates,
trellises, gazebos fabricated from steel, aluminum, and 2. Conventional playgrounds often have recreational
other metals. components such as the seesaw, merry-go-round, swing
set, slide, jungle gym, chin-up bars, sandbox, spring rider,
2 Finishes include, but are not limited to, galvanizing, trapeze rings, playhouses, and mazes etc. These compo-
painting and powder coating. nents help children develop physical coordination,
12.2.8. GEOTEXTILES strength, and flexibility, as well as provide recreation and
enjoyment and supporting social and emotional
1. Geotextiles are permeable fabrics which, when used in development.
association with soil, can separate, filter, reinforce,
protect, or drain. 3. Modern playgrounds provide play structures that link
many different pieces of equipment.
2. Geotextile composites products such as geogrids and
meshes are available. 4. Natural playgrounds also called playscapes is designed
to provide a safe environment for play in a natural setting
3. Geotextiles come in many different types and weights and uses natural landscapes, vegetation and materials in a
of fabric. Lightweight geotextiles are used in drainage, creative and interactive way for child play and exploration
landscaping, and filtration where they help allow water to and discovery.
escape but don’t need to provide structural
reinforcement. 5. Reference product manufacturer’s technical specifica-
tions, design and installation manuals.
12.2.9. LANDSCAPE LIGHTING
12.3. EXECUTION
1. Landscape lighting is provided by line voltage and low
voltage systems and their components can include 1. Hard landscape installation shall be undertaken in
transformers, timers, sensors, electric wiring, etc., and a accordance with the project document[s] specifications,
variety of light fixtures intended for specific uses. using standard industry best practices or manufacturers’
installation recommendations.
2. Due to climate change there is increasing demand for
more efficient lighting. Landscape lighting systems and 2. Table T-12.1. provides a summary of relevant codes,
methods are evolving and include increasing use of LEDs, standards and technical guidance references for hard-
solar power, low voltage fixtures, energy efficient lamps, scape elements, products and materials.
and energy-saving lighting design technology.

162 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

12.3.2. PREPARATION AND COORDINATION 5. The Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute [ICPI]
provides numerous technical resources including technical
1. Locates for utilities and other in-ground systems shall specifications and detail drawings of specific construction
take place prior to excavation. assemblies for interlocking concrete pavements, concrete
grid pavements and precast concrete paving slabs for
2. Before proceeding with installation of hardscape commercial and residential applications.
elements, the contractor shall verify that all substrates are
prepared and are suitable for the installation. Hardscape 6. The following is a sample graphic [drawing number
installation work shall be coordinated with other work on ICPI-16: Patio / sidewalk / plaza on compacted aggregate
site to avoid/prevent damage to other work. base]. Note: There are numerous such resources on the
ICPI website within the resource library ‘Detail Drawings’.
3. Preparation shall include accurate layout as identified in
project document(s), verification of correct grades and
elevations, specified compaction, and removal of contami-
nants and foreign materials. FIGURE 12.1. PATIO/SIDEWALK/PLAZA
ON COMPACTED AGGREGATE BASE
12.3.3. SITE PROTECTION

1. Prevent damage to buildings, landscape and landscape CONCRETE CURB

SET 1/4" (7 MM) BELOW TOP OF PAVERS

elements, curbs, sidewalks, trees, fences, roads, drains,

AND CONTROL JOINTS @ 15’ (5 M) OC

and adjacent property. Make good any damage incurred. CONCRETE PAVER
2 3/8" (60 MM) MIN THICKNESS

GEOTEXTILE 12" (300 MM) WIDE, TURN UP AGAINST CURB

2. Reference Section 3, Site Preparation And Protection. 1" (25 MM) BEDDING SAND

12.3.4. PAVING
COMPACTED AGGREGATE BASE
4" (100 MM) MIN THICKNESS

GEOTEXTILE AS REQUIRED

1. Related work may include edge restraints, curbs, and

sub-base and base preparation.

2. Base preparation considerations: COMPACTED SOIL SUBGRADE

a. Base construction is vital to the longevity of

paving installations. NOTE:
1. THICKNESS OF BASE WILL VARY WITH SUBGRADE CONDITIONS AND CLIMATE.
COLDER CLIMATES MAY REQUIRE THICKER BASES.
2. CONSULT ICPI TECH SPEC 2 FOR GUIDELINES ON SPECIFICATIONS

b. Base preparation specifications shall consider

FOR BASE MATERIALS, SUBGRADE SOIL AND BASE COMPACTION.

subsoil, drainage and grade to provide for

DRAWING NO.

PATIO / SIDEWALK / PLAZA ICPI-16

ON COMPACTED AGGREGATE BASE
effective ground and surface water
SCALE

F.S.

management.

c. Base depths and material requirements can vary 12.3.5. PERMEABLE INTERLOCKING CONCRETE
depending on the specific site conditions and site PAVEMENT [PICP]
use [vehicular or pedestrian]. The base shall be
prepared to project specification or manufactur- 1. The Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute [ICPI]
er’s recommendations. provides numerous technical resources including technical
specifications and detail drawings of specific construction
3. Edge restraints are recommended to mitigate against assemblies for permeable interlocking concrete
the risk of separation, spreading or cracking. Edge re- pavements.
straints shall be installed for interlocking concrete pavers
and concrete slabs. 2. Following are sample ICPI graphics for permeable
pavement with full/partial/no infiltration to soil subgrade.
4. Paving and related work may be subject to the stan- Note: There are numerous such resources on the ICPI
dards of the Master Municipal Construction Documents website within the resource library ‘Detail Drawings’.
[MMCD], including MMCD standard details and specifica-
tions or the National Master Specifications Division 32.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 163

FIGURE 12.2. PERMEABLE PAVEMENT FIGURE 12.4. PERMEABLE PAVEMENT
WITH FULL INFILTRATION TO SOIL WITH NO INFILTRATION TO SOIL
SUBGRADE SUBGRADE

�------ CONCRETE PAYERS MIN. 3 1/8 IN. (80 mm) THICK

FOR VEHICULAR TRAFFIC (ASPECT RATIO� 3)

�----- CURB/EDGE RESTRAINT WITH CUT-OUTS

�----- CURB/EDGE RESTRAINT WITH CUT-OUTS FOR OVERFLOW DRAINAGE (CURB SHOWN)
FOR OVERFLOW DRAINAGE (CURB SHOWN)
---- BEDDING COURSE 1 1/2 IN. TO 2 IN. (40 TO 50 mm) THICK
(TYP. NO. 8 AGGREGATE)

---+--- 4 IN. (100 MM) THICK NO. 57 STONE

OPEN-GRADED BASE
1----+-- MIN. 6 IN. (150 MM) THICK
NO. 2 STONE SUBBASE
--t-tt-t-t-H--H�-::--- BEDDING COURSE 1 1/2 TO 2 IN. (40 TO 50 MM) THICK
(TYP. NO. 8 AGGREGATE)

�:d-+�e:=---��=n----- 4 IN. (100 MM) THICK NO. 57 STONE

OPEN-GRADED BASE �������-- IMPERMEABLE LINER ON BOTTOM AND
SIDES OF OPEN-GRADED BASE

�..,....,..--e++-1=++1==1--- PERFORATED PIPES SPACED AND SLOPED

TO DRAIN ALL STORED WATER
1"'i-+++--++-+-+++--+++-- MIN. 6 IN. (150 MM) THICK
NO. 2 STONE SUBBASE
-=H+==+++-=f+-H--- NON-PERFORATED OUTFALL PIPE(S) SLOPED
�------- OPTIONAL GEOTEXTILE ON BOTTOM SEWER OR STREAM

..________ SOIL SUBGRADE SLOPED TO DRAIN

NOTES:
1. 2 3/8 IN. (60 MM) THICK PAYERS MAY BE USED IN RESIDENTIAL APPLICATIONS.
NOTES: 2. NO. 2 STONE SUBBASE THICKNESS VARIES WITH DESIGN. CONSULT ICPI PERMEABLE
1. 2 3/8 IN. (60 MM) THICK PAVERS MAY BE USED IN PEDESTRIAN APPLICATIONS. INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVEMENT MANUAL.
2. NO. 2 STONE SUBBASE THICKNESS VARIES WITH DESIGN. 3. PERFORATED PIPES MAY BE RAISED FOR WATER STORAGE FROM LARGE RAIN EVENTS
CONSULT ICPI PERMEABLE INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVEMENT MANUAL. WITH OUTLET(S) AT LINER BOTTOM TO DRAIN SMALL RAIN EVENTS.

0 0
DRAWING NO. DRAWING NO.

PERMEABLE PAVEMENT WITH FULL ICPl-68 PERMEABLE PAVEMENT WITH NO ICPl-70

INFILTRATION TO SOIL SUBGRADE SCALE

NO SCALE INFILTRATION TO SOIL SUBGRADE SCALE

NO SCALE

FIGURE 12.3. PERMEABLE PAVEMENT

WITH PARTIAL INFILTRATION TO SOIL 12.3.6. RETAINING WALLS/SEGMENTED
SUBGRADE RETAINING WALLS

1. Retaining walls higher than 1.2m (4ft.), or those where

heavy loading or dynamic loading is anticipated above the
,--------- TYP. NO. 8, 89, OR 9 AGGREGATE IN OPENINGS wall, shall be designed by a structural engineer and may
,--------- CONCRETE PAVERS MIN. 3 1/8 IN. (80 mm) THICK
FOR VEHICULAR TRAFFIC (ASPECT RATIO� 3) require evaluation of soils conditions and design by a
�------ CURB/EDGE RESTRAINT WITH CUT-OUTS
FOR OVERFLOW DRAINAGE (CURB SHOWN)
geotechnical engineer.
��MW!l;!Yl-- BEDDING COURSE 1 1/2 IN. TO 2 IN. (40 TO 50 MM) THICK

2. Due diligence shall be undertaken so that all municipal

(TYP. NO. 8 AGGREGATE)

������� 4 IN. (100 MM) THICK NO. 57 STONE

OPEN-GRADED BASE
and jurisdictional requirements are met. A building permit
may be required.
I.->==++<>--+-++==-++- MIN. 6 IN. (150 MM) THICK
NO. 2 STONE SUBBASE

�������������� PERFORATED PIPES SPACED AND

SLOPED TO DRAIN STORED WATER

GEOTEXTILE ON TOP AND SIDES OF

SUBBASE UNDER/BEYOND CURB
12.3.7. CONCRETE – CAST-IN-PLACE
n-t--++�e+-1---1-+-1+---++-- GEOTEXTILE ON SUBGRADE
PER DESIGN ENGINEER
1. Concrete may be finished in a wide variety of ways,
including painting, parging, exposed aggregate, trowel
�������� NON-PERFORATED OUTFALL PIPE(S)
SLOPED TO STORM SEWER OR STREAM

finish, broom finish.

'--------- SOIL SUBGRADE SLOPED TO DRAIN

NOTES:
1. 2 3/8 IN. (60 MM) THICK PAVERS MAY BE USED IN PEDESTRIAN AND RESIDENTIAL APPLICATIONS.
2. NO. 2 STONE SUBBASE THICKNESS VARIES WITH DESIGN. 2. Concrete is usually reinforced with reinforcing steel

0
CONSULT ICPI PERMEABLE INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVEMENT MANUAL.
3. NO. 2 STONE MAY BE SUBSTITUTED WITH NO.3 OR NO.4 STONE. [rebar].
DRAWING NO.

PERMEABLE PAVEMENT WITH PARTIAL ICPl-69

INFILTRATION TO SOIL SUBGRADE SCALE

NO SCALE 3. Concrete work requires testing to measure durability

and development of required strengths.

4. Related work includes forming and may include block-

outs or inserts for installation of other items such as
handrails, guardrails or site furnishings.

164 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

12.3.8. WOOD AND WOOD COMPOSITES 12.3.13. PLAYGROUNDS

1. Wood may be finished in a wide variety of ways, includ- 1. All playground component and equipment installation
ing painting and staining. Wood may be pressure treated shall comply with applicable regulations including, but not
with preservatives for greater longevity, particularly when limited to:
installed in contact with earth.
a. Canadian Standards Association [CSA]

12.3.9. METAL FABRICATION b. American Society for Testing Materials [ASTM]

1. Use appropriate metals, finishes and fasteners based on c. The Canadian Playground Safety Institute [CPSI]
site conditions and intended use to ensure product
d. Municipal by-laws
longevity and minimize corrosion.
2. Reference product manufacturer’s technical specifica-
tions, design and installation manuals.
12.3.10. GEOTEXTILES

1. When using geotextiles to separate, filter, reinforce,

protect or drain, select the appropriate geotextile material
for the intended function.

2. Ensure smooth and even placement and avoid displace-

ment and damage of material during and after placement.

3. Reference product manufacturer’s technical specifica-

tions, design and installation manuals.

12.3.11. LANDSCAPE LIGHTING

1. All landscape lighting installations shall be carried out

according to the regulations as set out in but not limited
to:

a. Canadian Electrical Code

b. Provincial electrical and building codes

c. Municipal by-laws regarding electrical, lighting

and light pollution/trespass

2. Reference product manufacturer’s technical specifica-

tions, design and installation manuals.

12.3.12. WATER FEATURES

1. All elements and components shall be installed as shown

on plans and in accordance with manufacturer’s directives
and installation procedure information.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 165

LANDSCAPE OVER STRUCTURES
13.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS h. Green Roofs for Healthy Cities

i. Green Roof Professional training manuals:

13.1.1. PURPOSE STATEMENT
AND INTENT • Green roof design and installation

1. Landscape over structures refers to all landscaping that • Green roof waterproofing and drainage
is developed over a built structure. They will vary in scope
depending on the environmental, aesthetic and functional • Green roof plants and growing media
intent of the design. j. Canada Green Building Council
2. The intent of this section is to provide guidelines [CaGBC] LEED v4.1
related to design considerations for plant selection, 13.1.3. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
structural components, growing media, drainage, irriga-
tion, construction and maintenance of landscape over 1. Design of landscape over structures should consider the
structures. following conditions:
13.1.2. RELATED REFERENCES, STANDARDS a. Exposure to sun and rapid drying conditions
AND LEGISLATION
b. Reflected heat stress
1. Government
c. Exposure to high winds and inclement weather
a. NMS Section 32 93 10 Trees, Shrubs and Ground
Cover Planting d. Wind load and drag on trees

b. NMS Section 32 91 19.16 Topsoil Placement for e. Winter freeze/thaw cycles

Vegetated Roofs
f. Absence of water table and potential growing
c. Government of Canada, Fertilizers Act R.S.C., media drainage problems
1985, c. F-10
g. Drainage design and type
d. Canada Occupational Health and Safety
Regulations h. Limited depth of planting area

e. Municipal by-laws and policies i. Weight of planting media, as well as soft and hard
landscape features
2. Industry
j. Parapets, walls height and overflow scupper
a. Canadian Nursery Landscape Association, Canadian locations
Nursery Stock Standard [CNSS]
k. Gravity loads
b. CSA S478-95, Guideline on durability in buildings
l. Related snow-load considerations
c. Guideline for the planning, construction and
maintenance of green roof sites [FLL] m. Establishment and ongoing maintenance
requirements
d. Factory Mutual [FM] Global property loss preven-
tion data sheet 1-35 2 To address these considerations, growing media depth
and type, drainage design and type, irrigation options, and
e. American Society for Testing Materials [ASTM] maintenance procedures require special attention.

f. Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute [ICPI] 3. To support effective establishment and ongoing
maintenance, a strip of 50cm (1.5ft.) between the walls
g. Irrigation Association [IA] 2014 Landscape and plantation areas, and between the drain and the
Irrigation Best Management Practices planting areas shall be provided.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 167

4. Contractors shall coordinate the landscape design with 6. Inspections should be scheduled at least twice per year
architects, structural engineers and mechanical engineers to verify the status of the plantings.
to consider structure loading capacity, water supply and
building function. 7. Routine inspections shall include leak detection.
[Electronic detection should be installed at the time of
13.1.4. LANDSCAPE OVER STRUCTURE construction].
COMPONENTS
13.1.7. CONTRACTS
1. The principle assembly components of a landscape over
structure consist of: 1. Section 9, Landscape Maintenance, shall be used as a
reference for developing contracts for maintenance
a. Vegetation programs.

b. Growing media 13.1.8. DOCUMENTATION AND REPORTING

c. Filtering layer 1. A mechanism shall be established for documenting and

reporting changes, deficiencies, damage, health and safety
d. Slotted edging issues, and discrepancies found in the course of the work
as required by this Standard.
e. Vegetation free zone
2. Reports shall be made promptly and in such a manner
f. Drainage system that the work schedule and administration procedures are
g. Waterproof membrane not hampered.

h. Support paper 13.1.9. SAFETY

i. Thermal insulation 1. The contractor shall comply with all applicable laws,
rules, regulations and lawful orders from any authority
j. Root repellent system having jurisdiction for the safety of persons and property
to protect them from damage, injury or loss.
k. Structural support
2. The contractor shall provide and maintain sufficient
13.1.5. QUALITY OF WORK barricades, safety guards and warning devices for the
protection of people and property.
1. Quality of work shall be defined in the contract docu-
ments and according to the recommendations as outlined 3. Section 9, Landscape Maintenance, shall be used as a
in this Standard. guideline for meeting safety, environmental and site
protection standards.
13.1.6. SCHEDULING
4. The contractor shall comply with the Canadian Centre
1. Delivery, handling, storage and placement, of growing for Occupational Health and Safety, Working at heights
media shall be to the recommendations identified in training/certification or provincial equivalent regulations.
Section 5, Growing Medium.
13.1.10. WATER
2. Hoisting and movement of drainage material, growing
media and plants onto or through building structures 1. Water used during construction and maintenance shall
should be carefully coordinated with the occupants and be free from organic or chemical contaminants detrimen-
other trades on-site. tal to animals, healthy plant growth, and the environment.

3. All required permits and building permits relating to the 2. Reuse of rainwater should be considered.
work shall be obtained prior to commencing the work.
3. Reference the Irrigation Association [IA]: 2014
4. Reference Section 2, Contract Administration. Landscape Irrigation Best Management Practice - Table 1
Water quality assessment.
5. Regular maintenance shall be scheduled, including
irrigation for the first two year and/or until the vegetation
is established.

168 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

13.1.11. SAMPLES, TESTING, AND CERTIFICATION 13.2. PRODUCTS
1. All materials, including but not limited to seed and 13.2.1. GROWING MEDIA PROPERTIES
mixes, fertilizers, and growing media and its components
shall be subject to sampling, testing, certification, and 1. Growing media should be specified by a qualified
approvals as required by this Standard. professional with experience in formulating media for
landscape over structures. Reference Section 2.1.12.
2. Plants shall meet the standards as identified in the Qualified Professionals.
Canadian Nursery Stock Standard, current edition unless
otherwise specified. 2. Commercial processing and blending of growing media
components shall be undertaken thoroughly by a mecha-
3. Reference Section 2.1.19. Samples, Testing And nized screening process.
Certification For Guidelines.
3. Processed and blended growing media shall be a
13.1.12. STRUCTURE LOADING homogeneous mixture; growing media shall not be hand
mixed.
1. The design of landscaped areas over structures shall be
such that loading is not in excess of the design loading 4. Organic matter shall be present in a homogenous
capacity for the structure. mixture with the mineral components or should be
concentrated within the top 20cm (8in.) of growing
2. Design shall consider accommodation of mature sizes of media.
plants, including crown and rooting sizes and total weight
of biomass and wet growing media. 5. Growing media for roof slabs and contained planters
shall be designed to avoid plugging or caking at the filter
3. Hoisting and moving of materials and equipment on cloth and should therefore be low in content of fines [silts
structures shall be managed to avoid excessive loading. and clays].
4. Both the intended landscape design loading and loading 6. Growing media properties identified in Section 5,
during construction should be reviewed and approved by a Growing Medium, Table T-5.3.5.2. Growing Medium Type 1h
structural engineer. [Application for high traffic lawn areas], should be consid-
13.1.13. EQUIPMENT ered for use on roof slabs and in contained planters when
amended for planting areas by increasing the content of
1. Equipment shall be suited to the work at hand, and shall organic matter to 14-20 percent.
be clean, maintained in good working condition, and
accurately calibrated. Safety devices shall be in place and 13.2.2. FERTILIZERS
functioning to the Canada Occupational Health and Safety 1. Fertilizers shall meet the standards as established by the
Regulations. government of Canada Fertilizers Act and the recommen-
2. Equipment shall be handled and maintained to minimize dations of this Standard in Section 2, Contract
or eliminate the risk of spillage, inadvertent spraying or Administration.
misdirection of oil, gasoline, herbicides, pesticides, or 13.2.3. VOIDING MATERIALS
other chemicals or liquids.
1. In order to avoid the excessive weight on the structural
3. Personal protective equipment shall be used as re- slab of a full depth of growing media, lightweight materials
quired, be in good condition, appropriate for the tasks should be incorporated as “voiding” to reduce the load.
conducted, and meet all regulatory standards.
2. Voiding materials shall be of sufficient compressive
4. Sharp equipment that can penetrate a roofing mem- strength to resist deformation and settlement due to the
brane shall be avoided and/or used with extreme caution weights of growing media, traffic, plants, water and other
during green roof installation and maintenance. forces.

3. Voiding materials shall resist decomposition and shall

not absorb more than 4 percent water by volume at any
time.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 169

4. Materials commonly used for voiding are solid blocks or 13.3. EXECUTION
clean formed “seedling trays” of expanded polystyrene
[EPS] which has a uniform cellular structure and is free 13.3.1. DRAINAGE
from voids resulting from un-expanded components.
1. All slabs shall have a sufficient slope to provide effective
5. Where voiding materials are specified or approved for runoff, and the drains shall be sufficient for the area to be
use, they shall be arranged and installed such that the drained.
movement of water through the growing media, filter
fabric, voiding and drainage course to the drains is not 2. All growing media areas on-slab shall be adequately
impeded. drained by the following methods:

13.2.4. FILTER FABRIC a. Drainage layer, consisting of a manufactured

product specifically designed for slab drainage or
1. Filter fabric shall be designed or selected to meet the minimum 10cm (4in.) depth of drain rock shall be
strength, durability and permeability requirements of each employed.
application. Reference Section 4, Grading And Drainage.
b. The drainage layer shall be installed immediately
2. Recommended minimum average roll test values for over the protective cover and separated from the
filter fabrics for On-Slab installations are: growing media with a filter fabric.
Mullen Burst Strength to ASTM-D-3786 Greater than 1500 kPa c. Deck drains and planter drains shall be placed
Apparent Opening Size to where required to collect excess water.
200 um
ASTM-D-4751
d. Bi-level drains should be used where suitable to
Permittivity to ASTM-D-4491 2.5 sec accept water at both the surface paving and the
Flow Rate to ASTM-D-4491 120 l/sec./m² waterproofed membrane level.

e. In situations where filter fabric is used as a

3. Filter fabric shall be selected and designed to withstand
separator between growing media and drainage
wear and tear during construction without deterioration
course, the contractor shall use a 50mm (2in.)
of its strength and filtering properties.
layer of washed sand placed directly over filter
4. Where considerable traffic is anticipated over the filter fabric to avoid accumulation of fines against the
fabric during construction a heavier, more durable fabric filter fabric [filter cake]. The 50mm (2in.) washed
with high permeability and flow rate should be selected. sand layer shall be included in the overall growing
media depth calculations.
5. Filter fabric should be installed beneath all growing
media and up the sides of slotted edging to terminate 3. Drains shall be protected to prevent growing media
above the height of the growing media to prevent erosion particles from entering drains. All drains shall be accessible
of the media and potential clogging of the roof drains or for inspection and cleaning via a capped cleanout riser to
scuppers. finished grade.

13.2.5. MOISTURE RETENTION MATS 4. Deck drains may not be required immediately beneath
the growing media, provided that the excess water
1. Moisture retention mats or equivalent products shall be collected in the drainage layer beneath the growing media
used as required to promote vegetation growth. is directed to flow out of the growing media area to deck
drains located outside the growing media area.
2. Moisture retention mats shall be suitable for stormwa-
ter retention and shall be selected following ASTM 5. Drainage panels specifically designed for on-slab
E2398-05 Standard test method for water capture and drainage layer combined with filter fabric may meet the
media retention of geo-composite drain layers for green above requirements if their flow rates and durability are
roof systems. acceptable.

170 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

13.3.2. PROTECTION OF WATERPROOFING growing media depths after settlement for on-slab
MEMBRANE applications, including roof decks and interior beds.

1. All slab areas, walls and other surfaces to receive TABLE T-13.1. MINIMUM GROWING
growing media shall have an impermeable MEDIA DEPTHS AFTER SETTLEMENT
surface/waterproof membrane with a protective FOR ON-SLAB APPLICATIONS,
cover [protection board].
INCLUDING ROOF DECKS AND
2. Leak tests shall be performed prior to green roof INTERIOR BEDS
installation.
Minimum
Application
3. Precaution shall be taken to protect the waterproof Depth
membrane when hoisting materials onto the green roof,
during material handling, and during green roof Irrigated lawn areas 150mm (6in.)
construction. Non-irrigated lawn areas 225mm (9in.)
4. The contractor shall maintain the green roof free of Planting areas:
sharp objects. [i.e. screws, tools and metal scraps]. 1. Ground cover areas 225mm (9in.)
2. Shrub areas:
13.3.3. GROWING MEDIA DELIVERY AND
a. Small shrubs 300mm (12in.)
STOCKPILING OF GROWING MEDIA
b. Large shrubs 450mm (18in.)
1. Efforts should be made so that growing media is not 3. Tree pits
contaminated prior to and during delivery, or while a. Small to medium trees 450mm (18in.)
stockpiled on site. b. Large trees 900mm (36in.)
2. Efforts should be made to have growing media delivered
on the day of installation. 13.3.5. FERTILIZERS

3. A storage area shall be designated and prepared prior to 1. Fertilizers shall be added and blended with the growing
delivery. media to bring growing media fertility within the ranges
set out in the project specification and in amounts as
4. All growing media delivered to the site and not immedi- recommended by testing results.
ately used shall:
13.3.6. IRRIGATION
a. Be placed on a clean tarpaulin, clean asphalt, or
clean concrete pad 1. Water sources and supply should be conveniently
located near all planting areas.
b. Be covered for protection from rain, debris, and
weed or invasive plant seeds 2. Irrigation systems shall be designed and scheduled to
meet the needs of the plants and the intended purpose of
13.3.4. PLACING GROWING MEDIA the landscape. Soil moisture sensor-based irrigation
controls shall be considered to optimize water use.
1. Growing media shall not be placed when excessively wet
or frozen. 3. Automatic irrigation systems should be installed to
serve all planted areas on-slab, to provide consistent
2. Growing media shall be placed and spread with suitable watering and prevent plant losses due to drying.
equipment and in a manner that does not adversely affect
its structure. 4. Irrigation systems shall be programmed to meet
municipal water restrictions.
3. Placed growing media shall be allowed to settle or shall
be compacted by light rolling such that it is firm against 5. Growing media areas on-slab shall be inspected fre-
deep footprints prior to planting. Compaction shall not be quently for moisture content and shall be irrigated as
more than is necessary to meet this requirement. often as required to maintain the health of the plants. The
contractor shall take the following factors into consider-
4. Growing media depths shall meet the minimum ation when determining irrigation requirements:
requirements as identified in Table T-13.1. Minimum
CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 171
 a. Rapid drainage in the growing media 7. The maintenance program shall promote sustainable
practices and include implementation of integrated pest
b. Absence of a water table management best practices to minimize the establishment
of invasive and noxious species from establishing within
c. Finite amount of growing media the landscape.
d. Exposure to the climatic conditions 8. Irrigations systems shall be inspected and calibrated as
per seasonal requirements.
13.3.7. NON-VEGETATED AREAS 9. Maintenance shall include winterizing and protection of
1. Non-vegetated areas/strips shall be located at the all components to address freeze/thaw cycles.
perimeter of green roofs to support green roof assembly, 13.3.9. INSECT PESTS, DISEASE, WEED,
reduce wind uplift pressure and to support optimal INVASIVE AND NOXIOUS SPECIES
drainage to roof scuppers or drains. CONTROLS
2. Non-vegetated areas typically consist of stone ballast or 1. The principles of integrated pest management shall be
raised patio stones. applied when controlling insect pests, diseases, and
3. The width of a non-vegetated area/strip may vary based invasive and noxious plant species. Methods shall be a
on local regulations/design standards but should be 45cm combination of physical, cultural, biological, and chemical
(1.5ft.) wide or as wide as the height of adjacent plants. methods chosen for the most effective, environmentally
safe, and economical controls possible.
4. Non-vegetated areas can serve as firebreaks from the
parapet or built form and should divide large green roofs 2. All chemical and biological controls employed in the
into 1,450m2 (15,600ft.2) sections. course of the work shall be limited to those that are
unrestricted and meet all federal, provincial and municipal
by-laws.
13.3.8. ESTABLISHMENT AND ONGOING
MAINTENANCE

1. Landscape over structures may require a higher level of

monitoring and maintenance than other landscape areas.

2. The establishment and maintenance program shall be

developed in consultation with the consultant or owner
and shall reflect the site’s intended use and its intended
design.

3. A maintenance strip of 50cm (1.5ft.) between the walls

and plantation areas, and between the drain and the
planting areas shall be maintained.

4. Maintenance practices as identified in Section 9,

Landscape Maintenance, for level 1 “Well-Groomed” and
level 2 “Groomed”, are most suitable for landscapes over
structures.

5. Establishment maintenance shall be such that the focus

is on nurturing healthy plant growth towards desired
mature forms and sizes.

6. The maintenance program shall define routine mainte-

nance and inspections sufficient so that the green roof
components [i.e. drain scuppers] perform their required
functions for the duration of their designed lifecycle.

172 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

INTERIOR PLANTSCAPE
14.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2. Industry

14.1.1. PURPOSE STATEMENT AND INTENT a. National Association of Landscape Professionals

[NALP], The Guide To Interior Landscape
1. The purpose of this section is to identify standards and Specifications, current edition
illustrate the methods of measurement, grading and
selection that as accepted by nursery growers and b. [NALP] Interior Plantscaping Reference & Study
specifiers of interior plantscape products. Manual, current edition

2. This section provides standards for installation and c. American Joint Committee on Horticultural
maintenance of interior plantscapes that are recognized Nomenclature: Standardized Plant Names. A
and accepted by qualified professionals. Catalogue Of Approved Scientific And Common
Names Of Plants In American Commerce
3. Where there is found to be a discrepancy between the
landscape plans and the associated plant list, the quantities d. Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer
identified within the plant list shall be deemed to be Services: Florida Grades And Standards For Nursery
correct. The contractor should make the owner and/or the Plants
owner’s representative aware of any such discrepancies as
14.1.3. MEASUREMENTS
early in the process as possible.
1. Both metric and imperial units shall be acceptable to
14.1.2. RELATED REFERENCES, STANDARDS AND
define pot size, height and spread [width]. Reference
LEGISLATION
[NALP] The Guide to Interior Landscape Specifications and
1. Government Table T-14.1. Growing Container Data.

a. NMS Section 32 93 23.13 Interior Plantings

TABLE T-14.1. GROWING CONTAINER DATA

Actual Dimension (in.) Metric Diameter (mm) Weight Weight

Inches Pot Type O.A.W. x O.A.H. O.A.W. x O.A.H. Pot Size lbs. Kg.

6 STD 6.5 x 6 165 x 150 #1 3 1.4

6”
6 AZ 6.5 x 6 165 x 125 Azalea 3 1.4
6”
8 STD 8x7 200 x 175 Azalea 5 2.3
8”
8 AZ 8 x 5.75 200 x 145 Azalea 5 2.3

9 STD 9x8 225 x 200 #2 9 4.1

10 STD 10 x 9.5 250.0 x 242 #3 13 5.9

#3
11 AZ 11 x 8 275 x 200 Azalea 20 9.1

11 STD 11 x 10.5 275.4 x 262 #4 20 9.1

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 173

 Actual Dimension (in.) Metric Diameter (mm) Weight Weight

Inches Pot Type O.A.W. x O.A.H. O.A.W. x O.A.H. Pot Size lbs. Kg.

12 STD 12 x 11 300 x 275 #4 25 11.4

14 STD 13.5 x 12 337 x 300 #7 35 15.9

17 STD 17 x 15 425 x 375 #15 75 34.1

21 STD 21 x 18 525 x 450 #26 200 90.9

21 STD 21 x 24 525 x 600 #35 300 136.4

28 STD 28 x 21 700 x 525 #45 450 204.5

32 STD 32 x 22 800x 550 #65 650 295.5

36 STD 36 x 24 900x 600 #95 1000 454.5

48 STD 48 x 30 1200x 750 #125 2000 909.1

48 STD 48 x 28 1200 x 700 #200 2000 909.1

60 STD 60 x 32 15000 x 800 #300 3000 1363.6

O.A.W. Outer Average Width

O.A.H. Outer Average Height

14.2. PRODUCTS a. True to name, size and form

14.2.1. GROWING MEDIUM b. Healthy [free from pest, disease, pathogen,

scarring and evidence of nutrient deficiency, etc.]
1. All growing media shall meet or exceed the require-
ments for planting media as specified in the [NALP] The c. Clean with foliage free of residue and
Guide To Interior Landscape Specifications, current edition; pest damage
Section: Format for specification and bid solicitation of
interior projects, subsection 2.1 Planting medium. d. Established with well-developed and healthy root
zone
14.2.2. PLANTS, SIZES AND SELECTION
e. Structurally stable
1. All interior plants shall meet or exceed the require-
ments of Florida No. 1 Grade as specified in the [NALP] f. Acclimatized as per [Nalp] The Guide To Interior
The guide to interior landscape specifications, current Landscape Specifications, current edition, Section:
edition as identified in the following sections: Format for specification and bid solicitation of
interior projects, subsection 3.4, Acclimatization.
a. Format for specification and bid solicitation of
interior projects, subsections 2.4, Plant materials 3. Plant sizes
and subsection 2.5, Plant sizes a. Plants shall meet the size specifications that
b. Interior plant specifications constitute the Florida No. 1 Grade designation
including:
2. Plants specified and selected shall be at a minimum
quality that meets Florida No.1 Grade designation and are: i. Pot size minimum plant height

ii. Minimum plant width

174 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020
 iii. Minimum plants/canes per pot 14.2.4. FREESTANDING PLANTERS

b. All plant sizes shall meet or exceed plant size 1. Reference [NALP] The Guide To Interior Landscape
specification in: Reference [NALP] The Guide To Specifications, current edition; Section: Format for specifi-
Interior Landscape Specifications, current edition; cation and bid solicitation of interior projects, subsection 2.3
Section: Format for specification and bid solicita- Freestanding planters.
tion of interior projects, subsection 2.5 Plant sizes.
14.2.5. GREENWALLS
4. Plant measurement
1. The Contractor shall provide the type of greenwall as
a. Overall plant height and cane height shall be specified. Types of greenwalls include:
measured from bottom of growing container to
the top of the foliage. a. Vertical displays

b. Some cane plant varieties are graded based on b. Planting pockets

the height of rooted canes.
c. Engineered modular systems
c. Foliage width and origin shall be measured across
d. Fixed and modular hydroponic walls
the mean foliage width dimension, not including
random outstanding branches. Foliage origin e. Biofiltration walls
along a main trunk, cane or stem shall be mea-
sured from the growing medium surface. Note: 2. Greenwall selection depends on budget, application,
Width of foliage should be specified as a percent permanence, size, portability, use and horticulture
of total plant height for best proportion. expertise.
5. Plant selection 3. The contractor shall refer to the manufacturer’s
documentation and instructions for design and installation
a. Plant selection shall be based on indoor environ- specifications and details.
mental factors including:
14.2.6. ACCESSORY MATERIALS
i. Light level [lux or foot-candles] and quality
[spectrum and duration] of natural and 1. All interior plant accessory materials shall meet or
supplementary light. Reference [NALP] The exceed the accessory materials specification in [NALP]
guide to interior landscape specifications, The Guide To Interior Landscape Specifications, current
current edition, Appendix 5 - Lighting for plant edition; Section: Format for specification and bid solicita-
growth tion of interior projects, subsections 2.6 Accessory materials
ii. Temperature ranges & 2.7 Other products.
iii. Access 2. Accessory materials include:
iv. Location in relationship to opening doors and
a. Anti-desiccants
windows during cold weather
v. Size of space b. Inspection tubes

c. Mulch materials
14.2.3. SUB-IRRIGATION UNITS
d. Foam collars
1. Reference [NALP] The Guide To Interior Landscape
Specifications, current edition; Section: Format for specifi- e. Drainage medium
cation and bid solicitation of interior projects, subsection 2.2
f. Filter fabric
Sub-irrigation units.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 175

14.2.7. PLANTING b. The contractor shall remove all trash, excess
materials, and other debris created from the work
1. Planting methods shall meet or exceed the specification from the building and site, daily during construc-
as stated by [Nalp] The Guide To Interior Landscape tion to avoid accumulation.
Specifications, current edition, Section: Format For
Specification And Bid Solicitation Of Interior Projects, c. Contractor shall:
subsection 3.9 Planting, Appendix #2, Planting methods
and/or according to manufacturer’s documentation. i. Remove all trash, excess materials, and other
debris.
2. The planting method, materials, and components shall ii. Clean all floors and other surfaces from any
be specified and shall be carried out by the contractor. planting medium or dirt that accumulated
3. Planting methods include: during, or as a result of, planting operations.
iii. Repair any damage, including but not limited
a. Indirect planting/sunken container planting to, stains, scratches, or damage to flooring,
walls, or other finished surfaces. Repairs shall
b. Double potting be promptly corrected at no cost to the
c. Direct planting owner in a manner acceptable to the owner.

d. Hydroponic d. The contractor shall care for all plants during the
delivery, installation and maintenance phases, and
e. Sub-irrigation shall care for all plants installed or temporarily
stored at the project premises and, except as
4. Inspection and acceptance shall be as specified in otherwise stipulated, shall warranty their health
[NALP] The Guide To Interior Landscape Specifications, and appearance.
current edition; Section: Format for specification and bid
solicitation of interior projects, subsection 3.13 Inspection e. The contractor shall perform all maintenance of
and acceptance. the landscaping work beginning immediately after
each plant is received and extending through the
5 Plants shall be planted in multiple applications including course of the project until the date of final
but not limited to: acceptance of the work. Plantings that appear to
be in distress shall be replaced or replanted.
a. Moveable freestanding planters [i.e., hanging
planters, floor planters, file cabinet planters, etc.] 14.2.8. INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
b. Fixed planting beds 1. Inspection and acceptance shall be conducted as
specified in [NALP] The Guide To Interior Landscape
c. Greenwalls [living walls, vertical gardens]
Specifications, current edition, Section: Format for
d. Rotational and seasonal plantings specification and bid solicitation of interior projects,
subsection 3.13 Inspection and acceptance.
6. The contractor shall perform the following duties
as required: 2. Inspection and acceptance shall be conducted at the
following stages of an installation:
a. All trees and shrubs shall be pruned in accordance
with accepted horticulture practices. Reference a. Plant approval
Section 6.3.8. Pruning And Shearing And Section
b. Inspection upon substantive completion
9.3.12. Pruning.
of planting
i. Remove dead, injured or broken twigs and
c. Replacement approval
branches and those sufficient to compensate
for the loss of roots resulting from d. Planting acceptance process
transplanting operations. Prune branches
that interfere with the desired shape of the e. Final acceptance
plant. Do not exceed 25% reduction in one
season. Do not change the natural habit or
shape of the plant.
176 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020
3. The Contractor shall notify the owner and/or owner’s 5. Water for interior plants shall be at room temperature.
representative upon substantive completion. Inspection Water that is too cold or hot is harmful to tropical plant
and final approval should be undertaken by the consultant. health.

14.2.9. HORTICULTURAL SERVICES 6. Water quality shall meet or exceed that as identified in
Section 2.1.18. Water and Irrigation.
1. The Horticultural services phase shall meet or exceed
the specification as stated by [NALP] The Guide To Interior 14.2.10. PLANT REPLACEMENT WARRANTY
Landscape Specifications, current edition; Section: Format
for specification and bid solicitation of interior projects, 1. The plant replacement warranty shall meet or exceed
subsection 3.16 Horticultural services. the requirements as specified in [NALP] The Guide To
Interior Landscape Specifications, current edition; Section:
2. Horticultural services shall begin immediately following Format for specification and bid solicitation of interior
final approval of the delivery and installation phase or may projects, subsection 1.9 Plant replacement warranty.
commence for an existing interior planting.
2. The supply, installation and horticultural services
3. Horticultural services shall consist of a regularly [maintenance phase] should clearly state the plant re-
scheduled program for maintaining the health and appear- placement product and materials warranty which shall
ance of the interior planting. include the term of the warranty, details, requirements,
limitations, exclusions and costs and who shall bear the
4. Horticultural service procedures and functions should costs in various situations. Specific exclusions to the
include, but are not limited to the following: warranty shall be included. Reference [NALP] The Guide To
Interior Landscape Specifications, current edition; Section:
a. Notification to owner of service technician(s) Format for specification and bid solicitation of interior
arrival at and departure from the project projects, subsection 1.10 Waiver of contractor’s plant
premises. replacement warranty.
b. Inspection, monitoring and maintenance of:

i. Plant and root zone condition and health

ii. Irrigation water [quality, temperature and pH]
iii. Growing media [debris removal, moisture
levels, nutrient levels, pH, compaction,
contamination, additional growing media and
mulch materials as required]
iv. Control of insect pests or diseases and other
infestations utilizing IPM best management
practices
v. Drainage function
vi. Irrigation system function
vii. Cleaning of the freestanding planters/
planting beds/greenwall components
viii. Foliage trimming and cleaning
ix. Pruning to maintain plant shape, size and
plant health
x. Plant rotation as necessary in order to
maintain attractive shape
c. Plant replacements as required.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 177

APPENDICES
APPENDIX A: TABLES & FIGURES
SECTION 3, SITE PREPARATION AND PROTECTION

Table T-3.1. Guideline for determining critical protection zones for trees Section 3, pg 29

Table T-3.2. Root pruning Section 3, pg 30

SECTION 4, GRADING AND DRAINAGE

Table T-4.1. Tolerances for subgrade elevations in soft landscape areas Section 4, pg 35

Table T-4.2. Maximum and minimum gradients for selected surface treatments Section 4, pg 36

SECTION 5, GROWING MEDIUM

Table T-5.3.5.1. Summary of growing medium type designations Section 5, pg 48

Table T-5.3.5.2 Properties of growing media for Level 1 “Well-Groomed” areas Section 5, pg 49

Table T-5.3.5.3. Properties of growing media for Level 2

“Groomed” and Level 3 “Moderate” areas Section 5, pg 50

Table T-5.3.5.4. Properties of growing media for Level 4, “Open Space/Play”,

Level 5, “Background and Natural” and Level 6, “Service & Industrial” areas Section 5, pg 51

Table T-5.3.5.5. Minimum depths of growing media Section 5, pg 52

SECTION 7, MULCHING

Table T-7.1. Considerations for mulch selection Section 7, pg 73

SECTION 8, SEEDING & SODDING

Table T-8.1. Lawn and grass classes Section 8, pg 76

Table T-8.2. Recommended sod quality grade by class Section 8, pg 78

Table T-8.3. Seed characteristics Section 8, pg 80

SECTION 9, LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE

Table T-9.1. Maintenance levels - level 1 “Well-Groomed” Section 9, pg 93

Table T-9.2. Maintenance Levels - Level 2 “Groomed” Section 9, pg 94

Table T-9.3. Maintenance Levels - Level 3 “Moderate” Section 9, pg 95

Table T-9.4. Maintenance Levels - Level 4 “Open Space/Play’ Section 9, pg 96

Table T-9.5. Maintenance Levels - Level 5 “Background & Natural” Section 9, pg 97

Table T-9.6. Maintenance Levels - Level 6 “Service & Industrial” Section 9, pg 98

Table T-9.7. Recommended maintenance procedures & frequencies - Level 1

“Well-Groomed” Section 9, pg 99

Table T-9.8. Recommended maintenance procedures & frequencies- Level 2 “Groomed” Section 9, pg 101

Table T-9.9. Recommended maintenance procedures & frequencies- Level 3 “Moderate” Section 9, pg 102
CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 179
 Table T-9.10. Recommended maintenance procedures & frequencies- Level 4
“Open Space/Play” Section 9, pg 104

Table T-9.11. Recommended maintenance procedures & frequencies- Level 5

“Background & Natural” Section 9, pg 105

Table T-9.12. Recommended maintenance procedures & frequencies- Level 6

“Service & Industrial” Section 9, pg 106

Table T-9.13. Site maintenance inspection form [sample] Section 9, pg 107

Table T-9.14. Maintenance program summary [sample] Section 9, pg 110

Table T-9.15. Developing a maintenance contract Section 9, pg 111

Table T-9.16. Landscape maintenance monthly report [sample] Section 9, pg 112

Table T-9.17. The practical chart for determining soil moisture Section 9, pg 117

Table T-9.18. Weed control standards Section 9, pg 120

Table T-9.19. Mowing heights and frequencies Section 9, pg 123

Table T-9.20. Minimum frequencies for fertilizing lawns Section 9, pg 125

SECTION 10, IRRIGATION SYSTEMS

Figure 10.1. Shrub Spray on Riser Section 10, pg 142

Figure 10.2. Turf Rotary Head or Pop-up Spray Head Section 10, pg 143

Figure 10.3. Quick Coupler Valve Section 10, pg 143

Figure 10.4. Remote Control Valve Section 10, pg 143

Figure 10.5. Controller – Wall Mount Section 10, pg 144

SECTION 12, HARDSCAPE

Table T-12.1. Relevant codes, standards and technical guidance resources

for hardscape elements, products and materials Section 12, pg 157

Figure 12.1. Patio/sidewalk/plaza on compacted aggregate base Section 12, pg 163

Figure 12.2. Permeable pavement with full infiltration to soil subgrade Section 12, pg 164

Figure 12.3. Permeable pavement with partial infiltration to soil subgrade Section 12, pg 164

Figure 12.4. Permeable pavement with no infiltration to soil subgrade Section 12, pg 164

SECTION 13, LANDSCAPE OVER STRUCTURES

Table T-13.1. Minimum growing medium depths after settlement for on-slab applications,
including roof decks and interior beds Section 13, pg 171

SECTION 14, INTERIOR PLANTSCAPE

Table T-14.1. Growing container data Section 14, pg 173

180 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

APPENDIX B:
BASIC CONTENTS OF A LANDSCAPE COMMISSIONING PLAN [LCX]
Project information
1. Owner name and contact information
2. Project name and location
3. Owner designate(s)
4. General contractor
5. Sub-contractor(s)
Statement from Owner Project Requirements [OPR] - Project performance goals
1. Design criteria – design intent
2. Contract drawings and specifications
LCx Team – Populate and define roles and responsibilities
• Owner representative – designate(s)
• Landscape Commissioning Agent [LCxA]
• Landscape Architect – landscape designer - consultant
• Landscape contractor [pre-qualified credentials]
• Specialty landscape sub-trades
• Equipment manufacturer/supplier(s)
• Landscape maintenance contractor [pre-qualified credentials]
• Landscape maintenance specialties – arboriculture, IPM technician, hardscape etc.
• Facility maintenance department designate
• Facility maintenance staff – [assess expertise – identify skill gaps – training options]
Development of LCx Plan [stand alone or for insertion into project documents]
1. Approved project documents – [landscape plan(s)] [shop drawings] [product data] [standards] [specifications]
[submittals][manufacturer]
2. Approved CCOs – changes to contract
3. Project schedule [contractor(s) schedules] [close-out date]
4. Timeline [duration] [warranty period] - schedule - aligned with contractor schedules [substantial completion]
5. Milestones – inspect – measure – assess – recommend - remediate
6. Project Management [Adaptive Management] - Critical path and processes outline
7. Work plan
8. LCxA fees and budget

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 181

Processes to meet performance goals - Deliverables
1. LCx team communication paths
2. Risk assessment – observations – check lists
3. Data collection protocols [method(s)] [frequency]
4. Data review - assessment – recommendations – remediation
5. Warranty and servicing oversight
6. As-built revision(s) post remediation(s)
7. Deferred LCx – activities delayed for reasons beyond LCxA control
8. Close-out report for distribution
9. O & M Manual
10. Path for communication loop – monitor, feedback, adaptation, learning, training
Operations and Maintenance Manual [O&M] inclusions
Inclusions can include;
i. Field test reports
ii. Certificates – Inspection and manufacturer’s
iii. Product Data – including installation instructions and parts lists
iv. Maintenance instructions – including supplemental diagrams illustrating component parts of equipment/
systems, irrigation/lighting schedules and plant/tree/turf maintenance requirements.
1. [Print] [Digital format] [English] [French][other]
2. Approved project documents – [shop drawings] [permits][change orders and other approved modifications to
contract] [as-built(s)] [plant list] [warranties] [service contracts] [safety documents] [reference documents
– [CLS 2.0]]
3. Scope of work
4. Details and illustrations
5. Execution – work plan
6. Data gathering and compilation [forms] [templates]
7. Reporting [forms] [templates]
8. Analytics and statistics [forms] [templates]
Scope of Landscape Commissioning
__ Turf – mow
__ Turf – no mow - naturalized
__ Turf – recreational
__ Plantings – naturalized – gardens – edibles

182 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

 __ Plantings – container – interior
__ Trees – Street Trees – Groves
__ Stormwater management – bio-swales – bio-retention – rain gardens
__ Landscape over structures – green roof – living wall
__ Hardscape – ICP – PICP – pervious concrete
__ Play areas – natural or built – structures and equipment
__ Water systems – irrigation – rain catchment/capture/harvest
__ Water systems – features – interactive play – pools – spas
__ Landscape lighting
__ Other
__ Other
__ Other

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 183

APPENDIX C:

CANADIAN NURSERY STOCK STANDARD

184 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

CANADIAN NURSERY STOCK STANDARD
ninth edition
Canadian Nursery Stock Standard
Ninth Edition

Table of Contents
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................ ii
Nursery Stock Standard Committee ................................................................................................................. iii
Section 1: General Requirements .................................................................................................................... 1
Section 2: Definitions ........................................................................................................................................ 2
Section 3: Container Grown Stock ................................................................................................................... 5
Section 4: Lining-Out Stock .............................................................................................................................. 7
Section 5: Evergreen and Deciduous Conifers .............................................................................................. 11
Section 6: Broadleaf Evergreens .................................................................................................................... 20
Section 7: Deciduous Shade and Flowering Trees ........................................................................................ 25
Section 8: Deciduous Shrubs ......................................................................................................................... 33
Section 9: Roses ............................................................................................................................................ 39
Section 10: Fruit Trees ................................................................................................................................... 41
Section 11: Small Fruits ................................................................................................................................. 42
Section 12: Understock .................................................................................................................................. 44
Section 13: Vines and Ground Covers ........................................................................................................... 45
Section 14: Herbaceous Perennials and Ornamental Grasses ...................................................................... 46
Section 15: Bulbs, Corms, and Tubers ........................................................................................................... 50
Section 16: Christmas Trees .......................................................................................................................... 53
Section 17: Nursery Turfgrass Sod ................................................................................................................ 54
Section 18: Compost ...................................................................................................................................... 55
Appendix A: Metric/Imperial Equivalents ........................................................................................................ 56

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - i

Introduction
This is the ninth edition of the Canadian Nursery Stock Standard. It was first published in 1967 as a
standardized system for sizing and describing plants produced by the nursery industry to facilitate
trade in nursery stock. Today it serves the same purpose, providing growers, distributors, specifiers,
and purchasers of nursery stock with a comprehensive and consistent set of minimum measurements
and specifications so that commercial transactions can occur in a common language. Measurement
techniques include such things as specifying 1) plant size, 2) relationships between caliper and height
or height and width, and 3) root ball or container size in relation to plant size.

Growers and distributors of nursery stock should ensure that catalogue and contract documents
conform to this Standard. Those who specify or purchase nursery stock should ensure that they
provide growers and distributors with specifications that conform to this Standard. Compliance with
this Standard is voluntary. The parties in a commercial transaction should agree that this Standard
applies. Any transactions that are not compliant with this Standard may result in conflict between the
parties.

This Standard is for use by professional horticulturists, landscape architects, and landscape
designers who understand nursery stock attributes, plant nomenclature and terms commonly used
in horticulture. It is not intended to be used in transactions with retail customers.

Nursery stock production in Canada and the United States share many similarities. As a result, and to
facilitate trade between the two countries, this Standard maintains reasonable conformity with the
American Standard for Nursery Stock (ANSI Z60.1-2014) published by AmericanHort. One difference
between the two Standards is the use of metric (Canada) and imperial (United States) measurements.

The revisions included in this 2017 edition were developed by the Nursery Stock Standard Committee
of the Canadian Nursery Landscape Association (CNLA). Prior to publication, the document was
submitted to nursery/landscape associations, municipalities, and horticultural professionals across
Canada for review and endorsement in order to develop industry consensus. It reflects the best
practices of the nursery industry.

This Standard is subject to periodic review and may be updated at any time. Users are urged to obtain
the most recent update from the Canadian Nursery Landscape Association website (www.cnla-
acpp.ca).

Comments and suggestions for improvement of this Standard are welcome. All recommendations
should be in writing. They should be concise but complete, stating the issue and providing possible
solutions. Provide references to resources that CNLA should use in making its decision regarding your
recommendations.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - ii

Nursery Stock Standard Committee
The following individuals served on the 2015-2017 revision committee.

Brett Mattson Mattson Tree Farm (AB) (Committee Chair)

Bart Brusse Sheridan Nurseries (ON)
Arnold Heuver Arnold Heuver Consulting (AB)
Aaron Krahn Lakeshore Tree Farms (SK)
Glen Lumis University of Guelph (ON)
Harold Voogd Sunstar Nurseries Ltd. (AB)
Rita Weerdenburg Canadian Nursery Landscape Association (ON)

Many other individuals served on working groups or answered detailed questions during the revision process
providing valuable advice and expertise. The editors acknowledge and thank everyone involved for making
their work proceed smoothly.

Arnold Heuver and Glen Lumis, Ninth Edition Editors

Canadian Nursery Landscape Association

7856 Fifth Line South
Milton, ON L9T 2X8

Phone, toll free: 1-888-446-3499

Phone, local: 905-875-1399
Fax: 905-875-1840
Email: [email protected]
Web site: www.cnla-acpp.ca

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - iii

Section 1: General Requirements
1.1 Scope
This Standard applies to all plant material designated as nursery stock produced and/or offered for
sale. Throughout this Standard, 'shall' signifies that the sentence in which the word appears is a mandatory
requirement and 'should' signifies that the sentence in which the word appears is recommended.

1.2 Measurement units

All measurements shall be in metric units. The unit cm (centimetre) shall be used to define all heights
and spreads. The unit mm (millimetre) shall be used to define all caliper measurements. Measurements
shall be considered the minimum to be compliant with this Standard.

1.3 Age
When height, spread or caliper are specified, age of the plant is usually not required. However, age
may be used in listings and shall be available on request.

1.4 Correct identification

All nursery stock shall be correctly identified by botanical name (genus, species and, if applicable, variety or
cultivar). Botanical nomenclature shall follow currently accepted usage.
See www.internationalplantnames.com for a source of currently accepted plant names.
Nursery stock shall be true to name and of the size or grade stated.

1.5 Minimum quality

Quality shall be typical for the species in each region of the country when grown under proper, currently
accepted, cultural practices. Fertile soil, ample spacing, weed control, pest control, adequate moisture,
pruning, and transplanting or root pruning are all necessary requirements for normal quality nursery
stock. All nursery stock shall be healthy, viable, undamaged, and substantially free from all pests,
including pernicious weeds, insects and diseases. Between digging and delivery, roots shall not be
exposed to drying winds, sun or frost.

1.6 Roots
All nursery stock shall have a healthy, adequately fibrous root system that has been developed by
proper, currently accepted cultural practices, particularly transplanting or root pruning. Pertinent facts
as to when large nursery stock was transplanted or root pruned shall be available on request. Roots
shall be free of physical defects that could jeopardize future growth and establishment.

1.7 Grading
Because of varying conditions of growth and methods of production preferred or necessitated by
climate, soil and other conditions beyond the control of the grower as well as established pruning
practices, it is difficult to rigidly standardize plant material. Therefore, judgement should be exercised
and allowances made for plant material of a designated size being at the smaller end of the size range.

1.8 Labelling
Sufficient labels or markings shall be used to clearly indicate plant name and grade or size of each
specimen or bundle.

1.9 Packaging or wrapping

Packaging or wrapping shall be adequate for the protection of the stock and sufficient to prevent
heating, drying out, and breakage during storage and/or transportation.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 1

Section 2: Definitions
Balled and Burlapped (B&B): Plants established in the ground that have been harvested by digging
with a soil ball so that the soil within the ball remains undisturbed. As part of the harvesting process, the
soil ball is bound in burlap or similar mesh material.

Bare Root (BR): Plants harvested while dormant without a ball of soil or from which the growing
medium has been removed.

Branch: A major lateral shoot originating from a main stem or trunk, as compared to twigs or spurs,
which are minor shoots originating from a trunk or branch. On large trees, not nursery stock, branches
are referred to as limbs.

Budded: Referring to a method of asexual propagation, where a bud from one plant has been grafted
onto another plant (typically an understock).

Caliper: The above ground diameter of a distinct part of a nursery stock stem, measured in accordance
with this Standard. The location of measurement depends on the type and size of plant. Measurement
height begins at the ground level, soil line or root flare, as appropriate. The word may be abbreviated
as cal.

Cane: The major stem originating directly from the basal area of a shrub.

Collar: See Root Collar.

Collected: Material dug from native stands, established woodlots or other non-cultivated areas; not
grown in a nursery. Collected plants must be designated as such and have a larger root system than
nursery grown stock.

Container: The pot in which nursery stock is grown or sold. Containers are manufactured of different
materials such as plastic, wood, paper, cloth, natural fiber, etc. and may vary greatly in size, shape, and
quality. However, in the context of nursery stock, containers are not used as a final installation for
growing, as for example, in a landscape planter

Container Grown Plant: A plant grown and marketed in a container.

Crown: That part of a plant directly above where branching begins, thus the portion of the plant
comprising the main system of branches and foliage.

Cultivar: Cultivated plants that are specifically named, whose unique characteristics are retained
during propagation, and populations are maintained by human efforts. They are distinguished from
botanical varieties which also are distinct populations of plants in a species, but are naturally occurring.

Eye: The dormant bud of a corm, root division or tuber that will produce a stem. A term used to
describe a division of certain herbaceous perennial plants such as Astilbe and Hosta.

Fabric Bag Container: A type of container used above ground or below ground (in-ground) for the
purpose of developing a fibrous root system within the bag without manual root pruning.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 2

Fan: A term used to describe a division of certain herbaceous perennial plants such as Hemerocallis
and Iris that lack a vertical stem since the leaves arise from the rhizome.

Field Potted (FP): Plants established in the ground that have been dug with soil balls and placed in
containers in lieu of burlapping.

Grade, Nursery Stock Grade: Any and all designations associated with a plant group signifying sizes,
number of stems, historical details, etc. of a nursery stock item. Grade does not describe quality except
for roses.

Graft: A product of asexual propagation where two plants or plant parts are joined together so that they
will unite and continue their growth as one.

Habit: The manner of natural or nursery formed growth of a tree, shrub, or herbaceous perennial
consistent with specific species; e.g. broad, dwarf, columnar, slender, spreading, upright.

Height: Unless otherwise specified, the vertical distance between the collar or ground line and the top
of the stem of nursery stock, measured in its natural position. Depending on the plant type,
measurement may not extend to the tip of the stem.

Liners: Young, immature plants intended for growing-on to mature sizes in nurseries, either by lining-
out in the field or in containers. Typically, they are one or two years old and often sold bare root or in
small containers.

Medium: A mixture of ingredients such as soil, organic or inorganic materials, etc. in which container
plants are grown; also referred to as a potting mix.

Micropropagation (M): Propagation of plants from very small plant parts, tissues or cells grown in a
test tube or container where the environment and nutrition are rigidly controlled.

Nursery Stock: Plants grown in or obtained from a nursery that have been grown to promote shoot
growth and root development to enable full recovery after transplanting.

Plug (PL): A cylinder of medium in which a plant is grown. The term is generally used for seedlings and
rooted cuttings that have been removed from the container with the medium held intact by the roots.

Processed Ball: Plants dug bare root while dormant to which a moist medium is added around the
roots to form a ball designed to sustain plant growth.

Root Ball: The intact ball of earth or growing medium containing the roots of a nursery plant.

Root Bound: A condition of container grown plants in which the root system occupies most of the available
space and has grown in a crowded, intertwined, and circling manner.

Root Collar: The region of the plant where roots and stem or trunk meet, generally at the ground level
or soil line.

Root Flare (Trunk Flare): The area at the base of the plant’s stem or trunk where the stem or trunk
broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 3

Root Pruning: The systematic pruning of roots of nursery stock in order to stimulate branching of roots
and the production of fibrous roots.
Rootstock: See Understock.

Rooted Cutting (RC): A vegetative portion, either hardwood (HWC) or softwood (SWC), removed from
a parent plant that has been induced to form roots and eventually new leaves and shoots.

Spurs: Branches with restricted longitudinal growth and shortened internodes typically appearing on
fruit plants and some whips.

Trunk: That portion of a stem or stems of a tree below the lowest branch.

Understock: A term used to describe a plant or that part of a plant including collar and roots, on which
another cultivar or species will be or has been budded or grafted.

Whip: A young tree without branches; in some species and grades spurs may be present.

Whorl: A group of three or more buds, leaves, flowers or twigs at the same node.

Young Plants: See Liners.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 4

Section 3: Container Grown Stock
3.1 General specifications
Container grown plants are those grown and marketed in a container. All nursery stock specification
requirements shall apply to container grown stock, i.e. grading, size, type, spread, and height.

Root circling and other root deformities can occur in container grown plants. These misdirected roots
should be avoided by using currently accepted nursery practices such as specialized containers, root
pruning, and upsizing.

Roots of all container grown plants shall be healthy and vigorous. The root mass of the plant shall be
adequate to hold the potting medium together as a unit when removed from the container. Roots shall
not circle the root ball in the container (become root bound) or be adversely misdirected to an extent
that future growth and establishment could be jeopardized. Such roots shall be corrected before
upsizing or planting-out to encourage proper development of root structure.

The container shall be sufficiently rigid to hold the root ball shape intact during handling and shipping.
Weight shall not be used as a specification for container-grown plants.

3.2 Minimum time required

Plants shall be grown in the container for a minimum of three months or have a well-established root
system reaching the sides of the container to maintain a firm ball. In the case of dormant roses, it is
generally accepted that plants may be potted and forced to be ready for sale in less than three months.

3.3 Alternative containers

It is recognized that containers with holes or made of fabric as a method of aeration to prune roots, or
with coatings to prevent roots from reaching the sides of the container, or shaped to train roots not to
circle the root ball, are acceptable and encouraged in the trade.

3.4 Container sizes

Container sizes listed for specific plant sizes throughout this Standard shall be the minimum acceptable
in order to be compliant with this Standard. The size class of the container shall be specified in addition
to the size of the plant. Containers marketed and sold by a class # designation must have volumes
within the ranges shown in Table 3.4 to be compliant with this Standard. For sizes smaller than #1, see
Section 14.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 5

Table 3.4 Container class volume ranges*

Container class Container volume

(#) (cubic cm)**
1 2,492 – 4,115
2 5,246 – 7,770
3 10,285 – 12,164
5 12,860 – 20,360
7 21,913 – 29,343
10 34,090 – 43,376
15 45,376 – 60,586
20 74,096 – 84,457
25 94,669 – 112,472

*Container classes and volume ranges are consistent with the American Standard for Nursery Stock (ANSI Z60.1-2014).
**cubic cm x .001 = litres; 1,000 cubic cm = 1 litre

3.5 In-ground fabric bag containers

These containers may be used by growers to increase root density and enable digging and
transplanting with smaller root balls than for conventional field dug plants. Users unfamiliar with
specifying and handling plants produced in these containers should consult the grower. Table 3.5
states recommended fabric bag sizes.

Table 3.5 In-ground fabric bag dimensions*

Diameter Minimum depth Minimum volume

(cm) (cm) (cubic cm)**
13 10 1,278
20 18 5,768
25 23 11,586
30 25 18,534
36 30 30,431
40 30 39,542
46 36 58,387
50 36 72,086
56 40 99,666
60 40 118,609

*Adapted from the American Standard for Nursery Stock (ANSI Z60.1-2014) with approximate imperial to metric conversions.
**cubic cm x .001 = litres; 1,000 cubic cm = 1 litre

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 6

Section 4: Lining-Out Stock
4.1 Definition
Lining-out stock includes all plant material suitable to transplant for growing on to a desired size. For
fruit trees and/or understock, see Sections 10 and 12.

4.2 Designation of size grades for lining out stock

Height measurements are taken from the soil line, while caliper measurements are taken at the root
collar.

4.2.1 Height
in 5 cm increments from 0 cm to 30 cm
in 10 cm increments from 30 cm to 60 cm
in 20 cm increments from 60 cm to 100 cm
in 25 cm increments from 100 cm to 200 cm
in 50 cm increments from 200 cm and above

4.2.2 Caliper
in 1 mm increments from 0 mm to 10 mm
in 2 mm increments from 10 mm to 20 mm
in 5 mm increments from 20 mm and above

4.3 Seedlings, Hardwood cuttings, Softwood cuttings, Layers, Grafts, and Whips

Bare root:
Bare root liners shall have a well branched, healthy root system free of deformities and be capable of
sustaining vigorous growth. Tops shall be characteristic of the species, healthy and free from diseases
and pests.

Container grown liners:

Root circling and other root deformities can occur in container grown plants. These misdirected roots
should be avoided by using currently accepted nursery practices such as specialized containers, root
pruning, and upsizing.

Roots shall be healthy, reaching the sides of the container and be well enough developed to keep the
root ball intact until transplanting. Roots shall not circle the root ball in the container (become root
bound) or be adversely misdirected to an extent that future growth and establishment could be
jeopardized. Such roots shall be corrected before upsizing or planting-out to encourage proper
development of root structure.

Whips:
Whips are immature trees that are traditionally used for growing either in open field plantings or grown
to a larger size in containers. The term whip refers to the fact that there is little or no lateral branching.
Whips are normally one-year-old when grown from hardwood cuttings, two years when grown from
softwood cuttings or seedlings and, in the case of budded selections, they normally have a one-year
top and a two-year root system. Tree whips shall have straight, sturdy trunks and a well-developed root
system free of physical deformities and be capable of sustaining vigorous growth. Height and caliper
measurements of whips in Table 4.3 may vary according to species, height, and climatic/cultural
conditions.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 7

Table 4.3 Height and caliper measurements for whips
Height Approximate caliper
(cm) (mm)
60 - 80 10
80 - 100 10
100 - 125 15
125 - 150 15
150 - 175 20
175 - 200 20
200 - 250 20+

4.4 Age
Age in years shall be stated. One year may equal one growing season or one propagation cycle (e.g.,
softwood cuttings). If grown for less than one season, state age in months. For tree whips, age refers to
the number of growing seasons of the bud or main stem if on its own roots.

4.4.1 Specifications abbreviations

The following designations shall be used for lining out stock.

Seedlings
1/0 1 year in seedbed
2/0 2 years in seedbed
1/1 2 years, 1 year in seedbed, transplanted once for 1 year
1/2 3 years, 1 year in seedbed, transplanted once for 2 years
2/1 3 years, 2 years in seedbed, transplanted once for 1 year
2/2 4 years, 2 years in seedbed, transplanted once for 2 years

Hardwood cuttings
0/1 1 year (propagation cycle) in cutting bench
0/2 2 years, 1 year (cycle) in bench, transplanted once for 1 year

Softwood cuttings
0/1/0 1 year (propagation cycle) in cutting bench
0/2/0 2 years (cycles) in cutting bench
0/1/1 2 years, 1 year (cycle) in bench, transplanted once for 1 year
0/1/2 3 years, 1 year (cycle) in bench, transplanted once for 2 years

Layers
L/1/0 1 year (cycle) in propagation
L/1/1 2 years, 1 year (cycle) in propagation, transplanted once for 1 year

Grafts
X/1/0 1 year (propagation cycle) in bench
X/1/1 2 years, 1 year (cycle) in bench, transplanted once for 1 year

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 8

There are additional abbreviations that may be used to further describe the product or production
method.

RC = Rooted cutting
HWC = Hardwood cutting
SWC = Softwood cutting
RP = Root pruned
Wh = Tree whips, either budded or own root
PL = Plug
M = Micropropagated

4.5 Height relationship to caliper by height

It is recognized that climatic conditions in different sections of the country produce plants of different
caliper by height proportions. There is also variance in caliper by height proportion from species to
species. These facts shall be taken into account.

4.5.1 Deciduous trees and shrubs bare root

When caliper governs, the measurements in Table 4.5.1.1 are taken at or from the root collar. When
height governs, the measurements in Table 4.5.1.2 are taken at or from the soil line.

Table 4.5.1.1 Height and root length based on caliper

Caliper Height Root length

(mm) (cm) (cm)
2 15 15
4 20 20
6 25 25
8 30 25

Table 4.5.1.2 Caliper and root length based on height

Height Caliper Root length

(cm) (mm) (cm)
15 2 15
30 4 20
50 6 25
60 8 25

4.6 Recommendations - evergreen lining-out stock

Evergreens should be transplanted or root pruned frequently enough to create a healthy root system
and to help ensure a minimum of transplanting loss. Frequent enough transplanting is recommended to
give the top sufficient space to develop a properly branched framework.

In order to produce a fibrous root system, genera such as Abies and Pinus, which normally make a few
coarse roots, should be transplanted every two or three years. Genera such as Chamaecyparis and
Thuja should be transplanted every three to four years, as they naturally have a more fibrous root
system.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 9

Broad leaved evergreen genera such as Pyracantha, which normally make a few coarse roots, should
be transplanted every year, while those producing more fibrous roots may be transplanted every
second year.

Trimming is also necessary to ensure a proper foundation for good shape in the finished plant.
Frequent transplanting will usually avoid the necessity of severe trimming.

4.7 Conifer plantation and reforestation plants

Conifer liners for Christmas tree plantations and reforestation uses are graded only by height unless
caliper is also specified.

The plug must be sufficiently rooted so that it holds together upon removal from the container or tray.
Roots shall not circle the plug in the container (become root bound) or be adversely misdirected to an
extent that future growth and establishment could be jeopardized. Such roots shall be corrected before
transplanting to encourage proper development of root structure.

Specifications for plugs shall include the number of plants per tray. The size or volume of the cell
should be available on request.

If the seedling is grown bare root, Section 4.3 applies.

Refer to:
Canadian Christmas Tree Growers Association
www.canadianchristmastrees.ca

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 10

Section 5: Evergreen and Deciduous Conifers
5.1 Evergreens and deciduous conifers may be:
Balled and burlapped
Balled and field potted
Container grown
In-ground fabric bag containers

5.2 Designation of size grades

Height or spread measurements shall be stated as follows:
in 5 cm increments from 0 to 30 cm
in 10 cm increments from 30 to 60 cm
in 20 cm increments from 60 to 100 cm
in 25 cm increments from 100 to 300 cm
in 50 cm increments from 300 to 500 cm
in 100 cm increments from 500 cm and over

5.3 Descriptions
Four types of evergreen and deciduous conifers are considered separately as follows:

5.3.1 Dwarf
This group includes ground cover, flat, and small globe types usually not exceeding 100 cm in height at
maturity. Measurement shall refer to spread (height not considered). The main body of the plant shall
be no less than the size stated.

Examples:
Juniperus communis ‘Repanda’
Juniperus horizontalis cultivars
Juniperus sabina ‘Tamariscifolia’
Juniperus sabina ‘Arcadia’
Picea abies ‘Nidiformis’
Thuja occidentalis ‘Little Giant’

Fig. 5.3.1.1 Typical measurement for a 50 cm spreading conifer

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 11

 Fig. 5.3.1.2 Typical measurements for Dwarf type conifers

5.3.2 Medium
This group includes plants usually not exceeding 200 cm in height or spread at maturity including semi-
spreading, globes, and compact upright types, commonly used in foundation planting. Measurements
shall refer to height or spread.

Examples:
Juniperus chinensis ‘Pfitzeriana’
Juniperus sabina
Picea glauca ‘Conica’
Pinus mugo var. mugo
Taxus media ‘Brownii’
Taxus cuspidata (spreading types)
Thuja occidentalis ‘Woodwardii’

Fig. 5.3.2 Typical measurements for Medium type conifers

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 12

5.3.3 Tall and Columnar
This group includes plants frequently used as accents in foundation or other plantings. Measurement
shall refer to height.

Examples:
Juniperus chinensis ‘Mountbatten’
Juniperus scopulorum ‘Skyrocket’
Juniperus scopulorum ‘Wichita Blue’
Taxus media ‘Hicksii’

125 cm 125 cm

45 cm

Fig. 5.3.3 Typical measurements for Tall and Columnar type conifers

5.3.3.1 Width at mid-height

A plant’s width at mid-height in relation to its height may vary with growing locations in Canada and
amount of pruning. Table 5.3.3 gives some indication of the height/spread relationship. Width shall not
be less than 20% of the overall height of the plant. Any deviations shall be indicated by the supplier or
be in accordance with the purchaser’s requirement.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 13

Table 5.3.3 Mid-height width in relation to height for Tall and Columnar type conifers

Height Width at mid-height

(cm) (cm)
40 - 50 10
50 - 60 10
60 - 80 15
80 - 100 20
100 - 125 20
125 - 150 25
150 - 175 30
175 - 200 35
200 - 225 40
225 - 250 40
250 - 275 50
275- 300 50

5.3.4 Tall and Broad

This group includes large trees frequently used as landscape specimens or for shelterbelts or screen
plantings. Measurements shall refer to height.

Examples:
Picea species
Pinus species
Pseudotsuga menziesii var. glauca

125 cm
Height shall be determined
midway between the tip of the
leader and the uppermost whorl.

50 cm

Fig. 5.3.4 Typical measurements for Tall and Broad type conifers

Saleable stock shall have a central leader. The width at the base in relation to height may vary with
growing location in Canada and amount of pruning. Table 5.3.4 states height-spread relationships.
Width at the base shall not be less than 40% of height. Any deviations shall be indicated by the supplier
or be in accordance with purchaser’s requirements.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 14

Table 5.3.4 Basal width in relation to height for Tall and Broad type conifers

Height Base width

(cm) (cm)
80 - 100 35
100 - 125 40
125 - 150 50
150 - 175 60
175 - 200 70
200 - 225 75
225 - 250 80
250 - 275 90
275 - 300 100

5.4 Digging specifications

These specifications include balled and burlapped, balled and field potted, and machine dug into wire
baskets.

Root ball sizes shall always be of a width and depth to encompass enough of the fibrous and
absorptive root system to enable full recovery of the plant. All roots shall be healthy and vigorous and
shall be free of physical abnormalities that could jeopardize future growth and establishment.

Plant trunks shall be centered in the root ball with a deviation not exceeding 10% of the root ball
diameter.

5.4.1 Balled and burlapped

Balls shall be solid, remain intact until transplanted and be tied tightly with burlap and rope. Using 140g
jute burlap, balls may be dug up to 40 cm in diameter without the support of heavy twine or rope.

5.4.2 Balled and field potted

Plants shall be dug with intact root balls and placed in containers in lieu of burlap. The containers shall
be sufficiently rigid to hold the root ball shape intact during handling and shipping. Root ball sizes shall
conform to tables in Section 5.4.

5.4.3 Machine dug into wire basket

Plants with intact root balls are mechanically dug and placed in burlap lined wire baskets. The burlap
shall be secured tightly over the top of the ball and the wire basket cross-laced securely. The basket
shall fit the ball tightly; crimping can ensure a secure fit. The top horizontal wire of the basket shall be
lower than the top of the root ball.

5.4.4 Root ball diameters (Dwarf, Medium, Tall and Columnar types)
Table 5.4.4 states minimum root ball diameters for field dug plants, including those in in-ground fabric
bag containers.

Root balls larger than those stated in Table 5.4.4 shall be required when the plants have not been
transplanted or root pruned for four or more years or when plants are dug out of season.
Collected or native material dug from woodlots or fencerows shall have a root ball 30% greater than
stated in Table 5.4.4

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 15

Root balls one size smaller than those recommended in Table 5.4.4 shall be acceptable for plants
frequently transplanted or root pruned.

Table 5.4.4 Root ball size in relation to spread or height for Dwarf, Medium, and Tall and
Columnar type conifers

Spread or height Minimum root ball Minimum in-ground

(whichever is greater) diameter fabric bag diameter*
(cm) (cm) (cm)

30 20 13
40 25 13
50 30 13
60 35 20
80 40 20
100 45 25
125 50 25
150 50 30
175 60 30
200 70 36
225 75 40
250 80 50

* Adapted from the American Standard for Nursery Stock (ANSI Z60.1-2014) with approximate imperial to metric conversions

Root ball measurements of plants larger than those shown in Table 5.4.4 shall be determined by the
grower and be adequately sized to enable full recovery of the plant.

5.4.5 Root ball diameters (Tall and Broad types)

Table 5.4.5 states minimum root ball diameters for field dug plants, including those in in-ground fabric
bag containers.

Root balls larger than those in Table 5.4.5 shall be required when the plants have not been
transplanted or root pruned for four or more years or when plants are dug out of season.

Collected or native material dug from woodlots or fencerows shall have a root ball 30% greater than
stated in Table 5.4.5

Root balls one size smaller than those recommended Table 5.4.5 shall be acceptable for plants
frequently transplanted or root pruned.

Where it is an accepted nursery cultural practice to shear, prune or otherwise impede the natural
growth rate of plants other than by root pruning, caliper shall be used to determine root ball and wire
basket size.

The caliper of larger evergreens shall be taken into account for root ball size and basket size selection
since in some locations evergreens will caliper quickly. Height and spread may not be the proper way
to determine either root ball or basket size. In that case refer to Table 7.3.4.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 16

Table 5.4.5 Root ball size in relation to height for Tall and Broad type conifers

Minimum root ball Minimum in-ground

Height
diameter fabric bag diameter*
(cm)
(cm) (cm)
30 20 13
40 25 13
50 30 20
60 35 20
80 40 25
100 45 25
125 50 30
150 60 30
175 70 40
200 80 45
225 80 50
250 80 50
275 90 55
300 90 55
350 100 60
400 120 75

*Adapted from the American Standard for Nursery Stock (ANSI Z60.1-2014) with approximate imperial to metric conversions.

Root ball measurements of plants larger than those shown in Table 5.4.5 shall be determined by the
grower and be adequately sized to enable full recovery of the plant.

5.4.6 Root ball depth

Balls of a specified diameter, as well as having sufficient depth to encompass the fibrous and
absorptive root systems, shall be deep enough to withstand the handling and transportation necessary
in the transplanting operation without breaking.

5.5 Container grown specifications

All specifications of nursery stock, including Section 3, apply to container grown conifers.

An established container grown conifer shall be one transplanted into a container and grown in that
container for a sufficient length of time for new fibrous roots to have developed so that the root mass
will retain its shape and hold together when removed from the container.

Root circling and other root abnormalities can occur in container grown plants. These misdirected roots
should be avoided by using currently accepted nursery practices such as specialized containers, root
pruning, and upsizing.

Roots shall be healthy and vigorous. Roots shall not circle the root ball in the container (become root
bound) or be adversely misdirected to an extent that future growth and establishment could be
jeopardized. Such roots shall be corrected before upsizing or planting-out to encourage proper
development of root structure.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 17

The centre of the trunk shall be as close to the centre of the container as possible. A tolerance of 10%
of the diameter of the container is the maximum deviation allowed for conifers planted and rooted in
containers.

Plants shall be transplanted into larger containers within a maximum of three growing seasons. Faster
rooting plants shall be transplanted earlier to avoid root circling and root deformities.

The container shall be sufficiently rigid to hold the root ball shape intact during handling and shipping.

5.5.1 Container size

Container size shall be adequate to provide sufficient space for growing medium and root growth
without deformities. Tables 5.5.1.1 and 5.5.1.2 provide a guide to container sizes.

Container size in relation to plant size will vary among the diverse number of genera, species, and
cultivars of conifers as well as with geographic location and established nursery practice.

Table 5.5.1.1 Guidelines for container size in relation to spread or height for Dwarf and Medium
type conifers

Minimum
Spread or height
container size
(cm)
(#)
10 - 25 1
25 - 40 2
30 - 50 3
40 - 60 5
50 - 90 7
60 - 110 10

Table 5.5.1.2 Guidelines for container size in relation to height for Tall and Columnar and for Tall
and Broad type conifers

Minimum
Height
container size
(cm)
(#)
15 - 40 1
25 - 50 2
40 - 75 3
50 - 90 5
60 - 150 7
80 - 180 10
120 - 210 15
150 - 250 25

5.6 In-ground fabric bag containers

These containers may be used by growers to increase root density and enable digging and
transplanting with smaller root balls than for conventional field dug plants. Users unfamiliar with
specifying and handling plants produced in these containers should consult the grower.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 18

Tables 5.4.4 and 5.4.5 state the recommended minimum sizes for plants grown in in-ground fabric bag
containers. Plants shall be grown for a minimum of two seasons in the fabric container. Coniferous
trees should be grown in the same container for a maximum of six years depending on the plant size
and container size at planting.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 19

Section 6: Broadleaf Evergreens
6.1 Broadleaf evergreens may be:
Balled and burlapped
Balled and field potted
Container grown
In-ground fabric bag containers

6.2 Designation of size grades

Height or spread measurements shall be as follows:
in 10 cm increments from 30 to 60 cm
in 20 cm increments from 60 to 100 cm
in 25 cm increments from 100 to 300 cm
in 50 cm increments from 300 and over

6.3 Descriptions
Plant age is usually not important but may be requested by the purchaser. Four types of broadleaf
evergreens are considered separately as follows:

6.3.1 Spreading
This group includes mainly flat types used as ground covers. Measurements shall refer to spread.
Height, seldom greater than 30 cm, shall not be considered.

Examples:
Andromeda polifolia ‘Blue Ice’
Cotoneaster dammeri
Erica cultivars
Genista pilosa ‘Vancouver Gold’
Paxistima canbyi

Fig. 6.3.1 Typical measurement for a Spreading type broadleaf evergreen

6.3.2 Semi-spreading
This group includes moderately spreading types. Height should be approximately 1/2 the spread.
Measurements shall refer to spread.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 20

Examples:
Buxus sinica var. insularis (B. microphylla var. koreana)
Euonymus fortunei cultivars
Prunus laurocerasus ‘Zabeliana’
Rhododendron (such as ‘Elizabeth’ or ‘Scarlet Wonder’)

Fig. 6.3.2 Typical measurement for a Semi-spreading type broadleaf evergreen

6.3.3 Globe and Dwarf

Plants in this group should have a spread not less than 2/3 of the height. Measurements shall refer to
height.

Examples:
Berberis buxifolia ‘Nana’
Berberis verruculosa
Buxus sempervirens ‘Suffruticosa’
Ilex x meserveae ‘Blue Boy’
Pieris japonica cultivars
Rhododendron (such as ‘Unique’ or ‘Bow Bells’)

Fig. 6.3.3 Typical measurement for a Globe and Dwarf type broadleaf evergreen

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 21

6.3.4 Upright Forms
Plants in this group should have a spread not less than 1/3 of the height. Measurements shall refer to
height.

Examples:
Berberis julianae
Ilex aquifolium
Pyracantha (tall types)
Rhododendron (tall types)

80cm

40 cm

Fig. 6.3.4 Typical measurements for an Upright type broadleaf evergreen

6.4 Yucca
Yuccas shall be specified and sold by container size and by age if field grown.

6.5 Digging specifications

These specifications include balled and burlapped as well as balled and field potted.

Root ball sizes shall always be of a width and depth to encompass enough of the fibrous and
absorptive root system to enable full recovery of the plant. All roots shall be healthy and vigorous and
shall be free of abnormalities that could jeopardize future growth and establishment.

Plant trunks shall be centered in the root ball with a deviation not exceeding 10% of the root ball
diameter.

6.5.1 Balled and burlapped

Balls shall be solid, remain intact until transplanted and be tied tightly with burlap and twine or rope.
Using 140g jute burlap, balls may be dug up to 40 cm in diameter without the support of heavy twine or
rope.

6.5.2 Balled and field potted

Plants shall be dug with intact root balls and placed in containers in lieu of burlap. The containers shall
be sufficiently rigid to hold the root ball shape intact during handling and shipping. Root ball sizes shall
conform to Table 6.5.3.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 22

6.5.3 Root Ball Diameters
Table 6.5.3 states the minimum root ball diameters for field dug plants, including those in in-ground
fabric bag containers.

Larger root balls than those stated in Table 6.5.3 are required when the plants have not been
transplanted or root pruned for four or more years or when plants are dug out of season.

Collected or native material dug from woodlots or fencerows shall have a root ball 30% greater than
stated in Table 6.5.3.

Root balls one size smaller than those in Table 6.5.3 shall be acceptable for plants frequently
transplanted or root pruned.

Root ball measurements of plants larger than those in Table 6.5.3 shall be determined by the grower
and be adequately sized to enable full recovery of the plant.

Table 6.5.3 Root ball diameter in relation to plant spread or height for broadleaf evergreens.

Plant spread or height Minimum root Minimum in-ground

(whichever is greater) ball diameter fabric bag diameter*
(cm) (cm) (cm)
30 20 13
40 25 13
50 30 20
60 35 20
80 40 25
100 50 30
125 60 30
150 70 36

*Adapted from the American Standard for Nursery Stock (ANSI Z60.1-2014) with approximate imperial to metric conversions.

6.5.4 Root Ball Depth

Balls of a specified diameter, as well as having sufficient depth to encompass the fibrous and
absorptive root system, shall be deep enough to withstand the handling and transportation necessary in
the transplanting operation without breaking.

6.6 Container grown specifications

All specifications of nursery stock, including Section 3, shall be applicable to container grown broadleaf
evergreens.

An established container grown broadleaf evergreen shall be one transplanted into a container and
grown in that container for a sufficient length of time for new fibrous roots to have developed so that the
root mass will retain its shape and hold together when removed from the container. Roots shall be
healthy and vigorous.

Root circling and other root abnormalities can occur in container grown plants. These misdirected roots
should be avoided by using currently accepted nursery practices such as specialized containers, root
pruning, and upsizing.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 23

Roots shall not circle the root ball in the container (become root bound) or be adversely misdirected to
an extent that future growth and establishment could be jeopardized. Such roots shall be corrected
before upsizing or planting-out to encourage proper development of root structure.

The centre of the trunk shall be as close to the centre of the container as possible. A tolerance of 10%
of the diameter of the container is the maximum deviation allowed.

Plants shall be transplanted into larger containers within a maximum of three growing seasons. Plants
in containers smaller than #5 shall be transplanted into a larger container after two growing seasons.
Those in #5 containers and larger shall be transplanted into a larger container after three growing
seasons. Faster rooting plants shall be transplanted earlier to avoid root circling and root deformities.

The container shall be sufficiently rigid to hold the root ball shape intact during handling and shipping.

6.6.1 Container Size

Container size shall be adequate to provide sufficient space for growing medium and root growth
without deformities. Table 6.6.1 provides a guide to container sizes.

Container size in relation to plant size will vary among the genera, species, and cultivars of broadleaf
evergreens as well as with geographic location and established nursery practice.

Table 6.6.1 Guidelines for container size in relation to plant size for broadleaf evergreens.

Minimum container
Spread or height
size
(cm)
(#)
15 - 30 1
25 - 50 2
40 - 80 3
60 - 100 5
80 - 120 7
80 - 150 10
90 - 200 15

6.7 In-ground fabric bag containers

These containers may be used by growers to increase root density and enable digging and
transplanting with smaller root balls than for conventional field dug plants. Users unfamiliar with
specifying and handling plants produced in these containers should consult the grower.

Table 6.5.3 states the recommended minimum sizes for plants grown in in-ground fabric bag
containers. Plants shall be grown for a minimum of two seasons in the fabric container. Plants should
be grown in the same container for a maximum of six years depending on the plant size and container
size at planting.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 24

Section 7: Deciduous Shade and Flowering Trees
7.1 Deciduous shade and flowering trees may be:
Bare root
Machine dug into wire baskets
Processed ball
Container grown
In-ground fabric bag containers

7.2 Descriptions
Three types of deciduous shade and flowering trees are considered separately as follows:

7.2.1 Dwarf, Formal, and Top-worked (grafted) trees

This group includes many small trees grown as ‘standards’ (top-worked or grafted). The maximum
height at maturity for this group is usually 600 cm.

Specify the following:

Height of the stem in appropriate cm increments
Size and/or age of the head
Caliper of the stem, when the caliper exceeds 40 mm

Examples:
Acer platanoides ‘Globosum’ 200 cm stem, 60 cm head
Catalpa bignonioides ‘Nana’ 200 cm stem, 50 mm caliper, 60 cm head
Caragana arborescens ‘Pendula’ 125 cm stem, 40 cm/2yr. head

Fig. 7.2.1 Typical measurements for a Top-worked (grafted) type tree

7.2.1.1 Measuring caliper

Caliper shall be the determining measurement when the caliper exceeds 40 mm. It shall be measured
at 15 cm above the soil line for trees with a caliper up to and including 100 mm. Trees greater than 100
mm caliper shall be measured 30 cm above the soil line. Soil line measurements shall be taken at or
close to the root flare.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 25

7.2.2 Standard trees
This group includes large growing shade and flowering trees which may be suitable for streets,
boulevards, parks, residential or industrial use. They may also be used as screens and shelterbelts.

Examples:
Acer rubrum
Acer saccharum
Fraxinus pennsylvanica
Gleditsia triacanthos cultivars
Quercus species
Tilia species

Fig. 7.2.2 Typical measurements for a Standard type tree

Standard type trees shall have straight sturdy trunks, with a well branched and balanced crown.
Branching structure of the crown will vary according to species, height, age, and climatic/cultural
conditions. A dominant, central leader should be developed in species and cultivars for which it is
characteristic but will not necessarily be evident or expected at a certain age of a tree’s maturity or be
typical of its natural growth habit. Indeterminate or diffuse branching shall be recognized and
considered acceptable provided it is characteristic for the species/cultivar and does not create crossing
branches, included bark or other flaws that could affect the tree’s long term health and stability. Co-
dominant stems (leaders) in the lower half of the crown do not meet recognized quality requirements.

Height shall be as follows:

in 25 cm increments from 100 cm to 200 cm
in 50 cm increments from 200 cm to 500 cm
in 100 cm increments above 500 cm

Height of branching
Bid specifications for trees for street plantings shall specify the height to which the tree shall be free of
branching. Height of branching shall bear a relationship to the size and kind of tree.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 26

Table 7.2.2.1 Caliper and branch number in relation to height for Standard type trees

Overall
Caliper Minimum number of
height
(mm) branches in crown
(cm)
200 - 250 20 3
250 - 300 25 5
250 - 300 30 6
300 - 350 35 7

Caliper shall be as follows:

in 2mm increments from 0mm to 10 mm
in 5 mm increments from 10mm to 50mm
in 10 mm increments from 50mm to 150mm
in 25 mm increments above 150mm

Height relationship to caliper

It is recognized that climatic conditions in different sections of the country produce Standard type trees
of different caliper-height proportions. Trees from one region of the country may have less caliper in
proportion to height while trees from another region may have greater caliper in proportion to height
than shown in Table 7.2.2.2.

Table 7.2.2.2 Height and branch number in relation to caliper for Standard type trees

Caliper Overall height Minimum number of

(mm) (cm) branches in crown
40 250 - 300 8
45 300 - 350 9
50 350 - 400 10

7.2.3 Other forms of trees

7.2.3.1 Small Spreading

This group includes small trees which may have a stem 30 cm to 80 cm high and a well-balanced
crown.

Examples:
Acer palmatum
Amelanchier laevis
Caragana arborescens ‘Sutherland’
Malus cultivars

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 27

 Fig. 7.2.3.1 Typical measurements for a Small Spreading type tree

7.2.3.2 Columnar and Fastigiate

This group includes tall growing trees with one main stem usually branched from ground level. If not
branched from the ground, state height of branching.

Examples:
Carpinus betulus ‘Fastigiata’
Fagus sylvatica ‘Fastigiata’
Populus canescens ‘Tower’
Quercus robur ‘Fastigiata’

Fig. 7.2.3.2 Typical measurement for a Columnar and Fastigiate type tree

7.2.3.3 Multi-stemmed
This group includes tall growing trees with two or more main stems, the number of stems shall be
specified as follows:
2 stems
3 or more stems

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 28

More stems may be specified if desired. The largest stem shall determine the grade of the clump. No
stem shall be counted if it is more than two sizes smaller than the size specified. For example, a
specified Betula 80 mm clump 3 stems, could have two stems 60 mm, one 80 mm and still be
acceptable as an 80 mm clump. Multi-stemmed trees may be specified based on height rather than by
caliper.

Examples:
Acer ginnala (A. tataricum subsp. ginnala)
Betula papyrifera

Fig. 7.2.3.3 Typical measurement for a Multi-stemmed type tree

7.3 Digging specifications

These specifications include bare root, balled and burlapped, machine dug into wire baskets, and
processed ball.

Root and ball sizes shall always be of a width and depth to encompass enough of the fibrous and
absorptive root system to enable full recovery of the plant. All roots shall be healthy and vigorous and
shall be free of deformities that could jeopardize future growth and establishment.

Plant trunks shall be centered in the root ball with a deviation not exceeding 10% of the root ball
diameter.

7.3.1 Bare root

All bare root trees shall have a well branched, healthy root system characteristic of the species. Root
size shall conform to the tables in Section 4.5.1 and Table 7.3.4.

7.3.2 Balled and burlapped

Balls shall be solid, remain intact until planted and be tied tightly with burlap and rope. Using 140 g jute
burlap, trees with a caliper of 20 mm or smaller may be dug without the support of heavy twine or rope.
Root ball sizes shall conform to Table 7.3.4.

7.3.3 Machine dug into wire basket

Plants with intact root balls are dug mechanically and placed in burlap lined wire baskets. The burlap shall
be secured tightly over the top of the ball and the wire basket cross-laced securely. The basket shall fit the
ball tightly; crimping to ensure a secure fit. The top horizontal wire of the basket shall be lower than the top
of the root ball.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 29

7.3.4 Root ball diameter
Table 7.3.4 states minimum root ball diameters for field dug plants, including those in in-ground fabric
bag containers.

Root balls larger than those stated in Table 7.3.4 shall be required when the plants have not been
transplanted or root pruned for four or more years or when plants are dug out of season. If the trees
have been in ground longer than four years, it is recommended to use the ball size for the next size
larger.

Root balls one size smaller than those in Table 7.3.4 shall be acceptable for plants frequently
transplanted or root pruned.

The minimum root ball size for multi-stemmed trees shall be one size larger than the sizes specified for
single-stemmed trees of equivalent caliper as shown in Table 7.3.4.

Collected or native material dug from woodlots or fencerows shall have a root ball 30% greater than
stated in Table 7.3.4.

Table 7.3.4 Root ball size in relation to caliper for field grown Standard type trees

Minimum root Approximate root Minimum in-ground

Caliper
ball diameter ball depth fabric bag diameter*
(mm)
(cm) (cm) (cm)
20 40 20 20
25 45 23 25
30 50 25 30
35 55 27 36
40 60 30 40
45 65 33 40
50 70 40 46
60 75 38 46
70 80 40 50
80 85 43 50
90 95 48 56
100 105 53 60
110 115 58 80
120 125 63
130 135 68
140 145 73
150 155 78
175 175 88
200 200 100

* Adapted from the American Standard for Nursery Stock (ANSI Z60.1-2014) with approximate imperial to metric conversions.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 30

7.4 Container grown specifications
All specifications of nursery stock, including Section 3, shall be applicable to container grown
deciduous shade and flowering trees.

An established container grown tree shall be one transplanted into a container and grown in that
container for a sufficient length of time for new fibrous roots to have developed so that the root mass
will retain its shape and hold together when removed from the container. Roots shall be healthy and
vigorous.

Root circling and other root abnormalities can occur in container grown plants. These misdirected roots
should be avoided by using currently accepted nursery practices such as specialized containers, root
pruning, and upsizing.

Roots shall not circle the root ball in the container (become root bound) or be adversely misdirected to
the extent that future growth and establishment could be jeopardized. Such roots shall be corrected
before upsizing or planting-out to encourage proper development of root structure.

The centre of the trunk shall be as close to the centre of the container as possible. A tolerance of 10%
of the diameter of the container is the maximum deviation allowed for trees planted and rooted in
containers.

Trees shall be transplanted into larger containers within a maximum of three growing seasons. Faster
rooting trees shall be transplanted earlier to avoid root circling and root deformities.

The container shall be sufficiently rigid to hold its shape intact and to protect the root mass during
handling and shipping. The trunk shall be protected during shipping and the top shall be protected if
necessary to prevent excess branch breakage.

7.4.1 Container size

Container size shall be adequate to provide sufficient space for growing medium and root growth
without deformities that could jeopardize future growth and establishment. Table 7.4.1 provides a guide
to container sizes.

Container size in relation to plant size will vary among the genera, species, and cultivars of shade and
flowering trees as well as with geographical location and established nursery practice.

Dwarf and light growing trees may be one or two container sizes smaller than shown in Table 7.4.1
provided excessive root circling and deformities do not exist.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 31

Table 7.4.1 Guidelines for container size in relation to tree height and caliper for shade and
flowering trees

Approximate Minimum container

Height range
caliper size
(cm)
(mm) (#)
50 - 80 8 1
80 - 125 10 2
100 - 150 15 3
150 - 250 20 - 30 5
200 - 300 30 - 35 7
250 - 350 35 - 40 10
300 - 400 40 - 45 15
350 - 450 45 - 50 20
400 - 500 50 - 60 25

7.5 In-ground fabric bag containers

These containers may be used by growers to increase root density and enable a smaller root ball than
for conventional field dug plants. Users unfamiliar with specifying and handling plants produced in
these containers should consult the grower.

Table 7.3.4 states the recommended minimum root ball and bag sizes for in-ground fabric bag
containers. Trees shall be grown for a minimum of two seasons in the fabric container. Trees should be
grown in the same container for a maximum of four years depending on the plant size and container
size at planting.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 32

Section 8: Deciduous Shrubs
8.1 Deciduous shrubs may be:
Bare root
Balled and burlapped
Balled and field potted
Machine dug into wire baskets
Container grown

8.2 Descriptions
Four types of deciduous shrubs are considered separately as follows:

8.2.1 Dwarf
This group includes small shrubs that seldom exceed 100 cm at maturity.

Examples:
Berberis thunbergii ‘Rose Glow’
Cotoneaster adpressus var. praecox (C. nanshan)
Hypericum kalmianum
Potentilla fruticosa
Spiraea japonica cultivars
Symphoricarpos chenaultii ‘Hancock’
Viburnum opulus ‘Nanum’

Fig. 8.2.1 Typical measurement for a Dwarf type deciduous shrub

Table 8.2.1 Cane number and root spread in relation to height for Dwarf type deciduous shrubs

Minimum root
Height Minimum
spread
(cm) number of canes
(cm)
20 - 30 3 15
30 - 40 4 20
40 - 50 4 25
50 - 60 5 25
60 - 80 5 30
80 - 100 6 35

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 33

8.2.2 Medium
This group includes compact shrubs that seldom exceed 200 cm at maturity.

Examples:
Chaenomeles speciosa
Euonymus alatus ‘Compactus’
Hydrangea paniculata cultivars
Philadelphus coronarius ‘Aureus’
Rosa rugosa
Spiraea x vanhouttei

Figure 8.2.2 Typical measurement for a Medium type deciduous shrub

Table 8.2.2 Cane number and root spread in relation to height for Medium type deciduous
shrubs

Height Minimum number of Minimum root spread

(cm) canes (cm)
20 - 30 3 15
30 - 40 4 20
40 - 50 4 25
50 - 60 4 30
60 - 80 5 35
80 - 100 5 40
100 - 125 5 50
125 - 150 6 60
150 - 175 6 60
175 - 200 7 65

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 34

8.2.3 Tall – Substantial
This group includes tall growing shrubs that generally grow to 200 cm or more at maturity.

Examples:
Acanthopanax sieboldianus
Lonicera (tall types)
Philadelphus (tall types)
Prunus triloba ‘Multiplex’
Ribes sanguineum
Sambucus nigra ‘Aurea’
Viburnum opulus
Viburnum lantana

Figure 8.2.3 Typical measurement for a Tall – Substantial type deciduous shrub

Table 8.2.3 Cane number and root spread in relation to height for Tall – Substantial type
deciduous shrubs

Minimum root
Height Minimum
spread
(cm) number of canes
(cm)
20 - 30 3 15
30 - 40 4 20
40 - 50 4 25
50 - 60 4 30
60 - 80 5 35
80 - 100 5 40
100 - 125 5 50
125 - 150 6 60
150 - 175 6 60
175 - 200 7 65

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 35

8.2.4 Tall – Slender
This group includes tall, slender shrubs growing to 200 cm or more at maturity.

Examples:
Caragana arborescens
Cornus alternifolia
Euonymus europaeus
Syringa vulgaris cultivars
Tamarix ramosissima
Viburnum lentago

Fig. 8.2.4 Typical measurement for a Tall - Slender type deciduous shrub

Table 8.2.4 Cane number and root spread in relation to height for Tall – Slender type deciduous
shrubs

Minimum Minimum root

Height
number of spread
(cm)
canes (cm)
40 - 50 3 25
50 - 60 3 25
60 - 80 3 30
80 - 100 3 30
100 - 125 4 40
125 - 150 4 45
150 - 175 4 50
175 - 200 4 55
200 - 250 4 60
250 - 300 5 65

8.3 Digging specifications

These specifications include bare root, balled and burlapped, balled and field potted, and machine dug
into wire baskets.

Roots and ball sizes shall always be of a width and depth to encompass enough of the fibrous and
absorptive root system to enable full recovery of the plant. All roots shall be healthy and vigorous and
shall be free of deformities that could jeopardize future growth and establishment.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 36

Larger root balls than those stated in Section 8.2 are required when plants have not been transplanted
or root pruned for four or more years or when plants are dug out of season.

Plant trunks shall be centered in the root ball with a deviation not exceeding 10% of the root ball
diameter.

8.3.1 Bare root

All bare root shrubs shall have a well branched root system characteristic of the species. Root sizes
shall conform to the tables in Section 8.2.

8.3.2 Balled and burlapped

Balls shall be solid, remain intact until planted and be tied tightly with burlap and twine or rope. Using
140 g jute burlap, balls may be dug up to 40 cm diameter without the support of heavy twine or rope.
Root ball sizes shall conform to the tables in Section 8.2.

8.3.3 Balled and field potted

Plants shall be dug with intact soil balls and placed in containers in lieu of burlap. The containers shall
be sufficiently rigid to hold the root ball shape intact during handling and shipping. Root ball sizes shall
conform to the tables in Section 8.2.

8.3.4 Machine dug into wire baskets

Plants with intact root balls are mechanically dug and placed in burlap lined wire baskets. The burlap
shall be secured tightly over the top of the ball and the wire basket cross-laced securely. The basket
shall fit the ball tightly; crimping can ensure a secure fit. The top horizontal wire of the basket shall be
lower than the top of the root ball. Root ball sizes shall conform to the tables in Section 8.2.

8.4 Container grown specifications

All specifications of nursery stock, including Section 3, shall be applicable to container grown
deciduous shrubs.

An established container grown shrub shall be one transplanted into a container and grown in that
container for a sufficient length of time for new fibrous roots to have reached the sides of the container
so that the root mass will retain its shape and hold together when removed from the container. Roots
shall be healthy and vigorous.

Root circling and other root abnormalities can occur in container grown plants. These misdirected roots
should be avoided by using currently accepted nursery practices such as specialized containers, root
pruning, and upsizing.

Roots shall not circle the root ball in the container (become root bound) or be adversely misdirected to an
extent that future growth and establishment could be jeopardized. Such roots shall be corrected before
upsizing or planting-out to encourage proper development of root structure.

The container shall be sufficiently rigid to hold the root shape intact during handling and shipping. The
top of the plant shall be protected during shipping if necessary to prevent excessive breakage.

All plants shall be specified by both plant size and container size. Plant size shall conform to the
requirements in Section 8.2. Plant age is usually not listed or specified but should be available on
request.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 37

Shrubs shall be transplanted into larger containers within a maximum of two growing seasons. Faster
growing shrubs shall be transplanted earlier to avoid root circling and root deformities.

Cultural pruning methods shall be practiced to develop the maximum number of canes typical of the
plant species’ growth habit and consistent with the requirements in Section 8.2.

The minimum number of canes listed in Table 8.4.1 compared to those listed in Section 8.2 may vary
based on differences among plant types and on established nursery practice.

8.4.1 Container size

Container size shall be adequate to provide sufficient space for the growing medium and root growth
without deformities that could jeopardize future growth and establishment.

Table 8.4.1 provides a guide to container size in relation to plant height and cane number. Container
size in relation to plant size will vary among the diverse number of genera, species, and cultivars of
deciduous shrubs as well as with geographic location and established nursery practice.

Table 8.4.1 Guidelines for container size in relation to plant height and cane number for
deciduous shrubs

Minimum
Height Minimum
container size
(cm) number of canes
(#)
15 - 30 3 1
25 - 50 3 2
30 - 60 4 3
40 - 80 5 5
60 - 100 5 7
80 - 125 6 10
100 - 150 6 15

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 38

Section 9: Roses
9.1 General specifications
There are numerous cultivars of roses available in today’s marketplace. Due to the similarity of the
plants, special care shall be taken in labelling bare root plants. All bundles shall be labelled and
securely tied.

Long storage periods are frequently required. Special care shall be taken to ensure that these plants
are kept free of disease, damaged roots or branches. A well developed, fibrous root system without
deformities is essential.

Roses are produced by either budding the cultivars onto a rootstock or by rooting cuttings. Plants shall
be identified as either ‘Budded’ or ‘Own Root’. Information regarding the understock type shall be
available on request.

If wax is applied to prevent desiccation during storage, clear wax or light coloured wax shall be used.

After roses are graded, canes are generally cut back for storage and shipping. The length shall not be
less than 20 cm. Illustrations in Section 9.3 are shown as field height.

The term ‘ground level’, as used in rose grades, applies only to field grown plants on their own roots. It
is defined as the area on the stem above the root flare where there is a colour change created by the
original planting depth when the plant was in the field.

9.2 Grading
Roses shall be graded as number 1, 1-1/2 or 2, according to the type, and the number, caliper, and
length of strong canes. A strong cane is one that is healthy, vigorous and fully developed. All canes
shall be sturdy, in good condition, and free of pests and diseases.

9.3 Descriptions
Grading for roses shall be as follows:

9.3.1 Climbing roses

Examples:
Improved Blaze
William Baffin

Grade No. 1 - Three or more strong canes, minimum 8 mm in caliper, measuring a minimum of 50 cm
in length and branched no higher than 10 cm above the bud union or ground level.

Fig. 9.3.1.1 Typical measurement for a Grade No. 1 climbing rose

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 39

Grade No. 1-1/2 - Two or more strong canes, minimum 8 mm in caliper, measuring a minimum of 40
cm in length and branched no higher than 10 cm above the bud union or ground level.

Fig. 9.3.1.2 Typical measurement for a Grade No. 1-1/2 climbing rose

Grade No. 2 - At least two canes, one of which shall be a strong cane, minimum 8 mm in caliper. The
second cane shall be a minimum of 6 mm in caliper. All canes shall be branched no higher than 10 cm
above the bud union or ground level.

9.3.2 Vigorous roses: hybrid tea, grandiflora, larger shrubs, rugosa

Examples:
Hansa
Peace
Queen Elizabeth

Grade No. 1 - Three or more strong canes, minimum 8 mm in caliper, measuring a minimum of 40 cm
in length and branched no higher than 10 cm above the bud union or ground level.

Grade No. 1-1/2 - Two or more strong canes, minimum 8 mm in caliper, measuring a minimum of 30
cm in length and branched no higher than 10 cm above the bud union or ground level.

Grade No. 2 - At least two canes, one of which shall be a strong cane, minimum 8 mm in caliper. The
second cane shall be a minimum of 6 mm in caliper. All canes shall be branched no higher than 10 cm
above the bud union or ground level.

9.3.3 Floribunda, small shrub, and landscape roses

Examples:
Champlain
The Fairy

Grade No. 1 - Three or more strong canes, minimum 5 mm in caliper, measuring a minimum of 25 cm
in length and branched no higher than 8 cm above the bud union or ground level.

Grade No. 1-1/2 - Two or more strong canes, minimum 5 mm in caliper, measuring a minimum of 20
cm in length and branched no higher than 8 cm above the bud union or ground level.

Grade No. 2 - At least two canes, one of which shall be a strong cane, minimum 5 mm in caliper.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 40

Section 10: Fruit Trees
10.1 General specifications
Fruit trees are grown by many Canadian nurseries to satisfy the requirements of the commercial fruit
growing industry. As the age/size requirements for the commercial fruit growing industry are somewhat
different than those of the retail market, standards have been designed primarily for the needs of the
commercial fruit grower. Some nurseries may choose to apply the standards for shade trees in Section
7.2.3 to fruit trees sold to the retail market.

All trees shall be well rooted, without root abnormalities that could jeopardize future growth and
establishment. They shall be free of diseases and insects and be reasonably straight. Age of trees is
stated as one year, two year, etc.

All trees shall have one label per bundle, be tied securely, and colour coded. The understock shall also
be noted on the label. Example: Apple Ambrosia (B9), 16 mm

All trees shall be measured by caliper only. Caliper shall govern over height. Caliper shall be taken 3
cm above the bud union. Growers who have traditionally listed one year pome fruit by height only may
list height along with caliper.

Trees listed as whips are unbranched. Trees listed as branched shall have a minimum of three
branches 30 cm long. All trees grown two year or more shall be branched.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 41

Section 11: Small Fruits
11.1 General specifications
Special care shall be taken with small fruit, especially raspberries and strawberries, to ensure that stock is
free of disease and insect pests. All stock used for propagation purposes should be certified where such
plant material is available.

All plants shall be well rooted. No grade shall include injured, stunted or odd shaped plants.

11.2 Raspberries

Grading:
No. 1 - Suckers, root cuttings, and tip plants shall be 5 mm and up in caliper at the collar and have 20 cm or
more of live tops.

No. 2 - Suckers, root cuttings, and tip plants, shall be 3 mm and up in caliper at the collar; suckers and root
cuttings shall have 20 cm of live tops; tip plants shall have 15 cm or more of live tops, all plants shall be
proportionately rooted.

11.3 Transplanted Raspberries

Grading:
No. 1 - Transplants shall be 6 mm and up in caliper at the collar and have 30 cm or more of live tops.

No. 2 - Transplants shall be 5 mm and up in caliper at the collar and have 30 cm or more of live tops. There
should be at least one cross root below the crown.

11.4 Dewberries, Blackberries, Boysenberries

Grading:
No. 1 - Root cuttings shall be 3 mm and up in caliper at the collar. Sucker plants require a caliper 5 mm and
up at the collar. All plants shall have 30 cm or more of live tops and be well rooted.

No. 2 - Root cuttings shall be 2 mm and up in caliper at the collar. Sucker plants require a caliper 3 mm and
up at the collar. All plants shall have 20 cm or more of live tops.

11.5 Transplanted Blackberries

Grading:
No. 1 - All transplanted blackberries shall be 6 mm and up in caliper at the collar and have 30 cm or
more of live tops.

11.6 Currants and Gooseberries

Grading:
1 yr. No. 1 - Plants shall measure 20 cm in height with one or more canes or equivalent side branches and
be well rooted.

2 yr. No. 1 - Plants shall measure 30 cm in height with two or more canes or equivalent side branches and
be well rooted.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 42

2 yr. No.2 - Plants shall measure 20 cm in height with one or more canes or equivalent side branches and
be well rooted.

11.7 Blueberries
All measurements of height shall be taken from the crown to the tip of the plant. Plants shall be well rooted
and well branched in proportion to height. Sizing shall be in accordance with Table 11.7 and with Section 8.2
and 8.4. Low bush blueberries, because of their growth habit, will be smaller.

Table 11.7 Grade number and/or age and height for blueberries

Minimum height
Plant grade and/ or age
(cm)
1 yr. rooted cuttings 7.5
2 yr. No.1 23
3 yr. No.1 30
4 yr. No.1 45

11.8 Saskatoon Berries (Amelanchier alnifolia)

Propagation method of cultivar shall be stated as seedling, rooted cutting or micropropagated. Sizing shall
be in accordance with Section 8.2 and 8.4.

11.9 Grape Vines

Grading:
Grape vines shall have healthy and proportionally developed roots. Plants may be trimmed back to
three buds.

1 yr. No.1 - Light growing varieties/cultivars shall have 15 cm or more of live top at harvest. Strong growing
varieties/cultivars shall be proportionately larger. Plants shall be well rooted.

2 yr. No.1 - Light growing varieties/cultivars shall have 30 cm or more of live top at harvest. Strong growing
varieties/cultivars shall be proportionately larger. Plants shall be well rooted.

2 yr. No.2 - same specification as 1 yr. No. 1

11.10 Strawberries
The internal crown shall be white and healthy with no signs of discolouration. There shall be at least ten
main roots, not less than 7.5 cm long, and a minimum crown diameter of 8 mm measured at the base.

11.11 Asparagus Crowns

The internal crown shall be white and fleshy with no signs of discolouration.

Grading:
1 yr. No. 1 - Crowns shall not weigh less than 25 kg per thousand plants. Fifty per cent of the root system
shall exceed 13 cm in length.

2 yr. No. 1 - Crowns shall not weigh less than 50 kg per thousand plants. Fifty per cent of the root system
shall exceed 18 cm in length.

2 yr. No. 2 - same specification as 1 yr. No. 1

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 43

Section 12: Understock
12.1 General specifications
This section covers young plants, graded by caliper, generally used for growing on to larger sizes.
These plants may be used in grafting and budding production. For plants graded by height, see Section
4.5. Caliper shall be taken at the root collar or ground line. If a purchaser requests height, the request
must indicate height only or height and caliper.

The understock (rootstock) on which a plant is grafted or budded shall be indicated when it has an
altering effect on the resulting plant, such as dwarfing rootstock, and when requested by the purchaser.
The quality of all understock shall be normal for the species or variety/cultivar unless otherwise
designated. It is essential that the stem be reasonably straight.

12.2 Grading increments and measurements

Specialized abbreviations related to age shall apply (see Section 4.4.1) followed by the caliper in
millimeters. Caliper increments shall be those listed in Section 4.2.1. Example: 1/0 5mm

12.3 Types of plants

12.3.1 Seedlings with limbs

There shall be no limbs on one side of the seedling for at least 5 cm above the root collar to ensure a
budding or grafting area. The plants must be sufficiently straight. The root system and the plant shall be
free of mechanical, chemical, and climatological damage as well as be free of root deformities that
could jeopardize future growth and establishment.

12.3.1.1 Root descriptions

In the case of apple and pear seedlings, where the root description is given as branched or straight, the
following shall apply:

Branched root: The seedling shall have not less than three root branches present within 13 cm of the
root collar.

Straight root: The root shall have the minimum caliper of the grade for not less than 15 cm from the
collar.

12.3.2 Vegetatively propagated plants

12.3.2.1 Layering
Caliper shall be taken at the root collar or ground level. If the collar or ground level cannot be
determined, stem caliper shall be taken 25 cm above the bottom of the layer (basal cut). Layers shall
have a minimum of three root nodes, each node containing at least one root.

12.3.2.2 Hardwood, softwood, and/or micropropagated cuttings

Caliper shall be taken at the root collar or ground level.

12.3.3 Unclassified
Any understock not meeting the above specifications shall be labelled ‘unclassified’.

12.4 Shade and flowering tree seedlings

When used for understock, they shall be graded by caliper as per this section.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 44

Section 13: Vines and Ground Covers
13.1 Vines
Specifications for vines shall state the container class and indicate if the plants are staked or trellised.
Unless otherwise stated or specified, it is generally expected that one or more stems/runners will be at
or close to the top of the stake or trellis. Stake or trellis height may be stated and shall be available on
request. If plants are not staked stem/runner length should be stated.

Plant age and propagation method are not usually specified but shall be available on request. Growers
may include other characteristics peculiar to a particular species or cultivar.

Roots shall be healthy and vigorous. The root mass of the plant shall be adequate to hold the potting
medium together as a unit when removed from the container. Roots shall not circle the root ball in the
container (become root bound) or be adversely misdirected to an extent that future growth and
establishment could be jeopardized. Such roots shall be corrected before upsizing or planting-out to
encourage proper development of root structure.

Examples:
Campsis
Clematis
Parthenocissus
Wisteria

13.2 Ground Covers

Specifications for ground covers shall state the container class. If grown in flats or plug trays, the
number of plants per tray shall be stated and the size or volume of the cell shall be available on
request.

Plant size may be stated and shall be available on request. Plant age and propagation method are not
usually specified but shall be available on request. If plants are grown bare root the clump size shall be
stated. Growers may include other characteristics peculiar to a particular species or cultivar.

Roots shall be healthy and vigorous. The root mass of the plant shall be adequate to hold the potting
medium together as a unit when removed from the container. Roots shall not circle the root ball in the
container (become root bound) or be adversely misdirected to an extent that future growth and
establishment could be jeopardized. Such roots shall be corrected before upsizing or planting-out to
encourage proper development of root structure.

Examples:
Ajuga reptans
Arctostaphylos uva-ursi
Gaultheria procumbens
Pachysandra terminalis

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 45

Section 14: Herbaceous Perennials and
Ornamental Grasses
14.1 General specifications
The specifications for container grown plants in this section shall use both plant size and container
size. For some container grown plants, the specifications may include only container size. In such
cases, specifiers are encouraged to also use plant size. The propagation method in Section 14.2 may
also be specified.

Container sizes listed for plants in Section 14.4 are the minimum in order to be compliant with this
Standard.

Roots shall be healthy and vigorous. The root mass of the plant shall be adequate to hold the potting
medium together as a unit when removed from the container.

Root circling and other root abnormalities can occur in container grown plants. These misdirected roots
should be avoided by using currently accepted nursery practices such as specialized containers, root
pruning, and upsizing.

Roots shall not circle the root ball in the container (become root bound) or be adversely misdirected to an
extent that future growth and establishment could be jeopardized. Such roots shall be corrected before
upsizing or planting-out to encourage proper development of root structure.

14.2 Propagation methods

The following codes shall be used to specify propagation methods:
C = cutting
D = division
G = graft
M = micropropagated
RC = rooted cutting
S = seed

14.3 Herbaceous perennial types (form in which marketed)

Container grown - are grown in a container to the specified size. Specify container size as per Table
14.7.

Bare root - are free or substantially free of soil or growing medium. Specify ‘BR’.

Field potted - are field grown plants dug from the field and potted for delivery. Specify ‘FP’.

14.4 Specific information for certain perennials sold by eye divisions, fans or rhizomes
The term ‘eye’ is the correct word to describe Astilbe, Dicentra, Hosta, and Paeonia divisions. The term
‘fan’ is the correct word to describe Hemerocallis, Iris ensata, and Iris sibirica divisions. The term
‘rhizome’ is the correct word to describe bearded iris divisions.

14.4.1 Astilbe
1-2 eye division – 10 cm container
2-3 eye division – 11 cm container or BR or FP
3-5 eye division – #1 container or BR or FP
5 eye and larger – #2 container or BR or FP

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 46

14.4.2 Dicentra – bleeding heart
1-2 eye division – 10 cm container
2-3 eye division – 11 cm container or BR or FP
3-5 eye division – #1 container or BR or FP
5 eye and larger – #2 container or BR or FP

14.4.3 Hemerocallis – daylily

1-fan division (small liner for growing-on) - 10 cm container
1-fan division (blooming size) - 10 cm container
1-2 fan division, heavy (husky, strong, large blooming size) - 11 cm container

Dwarf and miniature cultivars usually make smaller fans. Tetraploid cultivars usually make larger fans.

There are many Hemerocallis classifications. These types vary greatly in their ability to thrive well in
various climatic zones. Therefore, it is important to consider the particular climate when selecting
cultivars.

14.4.4 Hosta
1-eye, light grade (for growing-on) - 10 cm container
1-eye, heavy grade (well rooted) - 11 cm container or BR or FP
1-2 eye, heavy grade (also known as extra-large) - 15 cm container or BR or FP

14.4.5 Iris
Iris ensata (Japanese iris) and Iris sibirica (Siberian iris)
1-fan division (liner for growing-on) - 10 cm container
1-2 fan division (at least 1 fan blooming size) - 11 cm container of BR or FP
2-3 fan, heavy blooming size - #1 container or BR or FP

Bearded iris – dwarf, intermediate and tall classifications

Small, non-blooming size rhizome (for growing-on) - 10 cm container
Large, blooming size rhizome - 11 cm container

14.4.6 Paeonia – peony

2-3 eye division - 13 cm container or BR or FP
3-5 eye division (standard) - #1 container or BR or FP
5 eye and larger - #2 container or BR or FP

All eyes counted must be flowering eyes, and/or large non-flowering eyes on heavy roots. Small eye
buds shall not be counted.

14.4.7 Papaver orientale – Oriental poppy

Liner - 15 cm container or BR or FP
Heavy, one-year plant - #1 container or BR or FP

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 47

 Fig. 14.4.1 Typical example grades for eye divisions of genera such as Astilbe, Dicentra,
Hosta, and Paeonia

Fig. 14.4.2 Typical example grades for fan divisions of genera such as Hemerocallis
and Iris

14.5 Other herbaceous perennials

Herbaceous perennials not specified in Section 14.4 shall be specified and sold by container size and
division size.

Examples:
Anemone
Campanula
Rudbeckia
Salvia
Veronica

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 48

14.6 Ornamental grasses and sedges
Ornamental grasses and sedges shall be specified and sold by container size. The root mass of the
plant shall comply with requirements in Sections 14.1 and 14.3.

Examples:
Andropogon
Carex
Festuca
Miscanthus
Panicum
Pennisetum

14.7 Container size

Perennials are often grown in smaller containers than woody plants. Table 14.7 list applicable classes
and dimensions. For larger containers, refer to Table 3.4. For smaller containers such as plug trays, the
number of plants per tray shall be given. The plug size or volume shall be available on request.

Because of the extensive diversity of containers within the classes in Table 14.7 (square, round, squat,
tall, etc.), plants supplied to meet a size specification shall meet the minimum volume. Volume shall
supersede class.

Table 14.7 Common container classes and volume ranges for herbaceous perennials

Container class Container volume

(cm)* (cubic cm)**
6 200 - 300
7.5 300 - 450
9 450 - 600
10 500 - 750
11 800 - 1100
13 1400 - 2000
15 2300 - 3500

* Numbers are only approximately equal to actual container dimensions.

**cubic cm x .001 = litres; 1,000 cubic cm = 1 litre

14.8 Unclassified container

Any container for which volume does not fall within the limits in Table 14.7.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 49

Section 15: Bulbs, Corms, and Tubers
15.1 General specifications
This section is generally consistent with a similar section in the American Standard for Nursery Stock
(ANSI Z60.1-2014). For plants not listed here, the Standard listed above is applicable. Refer to:
www.americanhort.org.

Bulbs and corms are generally sold under grade names such as ‘forcing size’, ‘top size’, ‘large’, etc. In
the case of narcissus and daffodils, the designations of ‘double nose’, to indicate a split bulb, and
‘round’, are used. With some groups, such as hyacinths, the grade names indicate use; for example,
‘forcing’ or ‘exhibition’, and garden ‘bedding’ sizes.

The following grades conform in substance to generally accepted trade usage. Both grade names and
sizes in centimetres should be given; size (centimetres in circumference or diameter) shall be required.
In some instances, such as dahlias and daffodils, measures such as weight and number per unit
volume are used.

Bulbs, corms, and tubers which cannot reasonably be expected to bloom in the season after planting
should not be sold to the public. If they are, they should be clearly indicated as “non-blooming” sizes for
naturalization or planting in situations where non-blooming sizes may be appropriate.

15.2 Amaryllis
The size of the bulb will determine the quantity of flower stalks produced. A Jumbo 36 cm can produce
three stalks, a Fancy 30 cm bulb can produce two stalks and a Small 20 cm bulb will only produce one
stalk. Each stalk produces between four and six flowers.

Designated by centimetres of circumference.

Jumbo 36 cm and up
Exhibition 32 cm
Fancy 30 cm
Large 26 cm
Medium 22 cm
Small 20 cm

15.3 Begonias (tuberous)

Designated by centimetres of diameter.

Giant 6 cm and up
Extra Large 5 cm
Large 4 cm
Medium 3 cm
Small 2 cm

15.4 Crocus (large flowering)

Designated by centimetres of circumference.

Top 9 cm and up
Large 8 cm
Medium 7 cm
Small 6 cm

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 50

15.5 Dahlias
Designated by weight in grams.

The tuberous root of Dahlia is available as:

A division, with one small to large tuberous root with a portion of live crown with at least one ‘eye’ or
‘bud’.

A clump, with a number of small to large tuberous roots with a common live crown with at least one
‘eye’ or ‘bud’.

No. 1 100 grams and up

No. 2 80 grams

15.6 Gladiolus
Designated by centimetres of circumference.

Jumbo 14 cm and up
Large No.1 12 cm
Large No.2 10 cm
Medium No.3 8 cm
Medium No.4 6 cm

15.7 Grape Hyacinths (Muscari)

Designated by centimetres of circumference.

Top Size 9 and up

Large Size 8 cm
Medium Size 7 cm
Small Size 6 cm

15.8 Hyacinths
Designated by centimetres of circumference.

Top Forcing (Exhibition) 19 cm and up

Large Forcing (Exhibition) 18 cm
Medium Forcing (Exhibition) 17 cm
Top Bedding 16 cm
Large Bedding 15 cm
Medium Bedding and Miniature 14 cm

15.9 Lilies
Designated by centimetres in circumference.

Various types of lilies produce different size bulbs. These generally fall into two groups: the large bulb
types such as ‘Easter’ and ‘Regal’, and the smaller bulb types such as ‘Midcentury’ and ‘Tigrinum’

Large bulb types Small bulb types

24 cm 18 cm
22 cm 16 cm
20 cm 14 cm
18 cm 10 - 12 cm

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 51

15.10 Narcissus and Daffodils
Narcissus bulbs are designated either as ‘double nose’ (DN) or ‘round’ (RN) and should be size graded
using the appropriate terms.
‘Double Nose’ means bulbs that show evidence of producing two or more flowers. Due to the double
character of the bulbs, circumference measurement is not used. The size designation of DN bulbs is
determined by the number of bulbs that fill a 50-litre basket.

DN I Top
DN II Large
DN III Medium

‘Round’ means single-nosed bulbs which are reasonable circular in cross-section and which show
evidence of producing one flower. Slabs are not permitted in this grade. Bulb size will vary from the
norm for some cultivars. Circumferences are generally as shown below.

RN I Top 14 cm and up
RN II Large 12 cm
RN III Medium 10 cm

15.11 Narcissus (Paper White)

Paper White is a type of bulb that is normally smaller than other narcissus and consequently is listed
separately.

Designated by centimetres of circumference.

Top 16 cm and up
Large 15 - 16 cm
Medium 14 - 15 cm
Small 13 - 14 cm

15.12 Tulips
Designated by centimetres of circumference.

Top 12 cm and up
Large 11 cm
Medium 10 cm
Small 9 cm

Some botanical and other species of tulips are smaller than the above sizes. Bulbs of these species
must be identified and sizes given.

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 52

Section 16: Christmas Trees
Although the production of Christmas Trees is not within the scope of this Standard, it deserves
mention.

Conifers grown for the Christmas tree market are not generally suitable for the landscape market for
several reasons. Very sandy soils typical of some plantations generally result in unstable soil balls for
transplanting. Root systems are often coarse when grown in non-cultivated situations. Tight shearing is
generally not appropriate for open-branched conifers for landscape purposes.

Refer to:
Canadian Christmas Tree Growers Association
www.canadianchristmastrees.ca

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 53

Section 17: Nursery Turfgrass Sod
Although the production of nursery turfgrass sod is not within the scope of this Standard, it deserves
mention.

Nursery turfgrass sod is typically defined as a grass that has been seeded and cultivated in nursery sod
fields as a turfgrass sod. It is usually classified by a grade designation which may specify things like
the limited number of weeds per square metre, the amount of native grasses, shoot density, and
mowing height.

Growers and specifiers of nursery turfgrass sod should consult and comply with national, regional or
provincial documents for current and updated requirements.

Refer to:
Canadian Landscape Standard: www.cnla-acpp.ca

Nursery Sod Growers Association of Ontario: www.nsgao.com

Turfgrass Producers International, “Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding”:

www.turfgrasssod.org

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 54

Section 18: Compost
Although the production of compost is not within the scope of this Standard, it deserves mention.

Compost is one of the materials that is beneficial for the production of nursery stock as a soil
amendment for field production and for use in soilless mixes. Compost quality is dependent on the
feedstock from which it is derived and the parameters used to determine its applicability in particular
situations.

The production of compost is regulated provincially in Canada, typically by provincial Ministries of the
Environment, with oversight in some instances by the Canadian Food Inspection Agency.

Those who produce, purchase, and specify compost should be familiar and comply with all applicable
regulations. Nurseries that do on-farm composting should be in compliance. Some local or regional
government bylaws may require permits or approval for the construction or operation of on-farm
composting.

Refer to:
The Compost Council of Canada (www.compost.org) is a non-profit, member driven organization that
can provide regulations and standard documents for jurisdictions across Canada for its members.

Ontario, as an example, has published quality standards for compost. At the time this Standard was
published, it was found at: www.ontario.ca/page/ontario-compost-quality-standards

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 55

Appendix A: Metric/Imperial Equivalents
This table has been prepared in cooperation with AmericanHort and the American Standard for Nursery
Stock (ANSI Z60.1-2014) to assist in trade between Canada and the United States. The equivalents
are suggested to be used for nursery stock and are not intended as actual mathematical equivalents.

For plants sized by caliper For plants sized by height or spread

Metric measure Imperial measure Metric measure Imperial measure
(mm) (in) (cm) (in/ft)
1.5 1/16 10 4 in
3 1/8 15 6 in
5 3/16 20 8 in
6 1/4 25 10 in
8 5/16 30 12 in
10 3/8 40 16 in
11 7/16 50 20 in
13 1/2 60 2 ft
14 9/16 80 2.5 ft
16 5/8 90 3 ft
17 11/16 100 3.5 ft
19 3/4 125 4 ft
22 7/8 135 4.5 ft
25 1 150 5 ft
30 1.25 175 6 ft
40 1.5 200 6.5 ft
45 1.75 225 7 ft
50 2 250 8 ft
60 2.5 300 10 ft
80 3 360 12 ft
90 3.5
100 4
110 4.5
130 5
140 5.5
150 6
200 8

Mathematical conversions

Convert from Into Multiply by

mm inches 0.03937
cm inches 0.3937
cm feet 0.03281
inches mm 25.4
inches cm 2.54
feet cm 30.48
cubic cm litres 0.001

- Canadian Nursery Stock Standard - 56

APPENDIX D:

NATIONAL VOLUNTARY CODE OF CONDUCT FOR THE ORNAMENTAL HORTICULTURE INDUSTRY

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 185

 NATIONAL
VOLUNTARY CODE
OF CONDUCT FOR For Landscape Architects,
THE ORNAMENTAL Landscape Contractors,
Growers, Plant Breeders,
HORTICULTURE Retailers, Suppliers,
INDUSTRY and Specifiers

Developed in partnership by the National Horticulture Invasive Plant Working Group

 VOLUNTARY CODE OF CONDUCT
We are committed to taking action to prevent the introduction and
spread of high risk invasive plants. I agree to abide by the codes
of conduct outlined in the document.

INVASIVE SPECIES ARE A GROWING THREAT TO CANADA’S ECOSYSTEMS AND ARE

CAPABLE OF OVERTAKING AND DISPLACING NATIVE SPECIES. Over 60% of Canada’s
invasive plants were intentionally introduced over the last 150 years based on their value
for food, medicine, ecosystem services, as well as aesthetics. Although most introduced
plants do not disrupt ecosystems, there are a very limited number of invasive plants that
are ‘high risk’ and a direct threat to human health and safety, the environment, and the
economy. Although the natural range of plants may shift with warming climate or time, OUR COMMITMENT
the prime focus of this initiative is to prevent the introduction of high risk invasive plants On behalf of our company, we recognize that invasive plants are
a threat to Canada’s landscapes and ecosystems and are com-
to specific regions of Canada. There is growing public pressure, along with government mitted to taking action to prevent the introduction and spread
regulations, that are restricting the sale and distribution of invasive plants. of high risk invasive plants. As a practitioner in the ornamental
horticulture industry, we are committed to adopting the Code of
Conduct and implementing best practices within our business
to prevent the spread of invasive species within the urban and
natural environment.

By working together, the goal of the National Horticulture – Raise awareness on this issue among all sectors
Invasive Plants Working Group is to support and recognize of the industry
responsible leaders in the horticulture industry who adopt
best practices to avoid the introduction of high risk invasive – Prevent the spread of invasive plants
plants to specific regions. The National Voluntary Code of already present in Canada
Conduct is intended to engage the ornamental horticulture
industry and trade to improve best practices across all sectors – Prevent the introduction of ‘high risk’
of the industry. Accompanied by a growing demand by garden-
new plant invaders.
ers and developers for non-invasive species, the outcome will
be a recognition program for key industry partners that will:

2 3
 VOLUNTARY CODE OF CONDUCT VOLUNTARY CODE OF CONDUCT
We are committed to taking action to prevent the introductions
We are committed to taking action to prevent the introductions
and spread of high risk invasive plants. I agree to abide by the
and spread of high risk invasive plants. I agree to abide by the
codes of conduct outlined in the document.
codes of conduct outlined in the document.

CODE OF CODE OF
CONDUCT EXAMPLE PRACTICES CONDUCT EXAMPLE PRACTICES
– Phase-out or dispose of existing stocks of specific high-risk invasive species or – Access professional associations education and training websites to find webinars,
1 Grow, sell and specify cultivars, eliminate specification, for use in regions where they are considered 7 P rovide information to your short courses, and events
non-invasive species a threat staff, clients, etc.
– Check out invasive species associations for upcoming webinars, lecture series, field
– Eliminate specification for use in regions where they are considered a threat tours, etc.
– Assign one staff responsible for implementation and annual review of the Code – Invite local invasive plant experts to do short on-site toolbox meetings and
of Conduct education sessions with staff on invasive species issues
– Select only non-invasive ornamentals – Talk to your industry partners in other sectors who you deal with on day to day
2 S elect and promote alternative, – Consider regional invasiveness of plants
8 C ommit to the Code of basis about the issue
non-invasive varieties that are Conduct and encourage others
aesthetically, horticulturally, – Suggest using alternatives in locally developed Grow-Me-Instead type initiatives in the industry through your
and ecologically suitable to a where feasible supply chain
region – Create and/or share publications on preventing the introduction and spread
9 P rovide information to gar- of known invasive plants available to your clients and customers such as local
dening public to use, including Grow-Me-Instead booklets, species-specific rack cards, or species-specific best
– Understand plant characteristics that make them invasive such as aggressive garden writers to promote,
3 D evelop and promote alterna- growth, heavy seed producers, hard to maintain, etc. non-invasive plants
management practices
– Support on-site education and info sessions for customers
tive plant
– Focus breeding on non-invasive plant characteristics
material as replacements for – Include “invasive” description and warnings for plants in your catalogues
known invasive plants through – Determine local recommended best disposal method for specific species; liase
selection 10 Dispose of unwanted stock with invasive plant expert when additional information is needed
and breeding and waste responsibly to
– Destroy high-risk plants in inventory, or label as invasive at point of sale
reduce spread
– Comply with regulated invasive plants listed in the region where you are – Bagging, tarping, drying are management tools for invasive plant
4 C omply with all laws that doing business material disposal
regulate – Dispose bagged plant parts in landfill and/or bury
– Review lists of regulated invasive plants exist at the national, provincial,
invasive plants for
territorial, regional and municipal levels across Canada – Composting is not a recommended practice for reproductive plant parts
specific regions
– Develop a written plan and have one staff responsible for implementation
– Participate in your regional invasive species council 11 Implement sanitation best
5W
 ork with regional experts – Become familiar with Invasive Plant Risk Assessment Tools based on biolog- practices in your business to
– Keep newly imported plants isolated until clear of all pests including seeds of other
plants
and invasive species councils avoid unintentional introduc-
ical, scientific and economic information by working with invasive species
to remain relevant about what tion and spread – Keep crop and facilities free of invasive plants
experts and conservationists
new species may be considered of invasive plants – Manage source materials
invasive” – Liaise with regional experts and stakeholders to determine which species in
your region are known to be invasive, or may become invasive, especially – Minimize soil disturbance
prior to new introductions – Keep machinery, tools, and vehicles clean to minimize spread from contaminated
to clean areas
– Use internationally recognized plant naming databases to find all accepted
6 L abel plant material names and synonyms for both common and Latin;
correctly using
–V
 ASCAN is Database of Vascular Plants in Canada;
both common and
Latin name –P
 LANTS Database - USDA PLANTS covers North America;
– I PNI is the International Plant Names Index

4 5
VOLUNTARY CODE OF CONDUCT
We are committed to taking action to prevent the introductions
and spread of high risk invasive plants. I agree to abide by the
codes of conduct outlined in the document.

By signing this form, we are committed to taking action

to prevent the introduction and spread of high risk invasive plants.
I agree to abide by the codes of conduct
outlined in the document.

Participating Business

Name Website

Address

Phone Email

WHO ARE WE
The National Horticulture Invasive Plant Working Group is made up of a group of stakeholders
that work collaboratively together to provide tools to the horticulture industry to help reduce
the spread of invasive horticulture plants across Canada.

CANADAINVASIVES.CA
GLOSSARY
GLOSSARY OF TERMS & [water retention, permeability, water infiltration, drainage,
aeration, structure and texture], chemical properties
DEFINITIONS [fertility] and provide a better environment for plant roots.

NOTE: The terms included in this glossary are for the sole ANTI-DESSICANT – Compounds applied to plants to
purpose of use within this Standard. Definitions and reduce dehydration.
explanations provided in this section are not necessarily
APPROVAL – Describes the gaining of the owner or
complete or exclusive but are general within the context
owner’s representatives acceptance at the beginning of a
of the product, service, work and [vernacular] ‘trade
project thereby granting approval to proceed; it can also
language' of the landscape horticulture industry.
relate to approvals at the end of a project, after a con-
tractor has successfully delivered the goods and services
ACCEPTANCE – The notification to the contractor or the that meet the requirements that were set at the beginning
owner, by the authority that the requirements of the of the project.
contract documents have been met and the work agreed
upon has been completed to the satisfaction of the owner APPROVER – Persons(s), or firm, organization or other
and the authority having jurisdiction. individual or body designated by the owner or owner’s
representative to sanction or provide authorization.
ACCESSIBLE CANADA ACT [ACA] – An Act to provide
for the development of accessibility standards leading to a ARBORIST – Individual trained in the art and science
barrier-free Canada. of planting, caring for, and maintaining individual trees
[see CERTIFIED ARBORIST].
ACCLIMATIZATION – A process of changing environ-
mental conditions to induce physiological changes within a AS-BUILT DRAWING – A drawing or series of drawings
plant system that will enable the plant to adapt in a healthy that record the features, layout and details of a construc-
and aesthetically appealing state from one environment to tion/installation project as-built following its completion.
another without exhibiting severe damage or death. As-built drawings show the dimensions, geometry, and
location of all features of the project. As-built drawings
ADMINISTRATION – The adoption, interpretation and document any changes made during the construction of
enforcement of this Standard by an authority and any the project that differs from the original design.
procedures undertaken by the authority as they relate to
this Standard. Administration shall also include procedures AUTHORITY – The owner or owner’s representative
by the contractor and required by the authority regarding [consultant] who uses this Standard.
this Standard [e.g. reporting, calling for field reviews etc.].
AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION – As applied to
AERATION – A maintenance procedure to improve water work described in this Standard, an authority having
penetration and soil/growing media structure by relieving jurisdiction is any governmental body having regulatory
compaction; often done by coring. powers with regard to such work and its locations.
AGENT – Person(s), firm, organization or other individual BACK FLOW PREVENTION DEVICE – Device used to
or body authorized to act on another’s behalf. protect potable water supplies from contamination or
pollution due to backflow.
AGGLOMERATION – In surface chemistry, agglomerate is
the process by which fine particulates are caused to clump BALLED AND BURLAPPED [B&B] – A tree, shrub or other
together into a floc. plant prepared for transplanting by allowing the roots to
remain covered by a ball of soil/growing media around
AGGREGATE – Crushed stone, crushed slag, or any which burlap is tied and sometimes reinforced with a rope
granular mineral material or water worn gravel. or a wire basket.
AGRONOMIST – Specialist in the theory of soil manage- BARK MULCH – An organic mulch that is comprised of
ment and the cultivation of field crops. bark chips and fines which are spread out over the ground
AMENDMENT – Any material that is added to a soil/ surface to prevent soil/growing media erosion and weed
growing media in order to improve its physical properties germination; improves soil/growing media fertility and
health, and conserves soil/growing media moisture.
CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 187
BASKETS, DAISY AND WIRE – Wire containment systems branch collar provides mechanical support to the branch
designed to maintain the structural integrity of a rootball attachment.
after digging.
BUILDERS’ LIEN ACT – Provides statutory protection for
BENCHMARK – A fixed point with a known or established payment of some or all of money due for work and
elevation that is site specific and assumed; or a pre-estab- material provided on a construction project. It provides a
lished and controlled point or placed monument/survey right to claim a lien, to the extent a claimant is unpaid,
marker. against title to the land and buildings in question.

BENEFICIARIES – A person or group enrolled on a CABLING AND BRACING – Installation of steel or

register that receives benefits, profits, or advantages. A synthetic cable in a tree to provide supplemental support
person designated as the recipient of benefits or other to weak branches or crotches.
property under a will, trust, agreement, etc.
CALIPER – The above-ground diameter of a distinct part
BINDER – Product added to the hydroseeding mixture to of a tree stem, measured in accordance with the Canadian
bind the seed, fertilizer and mulch to the soil/growing Nursery Stock Standard. Measurement height begins at
media surface. It is a powdered or granular glue, which the ground level, soil/growing media line or root flare.
when added to the slurry, serves to glue the mulch blanket
in place, helping it to withstand wind and rain erosion. It CANADIAN NURSERY STOCK STANDARD [CNSS] – A
also protects the seed from wind, water erosion and minimum standard of quality for the production of woody
drought [See TACKIFIER]. ornamentals and herbaceous perennials. Nursery stock
specifiers, including landscape architects and designers,
BIOLOGICAL CONTROLS [BIOCONTROL] – A method developers and municipalities and other government
of controlling pests such as insects, mites, weeds and plant agencies, make reference to these standards in the
diseases using other organisms. It relies on predators, development of tenders and contract specifications.
parasites, herbivores, or other natural mechanisms.
CERTIFIED ARBORIST – A term trademarked by the ISA
BIOSWALE – A landscape element designed to remove silt designating a person who is currently in good standing
and pollution from surface water runoff. Bioswales consist with the International Society of Arboriculture and has
of a swaled drainage course with gently sloped sides and completed a comprehensive exam. Certified arborists
filled with vegetation, compost and/or rip/rap. shall continue their education over three-year cycles to
maintain their certification and adhere to a code of ethics.
BLIND DRAIN – A drain which is not connected to a
sewage system. CERTIFIED NURSERY STOCK – Plants that are designated
free of injurious pests and disease.
BONDED FIBRE MATRIX – A unique class of hydro-
seeding erosion control product. The matrix is a CERTIFIED TREE RISK ASSESSOR – A designation
continuous layer of elongated fibre strands held together certified by the International Society of Arboriculture
by a water-resistant bonding agent. It keeps raindrops [ISA] based on the tree risk assessment course and exam
from hitting the soil/growing media because it has no [Tree risk assessment qualification – TRAQ]. Certification
holes larger than one millimetre. It allows no gaps between shall be renewed every five years. Certification shows that
the product and the soil/growing media. It has a high the individual has taken a two-day course and passed an
water-holding capacity. It will not form a water-insensitive examination of tree risk assessment.
crust that can inhibit plant growth. It biodegrades into
materials that help plant growth. CHANGE ORDER – Work that is added to or deleted from
the original scope of work of a contract, however,
BRANCH – The major lateral shoots which grows out from depending on the magnitude of the change, it may or may
a tree trunk or from a bough, as compared to twigs or not alter the original contract amount and/or completion
spurs, which are minor shoots emanating from a trunk or date.
branch; on established trees, branches are also referred to
as limbs. CHEMICAL CONTROLS – The use of chemicals that are
either generally toxic and used as disinfectants or fumi-
BRANCH COLLAR – The visible swelling in a woody plant gants or chemicals that target specific kinds of pathogens,
that forms at the base of a branch where it is attached to as in the case of fungicides, bactericides [or antibiotics]
its parent branch or to the tree’s trunk. The top of the and nematicides. Ideally, a chemical control product
should be effective at concentrations that will not harm
188 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020
the plant, have low risk to humans and animals, and have peat moss, plastic, wood, paper, cloth, etc. and may vary
minimal effect on the normal micro flora on the plants and greatly in size, shape and quality.
in the soil/growing media. These chemical agents can be
sold as dusts, concentrated solutions, wettable powders, CONTAINER GROWN – Plants grown in standard nursery
granules or emulsions. containers suitable to age and size, and not field-grown or
collected.
CHLOROSIS – An abnormal condition of plants in which
the green parts lose their colour or turn yellow as a result CONTRACT – A legally binding agreement that recog-
of disease, damaged or compacted roots, poor drainage nizes and governs the rights and duties of the parties to
conditions, or lack of nutrition. the agreement, and is typically between the owner and
contractor containing all the conditions of their respective
CLEARING – Removing all surface vegetative material in a duties, obligations and responsibilities concerning the
given area, usually done in conjunction with grubbing [see work to be done [typically involves the exchange of goods,
GRUBBING]. services, money, or promises of any of those], as set out in
the contract documents. A contract is legally enforceable
CLIMATE CHANGE – A change in global or regional because it meets the requirements and approval of the
climate patterns, in particular a change apparent from the law.
mid to late 20th century onwards and attributed largely to
the increased levels of atmospheric carbon dioxide CONTRACT DOCUMENTS – The contract documents
produced by the use of fossil fuels. Climate change refers may include: the proposal, the contract form containing
to significant changes in global temperature, precipitation, the written agreement between owner and contractor,
wind patterns and other measures of climate that occur bidding documents and addenda, specification, drawings,
over several decades or longer. schedules, change orders, Land Claims Agreement and any
other relevant written instructions and agreements.
COLLECTED – Material dug from native stands, estab-
lished woodlots or other non-cultivated areas. Collected CONTRACTOR – An individual, firm, corporation or other
plants shall be designated as such. organization that, in cooperation with other contractors
and persons, enters into a contractual agreement with the
COMPETENT – Having the necessary ability, knowledge, owner for work identified in the contract documents.
or skill to do something successfully.
CONTRACTOR/PRIME CONTRACTOR – Person(s), firm,
COMPOST – A mixture of organic matter, as from leaves partnership, company, or corporation entering into a
and manure, which has decayed or has been digested by written agreement with the owner of the designated site
organisms, used to improve soil/growing media structure to carry out the work.
and provide nutrients.
CONSTRUCTION DETAILS – A document that identifies
CONSTRUCTION COMPLETION CERTIFICATE – all of the special details of a construction assembly.
Certifies that performance of all work has been
completed in accordance with the agreement, including CONSTRUCTION LIEN ACT – Regulates how payments
the remedy or correction of deficiencies, except for are made, to help ensure that workers who have provided
seasonal work and ongoing obligations related to warranty services or materials during a construction project are
work. paid for their work.

CONSULTANT – A person or entity with an area of COVER CROP – A crop of a specific plant that is grown
expertise, training, or accreditation who is contracted to primarily for the benefit of the soil/growing media rather
render professional services to the owner. For the pur- than the crop yield. They are commonly used to suppress
poses of this Standard, the term consultant may include weeds, manage erosion, help build and improve soil/
multiple persons or entities providing services to the growing media fertility and quality, control diseases and
owner either directly or as members of a team under the pests, and promote biodiversity.
direction of a prime consultant.
CRITICAL PROTECTION ZONE – An area surrounding any
CONSULTATION – A meeting which is held to discuss element, such as a tree, that shall be protected to support
something, for deliberation, discussion, or decision. the survival of the element [see CRITICAL ROOT ZONE].

CONTAINER – Pot in which nursery stock is sold or

grown. Containers are manufactured of materials such as
CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 189
CRITICAL ROOT ZONE – The area around a tree corre- DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT [DBH] – Standard term
sponding to the dripline, or the essential area of the roots of trunk diameter measurement for forestry and arbori-
that shall be maintained or protected for the tree’s cultural work. The Canadian metric standard for DBH is
survival. The critical root zone should be determined based over bark at a point 1.30m (4.3ft.) above the ground.
on evaluation by a Certified Arborist or other qualified
professional and based on the diameter at breast height DIE-BACK – A condition in which a tree or shrub begins to
[DBH], conditions of the site, the tree species and pro- die from the tip of its leaves or roots inward, due to
posed project [See TREE PROTECTION ZONE]. disease or an unfavourable environment.

CROWN – The top part of the tree which features DIRECT PLANTING – The planting process in which the
branches that grow out from the main trunk and support root mass of the plant is removed from the growing
the various leaves used for photosynthesis. container prior to being planted directly into the growing
medium that fills the [decorative, fixed, floor type or other
CULTIVATING – A term used for the tilling of growing type] planter.
media to promote air exchange and water penetration.
Cultivating is undertaken in preparation for planting or DOCUMENTATION – Recording of observable conditions
during regular maintenance. that require reporting.

CULTURAL CONTROLS – A horticultural practice used to DORMANCY – A period in an organism’s life cycle when
modify the growing environment to reduce the prevalence growth, development, and physical activity are temporarily
of unwanted pests. Examples include water, growing stopped. Dormancy may be a normal part of the life cycle
media, and fertility management, selection of plants that or may be induced by unfavourable environmental condi-
attract or support natural enemies, removal of pest host tions resulting in a period of reduced or suspended
plants, sanitation, mulching, mowing heights, and pruning physiological activity.
etc.
DRAIN ROCK – Free draining rock usually round or
CUT AND FILL – A procedure used during construction to broadly angular that retains its drainage capacity and is
level slopes and create canals, and embankments by designed to manage the flow of water.
removing earth from one point and using it as a fill in
DRAINAGE – The natural or artificial removal of surface
another. A ‘cut’ is made when earth is cut from above the
and sub-surface water from an area with excess water.
desired ground height and a ‘fill’ is when earth is used to
fill a hole to desired ground level. DRAINAGE SWALES AND GUTTERS – A low-lying or
depressed stretch of land used to guide water away from
DAMPING-OFF – Damping off is a common horticultural
homes and roadways, direct water to gardens, prevent
condition caused by various pathogens that kill off a seed
flooding, or capture rainwater for reuse.
or seedling. Damping off occurs most often in moist, cool
conditions. DRAINAGE SYSTEMS – A system of watercourses or
drains for carrying away excess water.
DESIGN LOAD – Design load is sum of the “live load” plus
the “dead load” with consideration to a safety factor. The DRAWINGS – The graphic and pictorial portions of the
“live load” is produced during maintenance by workers, contract documents, showing the design, type of con-
equipment and materials; and during the life of the struction, location, dimension, and scope of the work to
structure by movable objects such as planters and by be undertaken; generally including, but not limited to
people. The “dead load” is the weight of materials of plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, diagrams,
construction and the weight of fixed service equipment notes and portions of any specifications.
that remains as a load upon completion of work.
DRIP EMITTERS – A type of micro-irrigation system [low
DETHATCHING – A maintenance procedure that involves pressure and low volume] that has the potential to save
a machine that makes a series of vertical cuts into turf to water and nutrients by allowing water to drip slowly to the
penetrate and remove accumulated layers of decaying roots of plants, either from above the soil/growing media
plants on the soil/growing media surface. surface or buried below the surface as drops or small
streams. The goal is to place water directly into the root
zone and minimize evaporation.

190 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

DRIP LINE – The area defined by the outermost circum- in 24 hours. [ET = inches/day]. The ET value is used by
ference of a tree canopy where water drips from and onto smart controllers to help determine the amount of
the ground. watering needed by a landscape.

ECOLOGICALLY SOUND – Methods, techniques and FERTILITY – A measure of the nutrient content of a soil or
approaches which are not disruptive to ecosystems, which growing media and its capacity to grow plants.
tend to benefit or cause minimal damage to the
environment. FERTILIZER – An organic or inorganic material, of natural
or synthetic origins, that is applied to soil/growing media
ECONOMIC INJURY LEVEL [EIL] – The smallest number or plant tissue to supply one or more plant nutrients
of insects [amount of injury] that will cause yield losses essential to the growth of plants.
equal to the insect management costs. The EIL is
described as the break-even point, the level of pest a plant FIELD CAPACITY – The amount of moisture or water
can tolerate; it is important to manage the pest population content held in a soil or growing media after excess water
before it reaches the EIL. has drained away by gravity and is usually expressed as a
percentage of oven-dry weight of soil.
EDGING – A line that creates visual interest and separa-
tion [i.e. between a lawn and other area or feature such as FIELD REVIEW – In this Standard the term field review
a flower bed] and is made of any non-biodegradable and site review are used interchangeably. It is a periodic
material and installed in the ground. and irregular site visit to view the work and verify whether
the work substantially conforms to the contract docu-
ELEMENT [HORTICULTURAL] – Defined by biological ments [see SITE REVIEW].
content and includes trees, plants and other vegetation,
bodies of water, growing media and soils. FILTER FABRIC – Geotextile whose primary function is
allowing water to pass through while keeping the soil/
ELEMENT [NON-HORTICULTURAL] – Natural or man- growing media fines from migrating through the fabric
made elements that are void of biological components. [see GEOTEXTILE].

ELEVATION – A vertical distance or height above or below FINAL ACCEPTANCE COMPLETION – The stage in the
a reference point. progress of the work as determined by the owners
representative and confirmed in writing to the contractor,
ENGINEERED SOIL – This is a growing media that can be at which all work required under the contract has been
compacted to meet engineering requirements for paved completed in a satisfactory manner, subject to the
surfaces, yet possesses qualities that allow roots to grow discovery of defects after final completion, and except for
freely, below and away from the pavement, thereby items specifically excluded in the notice of final
reducing walkway heaving from tree roots. acceptance.
EQUIPMENT – All tools, components, machinery, attach- FINES – Silt and clay particles in a soil/growing media or
ments, assemblies, instruments and devices necessary to aggregate, generally those smaller than the No. 200 or
perform work. 0.075 mm sieves.
EROSION – The action of surface processes [such as FLOW METER – A device that measures the total volume
water flow or wind] that removes soil/growing media, of water flow through a piping system and reports its data
rock, or dissolved material from one location and then to the computerized central control system.
transports it to another location.
FRESHET – The occurrence of a flood or water overflow
ESTABLISHMENT MAINTENANCE – Maintenance resulting from sudden rain or melting snow/ice.
procedures that should be carried out to at least the
requirements of this Standard during the first two years, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS – A section, usually found at
or agreed to period after landscape installation, to or near the front of the specification that sets out require-
increase the long-term success of the planting. ments applicable to the entire work of the contract.

EVAPOTRANSPIRATION [ET] VALUE – The amount of GEOTEXTILE – Woven or non-woven permeable fabrics
water lost due to evaporation from the soil/growing media that when used in association with soil/growing media,
and transpiration from lawns, and plants over a given area have the ability to separate, filter, reinforce, protect or
drain [see FILTER FABRIC].

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 191

GIRDLING ROOT – A root that partially or entirely and agricultural lands; green roofs and green walls; parks,
encircles the trunk and/or large buttress roots, and cuts gardens and landscaped areas, community gardens, and
into at least one side of the main trunk over time. These other green open spaces; rain gardens, bio-swales,
roots restrict the movement of water and nutrients engineered wetlands, rainwater and stormwater manage-
between the roots and branches, and food produced in ment systems and permeable hard surfaces.
the leaves from reaching the roots. They can compress
and weaken the trunk of a tree at or above the root collar GROUND COVER – Small low-growing dense growth of
flare causing it to lean and lose its stability. Trees having plants that grows over an area of ground, used to provide
stem girdling roots suffer a slow decline in health and a protection from erosion and drought, and to improve its
premature death. aesthetic appearance.

GRADE – Specified elevations of existing terrain or base. GROWING MEDIA/GROWING MEDIUM – The material
that plants grow in. Growing media has three main
GRADIENT – A measure of the change in elevation in functions: to supply roots with nutrients, air, and water; to
relation to the change in distance. support maximum root growth; and to physically support
the plant. Growing media includes existing on site or
GRADING – The work of altering or shaping existing imported topsoil, soil substitute or mixture of growing
terrain, base or an elevation or slope to meet specifica- medium components and soil-less mixes whose chemical
tions for work such as a foundation, base, landscape and physical properties fall within the range as set out by
feature or surface drainage. Grading directs surface runoff the standard or specification [See SOIL].
away from structures, controls surface/stormwater
run-off and shall be designed to maximize drainage away GRUBBING – The removal of stumps, root systems and
from buildings and structures to minimize erosion, vegetative matter from the ground surface by exposing
pollution, and sedimentation during and after and cutting the roots, generally done after clearing and
construction. prior to excavation [see CLEARING].

GRADING PLAN – A written plan [including drawings or HARD LANDSCAPE [HARDSCAPE] – The components of
other graphic representations] which identifies both pre the design and construction of any landscape project that
and post construction finish of the ground surface, usually deals with a range of materials that include brick, stone,
by means of contours and grade elevations for a given site wood, metals or other natural or fabricated materials used
where construction activities are planned. in construction of the built landscape including streets,
walkways structures, walls, street amenities, pools and
GRAFT – The joining together of plant parts by means of fountains, and fireplaces and fire pits etc.
tissue regeneration by placing a portion of one plant [bud
or scion] into or on a stem, root, or branch of another HARDENING OFF – A process in which tender plants are
plant in such a way that a union will be formed and the prepared for their final exterior location by exposing them
partners will continue to grow, in order to combine to a period of gradual change in growing conditions such
desirable characteristics or to affect a repair [bridge as light, wind and varying temperatures.
graft].
HARDINESS – Describes a plants ability to tolerate and
GRASS – A monocotyledon plant, mostly herbaceous survive adverse growing conditions such as cold, heat,
plants with jointed stems, slender sheathing leaves drought, flooding, or wind.
growing from the base, and flowers borne in spikelets of
bracts. A common kind of grass is used to cover the HAZARDS – An agent which has the potential to cause
ground in a lawn and other places. The grasses include the harm to a vulnerable target. Hazards can be both natural
“true grasses”, of the family Poaceae [also called or human induced and are a source of potential damage,
Gramineae], as well as the sedges [Cyperaceae] and the harm or adverse health effects to individuals, equipment,
rushes [Juncaceae]. property etc. under certain conditions at work.

GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE – Planned and managed HEELING IN – Temporary measure in the nursery or on
vegetation and semi-vegetative technologies that reduce site for storing planting stock that is being moved, by
pollution and provide ecosystems that support healthy temporarily covering the root zone of the plant[s] with a
living. Green infrastructure takes many forms including suitable soil/growing media or mulch until ready to plant
but is not limited to the following: urban forests, natural permanently.
areas, greenways, streams and riparian zones, meadows

192 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

HORIZON A [TOPSOIL] – The A horizon is the topmost IRRIGATION – Distribution of water over the surface of
layer of the soil and consists of organic matter and land to encourage the growth of vegetation.
minerals. This is the soil layer where plants and organisms
primarily live and it is this layer where seeds germinate, IRRIGATION SYSTEM – Automated systems that deliver
and roots grow. and distribute water to landscape/softscape elements
including but not limited to lawns, gardens, and horticul-
HYDRAULIC SEEDING [HYDROSEEDING] – A planting tural crops [greenhouse and nursery], for the purpose of
process that uses seed mixed with water, fibre mulch, growing and maintaining moisture during periods of
fertilizer and other additives in slurry and uniformly inadequate rainfall. Components of these systems include
distributed on prepared finished grade by spraying the sprinklers, nozzles, controllers, bubblers, drip emitters,
calibrated mixture. It is often used as an erosion control valves, backflow prevention, pipe etc.
technique on construction sites, as an alternative to the
traditional process of broadcasting or sowing dry seed. JURISDICTIONAL REGULATIONS – Municipal, provincial
or federal law or rule based on geographic area, or other
HYDROZONE – Grouping of plants into a hydrozone, is an order prescribed by an authority based on type, such as
approach to irrigation and landscape design, where plants building by-laws, labour laws and environmental protection
with similar water requirements are grouped together so laws.
that they can be irrigated within a common zone in an
effort to conserve water. LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT – Landscape architects are
concerned with the design, planning, management and
INORGANIC MULCH – Natural or man-made materials stewardship of the land. The goal of the profession is to
that do not readily decompose and have limited value in achieve environmental, social or aesthetically pleasing
their contribution to growing media improvements [See spaces by investigating existing social, ecological and
MULCH]. geological conditions in the landscape. The work of
landscape architects is all around us in the form and
INTEGRATED PEST MANAGEMENT [IPM] – An approach function of the land: the work often touches on urban
to planning and managing pests that uses a combination of design, site planning, stormwater management, urban
cultural, biological, mechanical and chemical methods to planning, restoration, parks and recreation planning, green
reduce pest populations to acceptable levels and with the infrastructure planning and private or residential master
least disruption to the environment starting with the least planning and design.
toxic control first.
Landscape architects are currently practicing members in
INTERIOR PLANTSCAPING – The practice of designing, good standing with a provincial self-regulating association
arranging, installing and maintaining living plants in in accordance with provincial legislation, or the constitu-
enclosed interior environments. tion and bylaws of a regulating organization (in the case of
those provinces and territories where there is no legisla-
INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS [ICP] – A seg- tion). Provincial regulatory bodies are members of a
mental concrete pavement which, due to the size, shape national organization, the Canadian Society of Landscape
and pattern of the units and the use of joint material Architects [CSLA], and individual membership in the CSLA
between the units, has a high degree of surface interlock. is obtained by joining one of the provincial or territorial
Structural interlock [load supporting and spreading] is components.
achieved when the units are placed in an interlocking
pattern, compacted into coarse bedding sand, the joints LANDSCAPE COMMISSIONING PLAN [LCx] – An
filled with sand and compacted again. inclusive and collaborative process that establishes
landscape performance goals at the beginning of a
INVASIVE PLANT – Invasive plants are plant species that project. The LCx provides guidance for designing, installing
can be harmful when introduced into new areas. These and maintaining landscapes to meet those goals.
species can invade agricultural and natural areas, causing
serious damage to Canada’s economy and environment. LANDSCAPE FABRIC – A woven or non-woven geo-tex-
The invasive plants regulated under the Plant Protection tile that acts as a separator between various landscape
Act are included in the list of Pests Regulated by Canada. elements. Landscape fabric differs from filter fabric and
The invasive plants regulated under the Seeds Act are should not be used as filter fabric.
listed in the Weed Seeds Order.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 193

LANDSCAPE HORTICULTURE CERTICATION consideration and allowance for adaptation as the land-
PROGRAM – The Canadian owned and operated certifica- scape changes, grows, matures and/or is damaged.
tion program for nursery and landscape workers. The
Landscape Horticulture Certification Program ensures LANDSCAPE OVER STRUCTURES – Landscaping on roof
that professionals from across Canada comply with slabs or in contained planters. Depending on the environ-
current standards and industry best practices. mental and aesthetic intent of the design, roof slab
Certification is available for Technicians, Landscape landscapes may be categorized as intensive or extensive
Designers, and Managers. Certification is provided to roof top designs, or green roofs.
industry members by the Canadian Nursery Landscape
LANDSCAPE PERFORMANCE – A measure of the
Association [CNLA] and provincial associations.
effectiveness with which landscape solutions fulfill their
CERTIFIED LANDSCAPE DESIGNER [CLD] – An indi- intended purpose and contribute to sustainability.
vidual who has a minimum of 6 years industry experience.
LANDSCAPING – Landscaping refers to an activity carried
In addition to passing written testing, they have had their
out by qualified professionals who plan, lay out and
design portfolio evaluated by peers for the highest level of
construct landscape features including hardscape ele-
excellence. CLD testing is provided to industry members
ments [paved surfaces and structures] and softscape
by the Canadian Nursery Landscape Association [CNLA]
elements [gardens, plants and trees etc.], that enhance the
and provincial associations.
appearance and function of an area or space.
CERTIFIED LANDSCAPE HORTICULTURIST MANAGER
LAWN – A lawn is an area of land planted with grasses and
[CLHM] – A business owner or manager with a minimum
other durable plants which are maintained at a short
of 5 years’ experience. They have proven that they possess
height with a lawnmower and used for aesthetic and
the knowledge and skills to pass a written test based on
recreational purposes.
seven modules identified by industry as integral to operate
a successful landscape company. CLHM testing is provided LCx – [See LANDSCAPE COMMISSIONING PLAN].
to industry members by the Canadian Nursery Landscape
Association [CNLA] and provincial associations. LEACHATE – Any liquid that, in the course of passing
through matter, extracts soluble or suspended solids, or
CERTIFIED LANDSCAPE HORTICULTURIST any other component of the material through which it has
TECHNICIAN [CLHT] – An individual with several seasons passed.
of industry experience, that has proven proficiency in a
variety of common green industry technical tasks through LEACHING – The process of flushing growing media with
a rigorous written and/or practical exam to achieve the clean, pure water that is low in dissolved salts to flush out
designation(s) in any of the following green industry excess dissolved soluble salts and materials, which might
technical tasks: otherwise injure the plant.
• Hardscape installation LEAF DENSITY – The approximate percentage of the
measurement plane seen as foliage as opposed to light
• Softscape installation passing through when viewed from the side or from above.
Where plants are not in full leaf, the leaf density should be
• Turf maintenance
estimated based on density of twigs and buds.
• Ornamental maintenance
LIME – An additive made from pulverized limestone or
• Interior landscape chalk used as a soil/growing media conditioner to correct
acidity, provide a source of calcium and magnesium,
CLHT testing is provided to industry members by the improve water penetration, fertility and oxygen levels for
Canada Nursery Landscape Association and provincial soils/growing media.
associations.
LOAM – Soil/growing media material composed of mostly
LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE CONTRACT – Is based on sand and silt and a little less clay. Of the three compo-
the landscape maintenance plan, and should include nents, sand particles are the largest. By weight, its mineral
scope, deliverables, duration and price. composition is about 40–40–20% concentration of
sand–silt–clay, respectively.
LANDSCAPE MANAGEMENT – Provides the care and
maintenance of a landscape and its elements and includes

194 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

LOAMY SAND – Has a high concentration of sand that NATIONAL MASTER SPECIFICATION [NMS] – A refer-
gives it a gritty feel. In gardens and lawns, sandy loam ence document containing over 750 master specifications
soils/growing media are capable of quickly draining excess in both English and French. Each section is designed to be
water but cannot hold significant amounts of water or edited from the original master to produce a project
nutrients for plants. Loamy sand contains 70 to 90 percent specific document. It is intended for use by the federal
sand, 0 to 30 percent silt and 0 to 15 percent clay. government, other public organizations and the private
sector in the preparation of construction and renovation
MAINTENANCE CONCEPT – A brief description of the contract documents.
maintenance considerations, constraints, and plans for
operational support of the system/equipment under NATIVE PLANT – A native plant is one that occurs
development. It is derived from the Concept of naturally in a particular habitat, ecosystem, or region of
Operations [CONOPS] and is a major driver in system Canada without direct or indirect human actions.
design and support.
NOXIOUS WEED – A weed that has been designated by
MAINTENANCE PLAN – Include details such as tasks to an agricultural authority as one that is injurious to agricul-
be performed, methods, product application rates, tural or horticultural crops, natural habitats or ecosystems,
frequencies and schedules and is developed to be specific or humans or livestock. Most noxious weeds have been
to the site. The plan should establish goals and introduced into an ecosystem by ignorance, mismanage-
expectations. ment, or accident. Some noxious weeds are native.
Typically, they are plants that grow aggressively, multiply
MEASUREMENT PLANE – The rectangle formed by a quickly without natural controls, and display adverse
plant’s spread [S] and height [H]. effects through contact or ingestion.
MECHANICAL CONTROLS – The management and NURSERY STOCK – Plants, both woody and herbaceous,
control of pests using devices or equipment such as including roots, crowns, bulbs, corms and tubers, pro-
barriers, traps, and flamers for the management of pests duced for transplanting. “Nursery Stock” are plants which
within an IPM program. have been propagated, lined out and grown to promote
growth and root development to enable full recovery after
MECHANICAL DRY SEEDING – Seed uniformly distrib- transplanting.
uted on prepared growing medium at finished grade by
calibrated mechanical equipment. NURSERY STOCK GRADE – Any and all designations
associated with a plant group signifying sizes, number of
MICRO IRRIGATION – A low pressure and low volume stems, historical details etc. of a nursery stock item. Grade
irrigation system wherein water is applied to the soil/ does not describe quality except for roses.
growing media surface [or below the surface] as drops or
small streams through emitters. ORGANIC MULCH – Composed of plant or animal
residues that decompose over time and may improve the
MULCH – A layer of material applied to the surface of structure or nutrient value of the growing media [See
soil/growing media. Mulch materials can include organic MULCH].
products such as: bark, peat moss, compost, shredded
leaves, hay or straw, lawn clippings, gravel, paper; and OVER STRUCTURES –
other inorganic materials spread over the soil/growing [See LANDSCAPE OVER STRUCTURES].
media around the base of plants. During the growing
season, mulch can help conserve soil/growing moisture, OWNER – Person(s) or corporation for whom the work
improve fertility and soil/growing media health, inhibit is being carried out, or on whose property the work is
weeds, and moderate soil/growing media temperature. located or being carried out.
Fresh layers of mulch are also spread to enhance aes-
thetics. In the winter, mulch of evergreen boughs, coarse OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE – Any individual or
hay or leaves is used to protect plants from freezing [See organization designated by the owner to act on his/her
ORGANIC MULCH/INORGANIC MULCH]. behalf [See AGENT].

MULTI-TRUNK – Trees having more than one main trunk PATHOGEN – A biological agent that causes disease or
or stem. They are similar to large shrubs but have more illness to its host by disrupting the normal physiology.
distinct structure and well-defined trunks. A pathogen can be a fungus, virus, bacteria or parasite.

PERCOLATION – The flow of water or other fluids

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 195
through growing media, rock, or a filter, under the influ- vitality. The plant and its requirements become the central
ence of gravity, and in conditions of partial or complete focus rather than responding to symptoms caused by pest
saturation. presence, physical agents, or nutritional deficiencies. A
plant health care practice addresses the basic causes of
PERMANENT WILTING POINT – The minimal point of the reduction in plant health and provides corrective
soil/growing media moisture the plant requires so it does measures to promote plant health.
not wilt. If the soil/growing media moisture decreases to
this or any lower point, a plant wilts and can no longer POLLUTANT – Substances or contaminants that substan-
recover its turgidity. tially alter or degrade the environment.

PERMEABLE INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVEMENT PRESERVATION – Protecting specific trees or a particular

[PICP] – A segmental concrete pavement with wide joints area, group or woodland from deliberate damage and
[typically 5 to 10 mm] between the units, and the use of destruction.
open-graded aggregates for the joint, bedding, base and
subbase materials, that allows for the surface infiltration of PRESSURE REGULATOR – An irrigation system valve that
stormwater, storage, infiltration into the subgrade and regulates water pressure to a set value.
discharge through an outlet.
PROCTOR COMPACTION TEST – A test which measures
PEST – Any species of plant, animal, or pathogenic agent the relationship of soil density with respect to soil mois-
which reduces the productivity or health of plants, either ture content under a standard compaction effort. This test
directly by eating them or indirectly by spreading diseases identifies the maximum density obtainable at optimum
among them. Pests include but are not limited to insects, moisture content.
snails, nematodes, fungi, viruses, bacteria, microorgan-
PROJECT – Word used to represent the overall scope of
isms, mycoplasma organisms, weeds, plants or parasitic
work being performed to complete a specific job.
plants.
PROJECT DOCUMENT – All written documents prepared
PEST CONTROL – Regulation or management of a
or assembled for defining and describing the project
species defined as a pest because it is considered to be
design, scope, responsibilities of owner and contractor,
detrimental to the ecology or the economy.
and contract administration.
PEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES – Mechanical, biolog-
PROVINCIALLY ACCREDITED HORTICULTURAL
ical or chemical application practices employed to control
PROGRAM – A post-secondary program approved by the
or eradicate pests.
relevant provincial ministry or equivalent.
PESTICIDE – Substances that are meant to control pests,
PRUNING – The selective cutting and removing of parts
including weeds. They are available in a variety of chemical
of a tree or shrub. Pruning covers a number of horticul-
compositions in the form of dusts, granules, pellets,
wettable powders, emulsified concentrates, and aerosols, tural techniques that controls growth, shape, removes
dead, damaged or diseased wood, and stimulates the
intended for the control or eradication of pests and
formation of flowers and fruit buds. Pruning often means
diseases. The term pesticide includes all of the following:
cutting branches back, sometimes removing smaller limbs
herbicide, insecticides nematicide, molluscicide, piscicide,
entirely to preserve or improve plant health and structure.
avicide, rodenticide, bactericide, insect repellent, animal
repellent, antimicrobial, and fungicide. QUALIFIED PROFESSIONAL – An individual or firm with a
recognized degree, diploma, certificate, and/or profes-
PHENOLOGY – The study of the timing of a periodic
sional designation; or who by extensive knowledge,
phenomenon, such as flowering, growth, and cessation in
training, and experience has successfully demonstrated
plants, especially as they relate to seasonal changes in
ability to identify and solve or resolve problems associated
temperature, day-length, and other biophysical factors.
with a specific subject matter or project type.
PHYSICAL CONTROLS – The use of any manual method
QUALITY ASSURANCE – A systematic approach to the
for pest management such as hoeing or pulling weeds and
maintenance of a desired level of quality[standard] in a
pruning out infected or infested plant parts.
service or product, which is met by means of attention to
PLANT HEALTH CARE [PHC] – A process of scheduled
preventative maintenance based on monitoring and use of
cultural, mechanical and chemical tactics to enhance plant
196 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020
detail at every stage of the process of delivery or soluble salt content in the soil/growing media. Salts occur
production. naturally within soils/growing media and water.

QUALITY OF WORK – Defined through adherence to this SAND – A naturally occurring granular material composed
Standard and/or contract documents for the work. of finely divided rock and mineral particles. It is defined by
size, being finer than gravel and coarser than silt. Sand can
QUICK COUPLING VALVES – Permanently installed valve also refer to a textural class of soil/growing media or soil/
that allows direct access to the irrigation main line. A growing media type; i.e. a soil/growing media containing
quick-coupling key is used to open the valve. more than 85% sand-sized particles by mass.
REGULATION – A rule, directive or order issued and SANDY LOAM – A loam consisting of mostly sand with
maintained by an authority or regulatory agency of a composition typically at 10 percent clay, 30 percent silt,
government and having the force of law in order to and 60 percent sand.
control an activity, process or behavior by means of rules.
SATURATION POINT – The state where all voids in a soil/
REQUIRED – Required by this Standard or by other growing media are full of water, and nothing more can be
standards, codes, laws including regulations in force or absorbed.
referenced by this Standard.
SCARIFICATION – Any technique that prepares soil/
RETAINING WALL – A retaining wall is a structure growing media to reduce compaction, increase infiltration
designed and constructed to support soil laterally so that and/or enhance root establishment. 1) Physical or mechan-
it can be retained at different levels on the two sides. They ical disturbance of soil/growing media on a site to break up
are structures designed to restrain soil to a slope that it and loosen compacted soil/growing media to a shallow
would not naturally keep to. depth to create better conditions for plants or infiltration.
2) Roughing up the surface of a rootball before planting.
REVIEWER – Person(s) designated by the owner or
authority to conduct field reviews. SCUPPER – An opening in the wall of a building through
which water can drain from a floor or flat roof.
ROOT BOUND – A condition in container-grown plants in
which the root system occupies most of the available SENSORS [SOIL, RAIN, FREEZE, FLOW] – Devices that
space and has grown in a crowded, intertwined manner. measure a physical property and record and provide
information used to detect conditions, identify necessary
ROOT COLLAR – The region of the plant where roots and repairs, and/or undertake schedule or program modifica-
stem or trunk meet, generally at the ground level or soil/ tions accordingly.
growing media line. The transition between roots and
trunk are sometimes delineated by a slight swelling; also SHALL – A term that signifies that something must be
referred to as ‘root-flare’. done and is a mandatory requirement.
ROOT CROWN – The point at which the root and stem of SHOULD – A term that signifies that it is recommended
a plant meet and the primary vascular anatomy changes that something be done and is not a mandatory
from that of a stem to that of a root. requirement.
ROOT PRUNING – The act of cutting the roots of large SILTATION – Siltation is water pollution caused by silt or
plants, primarily shrubs or trees to force more vigorous clay. It refers both to the increased concentration of
growth or to prepare for transplanting; the systematic suspended sediments and to the increased accumulation
pruning of roots of nursery plants growing in the field, in of fine sediments on bottoms. Siltation is most often
order to stimulate branching of roots and the production caused by soil/growing media erosion or sediment spill.
of fibrous roots.
SITE – A geographic location which is under review for
ROOTBALL – The intact ball of earth or growing medium work to be conducted or at which the work is taking place.
containing the roots of a nursery plant.
SITE REVIEW – [See FIELD REVIEW].
SALINITY – Soil/growing media salinity is the accumulated
SLEEVES – Open pipes/conduits through which sprinkler
irrigation and other wiring can be easily run whenever that
phase of the project is ready to begin. Sleeves protect

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 197

underground infrastructure including, but not limited to, equipment, systems, processes, techniques, standards and
irrigation pipe and wire and is installed to run under a workmanship, and certain administrative requirements and
hardscape surface. procedural matters applicable to the work. Specifications
are typically prepared by the consultant as a complement
SOFT LANDSCAPE [SOFTSCAPE] – Portions of a land- to the drawings. The specification is a component of the
scape that are comprised of horticultural elements such as contract documents.
trees, shrubs, perennials, lawns, and those elements on
which the living elements depend on physiologically for SPECIFIER – A qualified technical professional who
survival, such as soils/growing medium identifies specific products or services to be contained
within the contract documents.
SOIL – The upper layer of earth in which plants grow, a
black or dark brown material typically consisting of a SPECIMEN – An unusual or impressive plant, usually a
mixture of organic remains, clay, and rock particles. In this large shrub or tree, that exhibits all the best characteris-
Standard, we refer to soil that is intended to support tics typically associated with its type, planted as a focal
plants as growing media [See GROWING MEDIUM]. point or point of interest in a landscape. This designation
may be used to indicate exceptionally heavy, well-shaped
SOIL PROFILE/HORIZONS – Layer or zone of the soil plants or to emphasize that certain specified traits are
profile with physical, chemical, and biological characteris- required.
tics that differ from adjacent layers.
SPOT ELEVATION – An exact elevation or point on the
SOIL STRIPPING – Removal of the exposed layer of the plan typically indicated by a dot accompanied by a number
earth’s surface, including vegetation. When removed, indicating the vertical distance of the point from the
topsoil/growing media usually is stockpiled. Later, it is reference point or benchmark elevation.
restored on the site for landscaping or to support growth
of vegetation to control erosion. SPOT SPRAYING – A localized, targeted application of
pesticide or herbicide thus reducing the amount of the
SOIL TEXTURE – Soil texture is a classification instrument chemical applied. Spot spraying is used where the weed or
used both in the field and laboratory to determine soil pest infestation is not sufficiently uniform to justify an
classes based on their physical texture. Soil texture can be overall spray.
determined using qualitative methods such as texture by
feel, and quantitative methods such as the hydrometer SPRINKLERS – Type of irrigation using mechanical devices
method. Soil/growing texture indicates the relative with nozzles [sprinklers] to distribute the water by con-
content of particles of various sizes, such as sand, silt and verting water pressure to a high velocity discharge stream
clay in the soil/growing media. Texture influences the ease or streams.
with which soil/growing media can be worked, the amount
of water and air it holds, and the rate at which water can STABILIZED MULCH MATRICES [SMM] – A hydraulically
enter and move through soil/growing media. Qualified applied matrix containing defibrated organic fibers with, at
professionals refer to the Soil Texture Triangle. a minimum, one of the following additives: soil flocculants,
cross-linked hydro-colloidal polymers, or cross-linked
SOLVITA TEST – A patented environmental measurement tackifier.
system providing indicators of biological processes and
health with applications for soil/growing media, compost, STANDARD – A standard is a of non-proprietary technical
manure and grain. document that relies on accepted reference standards to
describe a product, material, assembly or piece of equip-
SPECIES – The basic unit of classification and a taxonomic ment to be incorporated into a project. A standard is
rank of an organism, as well as a unit of biodiversity. Plant designed to be used as a rule, guideline or definition.
species are types of plants having certain characteristics
that differentiate it from other members of the genus, and STANDARD [SINGLE TRUNK] – This is the standard
which retains these distinctions through successive growth form of most trees consisting of a single large
generations. trunk growing from a simple root mass below ground.

SPECIFICATION – The part of the contract that consists STORMWATER CONTROL PLAN – Utilizes site design
of written requirements, and provides a detailed and principles and construction techniques to prevent sedi-
precise statement of particulars for the work of a project, ment and other pollutants from entering surface or
and outlines a detailed description of materials, ground water and includes source controls and treatment

198 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020

of runoff to reduce pollution. The plan describes all the TERRASEEDING – Seed mixed with growing medium and
construction site activities required to prevent storm- applied by “blowing” the growing media/seed mix onto a
water contamination. prepared subgrade or growing medium bed.

STORMWATER MANAGEMENT LANDSCAPE FEATURE THATCH – The layer of dead plants found at the roots of
– Landscape element that directs, reduces and removes grasses in lawns. Certain amounts are beneficial in pro-
pollutants from water that runs off impermeable surfaces tecting roots from heat, cold and drought; whereas too
such as rooftops, streets, highways, and parking lots. much smothers roots and blocks fertilizers and water from
Features include rain gardens, rainwater harvesting reaching the soil/growing media.
practices, permeable pavers, bioswales, green roofs etc.
TOPDRESSING – Application of fertilizer, compost,
SUBGRADE – In paved areas that level below the gravel or manure, or other soil/growing media amendment to the
paver base; in planting areas that level below the accepted ground surface or a lawn.
growing media depth.
TOPOGRAPHY –The physical shape of a site’s surface
SUBSOIL – The “B” horizon of a soil profile. The stratum of including natural and constructed features, such as hills,
earth immediately under the surface topsoil containing valleys, swales, and pathways.
little or no humus.
TOPSOIL – Imported or on-site “A” horizon soil generally
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION – A legal term used in found in the uppermost layer of soil. Topsoil contains
contracts between owners and contractors. The stage in accumulated organic matter and microorganisms and can
the progress of the work when the owner determines that typically be distinguished by a darker colouration.
the work, or designated portion thereof, is sufficiently
complete in accordance with the contract documents so TRANSPLANTING – The act of removing and resetting a
the project, or designated portion thereof, can be used for plant one or more times to improve its size and growth
its intended purpose. potential characteristics; also refers to moving a plant
from one site to another.
SUBSTITUTION – Refers to the use of material or equip-
ment not specified in the contract documents, which the TREE PROTECTION ZONE – The area around a tree
contractor proposes and warrants as suitable for the use corresponding to the dripline, or the essential area of the
intended and that conforms to all other physical, func- roots that shall be maintained or protected for the tree’s
tional, and performance requirements of the contract survival. The critical root zone should be determined based
documents. Term used in installation and maintenance on evaluation by a Certified Arborist or other qualified
operations to convey authorization that a plant or planter, professional and based on the diameter at breast height
etc., other than the exact kind, size, shape specified or [DBH], conditions of the site, the tree species and pro-
on-site can be employed if original is not in stock or posed project [see CRITICAL PROTECTION ZONE].
suitable.
TREE RISK ASSESSMENT – The systematic process to
SUCCESSION – The dynamic process of change in identify, analyze, and evaluate tree risk by assessing a
ecosystem structure, function, and species composition standing tree for signs of structural weakness caused by
over time. It involves the processes of colonization, growth habit, disease, damage or decay. Generally con-
establishment, and extinction which act on the partici- ducted by an arborist with a tree risk assessment
pating plant species. At each stage of the succession, the designation.
plant community alters the soil and microclimate, allowing
TREE SURVEY – A tree survey is an important survey that
the establishment of another group of species.
is performed on private or public landscapes by an arborist
TACKIFIER – Product added to the hydroseeding mixture or qualified professional. The goal of the survey is to
to bind the seed, fertilizer and mulch to the soil/growing provide useful information on the trees so that property
media surface. It is a powdered or granular glue, which managers or homeowners can make informed decisions.
when added to the slurry, serves to glue the mulch blanket The survey will reveal information such as: species of the
in place, helping it to withstand wind and rain erosion. It tree based on scientific name, physical measurements of
also protects the seed from wind, water erosion and the tree such as height and diameter, age of the tree,
drought. overall health of the tree, life expectancy and manage-
ment recommendations.

CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020 199

TREE TIE – Material used to attach the trunk of a tree to a and resultant precipitation. The majority of the injuries can
support stake. be classified as due to desiccation, freezing, breakage and/
or exposure to de-icing salts.
TURGID – A plant with cells that are fully hydrated and
showing no signs of wilting. WORK – Landscape work to be conducted by the
contractor under the contract as set out in the specifica-
USER – Any individual utilizing this Standard to specify tion together with any other services which the contractor
conditions under which the work will be conducted and agrees to provide to the client in accordance with this
completed. Standard.
VALVE BOXES – Irrigation valve boxes are made of strong, WORK SUBMITTALS – Submittals include shop drawings,
thermoplastic materials, vary in size and are suitable for product data, samples, and mock-ups to be provided by
underground use. They are light in weight, easy to handle the contractor to the consultant or owner for verification
and protect key parts of an irrigation system [irrigation and approval.
valves] from damage caused by lawn machinery and foot
traffic, and harsh Canadian weather conditions. They a
provide an easy access for valve repair via removable tops.

WARRANTY – A written obligation, issued to the owner by

the contractor or supplier of products and services,
promising to repair or replace project components if
necessary, within a specified time period. The contract
documents will typically state in very specific terms the
conditions and extent of warranties for both the con-
tractor and/or supplier and owner. With regards to trees,
shrubs and groundcovers for a landscape project, the
warranty will typically commence from the date of
acceptance requiring the replacement of dead trees and
unacceptable or unhealthy plants within the warranty
period.

WEED – Any plant growing where it is not wanted and

includes unwanted plants in planting beds, unplanted
areas, and paving, as well as those grass varieties that
detract from the desired appearance or function of lawn
areas.

WEEP HOLE – Small openings that allow water to drain

from within landscape features such as retaining walls to
the outside of the feature, so as to prevent the buildup of
pressure behind the wall. The weep hole must be sized
adequately to function as designed.

WEEPING – Tree form characterized by branches that

droop or hang vertically down. This characterization may
lead to a bent crown and pendulous branches that can
cascade to the ground.

WHORL – An arrangement of leaves, sepals, petals,

stamens, or carpels that radiate from a single point and
surround or wrap around the stem or stalk. A plant has
whorled leaves when there are three or more equally
spaced leaves at a node.

WINTER DAMAGE – Injury, damage or death of plant

tissue caused by the climatic effects of cold temperature
200 CANADIAN LANDSCAPE STANDARD SECOND EDITION 2020